2004 Specifications
CSJ 0904-03-010
SPECIAL SPECIFICATION
5132
Canadian Tourist and Visitor Information Center
1.
Description. This Item shall govern for the furnishing all materials, equipment, labor and
incidentals necessary for the Tourist and Visitor Information Center in Canadian, Texas.
2.
Materials and Construction Methods. All materials furnished and all construction
methods utilized shall be in accordance with the plans, details and the attached
specifications.
3.
Measurement. This Item will be measured by the lump sum.
4.
Payment. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and
measured as provided for under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price bid for
“Tourist and Visitor Information Center”. This price shall be full compensation for
furnishing all materials, equipment, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work
specified.
1-1
5132
06-05
THE CITY OF CANADIAN, TEXAS
VISITOR’S CENTER
ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS
City of Canadian
6 Main Street
Canadian, Texas 79014
(806) 323-6473
(806) 323-5398 Fax
Dean Looper
City Manager
February 28, 2003
Killis Almond, FAIA
Killis Almond and Associates, Inc.
342 Wilkens
San Antonio, Texas 78210
210-532-3212
210-532-9919 Fax
Paul A Sanchez
Paul Anthony and Associates
7300 Blanco Road
San Antonio, Texas 78216
210-375-7700
210-375-7784 Fax
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
TABLE OF CONTENTS
BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACT FORMS, AND
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
DIVISION 00 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF TxDOT
01100 Summary of Work
01200 Price and Payment Procedures
01300 Administrative Requirements
01330 Submittal Procedures
01400 Quality Requirements
01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls
01600 Product Requirements
01700 Execution Requirements
DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK
NIC
DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE
03365 Stained Concrete Finishes
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
04100 Mortar and Masonry Grout
04270 Glass Masonry Assemblies
04300 Unit Masonry System
04853 Mortar-Placed Stone Assemblies
DIVISION 5 – METALS
05500 Metal Fabrications
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTIC
06001 Carpentry Work
06112 Framing and Sheathing 06114
Wood Blocking and Curbing 06410
Custom Cabinets
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07213 Batt Insulation
07220 Roof and Deck Insulation
07260 Vapor Retarders
07322 Clay Roofing Tile
07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
07900 Joint Sealers
February 28, 2003
00010 - 3
Table of Contents
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
DIVISION
08211
08212
08550
08710
08830
8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
Stile and Rail Doors
Flush Wood Doors
Wood Single Hung Windows
Door Hardware
Mirrors
DIVISION 9 – FINISHES
09260 Gypsum Board Assemblies
09300 Tile
09520 Acoustic Wall Pannels
09670 Fluid-applied Flooring
09900 Paints and Coatings
DIVISION
10160
10440
10800
10 – SPECIALTIES
Metal Toilet Compartments
Interior Signage
Toilet, Bath and Laundry Accessories
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
NIC
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS
NIC
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
See Volume 2
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
See Volume 2
February 28, 2003
00010 - 4
Table of Contents
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 01100
SUMMARY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Contract description.
B.
Work by Owner.
C.
Owner supplied products.
D.
Contractor's use of site and premises.
E.
Future work.
F.
Work sequence.
G.
Owner occupancy. 1.2
CONTRACT DESCRIPTION
1.3
A.
Work of the Project includes construction of a new
Visitor’s Center in Canadian, Texas on a vacant piece
of property owned by the City of Canadian. The site
work is part of this contract.
B.
Perform Work of Contract under stipulated sum contract with
The Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) in accordance
with the contract with the State TxDOT in accordance with
Conditions of that Contract.
CONTRACTOR'S USE OF SITE AND PREMISES
A.
B.
Limit use of site and premises to allow:
1.
Work by Others and Work by Owner.
Construction Operations: Limited to areas noted on
Drawings.
February 28, 2003
01100 - 1
Summary
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION Not
Used.
END OF SECTION
February 28, 2003
01100 - 2
Summary
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 01200
PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Cash allowances.
B.
Contingency allowances.
C.
Testing and inspection allowances.
D.
Schedule of values.
E.
Applications for payment.
F.
Change procedures.
G.
Defect assessment.
H.
Unit prices.
I.
Alternates.
1.2 CASH ALLOWANCES
A.
Costs Included in Cash Allowances: Cost of product to
Contractor or Subcontractor, less applicable trade discounts;
delivery to site and applicable taxes.
B.
Costs Not Included in Cash Allowances But Included in
Contract Sum/Price: Product handling at site, including
unloading, uncrating, and storage;
protection of products from elements and from damage; and
labor for installation and finishing.
C.
Architect/Engineer Responsibilities:
1.
Consult with Contractor for consideration and
selection of products, suppliers, and installers.
2.
Select products in consultation with Owner and
transmit decision to Contractor.
3.
Prepare Change Order.
D.
Contractor Responsibilities:
1.
Assist Architect/Engineer in selection of
products, suppliers and installers.
2.
Obtain proposals from suppliers and installers
Price and
February 28, 2003
01200 - 1
Payment Procedures
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
3.
4.
5.
and offer recommendations.
On notification of selection by
Architect/Engineer, execute purchase agreement
with designated supplier and installer.
Arrange for and process shop drawings, product
data, and samples. Arrange for delivery.
Promptly inspect products upon delivery for
completeness, damage, and defects. Submit claims
for transportation damage.
E.
Differences in costs will be adjusted by Change Order.
F.
Allowances Schedule: None. 1.3
TESTING AND INSPECTION ALLOWANCES
A.
Costs Included in Testing and Inspecting Allowances: Cost
of engaging testing and inspecting agency; execution of
tests and inspecting; and reporting results.
B.
Costs Not Included in Testing and Inspecting Allowance But
Included in Contract Sum/Price:
1.
Costs of incidental labor and facilities required to
assist testing or inspecting agency.
2.
Costs of testing services used by Contractor
separate from Contract Document requirements.
3.
Costs of retesting upon failure of previous tests
as determined by Architect/Engineer.
C.
Payment Procedures:
1.
Submit one copy of inspecting or testing firm's
invoice with next application for payment.
2.
Pay invoice on approval by Architect/Engineer.
D.
Testing and Inspecting Allowances Schedule:
$5,000.00.
E.
Differences in cost will be adjusted by Change Order. 1.4
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A.
Submit printed schedule on AIA Form G703 - Continuation
Sheet for G702 or Contractor's standard form or electronic
media printout will be considered.
B.
Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within 15 days
after date established in Notice to Proceed.
February 28, 2003
01200 - 2
Price and
Payment Procedures
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
C.
Format: Utilize Table of Contents of this Project Manual.
Identify each line item with number and title of major
specification Section. Identify site mobilization, bonds
and insurance.
D.
Include in each line item, amount of Allowances specified
in this section. For unit cost Allowances, identify
quantities taken from Contract Documents multiplied by
unit cost to achieve total for each item.
E.
Include within each line item, direct proportional
amount of Contractor's overhead and profit.
F.
Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders, with each
Application For Payment.
1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A.
Submit three copies of each application on AIA Form
G702 - Application and Certificate for Payment and AIA
G703 - Continuation Sheet for G702.
B.
Content and Format: Utilize Schedule of Values for
listing items in Application for Payment.
C.
Submit updated construction schedule with each
Application for Payment.
D.
Payment Period: Submit at intervals stipulated in the
Agreement.
E.
Submit with transmittal letter as specified for
Submittals in Section 01330.
F.
Submit Partial Release-of-Lien waivers.
G.
Substantiating Data: When Architect/Engineer requires
substantiating information, submit data justifying
dollar amounts in question. Include the following
with Application for Payment:
1.
Current construction photographs specified in
Section 01330.
2.
Partial release of liens from major
subcontractors and vendors.
3.
Affidavits attesting to off-site stored products.
4.
Construction progress schedules, revised and
current as specified in Section 01330.
February 28, 2003
01200 - 3
Price and
Payment Procedures
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
1.6 CHANGE PROCEDURES
A.
Submittals: Submit name of individual authorized to
receive change documents, and be responsible for
informing others in Contractor's employ or Subcontractors
of changes to the Work.
B.
The Architect/Engineer will advise of minor changes in the
Work not involving adjustment to Contract
Sum/Price or Contract Time by issuing supplemental
instructions on AIA Form G710.
C.
The Architect/Engineer may issue a Proposal Request
including a detailed description of proposed change with
supplementary or revised Drawings and specifications, a
change in Contract Time for executing the change and the
period of time during which the requested price will be
considered valid. Contractor will prepare and submit
estimate within 15 days.
D.
Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for
change to Architect/Engineer, describing proposed change and
its full effect on the Work. Include a statement describing
reason for the change, and effect on Contract Sum/Price and
Contract Time with full documentation and a statement
describing effect on Work by separate or other Contractors.
Document requested substitutions in accordance with Section
01600.
E.
Stipulated Sum/Price Change Order: Based on Proposal
Request and Contractor's fixed price quotation or
Contractor's request for Change Order as approved by
Architect/Engineer.
F.
Unit Price Change Order: For contract unit prices and
quantities, the Change Order will be executed on fixed unit
price basis. For unit costs or quantities of units of work
which are not pre-determined, execute Work under
Construction Change Directive. Changes in Contract Sum/Price
or Contract Time will be computed as specified for Time and
Material Change Order.
G.
Construction Change Directive: Architect/Engineer may issue
directive, on AIA Form G713 Construction Change Directive
signed by Owner, instructing Contractor to proceed with
change in the Work, for subsequent
Price and
February 28, 2003
01200 - 4
Payment Procedures
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
inclusion in a Change Order. Document will describe
changes in the Work, and designate method of determining
any change in Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time.
Promptly execute change.
H.
Time and Material Change Order: Submit itemized account and
supporting data after completion of change, within time
limits indicated in Conditions of the Contract.
Architect/Engineer will determine change allowable in
Contract Sum/Price and Contract Time as provided in Contract
Documents.
I.
Maintain detailed records of work done on Time and Material
basis. Provide full information required for evaluation of
proposed changes, and to substantiate costs for changes in
the Work.
J.
Document each quotation for change in cost or time with
sufficient data to allow evaluation of quotation.
K.
Change Order Forms: AIA G701 Change Order.
L.
Execution of Change Orders: Architect/Engineer will issue
Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in
Conditions of the Contract.
M.
Correlation Of Contractor Submittals:
1.
Promptly revise Schedule of Values and
Application for Payment forms to record each authorized
Change Order as separate line item and adjust Contract
Sum/Price.
2.
Promptly revise progress schedules to reflect change
in Contract Time, revise sub-schedules to adjust times
for other items of work affected by the change, and
resubmit.
3.
Promptly enter changes in Project Record
Documents.
1.7 DEFECT ASSESSMENT
A.
B.
Replace the Work, or portions of the Work, not
conforming to specified requirements.
If, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer, it is not
practical to remove and replace the Work, the
Architect/Engineer will direct appropriate remedy or
adjust payment.
February 28, 2003
01200 - 5
Price and
Payment Procedures
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
C.
The defective Work may remain, but unit sum/price will be
reduced 50 percent at discretion of Architect/ Engineer.
D.
Defective Work will be partially repaired to instructions
of Architect/Engineer, and unit sum/price will be reduced 50
percent at discretion of Architect/Engineer.
E.
Individual specification sections may modify these options
or may identify specific formula or percentage sum/price
reduction.
F.
Authority of Architect/Engineer to assess defects and
identify payment adjustments, is final.
G.
Non-Payment For Rejected Products: Payment will not be
made for rejected products for any of the following:
1.
Products wasted or disposed of in a manner that is
not acceptable.
2.
Products determined as unacceptable before or
after placement.
3.
Products not completely unloaded from
transporting vehicle.
4.
Products placed beyond lines and levels of
required Work.
5.
Products remaining on hand after completion of the
Work.
6.
Loading, hauling, and disposing of rejected
products.
1.8 UNIT PRICES
A.
Authority: Measurement methods are delineated in
individual specification sections.
B.
Measurement methods delineated in individual
specification sections complement criteria of this
section. In event of conflict, requirements of
individual specification section govern.
C.
Take measurements and compute quantities.
Architect/Engineer will verify measurements and
quantities.
D.
Unit Quantities: Quantities and measurements indicated in
Bid Form are for contract purposes only.
February 28, 2003
01200 - 6
Price and
Payment Procedures
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
Quantities and measurements supplied or placed in the Work
shall determine payment.
1.
When actual Work requires more or fewer
quantities than those quantities indicated,
provide required quantities at unit sum/prices
contracted.
2.
When actual Work requires 25 percent or greater
change in quantity than those quantities indicated,
Owner or Contractor may claim for Contract Price
adjustment.
E.
Payment Includes: Full compensation for required labor,
products, tools, equipment, plant and facilities,
transportation, services and incidentals; erection,
application or installation of item of the Work; overhead
and profit.
F.
Final payment for Work governed by unit prices will be made
on basis of actual measurements and quantities accepted by
Architect/Engineer multiplied by unit sum/price for Work
incorporated in or made necessary by the Work.
G.
Measurement Of Quantities:
1.
Weigh Scales: Inspected, tested and certified by
applicable state Weights and Measures department within
past year.
2.
Platform Scales: Of sufficient size and capacity to
accommodate conveying vehicle.
3.
Metering Devices: Inspected, tested and certified by
applicable organization within past year.
4.
Measurement by Weight: Concrete reinforcing steel,
rolled or formed steel or other metal shapes will be
measured by handbook weights. Welded assemblies will be
measured by handbook or scale weight.
5.
Measurement by Volume: Measured by cubic dimension
using mean length, width and height or thickness.
6.
Measurement by Area: Measured by square
dimension using mean length and width or radius.
7.
Linear Measurement: Measured by linear
dimension, at item centerline or mean chord.
8.
Stipulated Sum/Price Measurement: Items measured by
weight, volume, area, or linear means or combination,
as appropriate, as completed item or unit of the Work.
February 28, 2003
01200 - 7
Price and
Payment Procedures
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
1.9 ALTERNATES
A.
Alternates quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and
accepted or rejected at Owner's option. Accepted
Alternates will be identified in Owner-Contractor
Agreement.
B.
Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work.
C.
Schedule of Alternates: None. PART
2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
February 28, 2003
01200 - 8
Price and
Payment Procedures
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 01300
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Coordination and project conditions.
B.
Field engineering.
C.
Preconstruction meeting.
D.
Site mobilization meeting.
E.
Progress meetings.
F.
Preinstallation meetings.
G.
Equipment electrical characteristics and components.
H.
Cutting and patching.
I.
Special procedures. 1.2
COORDINATION AND PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of various
sections of Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly
sequence of installation of interdependent construction
elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed
later.
B.
Verify utility requirements and characteristics of operating
equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate
work of various sections having interdependent
responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing
in service, operating equipment.
C.
Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of
mechanical and electrical Work indicated diagrammatically on
Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit,
as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of
building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize
accessibility for other installations, for
maintenance, and for repairs.
Administrative
February 28, 2003
01300 - 1
Requirements
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
D.
In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal
pipes, ducts, and wiring within construction. Coordinate
locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.
E.
Coordinate completion and clean-up of Work of separate
sections in preparation for Substantial Completion and for
portions of Work designated for Owner's partial occupancy.
F.
After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to
site for correction of defective Work and Work not in
accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption
of Owner's activities.
1.3 FIELD ENGINEERING
A.
Employ Land Surveyor registered at Project location and
acceptable to Architect/Engineer.
B.
Locate and protect survey control and reference
points. Promptly notify Architect/Engineer of
discrepancies discovered.
C.
Control datum for survey is that shown on Drawings.
D.
Verify set-backs and easements; confirm drawing
dimensions and elevations.
E.
Provide field engineering services. Establish
elevations, lines, and levels, utilizing recognized
engineering survey practices.
F.
Submit copy of site drawing signed by Land Surveyor
certifying elevations and locations of the Work are in
conformance with Contract Documents.
G.
Maintain complete and accurate log of control and
survey work as Work progresses.
H.
On completion of foundation walls and major site
improvements, prepare certified survey illustrating
dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of
construction and site work.
I.
Protect survey control points prior to starting site
work; preserve permanent reference points during
construction.
February 28, 2003
01300 - 2
Administrative
Requirements
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
J.
Promptly report to Architect/Engineer loss or destruction
of reference point or relocation required because of
changes in grades or other reasons.
K.
Replace dislocated survey control points based on
original survey control. Make no changes without prior
written notice to Architect/Engineer.
1.4 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING
A.
Architect/Engineer will schedule meeting after Notice of
Award.
B.
Attendance Required: Architect/Engineer, and
Contractor.
C.
Agenda:
1.
Execution of Owner-Contractor Agreement.
2.
Submission of executed bonds and insurance
certificates.
3.
Distribution of Contract Documents.
4.
Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of
products, schedule of values, and progress
schedule.
5.
Designation of personnel representing parties in
Contract, and Architect/Engineer.
6.
Procedures and processing of field decisions,
submittals, substitutions, applications for
payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and
Contract closeout procedures.
7.
Scheduling.
D.
Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after
meeting to participants, with two copies to
Architect/Engineer, and those affected by decisions made.
1.5 SITE MOBILIZATION MEETING
A.
Owner will schedule meeting at Project site prior to
Contractor occupancy.
B.
Attendance Required: Owner, Architect/Engineer,
Special Consultants, Contractor, Contractor's
Superintendent, and major Subcontractors.
C.
Agenda:
1.
Use of premises by Owner and Contractor.
February 28, 2003
01300 - 3
Administrative
Requirements
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
D.
Owner's requirements and partial occupancy.
Construction facilities and controls provided by
Owner.
Temporary utilities provided by Owner.
Survey and building layout.
Security and housekeeping procedures.
Schedules.
Application for payment procedures.
Procedures for testing.
Procedures for maintaining record documents.
Requirements for start-up of equipment.
Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into
service during construction period.
Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after
meeting to participants, with two copies to
Architect/Engineer, and those affected by decisions made.
1.6 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A.
Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of
the Work at maximum monthly intervals.
B.
Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with
copies for participants, preside at meetings.
C.
Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major
subcontractors and suppliers, Owner,
Architect/Engineer, as appropriate to agenda topics for
each meeting.
D.
Agenda:
1.
Review minutes of previous meetings.
2.
Review of Work progress.
3.
Field observations, problems, and decisions.
4.
Identification of problems impeding planned
progress.
5.
Review of submittals schedule and status of
submittals.
6.
Review of off-site fabrication and delivery
schedules.
7.
Maintenance of progress schedule.
8.
Corrective measures to regain projected
schedules.
9.
Planned progress during succeeding work period.
10.
Coordination of projected progress.
11.
Maintenance of quality and work standards.
Administrative
February 28, 2003
01300 - 4
Requirements
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
12.
13.
E.
Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and
coordination.
Other business relating to Work.
Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after
meeting to participants, with two copies to
Architect/Engineer, and those affected by decisions made.
1.7 PREINSTALLATION MEETING
A.
When required in individual specification sections, convene
preinstallation meeting at Project site prior to commencing
work of specific section.
B.
Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or
affected by, Work of specific section.
C.
Notify Architect/Engineer seven days in advance of
meeting date.
D.
Prepare agenda and preside at meeting:
1.
Review conditions of installation, preparation and
installation procedures.
2.
Review coordination with related work.
E.
Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after
meeting to participants, with two copies to
Architect/Engineer, and those affected by decisions made.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS
A.
Motors: Specific motor type is specified in
individual specification sections.
B.
Wiring Terminations: Furnish terminal lugs to match branch
circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials
indicated. Include lugs for terminal box.
C.
Cord and Plug: Furnish minimum 6 foot 2 m cord and plug
including grounding connector for connection to electric
wiring system. Cord of longer length is specified in
individual specification sections.
PART 3 EXECUTION
February 28, 2003
Administrative
01300 - 5
Requirements
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
3.1 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A.
Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform
cutting and patching.
B.
Submit written request in advance of cutting or
altering elements affecting:
1.
Structural integrity of element.
2.
Integrity of weather-exposed or moistureresistant elements.
3.
Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of element.
4.
Visual qualities of sight exposed elements.
5.
Work of Owner or separate contractor.
C.
Execute cutting, fitting, and patching including
excavation and fill, to complete Work, and to:
1.
Fit the several parts together, to integrate with
other Work.
2.
Uncover Work to install or correct ill-timed
Work.
3.
Remove and replace defective and non-conforming
Work.
4.
Remove samples of installed Work for testing.
5.
Provide openings in elements of Work for
penetrations of mechanical and electrical Work.
D. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other Work, and to
provide proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing.
E.
Cut masonry and concrete materials using masonry saw or
core drill.
F.
Restore Work with new products in accordance with
requirements of Contract Documents.
G.
Fit Work tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other
penetrations through surfaces.
H.
Maintain integrity of wall, ceiling, or floor
construction; completely seal voids.
I.
At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling,
or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire rated
material to full thickness of penetrated element.
J.
Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes. For
February 28, 2003
01300 - 6
Administrative
Requirements
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection; for
assembly, refinish entire unit.
K.
Identify hazardous substances or conditions exposed during
the Work to Architect/Engineer for decision or remedy.
3.2 SPECIAL PROCEDURES
A.
Materials: As specified in product sections.
B.
Employ skilled and experienced installers to perform work.
C.
Remove debris and abandoned items from area and from
concealed spaces.
D.
Prepare surface to permit installation of new work and
finishes.
E.
Close openings in exterior surfaces to protect existing work
from weather and extremes of temperature and humidity.
F.
Remove, cut, and patch Work in manner to minimize
damage.
G.
When finished surfaces are cut so that smooth transition
with new Work is not possible, terminate existing surface
along straight line at natural line of division and submit
recommendation to Architect/Engineer for review.
H.
Where change of plane of 1/4 inch (6 mm) or more occurs,
submit recommendation for providing smooth transition to
Architect/Engineer for review.
I.
Trim doors to clear new floor finish.
J.
Patch or replace portions of existing surfaces which are
damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other
imperfections.
K.
Finish surfaces as specified in individual product
sections.
END OF SECTION
February 28, 2003
01300 - 7
Administrative
Requirements
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 01330
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Submittal procedures.
B.
Construction progress schedules.
C.
Proposed products list.
D.
Product data.
E.
Shop drawings.
F.
Samples.
G.
Design data.
H.
Test reports.
I.
Certificates.
J.
Manufacturer's instructions.
K.
Manufacturer's field reports.
L.
Erection drawings.
M.
Construction photographs.
1.2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A.
Transmit each submittal with Architect/Engineer accepted form.
B.
Sequentially number transmittal forms. Mark revised
submittals with original number and sequential alphabetic
suffix.
C.
Identify Project, Contractor, subcontractor and supplier;
pertinent drawing and detail number, and specification
section number, appropriate to submittal.
D.
Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that
review, approval, verification of products required, field
dimensions, adjacent construction Work,
February 28, 2003
01330 - 1
Submittal Procedures
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
and coordination of information is in accordance with
requirements of the Work and Contract Documents.
E.
Schedule submittals to expedite Project, and deliver to
Architect/Engineer at business address. Coordinate submission
of related items.
F.
For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding
delivery time to and from Contractor.
G.
Identify variations from Contract Documents and product or
system limitations which may be detrimental to successful
performance of completed Work.
H.
Allow space on submittals for Contractor and
Architect/Engineer review stamps.
I.
When revised for resubmission, identify changes made since
previous submission.
J.
Distribute copies of reviewed submittals as appropriate.
Instruct parties to promptly report inability to comply with
requirements.
K.
Submittals not requested will not be recognized or
processed.
1.3 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES
A.
Submit initial schedules within 15 days after date
established in Notice to Proceed. After review, resubmit
required revised data within ten days.
B.
Submit revised Progress Schedules with each Application for
Payment.
C.
Distribute copies of reviewed schedules to Project site file,
subcontractors, suppliers, and other concerned parties.
D.
Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing,
problems anticipated by projections indicated in
schedules.
E.
Submit computer generated horizontal bar chart with
separate line for each major portion of Work or
operation, identifying first work day of each week.
F.
Show complete sequence of construction by activity,
February 28, 2003
01330 - 2
Submittal Procedures
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
identifying Work of separate stages and other logically
grouped activities. Indicate early and late start, early and
late finish, float dates, and duration.
G.
Indicate estimated percentage of completion for each item
of Work at each submission.
H.
Submit separate schedule of submittal dates for shop
drawings, product data, and samples, including Owner
furnished products and products identified under
Allowances, and dates reviewed submittals will be required
from Architect/Engineer. Indicate decision dates for
selection of finishes.
I.
Indicate delivery dates for Owner furnished products and
products identified under Allowances.
J.
Revisions To Schedules:
1.
Indicate progress of each activity to date of
submittal, and projected completion date of each
activity.
2.
Identify activities modified since previous
submittal, major changes in scope, and other
identifiable changes.
3.
Prepare narrative report to define problem areas,
anticipated delays, and impact on Schedule. Report
corrective action taken, or proposed, and its effect
including effect of changes on schedules of separate
contractors.
1.4 PROPOSED PRODUCTS LIST
A.
Within 15 days after date of Notice to Proceed, submit list
of major products proposed for use, with name of
manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product.
B.
For products specified only by reference standards, give
manufacturer, trade name, model or catalog designation, and
reference standards.
1.5 PRODUCT DATA
A.
Product Data: Submit to Architect/Engineer for review for
limited purpose of checking for conformance with information
given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents.
Provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES article and for
February 28, 2003
01330 - 3
Submittal Procedures
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
record documents purposes described in Section 01700.
B.
Submit number of copies Contractor requires, plus two
copies Architect/Engineer will retain.
C.
Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models,
options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard
data to provide information specific to this Project.
D.
Indicate product utility and electrical characteristics,
utility connection requirements, and location of utility
outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances.
E.
After review distribute in accordance with Submittal
Procedures article above and provide copies for record
documents described in Section 01700.
1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS
A.
Shop Drawings: Submit to Architect/Engineer for review for
limited purpose of checking for conformance with information
given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents.
Produce copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES article and for record documents purposes
described in Section 01700.
B.
Indicate special utility and electrical characteristics,
utility connection requirements, and location of utility
outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances.
C.
Submit number of opaque reproductions Contractor
requires, plus two copies Architect/Engineer will
retain.
1.7 SAMPLES
A.
Samples: Submit to Architect/Engineer for review for limited
purpose of checking for conformance with information given
and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. Produce
duplicates and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES article and for record documents purposes
described in Section 01700.
B.
Samples For Selection as Specified in Product Sections:
1.
Submit to Architect/Engineer for aesthetic, color,
February 28, 2003
01330 - 4
Submittal Procedures
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
2.
3.
or finish selection.
Submit samples of finishes from full range of
manufacturers'
standard
colors,
textures,
and
patterns for Architect/Engineer selection.
After review, produce duplicates and distribute in
accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article and for
record documents purposes described in Section 01700.
C.
Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic
characteristics of Products, with integral parts and
attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for
interfacing work.
D.
Include identification on each sample, with full Project
information.
E.
Submit number of samples specified in individual
specification sections; Architect/Engineer will retain one
sample.
F.
Reviewed samples which may be used in the Work are
indicated in individual specification sections.
G.
Samples will not be used for testing purposes unless
specifically stated in specification section.
1.8 DESIGN DATA
A.
Submit for Architect/Engineer's knowledge as contract
administrator or for Owner.
B.
Submit for information for limited purpose of assessing
conformance with information given and design concept
expressed in Contract Documents.
1.9 TEST REPORTS
A.
Submit for Architect/Engineer's knowledge as contract
administrator or for Owner.
B.
Submit test reports for information for limited purpose of
assessing conformance with information given and design
concept expressed in Contract Documents.
1.10 CERTIFICATES
February 28, 2003
01330 - 5
Submittal Procedures
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
A.
When specified in individual specification sections, submit
certification by manufacturer, installation/application
subcontractor, or Contractor to Architect/Engineer, in
quantities specified for Product Data.
B.
Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds
specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data,
affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.
C.
Certificates may be recent or previous test results on
material or Product, but must be acceptable to
Architect/Engineer.
1.11 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
A.
When specified in individual specification sections, submit
printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly,
installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, to
Architect/Engineer for delivery to Owner in quantities
specified for Product Data.
B.
Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring
special attention, and special environmental criteria
required for application or installation.
1.12 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD REPORTS
A.
Submit reports for Architect/Engineer's benefit as
contract administrator or for Owner.
B.
Submit report in duplicate within 30 days of observation to
Architect/Engineer for information.
C.
Submit for information for limited purpose of assessing
conformance with information given and design concept
expressed in Contract Documents.
1.13 ERECTION DRAWINGS
A.
Submit drawings for Architect/Engineer's benefit as
contract administrator or for Owner.
B.
Submit for information for limited purpose of assessing
conformance with information given and design concept
expressed in Contract Documents.
C.
Data indicating inappropriate or unacceptable Work may be
subject to action by Architect/Engineer or Owner.
February 28, 2003
01330 - 6
Submittal Procedures
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
1.14 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS
A.
Provide photographs of site and construction throughout
progress of Work produced by an experienced photographer,
acceptable to Architect/Engineer.
B.
Each month submit photographs with Application for
Payment.
C. Photographs: Two prints; color, glossy; 4 x 6 inch, 100 x 150 mm
size; mounted on 8-1/2 x 11 inch, 216 x 280 mm soft card stock,
with left edge binding margin for three hole punch.
D.
Take two site photographs from differing directions and five
interior photographs indicating relative progress of the
Work, 7 days maximum prior to submitting.
E.
Take photographs as evidence of existing project
conditions as follows:
1.
Interior views.
2.
Exterior views.
3.
Reinforcing Steel.
F.
Identify each print on back. Identify name of Project,
contract number phase orientation of view, date and time of
view, name and address of photographer, and photographer's
numbered identification of exposure.
G.
Deliver negatives to Owner with project record documents.
Catalog and index negatives in chronological sequence; include
typed table of contents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 PART EXECUTION Not
Used.
END OF SECTION
February 28, 2003
01330 - 7
Submittal Procedures
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 01400
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Quality control and control of installation.
B.
Tolerances.
C.
References.
D.
Mock-up requirements.
E.
Testing and inspection services.
F.
Manufacturers' field services.
G.
Examination.
H.
Preparation. 1.2 QUALITY CONTROL AND CONTROL
OF INSTALLATION
A.
Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers,
products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to
produce Work of specified quality.
B.
Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each
step in sequence.
C.
When
manufacturers'
instructions
conflict
Contract
Documents,
request
clarification
Architect/Engineer before proceeding.
D.
Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the
Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or
specified requirements indicate higher standards or more
precise workmanship.
E.
Perform Work by persons qualified to produce required and
specified quality.
F.
Verify field measurements are as indicated on Shop
Drawings or as instructed by manufacturer.
G.
Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices
designed and sized to withstand stresses,
February 28, 2003
01400 - 1
with
from
Quality Requirements
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
vibration, physical distortion, or disfigurement. 1.3
TOLERANCES
A.
Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of
products
to
produce
acceptable
Work.
Do
not
permit
tolerances to accumulate.
B.
Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. When
manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract
Documents, request clarification from
Architect/Engineer before proceeding.
C.
Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position
before securing products in place.
1.4 REFERENCES
A.
For products or workmanship specified by association,
trade, or other consensus standards, comply with
requirements of standard, except when more rigid
requirements are specified or are required by applicable
codes.
B.
Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on
date of Contract Documents, except where specific date is
established by code.
C.
Obtain copies of standards where required by product
specification sections.
D.
When specified reference standards conflict with
Contract Documents, request clarification from
Architect/Engineer before proceeding.
E.
Neither contractual relationships, duties, nor
responsibilities of parties in Contract nor those of
Architect/Engineer shall be altered from Contract
Documents by mention or inference otherwise in reference
documents.
1.5 MOCK-UP REQUIREMENTS
A.
B.
Tests will be performed under provisions identified in this
section and identified in respective product specification
sections.
Assemble and erect specified items with specified
attachment and anchorage devices, flashings, seals, and
finishes.
February 28, 2003
01400 - 2
Quality Requirements
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
C.
Accepted mock-ups shall be comparison standard for
remaining Work.
D.
Where mock-up has been accepted by Architect/Engineer and
is specified in product specification sections to be
removed; remove mock-up and clear area when directed to do
so by Architect/Engineer.
1.6 TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES
A.
Owner will employ services of an independent firm to perform
testing and inspection. Contractor shall pay for services
from cash allowances specified in Section 01200.
B.
The independent firm will perform tests, inspections and
other services specified in individual specification
sections and as required by Authority having jurisdiction.
1.
Laboratory: Authorized to operate at Project
location.
2.
Laboratory Staff: Maintain full time registered
Engineer on staff to review services.
3.
Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable
intervals with devices of an accuracy traceable to
National Bureau of Standards or accepted values of
natural physical constants.
C.
Testing, inspections and source quality control may occur
on or off project site. Perform off-site testing as
required by Architect/Engineer or Owner.
D.
Reports will be submitted by independent firm to
Architect/Engineer and Contractor, in duplicate, indicating
observations and results of tests and indicating compliance
or non-compliance with Contract Documents.
E.
Cooperate with independent firm; furnish samples of
materials, design mix, equipment, tools, storage, safe
access, and assistance by incidental labor as requested.
1.
Notify Architect/Engineer and independent firm 48
hours prior to expected time for operations requiring
services.
2.
Make arrangements with independent firm and pay for
additional samples and tests required for
Contractor's use.
February 28, 2003
01400 - 3
Quality Requirements
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
F.
Testing and employment of testing agency or laboratory shall
not relieve Contractor of obligation to perform Work in
accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.
G.
Re-testing or re-inspection required because of nonconformance to specified requirements shall be performed by
same independent firm on instructions by Architect/Engineer.
Payment for re-testing or reinspection will be charged to
Contractor by deducting testing charges from Contract
Sum/Price.
H.
Agency Responsibilities:
1.
Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor.
2.
Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with
Architect/Engineer and Contractor in performance of
services.
3.
Perform specified sampling and testing of
products in accordance with specified standards.
4.
Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with
requirements of Contract Documents.
5.
Promptly notify Architect/Engineer and Contractor of
observed irregularities or non-conformance of Work or
products.
6.
Perform additional tests required by
Architect/Engineer.
7.
Attend when required by Architect/Engineer.
I.
Agency Reports: After each test, promptly submit two copies
of report to Architect/Engineer and to Contractor. When
requested by Architect/Engineer, provide interpretation of
test results. Include the following:
1.
Date issued.
2.
Project title and number.
3.
Name of inspector.
4.
Date and time of sampling or inspection.
5.
Identification of product and specifications
section.
6.
Location in Project.
7.
Type of inspection or test.
8.
Date of test.
9.
Results of tests.
10.
Conformance with Contract Documents.
J.
Limits On Testing Authority:
1. Agency or laboratory may not release, revoke, alter,
or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents.
February 28, 2003
01400 - 4
Quality Requirements
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
2.
3.
4.
Agency or laboratory may not approve or accept any
portion of the Work.
Agency or laboratory may not assume duties of
Contractor.
Agency or laboratory has no authority to stop the Work.
1.7 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES
A.
When specified in individual specification sections, require
material or product suppliers or manufacturers to provide
qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions,
conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of
workmanship, start-up of equipment, and test, adjust and
balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate
instructions when necessary.
B.
Submit qualifications of observer to
Architect/Engineer 30 days in advance of required
observations. Observer subject to approval of
Architect/Engineer.
C.
Report observations and site decisions or instructions given
to applicators or installers that are supplemental or
contrary to manufacturers' written instructions.
D.
Refer to Section 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES,
MANUFACTURERS' FIELD REPORTS article.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are
acceptable for subsequent Work. Beginning new Work means
acceptance of existing conditions.
B.
Verify existing substrate is
support or attachment of new
attached.
C.
Examine and verify specific conditions described in
individual specification sections.
capable of structural
Work being applied or
D.
Verify utility services are available, of correct
February 28, 2003
01400 - 5
Quality Requirements
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
characteristics, and in correct locations.
3.2 PREPARATION
A.
Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next
material or substance.
B.
Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next
material or substance.
C.
Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer,
sealer, or conditioner prior to applying new material or
substance in contact or bond.
END OF SECTION
February 28, 2003
01400 - 6
Quality Requirements
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 01500
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Temporary Utilities:
1.
Temporary
2.
Temporary
3.
Temporary
4.
Temporary
5.
Temporary
6.
Telephone
7.
Facsimile
8.
Temporary
9.
Temporary
electricity.
lighting for construction purposes.
heating.
cooling.
ventilation.
service.
service.
water service.
sanitary facilities.
B.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Construction Facilities:
1.
Field offices and sheds.
Vehicular access.
Parking.
Progress cleaning and waste removal.
Project identification.
Traffic regulation.
C.
Temporary Controls:
1.
Barriers.
2.
Enclosures and fencing.
3.
Protection of the Work.
4.
Security.
5.
Water control.
6.
Dust control.
7.
Erosion and sediment control.
8.
Noise control.
9.
Pest control.
10.
Pollution control.
11.
Rodent control.
D.
Removal of utilities, facilities, and controls. 1.2
TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY
A.
Owner will pay cost of energy used. Exercise measures to
conserve energy. Utilize Owner’s existing power service.
February 28, 2003
01500 - 1
Temporary Facilities
and Controls
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
B.
Provide temporary electric feeder from existing building
electrical service at location as directed by Owner. Do not
disrupt Owner's use of service.
C.
Complement existing power service capacity and
characteristics as required for construction
operations.
D.
Provide power outlets, with branch wiring and
distribution boxes located as required for
construction operations. Provide flexible power cords as
required for portable construction tools and equipment.
E.
Provide main service disconnect and over-current
protection at convenient location.
F.
Permanent convenience receptacles may be utilized
during construction.
G.
Provide distribution equipment, wiring, and outlets to
provide single phase branch circuits for power and
lighting.
1.
Provide 20 ampere duplex outlets, single phase
circuits for power tools for every 100 sq ft (10 sq m)
of active work area.
2.
Provide 20 ampere, single phase branch circuits for
lighting.
1.3 TEMPORARY LIGHTING FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES
A.
Provide and maintain lighting for construction
operations to achieve minimum lighting level of 2
watt/sq ft (21 watt/sq m).
B.
Provide and maintain 1 watt/sq ft (10.8 watt/sq m)
lighting to exterior staging and storage areas entire site
after dark for security purposes.
C.
Provide and maintain 0.25 watt/sq ft (2.7 watt/sq m) HID
lighting to interior work areas after dark for security
purposes.
D.
Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution
boxes with lighting conductors, pigtails, and lamps for
specified lighting levels.
E.
Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs.
February 28, 2003
01500 - 2
Temporary Facilities
and Controls
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
F.
Permanent building lighting may not be utilized during
construction.
1.4 TEMPORARY HEATING
A.
Provide heating devices and heat as needed to maintain
specified conditions for construction operations.
B.
Owner will pay cost of temporary heat. Exercise measures to
conserve energy. Utilize Owner's existing heat plant, extend
and supplement with temporary heat devices as needed to
maintain specified conditions for construction operations.
C.
Enclose building prior to activating temporary heat in
accordance with Enclosures article in this section.
D.
Prior to operation of permanent equipment for temporary
heating purposes, verify installation is approved for
operation, equipment is lubricated and filters are in
place. Provide and pay for operation, maintenance, and
regular replacement of filters and worn or consumed parts.
E.
Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F
(10 degrees C) in areas where construction is in
progress, unless indicated otherwise in product
sections.
1.5 TEMPORARY COOLING
A.
Provide cooling devices and cooling as needed to
maintain specified conditions for construction
operations.
B.
Enclose building prior to activating temporary cooling in
accordance with Enclosures article in this section.
C.
Prior to operation of permanent equipment for temporary
cooling purposes, verify installation is approved for
operation, equipment is lubricated and filters are in
place. Provide and pay for operation, maintenance, and
regular replacement of filters and worn or consumed parts.
D.
Maintain maximum ambient temperature of 80 degrees F (26
degrees C) in areas where construction is in progress,
unless indicated otherwise in
February 28, 2003
01500 - 3
Temporary Facilities
and Controls
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
specifications.
1.6 TEMPORARY VENTILATION
A.
Ventilate enclosed areas to achieve curing of
materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent
accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.
1.7 TELEPHONE SERVICE
A.
Provide, maintain, and pay for telephone service to field
office at time of project mobilization.
1.8 FACSIMILE SERVICE
A.
Provide, maintain and pay for facsimile service and
dedicated telephone line to field office at time of
project mobilization.
1.9 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE
A.
B.
C.
Provide suitable quality water service as needed to
maintain specified conditions for construction
operations. Connect to existing water source.
Owner will pay cost of temporary water. Exercise
measures to conserve energy.
Extend branch piping with outlets located so water is
available by hoses with threaded connections. Provide
temporary pipe insulation to prevent freezing.
1.10 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
A.
Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures.
Existing facility use is not permitted. Provide
facilities at time of project mobilization.
1.11 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS
A.
Office: Weather tight, with lighting, electrical outlets,
heating, cooling and ventilating equipment, and equipped
with sturdy furniture drawing rack, and drawing display
table.
B.
Provide space for Project meetings, with table and
chairs to accommodate 6 persons.
C.
Provide separate work station, similarly equipped and
Temporary Facilities
February 28, 2003
01500 - 4
and Controls
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
furnished, for use of Architect/Engineer.
D.
Locate offices and sheds minimum distance of 30 feet (10 m)
from existing and new structures.
E.
When permanent facilities are enclosed with operable
utilities, relocate offices and storage into building, with
written agreement of Owner, and remove temporary buildings.
F.
Construction: Portable or mobile buildings, or buildings
constructed with floors raised above ground, securely fixed
to foundations with steps and landings at entrance doors.
1.
Construction: Structurally sound, secure, weather tight
enclosures for office and storage spaces. Maintain
during progress of Work; remove when no longer needed.
2.
Temperature Transmission Resistance of Floors,
Walls, and Ceilings: Compatible with occupancy and
storage requirements.
3.
Exterior Materials: Weather resistant, finished
in one color acceptable to Architect/Engineer.
4.
Interior Materials in Offices: Sheet type
materials for walls and ceilings, pre-finished or
painted; resilient floors and bases.
5.
Lighting for Offices: 50 ft C (538 lx) at desk top
height, exterior lighting at entrance doors.
6.
Fire Extinguishers: Appropriate type fire
extinguisher at each office and each storage
area.
7.
Interior Materials in Storage Sheds: As required to
provide specified conditions for storage of products.
G.
Environmental Control:
1.
Heating, Cooling, and Ventilating for Offices:
Automatic equipment to maintain comfort
conditions.
2.
Storage Spaces: Heating and ventilation as needed to
maintain products in accordance with Contract
Documents; lighting for maintenance and inspection of
products.
H.
Storage Areas And Sheds: Size to storage requirements for
products of individual Sections, allowing for access and
orderly provision for maintenance and for inspection of
products to requirements of Section
Temporary Facilities
February 28, 2003
01500 - 5
and Controls
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
01600.
I.
Preparation: Fill and grade sites for temporary
structures sloped for drainage away from buildings.
J.
Maintenance And Cleaning:
1.
Weekly janitorial services for offices; periodic
cleaning and maintenance for office and storage
areas.
2.
Maintain approach walks free of mud, water, and
snow.
K.
Removal: At completion of Work remove buildings,
foundations, utility services, and debris. Restore areas.
1.12 VEHICULAR ACCESS
A.
Construct temporary all-weather access roads from public
thoroughfares to serve construction area, of width and
load bearing capacity to accommodate unimpeded traffic
for construction purposes.
B.
Construct temporary bridges and culverts to span low areas
and allow unimpeded drainage.
C.
Extend and relocate vehicular access as Work progress
requires, provide detours as necessary for unimpeded
traffic flow.
D.
Location approved by Owner.
E.
Provide unimpeded access for emergency vehicles.
Maintain 20 feet (6 m) wide driveways with turning space
between and around combustible materials.
F.
Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants and
control valves free of obstructions.
G.
Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels
before entering streets.
H.
Use designated existing on-site roads for construction
traffic.
1.13 PARKING
A.
Arrange for temporary surface parking areas to
accommodate construction personnel.
Temporary Facilities
February 28, 2003
01500 - 6
and Controls
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
B.
Locate as approved by Owner.
C.
When site space is not adequate, provide additional offsite parking.
D.
Use of existing on-site streets and driveways used for
construction traffic is permitted. Tracked vehicles not
allowed on paved areas.
E.
Use of existing parking facilities used by
construction personnel is permitted.
F.
Do not allow heavy vehicles or construction equipment in
parking areas.
G.
Designate one parking space for Owner.
H.
Permanent Pavements And Parking Facilities:
1.
Bases for permanent roads and parking areas may be
used for construction traffic.
2.
Avoid traffic loading beyond paving design
capacity. Tracked vehicles not allowed.
I.
Maintenance:
1.
Maintain traffic and parking areas in sound
condition free of excavated material,
construction equipment, products, mud, snow, and ice.
2.
Maintain existing and permanent paved areas used for
construction; promptly repair breaks, potholes, low
areas, standing water, and other deficiencies, to
maintain paving and drainage in original, or
specified, condition.
J.
Removal, Repair:
1.
Remove temporary materials and construction when
permanent paving is usable.
2.
Remove underground work and compacted materials to
depth of 2 feet (600 mm); fill and grade site as
specified.
3.
Repair existing facilities damaged by use, to
original condition.
K.
Mud From Site Vehicles: Provide means of removing mud from
vehicle wheels before entering streets.
1.14 PROGRESS CLEANING AND WASTE REMOVAL
February 28, 2003
01500 - 7
Temporary Facilities
and Controls
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
A.
Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and
rubbish. Maintain site in clean and orderly condition.
B.
Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums,
attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces,
prior to enclosing spaces.
C.
Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of
surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate
dust.
D.
Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and
rubbish from site weekly and dispose off-site.
E.
Open free-fall chutes are not permitted. Terminate closed
chutes into appropriate containers with lids.
1.15 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION
A.
Project Identification Sign:
1.
One painted sign of construction, design, and
content shown on Drawings, location designated.
2.
Content:
a.
Project title, and name of Owner as
indicated on Contract Documents.
b.
Names and titles of authorities.
c.
Names and titles of Architect/Engineer and
Consultants.
d.
Name of Prime Contractor and major
Subcontractors.
e.
Council members.
3.
Graphic Design, Colors, Style of Lettering:
Designated by Architect/Engineer.
B.
Project Informational Signs:
1.
Painted informational signs of same colors and
lettering as Project Identification sign, or standard
products; size lettering for legibility at 100 feet
(30 m) distance.
2.
Provide sign at each field office, storage shed,
and directional signs to direct traffic into and
within site. Relocate as Work progress requires.
3.
No other signs are allowed without Owner
permission except those required by law.
C.
Sign Painter: Experienced as professional sign
painter for minimum three years.
February 28, 2003
01500 - 8
Temporary Facilities
and Controls
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
D.
Finishes, Painting: Adequate to withstand weathering,
fading, and chipping for duration of construction.
E.
Sign Materials:
1.
Structure and Framing: New wood, structurally
adequate.
2.
Sign Surfaces: Exterior grade plywood with medium
density overlay, minimum 3/4 inches (19 mm) thick,
standard large sizes to minimize joints.
3.
Rough Hardware: Galvanized.
4.
Paint and Primers: Exterior quality, two coats; sign
background of color as selected.
5.
Lettering: Pre-cut vinyl self-adhesive products.
F.
Installation:
1.
Install project identification sign within 15
days after date fixed by Notice to Proceed.
2.
Erect at location of high public visibility
adjacent to main entrance to site.
3.
Erect supports and framing on secure foundation,
rigidly braced and framed to resist wind
loadings.
4.
Install sign surface plumb and level, with butt
joints. Anchor securely.
5.
Paint exposed surfaces of sign, supports, and
framing.
G.
Maintenance: Maintain signs and supports clean, repair
deterioration and damage.
H.
Removal: Remove signs, framing, supports, and foundations at
completion of Project and restore area.
1.16 TRAFFIC REGULATION
A.
Signs, Signals, And Devices:
1.
Post Mounted and Wall Mounted Traffic Control and
Informational Signs: As approved by authority
having jurisdiction.
2.
Traffic Control Signals: As approved by local
jurisdictions.
3.
Traffic Cones and Drums, Flares and Lights: As
approved by authority having jurisdiction.
4.
Flagperson Equipment: As required by authority
having jurisdiction.
B.
Flag Persons: Provide trained and equipped flag
February 28, 2003
01500 - 9
Temporary Facilities
and Controls
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
persons to regulate traffic when construction
operations or traffic encroach on public traffic
lanes.
C.
Flares And Lights: Use flares and lights during hours of low
visibility to delineate traffic lanes and to guide traffic.
D.
Haul Routes:
1.
Consult with authority having jurisdiction,
establish public thoroughfares to be used for
haul routes and site access.
2.
Confine construction traffic to designated haul
routes.
3.
Provide traffic control at critical areas of haul
routes to regulate traffic, to minimize interference
with public traffic.
E.
Traffic Signs And Signals:
1.
Provide signs at approaches to site and on site, at
crossroads, detours, parking areas, and elsewhere as
needed to direct construction and affected public
traffic.
2.
Provide, operate, and maintain traffic control
signals to direct and maintain orderly flow of traffic
in areas under Contractor's control, and areas
affected by Contractor's operations.
3.
Relocate as Work progresses, to maintain
effective traffic control.
F.
Removal:
1.
Remove equipment and devices when no longer
required.
2.
Repair damage caused by installation.
3.
Remove post settings to depth of 2 feet (600 mm).
1.17 BARRIERS
A.
Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to
construction areas and to protect existing facilities and
adjacent properties from damage from construction operations
and demolition.
B.
Provide barricades and covered walkways required by
authorities having jurisdiction for public rights-ofway and
for public access to existing building.
C.
Provide protection for plants designated to remain.
February 28, 2003
01500 - 10
Temporary Facilities
and Controls
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
Replace damaged plants.
D.
Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site,
and structures from damage.
1.18 ENCLOSURES AND FENCING
A.
Construction: Contractor's option. Commercial grade chain
link fence. Plastic construction netting. Solid wood fence,
painted.
B.
Provide 6 feet (1.8 m) high fence around construction
site; equip with vehicular and pedestrian gates with locks.
C.
Exterior Enclosures:
1.
Provide temporary weather tight closure of exterior
openings to accommodate acceptable working conditions
and protection for products, to allow for temporary
heating and maintenance of required ambient
temperatures identified in individual specification
sections, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons.
Provide access doors with self-closing hardware and
locks.
D.
Interior Enclosures:
1.
Provide temporary partitions to separate work areas
from Owner occupied areas, to prevent penetration of
dust and moisture into Owner occupied areas, and to
prevent damage to existing materials and equipment.
2.
Construction: Framing and reinforced polyethylene,
plywood, gypsum board, sheet materials with closed
joints and sealed edges at intersections with existing
surfaces: a. Maximum flame spread rating of 25 in
accordance with ASTM E84.
3.
Paint surfaces exposed to view from Owner
occupied areas.
1.19 SECURITY
A.
Security Program:
1.
Protect Work, existing premises and Owner's
operations from theft, vandalism, and
unauthorized entry.
2.
Initiate program in coordination with Owner's existing
security system at project mobilization.
Temporary Facilities
February 28, 2003
01500 - 11
and Controls
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
3.
Maintain program throughout construction period until
Owner acceptance precludes need for Contractor
security.
B.
Entry Control:
1.
Restrict entrance of persons and vehicles into
Project site and existing facilities.
2.
Allow entrance only to authorized persons with
proper identification.
3.
Maintain log of workers and visitors, make
available to Owner on request.
4.
Control entrance of persons and vehicles related to
Owner's operations.
C.
Personnel Identification:
1.
Maintain list of accredited persons, submit copy to
Owner on request.
1.20 WATER CONTROL
A.
Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of
water. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping
equipment.
B.
Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water
barriers as required to protect site from soil erosion.
1.21 DUST CONTROL
A.
Execute Work by methods to minimize raising dust from
construction operations.
B.
Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from
dispersing into atmosphere.
1.22 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
A.
Plan and execute construction by methods to control surface
drainage from cuts and fills, from borrow and waste disposal
areas. Prevent erosion and sedimentation.
B.
Minimize surface area of bare soil exposed at one time.
C.
Provide temporary measures including berms, dikes, and
drains, and other devices to prevent water flow.
February 28, 2003
01500 - 12
Temporary Facilities
and Controls
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
D.
Construct fill and waste areas by selective placement to
avoid erosive surface silts or clays.
E.
Periodically
erosion and
measures.
inspect earthwork to detect evidence of
sedimentation; promptly apply corrective
1.23 NOISE CONTROL
A.
Provide methods, means, and facilities to minimize noise
from heavy equipment and noise produced by construction
operations.
1.24 PEST CONTROL
A.
Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent pests
and insects from damaging the Work or entering facility.
1.25 POLLUTION CONTROL
A.
Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent
contamination of soil, water, and atmosphere from discharge
of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by
construction operations.
B.
Comply with pollution and environmental control
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.26 RODENT CONTROL
A.
Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent
rodents from accessing or invading premises.
1.27 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS
A.
Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities,
materials, prior to Substantial Completion inspection.
B.
Remove underground installations to minimum depth of 2 feet
(600 mm).
C.
Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of
temporary work.
D.
Restore existing and permanent facilities used during
construction to original condition. Restore permanent
facilities used during construction to specified condition.
Temporary Facilities
February 28, 2003
01500 - 13
and Controls
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION Not
Used.
END OF SECTION
February 28, 2003
01500 - 14
Temporary Facilities
and Controls
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 01600
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Products.
B.
Product delivery requirements.
C.
Product storage and handling requirements.
D.
Product options.
E.
Product substitution procedures. 1.2
PRODUCTS
A.
Furnish products of qualified manufacturers suitable for
intended use. Furnish products of each type by single
manufacturer unless specified otherwise.
B.
Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing
premises, except as specifically permitted by Contract
Documents.
C.
Furnish interchangeable components from same
manufacturer for components being replaced.
1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Transport and handle products in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Promptly inspect shipments to ensure products comply with
requirements, quantities are correct, and products are
undamaged.
C.
Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods
to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage.
1.4 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS
A.
Store and protect products in accordance with
manufacturers' instructions.
B.
Store with seals and labels intact and legible.
February 28, 2003
01600 - 1
Product Requirements
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
C.
Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate
controlled, enclosures in an environment favorable to
product.
D.
For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on
sloped supports above ground.
E.
Provide bonded off-site storage and protection when site
does not permit on-site storage or protection.
F.
Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious
sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent
condensation and degradation of products.
G.
Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in
well-drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter.
H.
Provide equipment and personnel to store products by
methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage.
I.
Arrange storage of products to permit access for
inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are
undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition.
1.5 PRODUCT OPTIONS
A.
Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description
Only: Any product meeting those standards or description.
B.
Products Specified by Naming One or More
Manufacturers: products of one of manufacturers named and
meeting specifications, no options or
substitutions allowed.
C.
Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with
Provision for Substitutions: Submit request for substitution
for any manufacturer not named in accordance with the
following article.
1.6 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
A.
B.
Architect/Engineer will consider requests for
Substitutions only within 30 days after date
established in Notice to Proceed.
Substitutions may be considered when a product becomes
unavailable through no fault of Contractor.
February 28, 2003
01600 - 2
Product Requirements
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
C.
Document each request with complete data substantiating
compliance of proposed Substitution with Contract
Documents.
D.
A request constitutes a representation that
Contractor:
1.
Has investigated proposed product and determined that it
meets or exceeds quality level of specified product.
2.
Will provide same warranty for Substitution as for
specified product.
3.
Will coordinate installation and make changes to
other Work which may be required for the Work to
be complete with no additional cost to Owner.
4.
Waives claims for additional costs or time
extension which may subsequently become apparent.
5.
Will reimburse Owner for review or redesign
services associated with re-approval by
authorities having jurisdiction.
E.
Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated
or implied on Shop Drawing or Product Data submittals,
without separate written request, or when acceptance will
require revision to Contract
Documents.
F.
Substitution Submittal Procedure:
1.
Submit three copies of request for Substitution for
consideration. Limit each request to one proposed
Substitution.
2.
Submit Shop Drawings, Product Data, and certified
test results attesting to proposed product
equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer.
3.
Architect/Engineer will notify Contractor in
writing of decision to accept or reject request.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION Not
Used.
END OF SECTION
February 28, 2003
01600 - 3
Product Requirements
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 01700
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Closeout procedures.
B.
Final cleaning.
C.
Starting of systems.
D.
Demonstration and instructions.
E.
Testing, adjusting and balancing.
F.
Protecting installed construction.
G.
Project record documents.
H.
Operation and maintenance data.
I.
Manual for materials and finishes.
J.
Manual for equipment and systems.
K.
Spare parts and maintenance products.
L.
Product warranties and product bonds.
M.
Maintenance service. 1.2
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A.
Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been
reviewed, Work has been inspected, and that Work is complete in
accordance with Contract Documents and ready for
Architect/Engineer's review.
B.
Provide submittals to Architect/Engineer required by
authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Submit final Application for Payment identifying total
adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining
due.
D.
Owner will occupy portions of building as necessary to
maintain operations.
February 28, 2003 01700 -1 Execution Requirements
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
1.3 FINAL CLEANING
A.
B.
Execute final cleaning prior to final project
assessment.
Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to
view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign
substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum
carpeted and soft surfaces.
C.
Clean equipment and fixtures to sanitary condition with
cleaning materials appropriate to surface and material
being cleaned.
D.
Replace filters of operating equipment.
E.
Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and
construction facilities from site.
1.4 STARTING OF SYSTEMS
A.
Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and
systems.
B.
Notify Architect/Engineer, and Owner seven days prior to
start-up of each item.
C.
Verify each piece of equipment or system has been
checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt
tension, control sequence, and for conditions, which
may cause damage.
D.
Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical
characteristics agree with those required by equipment or
system manufacturer.
E.
Verify wiring and support components for equipment are
complete and tested.
F.
G.
Execute start-up under supervision of applicable
Contractors' personnel in accordance with
manufacturers' instructions.
When specified in individual specification Sections,
require manufacturer to provide authorized representative
to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve
equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to
supervise placing equipment or system in operation.
February 28, 2003
01700 -2
Execution Requirements
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
H.
Submit a written report in accordance with Section 01300
that equipment or system has been properly installed and
is functioning correctly.
1.5 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS
A.
Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to
Owner's personnel two weeks prior to date of Substantial
Completion.
B.
Demonstrate Project equipment and instruct by
qualified manufacturer's representative who is
knowledgeable about the Project.
C.
For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation,
perform demonstration for other season within six months.
D.
Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for
instruction. Review contents of manual with Owner's
personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and
maintenance.
E.
Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment,
trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of
each item of equipment at agreed time, at equipment location.
F.
Prepare and insert additional data in operations and
maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes
apparent during instruction.
G.
Required instruction time for each item of equipment
and system is specified in individual sections.
1.6 PROTECTING INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A.
Protect installed Work and provide special protection where
specified in individual specification sections.
B.
Provide temporary and removable protection for installed
products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent
damage.
C.
Provide protective coverings at walls, projections,
jambs, sills, and soffits of openings.
February 28, 2003
01700 -3
Execution Requirements
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
D.
Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from
traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by
protecting with durable sheet materials.
1.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
Maintain on site one set of the following record
documents; record actual revisions to the Work:
1.
Drawings.
2.
Specifications.
3.
Addenda.
4.
Change Orders and other modifications to the
Contract.
5.
Reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data, and
Samples.
6.
Manufacturer's instruction for assembly,
installation, and adjusting.
B.
Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling
future reference by Owner.
C.
Store record documents separate from documents used for
construction.
D.
Record information concurrent with construction
progress, not less than weekly.
E.
Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each
product section description of actual products
installed, including the following:
1.
Manufacturer's name and product model and number.
2.
Product substitutions or alternates utilized.
3.
Changes made by Addenda and modifications.
F.
Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item
to record actual construction including:
1.
Measured depths of foundations in relation to
finish main floor datum.
2.
Measured horizontal and vertical locations of
underground utilities and appurtenances,
referenced to permanent surface improvements.
3.
Measured locations of internal utilities and
appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to
visible and accessible features of the Work.
4.
Field changes of dimension and detail.
5.
Details not on original Contract drawings.
February 28, 2003
01700 -4
Execution Requirements
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
G.
Submit documents to Architect/Engineer with claim for final
Application for Payment.
1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A.
Submit data bound in 8-1/2 x 11 inch (A4) text pages, three
D side ring binders with durable plastic covers.
B.
Prepare binder cover with printed title "OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS", title of project , and
subject matter of binder when multiple binders are
required.
C.
Internally subdivide binder contents with permanent page
dividers, logically organized as described below; with tab
titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic
tabs.
D.
Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind
in with text; fold larger drawings to size of text pages.
E.
Contents: Prepare Table of Contents for each volume,
with each product or system description identified,
typed on white paper, in three parts as follows:
1.
Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and
telephone numbers of Architect/Engineer, Contractor,
Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers.
2.
Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions,
arranged by system and subdivided by specification
section. For each category, identify names,
addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors
and suppliers. Identify the following:
a.
Significant design criteria.
b.
List of equipment.
c.
Parts list for each component.
d.
Operating instructions.
e.
Maintenance instructions for equipment and
systems.
f.
Maintenance instructions for [special]
finishes, including recommended cleaning
methods and materials, and special
precautions identifying detrimental agents.
3.
Part 3: Project documents and certificates,
including the following:
a.
Shop drawings and product data.
February 28, 2003
01700 -5
Execution Requirements
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
b.
c.
d.
Air and water balance reports.
Certificates.
Photocopies of warranties and bonds.
1.9 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES
A.
Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats
and outlines of contents before start of Work.
Architect/Engineer will review draft and return one copy
with comments.
B.
For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into
service during construction and operated by Owner,
submit documents within ten days after acceptance.
C.
Submit one copy of completed volumes 15 days prior to final
inspection. Draft copy be reviewed and returned with
Architect/Engineer comments. Revise content of document sets
as required prior to final submission.
D.
Submit two sets of revised final volumes in final form
within 10 days after final inspection.
E.
Building Products, Applied Materials, and Finishes:
Include product data, with catalog number, size,
composition, and color and texture designations. Include
information for re-ordering custom manufactured
products.
F.
Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Include
manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and
methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods,
and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.
G.
Moisture Protection and Weather Exposed Products:
Include product data listing applicable reference
standards, chemical composition, and details of
installation. Include recommendations for inspections,
maintenance, and repair.
H.
Additional Requirements: As specified in individual
product specification sections.
I.
Include listing in Table of Contents for design data, with
tabbed fly sheet and space for insertion of data.
February 28, 2003
01700 -6
Execution Requirements
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
1.10 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
A.
Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats
and outlines of contents before start of Work.
Architect/Engineer will review draft and return one copy
with comments.
B.
For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into
service during construction and operated by Owner,
submit documents within ten days after acceptance.
C.
Submit one copy of completed volumes 15 days prior to final
inspection. Draft copy be reviewed and returned with
Architect/Engineer comments. Revise content of document sets
as required prior to final submission.
D.
Submit two sets of revised final volumes in final form
within 10 days after final inspection.
E.
Each Item of Equipment and Each System: Include
description of unit or system, and component parts.
Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and
limiting conditions. Include performance curves, with
engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and
model number of replaceable parts.
F.
Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service
characteristics, controls, and communications; typed.
G.
Include color coded wiring diagrams as installed.
H.
Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and
routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include
regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency
instructions. Include summer, winter, and special operating
instructions.
I.
Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and
guide for preventative maintenance and trouble shooting;
disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and
alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions.
J.
Include servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of
lubricants required.
February 28, 2003
01700 -7
Execution Requirements
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
K.
Include manufacturer's printed operation and
maintenance instructions.
L.
Include sequence of operation by controls
manufacturer.
M.
Include original manufacturer's parts list,
illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams
required for maintenance.
N.
Include control diagrams by controls manufacturer as
installed.
O.
Include Contractor's coordination drawings, with color coded
piping diagrams as installed.
P.
Include charts of valve tag numbers, with location and
function of each valve, keyed to flow and control diagrams.
Q.
Include list of original manufacturer's spare parts,
current prices, and recommended quantities to be
maintained in storage.
R.
Include test and balancing reports as specified in
Section 01400.
S.
Additional Requirements: As specified in individual
product specification sections.
T.
Include listing in Table of Contents for design data, with
tabbed dividers and space for insertion of data.
1.11 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS
A.
Furnish spare parts, maintenance, and extra products in
quantities specified in individual specification sections.
B.
Deliver to Project site and place in location as
directed by Owner; obtain receipt prior to final
payment.
1.12 PRODUCT WARRANTIES AND PRODUCT BONDS
A.
Obtain warranties and bonds executed in duplicate by
responsible subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers,
within ten days after completion of applicable item of
work.
February 28, 2003
01700 -8
Execution Requirements
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
B.
Execute and assemble transferable warranty documents and
bonds from subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers.
C.
Verify documents are in proper form, contain full
information, and are notarized.
D.
Co-execute submittals when required.
E.
Include Table of Contents and assemble in three D side ring
binder with durable plastic cover.
F.
Submit prior to final Application for Payment.
G.
Time Of Submittals:
1.
For equipment or component parts of equipment put into
service during construction with Owner's permission,
submit documents within ten days after acceptance.
2.
Make other submittals within ten days after Date of
Substantial Completion, prior to final Application
for Payment.
3.
For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed
beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submit within
ten days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance
as beginning of warranty or bond period.
1.13 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A.
Furnish service and maintenance of components indicated
in specification sections during warranty period.
B.
Examine system components at frequency consistent with
reliable operation. Clean, adjust, and lubricate as
required.
C.
Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication
of components. Repair or replace parts whenever required.
Use parts produced by manufacturer of original component.
D.
Do not assign or transfer maintenance service to agent or
Subcontractor without prior written consent of Owner.
February 28, 2003
01700 -9
Execution Requirements
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION Not
Used.
END OF SECTION
February 28, 2003
01700 -10
Execution Requirements
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 03365
STAINED CONCRETE FINISHES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes stained concrete finish on cast-inplace concrete work specified on structural drawings.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
Structural Drawings - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
REFERENCES
A.
American Concrete Institute:
1.
ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete.
2.
ACI 303 - Guide to Cast-in-Place Architectural
Concrete Practice.
3.
ACI 308 - Standard Practice for Curing Concrete.
B.
American Society for Testing and Materials:
1.
ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A.
Section 01300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal
procedures.
B.
Product Data: Submit data for accessory materials.
C.
Samples: Supply liquid samples of the concrete stain in 5
oz. (minimum) containers.
D.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify [Products] meet or exceed
[specified requirements] .
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform Work in accordance with manufacturer’s
instruction
February 28, 2003
03365 - 1 Stained Concrete Finishes
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
1.5 MOCK-UP
A.
B.
Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for
mockup.
Construct mockup for one area of he floor in a storage or
janitor’s room for approval of the color and finish.
C.
Locate [where directed by Architect/Engineer.]
D.
Incorporate accepted mockup as part of Work. 1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
B.
Section 1600 - Product Requirements: Product storage and
handling requirements.
Deliver [acid etch solution,] in manufacturer's
packaging, including use instructions.
1.7 COORDINATION
A.
Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements:
Coordination and project conditions.
B.
Ensure concrete mix is provided with correct
aggregate.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
B.
See structural engineering drawings.
Acid Stain and Clear Sealer by the same manufacturer.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
Kemiko Concrete Floor Stain
Jo Phillipps
6663 SW Beaverton-Hillsdale Hwy
Portland, Or. 503291-7756 503-2911753 Fax
b.
February 28, 2003
Substitutions: [Section 01600 - Product
Requirements] .
03365 - 2 Stained Concrete Finishes
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
EXAMINATION
A.
Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements:
Coordination and project conditions.
B.
Verify that sufficient material are on site to
complete the work.
PREPARATION
A.
Clean formwork surfaces.
B.
Clean previously placed concrete with steel brush and
apply bonding agent.
STAINING CONCRETE
A.
B.
C.
D.
Protect the concrete surface from stain and liquids until
the floor is ready to be finished.
Concrete moisture content must be below 14% prior to
staining the floor.
Apply two coats of English Red stain to the concrete
allowing each coat to react with the concrete completely.
Follow manufacturer’s application instructions.
After curing, apply two coats of “Perfectly Clear
Sealer” to the floor.
3.4 CLEANING
A.
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Final
cleaning.
B.
When desired finish is achieved, wash and rinse. Follow
Manufacturer’s maintenance procedures until acceptance of
the project by the owner.
3.5 DEFECTIVE FINISH
A. Clean and refinish imperfections which exceed manufacturer’s
acceptable finish to match adjacent areas.
February 28, 2003
03365 - 3 Stained Concrete Finishes
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
3.7
A.
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Protecting
installed construction.
B.
Protect finish from moisture, or mechanical injury.
SCHEDULES
A.
English Red on all surfaces within the structure except
mechanical spaces..
END OF SECTION
February 28, 2003
03365 - 4 Stained Concrete Finishes
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 04100
MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Mortar and grout for masonry.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01400 - Quality Control:
B. Section 04300 – Unit Masonry Systems.
C. Section 04853 – Mortar Placed Stone Assemblies.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ACI 530 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry
Structures.
B. ACI 530.1 - Specifications For Masonry Structures.
C. ASTM C5 - Quicklime for Structural Purposes.
D. ASTM C91 - Masonry Cement.
E. ASTM C94 - Ready-Mixed Concrete.
F. ASTM C144 - Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.
G. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement.
H. ASTM C199 - Test Method for Pier Test for Refractory Mortar.
I. ASTM C207 - Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.
J. ASTM C270 - Mortar for Unit Masonry.
K. ASTM C387 - Packaged, Dry, Combined Materials, for Mortar and
Concrete.
L. ASTM C404 - Aggregates for Masonry Grout.
February 28, 2003
SECTION 04100-1 MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
M. ASTM C476 - Grout for Masonry.
N. ASTM C595 - Blended Hydraulic Cement.
O. ASTM C780 - Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of
Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry.
P. ASTM C1019 - Method of Sampling and Testing Grout.
Q. ASTM C1072 - Method for Measurement of Masonry Flexural Bond
Strength.
R. ASTM C1142 - Ready-Mixed Mortar for Unit Masonry.
S. ASTM E447 - Test Methods for Compressive Strength of
Masonry Prisms.
T. ASTM E518 - Test Method for Flexural Bond Strength of
Masonry.
U. IMIAC (International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council) Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather
Masonry Construction.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Include design mix, indicate whether the Proportion or Property
specification of ASTM C270 is to be used, required environmental
conditions, and admixture limitations.
C. Samples: Submit two samples of mortar, illustrating mortar color
and color range.
D. Reports: Submit reports on mortar indicating conformance of
mortar to property requirements of ASTM C270
E. Reports: Submit reports on grout indicating conformance of
component grout materials to requirements of ASTM C476 and test
and evaluation reports to ASTM C1019.
F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that product meet or exceed
specified requirements.
G. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under
provisions of Section 01300.
February 28, 2003
SECTION 04100-2 MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 530 and ACI 530.1.
B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under
provisions of Section 01600.
B. Maintain packaged materials clean, dry, and protected
against dampness, freezing, and foreign matter.
1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Cold Weather Requirements: IMIAC - Recommended Practices and
Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction.
B. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum
50 degrees F (10 degrees C) prior to, during, and 48 hours after
completion of masonry work.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS -
ANY APPROVED MANUFACTURER
A. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02
MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I white color.
B. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91, Type N.
C. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144, standard masonry type.
D. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S
E. Quicklime: ASTM C5, non-hydraulic type.
F. Water: Clean and potable.
G. Bonding Agent:
February 28, 2003
SECTION 04100-3 MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
2.03 MORTAR COLOR
A. White. Coordinate with the Architect for pointing mortar mix
and aggregate. No color dyes allowed.
2.04 MORTAR MIXES
A. Mortar For Load Bearing Walls and Partitions: ASTM C270, Type N
using the property method utilizing the proportion method to
achieve 1,250 psi.
2.05 MORTAR MIXING
A. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in accordance with ASTM C270
in quantities needed for immediate use.
B. Maintain sand uniformly damp immediately before the mixing
process.
C. Add admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Provide uniformity of mix and coloration.
D. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point
of mortar.
E. If water is lost by evaporation, re-temper only within two hours
of mixing.
F. Use mortar within two hours after mixing at temperatures of 80
degrees F (26 degrees C), or two-and-one-half hours at
temperatures under 50 degrees F 10 degrees C).
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Clean any wet units before placing. Provide full mortar coverage
of vertical and horizontal face of joints. Step back any
unfinished work for joining with continued work. Use no warped
spotted cracked or broken units, except where restoration of a
surface requires reuse of existing.
B. Work grout into masonry cores and cavities to eliminate voids
February 28, 2003
SECTION 04100-4 MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
C. Tolerances vertical: within 1/8” in five (5) feet
horizontal: within 1/4 inch for length of wall
D. Do not displace reinforcement while placing grout.
E. Remove excess mortar from grout spaces.
F. On completion of work, take out defective joints in exposed
masonry work, fill with mortar and retool.
3.02 PROTECTION: Cover over all unfinished Work at night against the
elements with plastic sheet, building paper, heavy canvas or
other material approved by Architect.
3.03 CLEANING: Clean all Work thoroughly from top, downward using
fiber brushes. Remove mortar stains with cleaning compound,
rinsing thoroughly with water. All finished surfaces shall be
unmarred.
3.04 CLEAN UP-Per General Conditions.
END OF SECTION 04100
February 28, 2003
SECTION 04100-5 MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
Section 04270
Glass Unit Masonry
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Summary
Install glass block in toilet windows only.
A.
B.
Section Includes Glass
Block Units, hollow
Integral Joint Reinforcement
C.
Mortar 1.2
Related Sections
A.
Steel Channels
B.
Sills, lintels, jambs
C.
Sealant, (caulk)
D.
Packing Material
1.3 References
A.
ASTM A82, Spec. for Cold Drawn Steel Wire
B.
ASTM A153–Class B-2, Spec. Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on
Iron and Steel Hardware
C.
ASTM C144, Spec. for Aggregate for Masonry (Canada A179-94)
D.
ASTM C150, Spec. for Portland Cement (Canada CAN/CSA-A5-93)
E.
ASTM E163, Fire Test of Window Assemblies (equivalent
to UL® 9 and CAN 4 - S106 - M80)
F.
ASTM C207, Spec. for Hydrated Lime for Masonry
Purposes (Canada same)
G.
ASTM C270, Spec. for Mortar for Unit Masonry (Canada A179-94)
February 28, 2003
04270 - 1
Glass Masonry Assemblies
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
H.
ASTM D1187, Type II – Spec. for Asphalt-Base Emulsions
(for Metal Surfaces)
I.
ASTM D1227, Type III, Class I – Spec. for Emulsified
Asphalt (for Porous Surfaces)
1.4 System Description
A.
Knowledge of the following basic information is
essential for proper installation of Glass Block
units:
1.
Glass block panels shall not be designed to
support structural loads.
2.
Maximum deflection of structural members
supporting glass block panels shall not exceed
L/600.
3.
Sills of all panels must be painted with a heavy
coat of asphalt emulsion and must dry for two
hours before first mortar bed is placed.
4.
Provision for expansion and movement must be made
at jambs and heads of all panels. Mortar must not
bridge expansion spaces.
5.
Mortar should be mixed and applied in accordance
with the recommendations of Pittsburgh Corning
Corporation. See Materials.
6.
Use only wooden or rubber tipped tools when
tapping glass block in place.
7.
All exterior Pittsburgh Corning Glass Block
panels must be well caulked to prevent
penetration of excessive moisture.
8.
Freshly mixed mortar may cause skin irritation.
Avoid direct contact where possible and wash
exposed skin areas promptly with water. If any
mortar gets into the eyes, rinse immediately with
water and get prompt medical attention.
1.5 Submittals
A.
A. Product Data
1.
Submit two (2) copies of manufacturer’s
literature and two (2) copies of manufacturer’s
installation instructions.
B.
Samples
February 28, 2003
04270 - 2
Glass Masonry Assemblies
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
1.
2.
C.
Submit two (2) glass block units of each type
specified showing size, color, design, and
pattern of faces.
Submit representative samples of panel
reinforcing, panel anchors, expansion strips, and
sealant.
Test Reports
1.
Fire Tests
a.
Submit documents verifying glass block units
are classified for a 3/4, 1 or 1-1/2-hour fire
exposure according to ASTM E163, UL® of Canada
CAN 4-S106-M80 or UL® 9 "Fire Tests of Window
Assemblies." All such glass block unit cartons
shall carry appropriate UL® labels.
1.6 Storage and Protection
A.
Store unopened cartons of glass block in a clean,
cool, dry area.
B.
Protect opened cartons of glass block against
windblown rain or water run-off with tarpaulins or
plastic covering.
1.7 Project/Site Conditions
A. Do not install glass block units when temperature is
40°F (4°C) and falling. Maintain the temperature of
glass unit masonry above 40°F (4°C) for the first 48
hours after construction.
1.8 Warranty
A.
Limited 5-year warranty on Glass Block units. Submit
warranty statement.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
A.
Pittsburgh Corning Corporation.
1.
Products of other manufacturers proposed as
equivalent quality must be submitted through the
February 28, 2003
04270 - 3
Glass Masonry Assemblies
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
2.
3.
bidding contractors for written approval of the
architect ten days prior to the bid date.
Supporting technical data, samples, published
specifications and the like must be submitted for
comparison.
Contractor shall warrant that proposed
substitutions, if accepted, will provide
performance equivalent to the materials specified
herein.
2.2 Glass Block Units
A.
Glass block units, nominally 8 inch x 8 inch x 4 inch
thick, shall be partially evacuated hollow units made
of clear, colorless glass with a polyvinyl butyral edge
coating. Pattern type: Decora by Pittsburgh Corning
2.3 Accessories
A.
Panel Reinforcing: two parallel 9-gauge wires either 15/8 inch or 2 inch on-center with electrically buttwelded cross-wires spaced at regular intervals, hotdipped galvanized after welding, by Pittsburgh Corning
Corporation.
B.
Expansion Strips: made of polyethylene foam with a
thickness of 3/8 inch, by Pittsburgh Corning
Corporation.
C.
Panel Anchors: 20 gauge perforated steel strips 24
inches long by 1-3/4 inches wide, hot-dipped
galvanized after perforation, by Pittsburgh Corning
Corporation.
D.
Asphalt Emulsion: a water-based asphalt emulsion, by
Karnak Chemical Corp. (Karnak 100, 1-800-526-4236), or
equal.
E.
Sealant: non-staining, waterproof mastic, silicone.
F.
Backer Rods: polyethylene foam, neoprene, fibrous
glass or equal as approved by sealant manufacturer.
February 28, 2003
04270 - 4
Glass Masonry Assemblies
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
2.4 Mortar Materials
A.
Mortar: Type S in accordance with ASTM C270. Mortar
shall be 1 part Portland Cement, 1/2 part lime, and sand
equal to 2-1/4 to 3 times the amount of cementitious
material (cement plus lime), all measures by volume.
(For exterior glass block panels, an integral type
waterproofer should be added to the mortar mix. No
antifreeze compounds or accelerators allowed.)
1.
Portland Cement: Type 1 in accordance with ASTM
C150. If a waterproof Portland Cement is used,
the integral type waterproofer shall be omitted.
(Masonry Cement is not recommended.) Color: To
match brick mortar.
2.
Lime: Type S, in accordance with ASTM C207. Shall
be a high-calcium lime, or a pressure-hydrated
dolomitic lime, provided that not less than 92% of
all the active ingredients are completely hydrated.
3.
Sand: A clean, white quartzite or silica type,
essentially free of iron compounds and sulfates
for thin joints, in accordance with ASTM C144,
not less than 100% passing a No. 8 sieve.
4.
Integral Type Water-Repellent: Stearate type by
Sonneborn Building Products (Hydrocide Powder, 1800-243-6739), or equal. Note: Add hydrocide powder
to dry mortar mix. Do not add powder to wet mortar
mix.
5.
External Type Waterproofer: Water based silane
sealer type by Harris Specialty Chemicals, Inc.
(ENVIROSEAL™ 20, 1-800-327-1570). Note: Remove
excess sealer from glass surfaces soon after
application.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Preparation
A.
Verify that channels have been provided at head and
jambs for the purpose of providing panel support
within the opening.
B.
Mix all mortar components to a consistency that is
drier than mortar for ordinary masonry. Retempering
February 28, 2003
04270 - 5
Glass Masonry Assemblies
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
the mortar after it has taken its initial set shall
not be permitted. Do not use antifreeze compounds or
accelerators.
C.
Freshly mixed mortar may create skin irritation. Avoid
direct contact where possible and wash exposed skin
areas promptly with water. If any mortar gets into the
eyes, rinse immediately with water and get prompt
medical attention.
3.2 Installation
A.
Cover sill area with a heavy coat of asphalt emulsion.
Allow emulsion to dry at least 2 hours before placing
mortar.
B.
Where panel anchors are used at jambs and heads in lieu
of channel or chase surrounds, install panel anchors in
the same joints (16 inches o.c. maximum) where panel
reinforcing will be laid. EXCEPT THAT, at panel
corners, anchors shall be placed in each mortar joint,
both at the jamb and head, 24 inches on each side of
the corner. Install panel anchors across head joint
spaced 16 inches o.c. maximum.
C.
Adhere expansion strips to jambs and head. Make certain
expansion strip extends to sill and covers leg of panel
anchor which is attached to jamb and head.
D.
Set a full mortar bed joint, applied to sill.
E.
Set lower course of block. Maintain a uniform joint
width of 1/4 to 3/8 inch plus or minus 1/8 inch. All
mortar joints must be full and not furrowed. Steel
tools must not be used to tap blocks into position.
(Place a rubber crutch tip on end of trowel to tap
block into position.) Do not realign, tap, or
otherwise move block after initial placement.
F.
Install panel reinforcing every 16" o.c. maximum in the
horizontal mortar joint, and in joints immediately above
and below all openings within panels. Run reinforcing
continuously from end to end of panels. Lap reinforcing
not less than 6 inches whenever it is necessary to use
more than one length. NOTE; In corrosive atmospheres,
(i.e. saline air, chlorine air,
February 28, 2003
04270 - 6
Glass Masonry Assemblies
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
etc.), the use of stainless steel channels, reinforcing
and panel anchors should be considered.
G.
Place lower half of mortar in bed joint. Do not
furrow. Press panel reinforcing into place. Cover
panel reinforcing with upper half of mortar bed and
trowel smooth. Do not furrow.
H.
Place full mortar bed for joints not requiring panel
reinforcing – do not furrow. Maintain uniform joint
width.
I.
Set succeeding courses of block. Space at head of
panel and jambs must remain free of mortar for
caulking with sealant.
J.
Use only wooden or rubber tipped tools when tapping
glass blocks in place.
K.
Strike joints smooth while mortar is still plastic and
before final set. Remove surplus mortar from faces of
glass blocks and wipe dry. (See Section 3.03.) Tool
joints smooth and concave, before mortar takes final
set. At this time remove and clean out all excess mortar
from jamb, head and other locations.
L.
After final mortar set (approximately 24 hours),
install packing tightly between glass block panel and
jamb and head construction. Leave space for sealing.
M.
Apply sealant evenly to the full depth of recesses as
indicated on the drawings and in accordance with the
manufacturer’s application manual and instructions.
N.
All exterior glass block panels shall be well sealed
to prevent water entry.
3.3 Cleaning
A.
Remove surplus mortar from the faces of the glass block
at the time joints are struck or tooled. Mortar should
be removed while it is still plastic using a clean, wet
sponge or an ordinary household scrub brush having stiff
bristles.
February 28, 2003
04270 - 7
Glass Masonry Assemblies
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
B.
Do not use harsh cleaners, acids (of any strength),
abrasives, or alkaline materials while cleaning glass
block. Never use a wire brush to remove mortar from glass
block surfaces.
C.
Final mortar removal is accomplished with a clean, wet
sponge or cloth. Rinse sponge or cloth frequently in clean
water to remove abrasive particles that could scratch
glass surfaces. Allow any remaining film on the block to
dry to a powder.
D.
After all organic sealants, caulking, etc., have been
applied, remove excess caulking materials with commercial
solvents such as xylene, toluene, mineral spirits, or
naptha and follow with normal wash and rinse. Be careful
not to damage caulking by overgenerous application of
strong solvents. Comply with solvent manufacturer’s
directions on label for toxicity and flammability
warnings.
E.
Final cleaning of glass block panels is accomplished after
they are completely installed. Wait until panels are not
exposed to direct sunlight. Start at the top of the panel
and wash with generous amounts of clean water. Dry all
water from the glass block surface. Change cloth
frequently to eliminate dried mortar particles or
aggregate that could scratch the glass surface. To remove
the dry powder from the glass surfaces, use a clean, dry,
soft cloth. For stubborn or hard to remove powder or
stains, the use of an "extra fine" steel wool (grades 000
or 0000) is suggested. Try this first in an unobtrusive
area.
END OF SECTION
February 28, 2003
04270 - 8
Glass Masonry Assemblies
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 04300
UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM PART
1
GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Exterior veneer masonry.
B.
Reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories.
1.02 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION A.
Placement of window anchors. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Section 01400 - Quality Control: Testing laboratory services.
Section 04100 - Mortar and Masonry Grout: Mortar and grout.
Section 04500 - Masonry Restoration and Cleaning.
Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Loose steel lintels, and
fabricated steel items.
Section 07212 - Rigid Insulation:Insulation for cavity spaces.
Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Cap flashings
over masonry work and placement of reglets for flashings.
Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Rod and sealant at control and
expansion joints.
1.04 REFERENCES
A.
ACI 530 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures.
B.
ACI 530.1 - Specifications For Masonry Structures.
C.
ASTM A82 - Cold-Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement.
D.
ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and
Steel Products.
E.
ASTM
A167
Stainless
and
Heat-Resisting
Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
F.
ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated, (Galvanized) by the HotDip Process.
G.
ASTM A580 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Wire.
H.
ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement.
I.
ASTM A641 - Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire.
February 28, 2003
04300 - 1
Unit Masonry System
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Q.
R.
S.
ASTM B370 - Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction.
ASTM C55 - Concrete Building Brick.
ASTM C62 - Building Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay
or Shale).
ASTM C73 - Calcium Silicate Face Brick (Sand-Lime Brick) .
ASTM C90 - Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units.
ASTM C129 - Non-Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units.
ASTM C216 - Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay
or Shale) .
ASTM C652 - Hollow Brick (Hollow Masonry Units Made From Clay
or Shale).
IMIAC - International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council:
Recommended Practices and Guide Specification for Cold
Weather Masonry Construction.
UL - Fire Resistance Directory.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B.
Product Data: Provide data for masonry units and fabricated
wire reinforcement.
C.
Samples: Submit four samples of face brick, units to
illustrate color, texture and extremes of color range.
D.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet
or exceed specified requirements.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform Work in accordance with ACI 530 and ACI 530.1.
B.
Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.07 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products
specified in this section with minimum three years documented
experience.
1.08 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to applicable code for requirements for fire rated
masonry construction.
1.09 MOCKUP
A.
Provide mockup of composite masonry under provisions of
Section 01400.
B.
Construct a masonry wall into a panel sized 4 feet long by 4
feet high, which includes mortar and accessories
C.
Locate where directed.
D.
Mockup may not remain as part of the Work.
February 28, 2003
04300 - 2
Unit Masonry System
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
1.10 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A.
Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section.
1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under
provisions of Section 01600.
B.
Accept units on site. Inspect for damage.
1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum
40 degrees F 5 degrees C prior to, during, and 48 hours after
completion of masonry work.
B.
Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to maximum
90 degrees F (32 degrees C) prior to, during, and 48 hours
after completion of masonry work.
1.13 COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01300.
B.
Coordinate the masonry work with veneer,
installation of window anchors.
and
1.14 EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 01700.
B.
Provide 50 of each size, color, and type of masonry units.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS - BRICK UNITS
A.
IXL - #128 Governor’s Blend Smooth
Brick Selections LTD
311 E. Nakoma
San Antonio, Texas 78216
210-525-1146
2.02 BRICK UNITS
A.
Face Brick: 128 Governor’s Blend Smooth finish. 2.03
REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE
A.
Wall Ties: See Drawing for material and placement. 2.04
MORTAR AND GROUT
A.
Mortar and Grout: As specified in Section 04100.
February 28, 2003
04300 - 3
Unit Masonry System
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
2.05 FLASHINGS
A.
Copper/Kraft Paper Flashings: 3 oz/sq ft 915 g/sq m) sheet
copper bonded to fiber reinforced asphalt treated Kraft paper;
manufactured by York or equal.
B.
Lap Sealant: Butyl type as specified in Section 07900.
2.06 ACCESSORIES
A.
Preformed Control Joints: Neoprene material. Provide
with corner and tee accessories, cement fused joints.
B.
Joint Filler: Closed cell polyurethane; oversized 50
percent to joint width; self expanding.
C.
Building Paper: No. 30 asphalt saturated felt.
D.
Nailing Strips:
Softwood, preservative treated for
moisture resistance, dovetail shape, sized to masonry
joints.
E.
Weeps: Honeycomb plastic joint inserts.
F.
Cavity Vents: Molded polyvinyl chloride grilles.
G.
Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or
adjacent materials.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
B.
C.
Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to
receive work.
Verify items provided by other sections of work are properly
sized and located.
Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready
for roughing into masonry work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied to
other sections.
B.
Provide temporary bracing during installation of
masonry work. Maintain in place until building
structure provides permanent bracing.
3.03 COURSING
A.
Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from
displacement.
B.
Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical
and horizontal joints of uniform thickness.
C.
Brick Units:
1.
Bond: Running.
2.
Coursing: To work with lintel dimensions to whole brick.
3.
Mortar Joints: Concave.
February 28, 2003
04300 - 4
Unit Masonry System
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
3.04 PLACING AND BONDING
A.
Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with
full head joints, uniformly jointed with other work.
B.
Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on
head and bed joints.
C.
Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar
joints are not permitted.
D.
Remove excess mortar as work progresses.
E.
Interlock intersections and external corners.
F.
Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved
initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and
replace.
G.
Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools
to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges. Prevent broken
masonry unit corners or edges.
H.
Isolate masonry partitions from vertical structural framing
members with a control joint.
I.
Isolate top joint of masonry partitions from horizontal
structural
framing
members
and
slabs
or
decks
with
compressible joint filler.
3.05 WEEPS
A. Install weeps in veneer at 24 inches (600 mm) oc horizontally
above through-wall flashing, above shelf angles and lintels,
and at bottom of walls.
3.06 CAVITY WALL
A.
Do not permit mortar to drop or accumulate into cavity air
space or to plug weeps.
3.07 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - MASONRY VENEER
A.
Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches (400 mm) oc
.
B.
Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second
horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend
minimum 16 inches (400 mm) each side of opening.
C.
Place joint reinforcement continuous in first and
second joint below top of walls.
D.
Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches (150 mm).
E.
Secure wall ties to stud framed back-up and embed into
masonry veneer at maximum 16 inches (400 mm) oc vertically
and 36 inches (900 mm) oc horizontally. Place at maximum 3
inches (75 mm) oc each way around perimeter of openings,
within 12 inches (300 mm) of openings.
F.
Reinforce stack bonded unit joint corners and intersections
with strap anchors 16 inches (400 mm) oc.
February 28, 2003
04300 - 5
Unit Masonry System
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
3.08 MASONRY FLASHINGS
A.
Extend flashings horizontally at foundation walls, above
ledge or shelf angles and lintels, and at bottom of walls.
B.
Turn flashing up minimum 8 inches (200 mm) and seal to
sheathing over wood stud framed back-up.
C.
Lap end joints minimum 6 inches (150 mm) and seal watertight.
D.
Turn flashing, fold, and seal at corners, bends, and
interruptions.
3.09 LINTELS
A.
Install loose steel lintels over openings.
B.
Maintain minimum 6 inch (150 mm) bearing on each side of
opening.
3.10 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
A.
Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through
control and expansion joints.
B.
Install preformed control joint device in continuous
lengths. Seal butt and corner joints in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Size control joint in accordance with Section 07900 for
sealant performance.
D.
Form expansion joint as detailed.
3.11 BUILT-IN WORK
A.
B.
C.
As work progresses, install doors and glazed frames, window
frames, wood nailing strips, anchor bolts, plates, and other items
to be built-in the work and furnished by other sections.
Install built-in items plumb and level.
Do not build in organic materials subject to deterioration.
3.12 TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation
From Alignment
of
Columns:
Pilasters: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
B.
Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit:1/16 inch (1 . 6
mm) .
C.
Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 ft (6
mm/3 m) and 1/2 inch in 20 ft (13 mm/6 m) or more.
D.
Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch (6 mm) per story noncumulative; 1/2 inch (13 mm) in two stories or more.
February 28, 2003
04300 - 6
Unit Masonry System
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
E.
F.
G.
Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 ft (3
mm/m) and 1/4 inch in 10 ft (6 mm/3 m) ; 1/2 inch in 30 ft (13
mm/9 m) .
Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 ft ( 3
mm/m) .
Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4
inch (6 mm).
3.13 CUTTING AND FITTING
A.
Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit, sleeves, and
grounds.
Coordinate with other sections of work to
provide correct size, shape, and location.
B.
Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not
indicated or where appearance or strength of masonry work may
be impaired.
3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Field inspection and testing will be performed under
provisions of Section 01400.
B.
Inspect and test all masonry work.
3.15 CLEANING
A.
Clean work under provisions of 01700.
B.
Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses.
C.
Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.
D.
Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.
E.
Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.
3.16 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A.
Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500.
B.
Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at
exposed external corners which may be damaged by construction
activities.
3.17 SCHEDULES
A. Exterior Wall: Composite masonry with an exterior wythe of "Dark
Red" face brick veneer, bonded with wire reinforcement to inner
wood Stud of interior facing wall with 2 inch (50 mm) space
for insulation.
END OF SECTION
0430
February 28, 2003
04300 - 7
Unit Masonry System
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 04853
MORTAR-PLACED STONE ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2
A.
Section includes cut stone veneer at exterior walls; metal
anchors and accessories; and mortar and joint pointing.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
Section 04100 - Masonry Mortar and Grout: Bedding
and pointing mortar.
2.
Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Product
requirements for metal fabricated items for
building into stone masonry for placement by this
section.
3.
Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim:
Product requirements for sheet metal coping and
sill flashings for placement by this section.
4.
Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Sealant for
perimeter, control, and expansion joints.
REFERENCES
A.
American Society for Testing and Materials:
1.
ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon
Structural Steel.
2.
ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc
Coating (Hot-Dip)
on Iron and Steel Hardware.
3.
ASTM A580/A580M - Standard Specification for
Stainless Steel Wire.
4.
ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Austenitic
Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat
Bar.
5.
ASTM C503 - Standard Specification for Marble
Dimension Stone (Exterior).
6.
ASTM C568 - Standard Specification for Limestone
Dimension Stone.
7.
ASTM C615 - Standard Specification for Granite
Dimension Stone.
B.
The Masonry Society:
February 28, 2003
04853 - 1
Mortar-Placed Stone
Assemblies
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
1.
TMS MSJC - Building Code for Masonry Structures
(ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402), Specification for
Masonry Structures (ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602) and
Commentaries .
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A.
Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal
procedures.
B.
Product Data: Submit data on stone units, mortar
products, reinforcement, wall tiles, anchors,
flashings and.
C.
Samples:
1.
Submit two stone samples illustrating minimum and
maximum stone sizes, general color range and texture,
and markings.
2.
Submit mortar color samples.
1.4 QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products
specified in this section with minimum three years documented
experience.
B.
Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this
section with minimum three years documented experience.
1.5 MOCKUP
A.
B.
Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Mockup
requirements.
Construct stone and brick wall mockup, four feet long
by four feet wide, including stone, reinforcing, wall ties,
mortar, sill and head flashings, corner condition.
C.
Locate where directed by Architect/Engineer.
D.
Remove mockup when directed by Architect/Engineer.
February 28, 2003
04853 - 2
Mortar-Placed Stone
Assemblies
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
1.6 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A.
Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Preinstallation meeting.
B.
Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this
section.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Product storage and
handling requirements.
B.
Protect stone from discoloration during storage on site.
C.
Provide ventilation to prevent condensation from
forming on stone.
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
B.
Hot and Cold Weather Requirements: TMS MSJC
Specification.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
COMPONENTS
A.
Limestone: Lueders limestone for the Texas Hill
Country
B.
Surface Texture: Smooth.
C.
Color: Light Gray.
D.
Mortar and Grout: As specified in Section 04100 2.2
ACCESSORIES
A.
Horizontal Joint Reinforcement: type; stainless steel wire
conforming to ASTM A580/A580M Type 304, see drawings for
details.
B.
Setting Buttons and Shims: Lead.
February 28, 2003
04853 - 3
Mortar-Placed Stone
Assemblies
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
C.
Through-wall Flashings: Sheet copper; 16 oz/sq ft.
D.
Weeps: See section 04300.
E.
Cleaning Solution: Non-acid, not harmful to stone, joint
materials, or adjacent surfaces.
2.3 FABRICATION
A.
Bed and Joint Surfaces: Sawn or cut full square at least twothirds of unit thickness back from face; remainder of surface
under square not more than 1 inch in 12 inches.
B.
Backs: Sawn.
C.
Slope exposed top surfaces of stone and horizontal sill
surfaces for shedding water.
D.
Cut drip slot
more than 1/2
Size slot not
deep for full
in bottom surface of work Projecting
inch over window frame. and door frame.
less than 3/8 inch wide and 1/4 inch
width of Projection.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements:
Coordination and project conditions.
B.
Verify support work and site conditions are ready to
receive work of this section.
C.
Verify items built-in under other sections are
properly located and sized.
3.2 PREPARATION
A.
Establish lines, levels, and coursing. Protect from
disturbance.
B.
Coat back cavity surfaces with dampproofing prior to
setting. Allow coating to cure.
C.
Clean sawn surfaces of rust stains and iron particles.
February 28, 2003
04853 - 4
Mortar-Placed Stone
Assemblies
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
3.3 INSTALLATION
A.
Install flashings of longest practical length and seal
watertight to back-up. Lap end joints minimum 6 inches and
seal watertight.
B.
Size stone units to fit opening dimensions and
perimeter conditions.
C.
Wet absorptive stone in preparation for placement to
minimize moisture suction from mortar.
D.
Install setting bed and pointing mortar in accordance with
Section 04100.
E.
Fill dowel holes in stone units with mortar.
F.
Set stone in full mortar setting bed to fully support stone
over bearing surface. Use setting buttons or shims to
maintain correct joint width.
G.
Reinforcement And Anchorage: As per Section 04300 and
drawings.
H.
Joints:
1.
Rake out mortar joints 5/8 to 3/4 inch and brush joints
clean to accommodate pointing mortar. Fill joints with
pointing mortar.
2.
Pack mortar into joints and work into voids.
Neatly tool surface to concave joint.
3.
At joints to be sealed, clean mortar out of joint
before mortar sets. Brush joints clean.
4.
Seal joints indicated with sealant. Perform sealant
work in accordance with requirements of Section 07900.
I.
Accessories:
1.
Install cavity vents at top of each cavity space, below
shelf angles, at spacing of 24” inches on center,
horizontally.
2.
Install weeps in vertical stone joints at 24” inches on
center, horizontally; immediately above horizontal
flashings, above shelf angles and supports, at bottom of
walls. Do not permit mortar accumulation in cavity
space.
February 28, 2003
04853 - 5
Mortar-Placed Stone
Assemblies
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Testing and
Inspection Services 01700 - Execution Requirements:
Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
3.5 CLEANING
A.
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Final
cleaning.
B.
Remove excess mortar as work progresses, and upon
completion of work.
C.
Clean soiled surfaces with non-acid cleaning solution.
D.
Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. 3.6
PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A.
B.
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Protecting
installed construction.
During temporary storage on site, at end of working day,
and during rainy weather, cover stone work exposed to
weather with non-staining waterproof coverings, securely
anchored.
END OF SECTION
February 28, 2003
04853 - 6
Mortar-Placed Stone
Assemblies
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 05500
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 Related Documents
A.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A.
This section includes the following metal fabrications:
1.
Shelf and relieving angles
1.03 Definitions
A.
For all shelf and relief angles: Yield Point, min. PSI
50,000
Tensile Strength, min. PSI 70,000
1.04 System performance Requirements
A.
Structural Performance of Shelf and relief angles are based on
the assumption that the angles are attached to the structural
system of the building at third points and that no anchor is
separated grater than eight and one half feet form the next
anchor. Any deviation from this maximum span must be reported
to the architect prior to the continuation of the
construction.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
General - Submit the following in accordance with
Conditions of Contract and Specification Section 01300.
B.
Product date for products used in miscellaneous metal
fabrications, including paint products and grout.
C.
Shop drawings detailing fabrication and erection of each
metal fabrication indicated. Include plans, elevations,
sections, and details of metal fabrications and their
connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide
templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation
under other sections.
D.
Samples representative of materials and finished products as
may be required by Architect.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: Firms experienced in successfully
producing metal fabrications similar to that indicated for
this Project, with sufficient production
February 28, 2003
05500 - 1
Metal Fabrications
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
capacity to produce required units without causing delay in the
Work.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: Check actual locations of walls and other
construction to which metal fabrications must fit, by accurate
field measurements before fabrication; show recorded
measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication
schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work.
1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A.
Sequence and coordinate installation of steel supports with
the contractor.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 FERROUS METALS
A.
Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view
upon completion of the Work, provide materials selected for
their surface flatness, smoothness, and freedom from surface
blemishes. Do not use materials whose exposed surfaces exhibit
pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names,
roughness, and, for steel sheet, variations in flatness
exceeding those permitted by reference standards for stretcherlevel sheet.
B. C. D.
E.
F.
S
tSteel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36.
aGalvanizing: Conform to ASTM A123
iTouch-up for galvanized surfaces:
30% tin, 30% zinc,
nlead and flux
l
ess steel bolts: Stud: ASTM A276 W/ chemical composition of AISI
304 or 316, Nut ASTM F594 and meeting the requirements of ANSI
B18.2.2 to conform to stud material, and washer AISI 304 or 316,
ASTM A240 to conform to stud material.
Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select in accordance with AWS
specifications for the metal alloy to be welded.
2.02 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
Form metal fabrications from materials of size, thickness, and
shapes indicated but not less than that needed to comply with
performance requirements indicated. Work to dimensions indicated
or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of
fabrication and support. Use type of materials indicated or
specified for various components of each metal fabrication.
February 28, 2003
05500 - 2
Metal Fabrications
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Allow for thermal movement resulting from the maximum change
(range) in ambient temperature in the design, fabrication and
installation of installed metal assemblies to prevent
buckling, opening up of joints or overstressing of welds and
fasteners. Base design calculations on actual surface
temperatures of metals during both maximum daytime solar heat
gain and nighttime sky heat loss.
Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove all
burrs.
Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch,
unless otherwise indicated. Form bent metal corners to
smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or
otherwise impairing work.
Provide the type of anchorage indicated. Coordinate with
supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices
to provide adequate support for intended use.
Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent
possible, in order to minimize field splicing and assembly.
Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling.
Use connections that maintain structural integrity of joined
pieces. Mark units clearly for reassembly and coordinated
installation.
2.03 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A.
Galvanizing: Hot dipped zinc coating in compliance with: ASTMA-153 for iron and steel hardware; ASTM-A-123 for iron and
steel of uncoated rolled, pressed or forged shapes, plates,
bars and strip 0.0299 inch thick and heavier.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION:
A.
B.
Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to
preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, where
possible. Do not delay job progress; allow for trimming and
fitting, where taking field measurements before fabrication
might delay work.
Furnish and coordinate anchors, setting drawings, diagrams,
templates and instructions for installation of anchors;
including concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts, etc. which
are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction.
Coordinate delivery of such items to project site.
February 28, 2003
05500 - 3
Metal Fabrications
3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchoring
devices and fasteners where necessary for securing
miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place
construction; include threaded fasteners for masonry and
concrete inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts, wood
screws and other connectors as required.
B.
Cutting, Fitting and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling and
fitting required for installation of miscellaneous metal
fabrications. Set metal fabrication accurately in location,
alignment and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb,
true and free of rack; and measured from established lines and
levels.
C.
Provide temporary bracing or anchoring in form work for
items that are to be built into concrete, masonry or similar
construction.
D.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual,
shielded metal-arc welding for the appearance and quality of
welds made, methods used in correcting metal work, and the
following:
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion,
and develop strength and corrosion resistance of
the base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove welding flux immediately.
At exposed connections blend and finish exposed
welds smoothly so that no roughness shows, and
contour welded surfaces to match those adjacent.
3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Touch-Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field
welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint,
and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touch-up of
field painted surfaces. Apply by brush or spray to provide a
minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
B.
For galvanized surfaces clean welds, bolted connections and
abraded areas and apply galvanizing repair paint to comply
with ASTM A 780.
END SECTION
February 28, 2003
05500 - 4
Metal Fabrications
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 06001
CARPENTRY WORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Rough and finish carpentry.
B. Interior finish carpentry.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 08210: Wood Doors
B. Section 08710: Hardware
C. Section 09900: Painting and Finishing 1.03
REFERENCES
A. MIL-L-1914-C Lumber and Plywood, Fire Retardant Treated
B. PS 1 Construction and Industrial Plywood
C. PS 20 American Softwood Lumber Standard
D. PS 51 Hardwood and Decorative Plywood
E. PS 58 Basic Hardwood
F. NFPA National Design Specification for Wood Construction
G. AWI Architectural Quality Standards 1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Rough Carpentry Lumber: Visible grade stamp, of agency certified
by National Forest Products Association (NFPA).
B. Fabricate cabinetwork and site made finish carpentry items
accordance
with
recommendations
of
Quality
Standards
Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI).
in
of
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.Submit shop drawings for all trim work, doors and wood flooring
under provisions of Section 01300.
February 28, 2003
SECTION 06001-1
CARPENTRY WORK
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
B. Submit two (2) full size samples of all molding profiles under
provisions of Section 01300.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver shop fabricated carpentry items until site
conditions are adequate to receive the work. Protect items from
weather while in transit.
B. Store indoors, in ventilated areas with a constant, minimum
temperature of 60 degrees F (16 degrees C), maximum relative
humidity of 25 to 55 percent.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 ROUGH CARPENTRY MATERIALS
A. Lumber: PS 20; pressure treated Douglas Fir or Yellow Pine graded
in accordance with established grading rules and grade marked;
construction grade, sized to match dimensions of any historic
element or member being replaced.
Maximum moisture content of 10 to 15 percent; of following
grades:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Non-structural Light Framing: utility grade
Studding: No. 3; stud grade
Structural Light Framing: construction grade 1200 f
Structural Joists and Planks : select structural No. 1
grade.
5. Posts and Timbers: select structural No. 1 grade.
B. Douglas Fir Plywood: Sheathing grade.
C. Softwood Plywood: PS 1; sheathing grade.
D. Poplar Plywood: Standard sheathing grade; exterior
waterproof, interior moisture resistant type.
E. Nails, Spikes and Staples: Galvanized for exterior locations,
high humidity locations and treated wood; plain finish for other
interior locations; size and type to suit application.
F. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins and Screws: Medium carbon steel;
sized to suit application galvanized for exterior locations, high
humidity locations and treated wood; plain finish for other
interior locations.
February 28, 2003
SECTION 06001-2
CARPENTRY WORK
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
G. Fasteners: Expansion shield and lag bolt type for anchorage to
solid masonry or concrete.
2.02 FINISH CARPENTRY MATERIALS
A. Softwood Lumber: PS 20; graded in accordance with the
requirements of AWI; maximum moisture content of 10 to 15
percent (all exterior wood shall be pressure treated) of
following species and grades:
Item
Species
Fascia Boards and trim
Select
Shelf edges and supports
Select
Door and glazed light frames
Select
Quality
Yellow Pine
No. 1
Fir
No. 1
Edge Grain Fir No. 1
B. Nails Size and Type to suit application.
C. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags Pins and Screws: Size and type to
suit application, matching finish in
exposed locations.
2.03 WOOD TREATMENT
A. Wood Preservative: 3-10D0-2-Propynyl Butyl Carbamate (IPBC).
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 WOOD PREPARATION
A. Shop pressure treat wood materials for exterior use and
deliver to site ready for installation.
B. Brush apply one coat of preservative treatment on wood in
contact with cementitious materials and roofing and related
metal flashings. Apply preservative treatment in accordance
with manufacturer's recommendations. Ensure site-sawn ends are
similarly treated. Allow preservative to cure prior to erecting
members.
C. Ensure finish carpentry materials requiring paint finish do not
exceed 10 to 15 percent moisture content before applying wood
preservative treatment.
February 28, 2003
SECTION 06001-3
CARPENTRY WORK
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas 3.02
FRAMING, FURRING, AND STRIPPING
A. Erect wood framing, furring, stripping and nailing members true to
lines and levels. Do not deviate from true alignment more than 1/4
inch.
B. Space members at 16 inches on centers.
C. Construct members of continuous pieces of longest possible lengths.
D. Provide double joist headers at joist ends and around floor and
ceiling openings.
E. Where complete replacement is required, coordinate installation of
wood joists; save all joists for the wood.
3.03 SHEATHING AND SUBFLOORING
A. Place SUB-FLOORING with end joints staggered. Secure sheets
over firm bearing. Maintain surface flatness of maximum 1/8
inch in 10 ft or more.
3.04 SHOP FABRICATION
A. Fabricate finish carpentry items in accordance with AWI Custom
Grade Standards. Shop fabricate items where possible.
B. Use exposed fastening devices or nails only when
unavoidable.
C. Shop assemble finish carpentry items for delivery to site in sizes
easily handled and to ensure passage through building openings.
3.05 PREPARATION OF FINISH CARPENTRY ITEMS FOR FINISHING
A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws. Apply wood filler
in exposed nail and screw indentations and leave ready to receive
site applied finishes. On items to receive transparent finishes, use
wood filler which matches surrounding surfaces and of types
recommended for applied finishes.
B. Seal and varnish concealed and semi-concealed surfaces. Brush
apply only.
C. Preservative treat surfaces in contact with cementitious
materials.
February 28, 2003
SECTION 06001-4
CARPENTRY WORK
3.06 SCHEDULE
A. Rough Carpentry Work:
1.
New wall construction, blocking and curbing,
structural floor construction, decking and sub-floors attic framing
and rough door openings.
2.
Preservative treatment of wood members where exposed to the
to the exterior or in contact with cementitious materials.
B. Interior Finish Carpentry Work:
1. New doors and trim.
2. New windows and trim.
3. Interior decorative trim.
END OF SECTION 0600
February 28, 2003
SECTION 06001-5
CARPENTRY WORK
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 06112
FRAMING AND SHEATHING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A.
Section includes structural wall, and roof framing; built-up
structural, wall, and roof sheathing; sill gaskets and
flashings; preservative treatment of wood; miscellaneous
framing and sheathing; telephone and electrical panel back
boards.
1.2 REFERENCES
A.
American National Standards Institute:
1.
ANSI A135.4 - Basic Hardboard.
2.
ANSI A208.1 - Mat-Formed Wood Particleboard.
B.
American Wood-Preservers’ Association:
1.
AWPA C1 - All Timber Products - Preservative
Treatment by Pressure Process.
2.
AWPA C20 - Structural Lumber - Fire-Retardant
Treatment by Pressure Processes.
C.
National Institute of Standards and Technology:
1.
NIST PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard.
D.
Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association:
1.
NELMA - Standard Grading Rules for Northeastern
Lumber.
E.
National Lumber Grades Authority:
1.
NLGA - Standard Grading Rules for Canadian
Lumber.
F.
The Redwood Inspection Service:
1.
RIS - Standard Specifications for Grades of
California Redwood Lumber.
G.
Southern Pine Inspection Bureau:
1.
SPIB - Standard Grading Rules for Southern Pine
Lumber.
H.
West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau:
February 28, 2003
06112 - 1
Framing and Sheathing
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
1. WCLIB - Standard Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber.
I.
Western Wood Products Association:
1.
WWPA G-5 - Western Lumber Grading Rules.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A.
Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal
procedures.
B.
Product Data: Submit technical data on sheathing, wood
preservative materials, and application instructions.
C.
Samples of Exposed To View Wood Members: Submit two
samples, 12 inches in size illustrating wood grain, and
finish.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform Work in accordance with the following:
1.
Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by NIST PS 20.
2.
Wood Structural Panel Grading Agency: Certified by
EWA - The Engineered Wood Association.
B.
In lieu of grade stamping exposed to view lumber and wood
structural panels, submit manufacturer's certificate
certifying Products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Product storage and
handling requirements.
B.
Protect trusses from warping or other distortion by
stacking in vertical position, braced to resist
movement.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 LUMBER MATERIALS
A.
Lumber Grading Rules: AF&PA
February 28, 2003
06112 - 2
Framing and Sheathing
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
B.
Joist Framing: Southern Yellow Pine species, structural
grade, size classification, 19 percent maximum moisture
content.
C.
Rafter Framing: Southern Yellow Pine species,
structural grade, size classification, 19 percent
maximum moisture content.
D.
Non-structural Light Framing: 19 percent maximum
moisture content.
E.
F.
2.2
2.3
2.4
Studding: Southern Yellow Pine species, Structural
grade, size classification, 19 percent maximum moisture
content.
Miscellaneous Framing: 19 percent maximum moisture
content.
SHEATHING MATERIALS
A.
Gypsum Wall Sheathing: Moisture resistant, 1/2 inch
thick, 4' x 8' inch sized sheets or larger,
square
edges, water repellant paper faces. Dens-Glass Gold
Sheathing by G-P or equal.
B.
Telephone and Electrical Panel Boards: Plywood.
SHEATHING LOCATIONS
A.
Insulating Sloped Roof Sheathing: See Section 07220
for details and material spec.
B.
Exterior Wood Framed Walls
ACCESSORIES
A.
B.
Fasteners and Anchors:
1.
Fasteners: Hot dipped galvanized steel for high
humidity and treated wood locations, unfinished
steel elsewhere.
2.
Drywall Screws: Bugle head, hardened steel, power
driven type, length to achieve full penetration of
sheathing substrate.
Die Stamped Connectors: Simpson Strong-Tie or equal.
February 28, 2003
06112 - 3
Framing and Sheathing
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
C.
Structural Framing Connectors: Hot dipped galvanized steel,
sized to suit framing conditions, manufactured by Simpson
Strong-Tie.
D.
Sill Gasket on Top of Foundation: 1/4 inch thick, plate
width, closed cell polyethylene foam from continuous
rolls.
2.5 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT
A.
Wood Preservative (Pressure Treatment): AWPA Treatment C1 using
water borne preservative with 0.25 percent retainage.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
FRAMING
A.
B.
C.
Set structural members level and plumb, in correct
position.
Make provisions for erection loads, and for sufficient
temporary bracing to maintain structure safe, plumb, and in
alignment until completion of erection and installation of
permanent bracing.
Place horizontal members, crown side up.
D.
Construct load bearing framing members full length
without splices.
E.
Double members at openings over 24" inches wide. Space short
studs over and under opening to stud spacing.
F.
Construct double joist headers at floor and ceiling
openings and under wall stud partitions parallel to floor
joists. Frame rigidly into joists.
G.
Bridge joists framing in excess of 8 feet span at midspan.
Fit solid bridging at ends of members.
H.
Place full width continuous sill flashings under framed walls
on cementitious foundations. Lap flashing joint 4 inches.
February 28, 2003
06112 - 4
Framing and Sheathing
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
I.
Place sill gasket directly on cementitious foundation.
Puncture gasket clean and fit tight to protruding foundation
anchor bolts.
3.2 SHEATHING: See Section 07220
A.
Secure wall sheathing with long dimension perpendicular
to wall studs, with ends over firm bearing and
staggered.
B.
Place wood structural panel sheeting at building
corners for horizontal distance of Install inlet
diagonal bracing.
C.
Place building paper horizontally over wall sheathing;
weather lap edges and ends.
D.
Install telephone and electrical panel back boards
with wood structural panel sheathing material where
required. Size back boards 12 inches beyond size of
electrical panel.
3.3 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT
A.
Apply preservative treatment.
B.
Brush apply two coats of preservative treatment on wood in
contact with cementitious materials roofing and related
metal flashings. Treat site-sawn cuts.
C.
Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting members. 3.4
TOLERANCES
A.
Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances.
B.
Framing Members: 1/4 inch from indicated position,
maximum.
February 28, 2003
06112 - 5
Framing and Sheathing
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
3.5 SCHEDULES
A.
Above Grade Joist, Rafter, and Stud Framing: S/P/F
species, 19 percent maximum moisture content.
B.
Blocking and Cants: S/P/F species, pressure
preservative treatment.
END OF SECTION
February 28, 2003
06112 - 6
Framing and Sheathing
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 06114
WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING
PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes perimeter nailers; blocking in wall; wood
furring and grounds; concealed wood blocking for support of
toilet and bath accessories wall cabinets; telephone and
electrical panel back boards.
1.2 REFERENCES
A.
ALSC (American Lumber Standards Committee) - Softwood Lumber
Standards.
B.
ANSI A208.1 - Mat-Formed Wood Particleboard.
C.
APA/EWA (APA/Engineered Wood Association) Certification.
D.
AWPA (American Wood Preservers Association) C1 - All Timber
Products Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process.
E.
AWPA (American Wood Preservers Association) C20 - Structural
Lumber Fire Retardant Treatment by Pressure Process.
F.
NFPA (National Forest Products Association) - Lumber Grading
Rules.
G.
RIS (Redwood Inspection Service) - Lumber Grading Rules.
H.
SPIB (Southern Pine Inspection Bureau) - Lumber Grading
Rules.
I.
WCLIB (West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau) - Lumber Grading
Rules.
J.
WWPA (Western Wood Products Association) - Lumber Grading
Rules.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A.
Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal
February 28, 2003
06114 - 1 Wood Blocking and Curbing
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
procedures.
B.
Product Data: Submit technical data on wood preservative
and fire retardant treatment materials and application
instructions.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform Work in accordance with the following:
1.
Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by ALSC.
2.
Plywood Grading Agency: Certified by APA/EWA.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS
A.
B.
Lumber Grading Rules: AP&PA.
Miscellaneous Framing: Stress Group D, yellow pine species,
structural grade 19 percent maximum moisture content after
treatment.
C.
Plywood: APA/EWA Grade C-D unsanded. 2.2
ACCESSORIES
A.
Fasteners and Anchors:
1.
Fasteners: Hot dipped galvanized steel for high
humidity and treated wood locations, unfinished steel
elsewhere.
2.
Anchors: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow
masonry. Expansion shield and lag bolt type for
anchorage to solid masonry or concrete. Bolt or
ballistic fastener for anchorages to steel.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
FRAMING
A.
Set members level and plumb, in correct position.
B.
Place horizontal members, crown side up.
C.
Construct curb members of solid wood sections.
D.
3.2
Space framing and furring 16 inches 400 mm oc.
SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT
February 28, 2003
06114 - 2
Wood Blocking and Curbing
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
A.
Apply preservative treatment.
B.
Brush apply two coats of preservative treatment on wood in
contact with cementitious materials, roofing and related
metal flashings. Treat site-sawn cuts.
C.
Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting members.
END OF SECTION
February 28, 2003
06114 – 3
Wood Blocking and Curbing
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 06410
CUSTOM CABINETS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A.
B.
Section includes custom-fabricated cabinet units; counter
tops; cabinet hardware; preparation for installing utilities
in cabinets; and shop finishing.
Related Sections:
1.
Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing:
Grounds and support framing.
2.
Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry: Related trim not
specified in this section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A.
American National Standards Institute:
1.
ANSI A156.9 - Cabinet Hardware.
2.
ANSI A208.1 - Mat-Formed Wood Particleboard.
B.
Architectural Woodwork Institute:
1.
AWI - Quality Standards Illustrated.
C.
Federal Specification Unit:
1.
FS A-A-1936 - Adhesive, Contact, Neoprene Rubber.
D.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1.
NEMA LD 3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates.
E.
Woodwork Institute of California:
1.
WIC - Manual of Millwork.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal
procedures.
Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles and
elevations, assembly methods, joint details, fastening
methods, accessory listings, hardware location and schedule
of finishes.
February 28, 2003
06410-1
CUSTOM CABINETS
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
1.4
1.5
C.
Product Data: Submit data for hardware accessories.
D.
Samples:
1.
Submit two, 8 x 10 inch size samples,
illustrating cabinet finish.
2.
Submit two, 8 x 10 inch size samples,
illustrating counter top finish.
3.
Submit two samples of drawer pulls, hinges,
illustrating hardware finish.
E.
Certification: Submit copy of fabricator’s AWI Quality
Certification Program license and Project specific letters.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform work in accordance with AWI (Architectural
Woodwork Institute) Architectural Woodwork Quality
Standards Illustrated, Custom Grade.
B.
Maintain one copy of each document on site.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
1.6
Fabricator: Company specializing in performing Work of
this section with minimum three years documented
experience.
MOCKUP
A.
Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Mockup
requirements.
B.
Construct mockup of full size base cabinet and upper cabinet
including fixtures, hardware, accessories, and fitments.
C.
Locate where directed by Architect/Engineer.
D.
Incorporate accepted mockup as part of Work. 1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Product storage and
handling requirements.
B.
Protect units from moisture damage.
February 28, 2003
06410-2
CUSTOM CABINETS
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
B.
Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
During and after installation of Work of this section,
maintain same temperature and humidity conditions in
building spaces as will occur after occupancy.
1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A.
Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPONENTS
A.
Hardwood Lumber: AWI Grade II; maximum moisture
content of 6-8 percent; and the following:
1.
Species of Wood: Butternut
2.
Cut or Slicing of Wood: Plain Sawn
3.
Matching of Individual Leaves to Each Other: slip
matching.
B.
Hardwood Plywood: AWI Grade A veneer; with
particleboard core; type of glue recommended for
application; and the following:
1.
Species of Veneer: Birch
2.
Cut or Slicing of Veneer: Rotery
3.
Matching of Individual Leaves to Each Other:
random matching.
4.
Matching Across the Panel Face: balanced
matching.
C.
Wood Particleboard: ANSI A208.1 Type 1; composed of wood
chips or sawdust, medium density, made with water resistant
adhesive; sanded faces.
D.
High Pressure Decorative Laminate: Equal to Pionite
E.
Synthetic Surfacing: Synthetic marble Equal to Pionite Solid
Surface Arbor NV201.
February 28, 2003
06410-3
CUSTOM CABINETS
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A.
Adhesive for High Pressure Decorative Laminates: Type
recommended by laminate manufacturer to suit application.
B.
Fasteners: Size and type to suit application.
C.
Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and
type to suit application; Galvanized finish in concealed
locations and Stainless Steel finish in exposed locations.
D.
Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel.
E.
Grommets: Metal material for cut-outs.
F.
Drawer and Door Pulls: "U" shaped pull, steel with satin
finish aluminum with satin finish, 4 inch centers.
G.
Cabinet Locks: Keyed cylinder, two keys for each lock, steel
with satin finish.
H.
Catches: Magnetic.
I.
Drawer Slides: Galvanized steel construction, ball
bearings separating tracks, full extension type.
J.
Hinges: Knuckle disappearing type, steel with satin finish.
2.3 FABRICATION
A.
Shop assemble casework for delivery to site in units easily
handled and to permit passage through building openings.
B.
Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges with matching veneer
edging. Use one piece for full length only.
C.
Cap exposed high pressure decorative laminate finish edges
with material of same finish and pattern.
D.
Door and Drawer Fronts: 3/4 inch thick; flush style.
February 28, 2003
06410-4
CUSTOM CABINETS
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
E.
When necessary to cut and fit on site, fabricate materials
with ample allowance for cutting. Furnish trim for scribing
and site cutting.
F.
Apply high pressure decorative laminate finish in full
uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit
corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners.
Slightly bevel arises.
G.
Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of plastic
laminate finished surfaces.
H.
Mechanically fasten back splash to counter tops with steel
brackets at 16 inches on center.
I.
Fabricate cabinets and counter tops with cutouts for
plumbing fixtures. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site
dimensions. Seal cut edges.
2.4 SHOP FINISHING
A.
Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws.
B.
Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw
indentations.
C.
On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler
matching surrounding surfaces and of types recommended for
applied finishes.
D.
Finish work in accordance with AWI - Section 1500 Finish
System Opaque OP-8.
E.
Seal internal surfaces of cabinets with two coats of
shellac.
F.
Prime paint surfaces in contact with cementitious
materials.
G.
Finish in accordance with Section 09900.
February 28, 2003
06410-5
CUSTOM CABINETS
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements:
Coordination and project conditions.
B.
Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.
C.
Verify location and sizes of utility rough-in
associated with work of this section.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A.
Set and secure casework in place; rigid, plumb, and level.
B.
Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall
mounted components.
C.
Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure
adjoining cabinet units counter tops.
D.
Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with
maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim
for this purpose.
E.
Secure cabinet and counter bases to floor using
appropriate angles and anchorages.
F.
3.3
3.4
Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations.
Conceal with solid wood plugs of species to match
surrounding wood; finish flush with surrounding surfaces.
ADJUSTING
A.
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Testing,
adjusting and balancing.
B.
Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly
and correctly.
CLEANING
A.
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Final
cleaning.
February 28, 2003
06410-6
CUSTOM CABINETS
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
B.
Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware,
fittings, and fixtures.
3.5 SCHEDULES
A.
Room 102: Gallery – Reception Desk.
B.
Room 105: Storage/Copy – Base Cabinet and Shelves.
C.
Room 108: Conference Room – Base and Upper Cabinets.
D.
Room 110: Janitor’s Closet – Shelving.
END OF SECTION
February 28, 2003
06410-7
CUSTOM CABINETS
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 07213
BATT INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes batt insulation and vapor retarder in
exterior wall and ceiling construction; and batt insulation
for filling perimeter window and door shim spaces, crevices in
exterior wall and roof.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
Section 07260 - Vapor Retarders: Vapor retarder
materials adjacent to insulation.
2.
Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies:
Acoustic insulation.
1.2 REFERENCES
A.
ASTM C665 - Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light
Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing.
B.
ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning
Characteristics of Building Materials.
C.
NFPA 255 (National Fire Protection Association) - Test of
Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
D.
UL 723 (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.) - Tests for Surface
Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Materials of This Section: Provide continuity of thermal
barrier at building enclosure elements in conjunction with
thermal insulating materials which have been previously
installed.
B.
Materials of This Section: Provide thermal protection to vapor
retarder in conjunction with vapor retarder materials in
Section 07260.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A.
Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal
procedures.
February 28, 2003
07213 - 1
Batt Insulation
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
B.
Product Data: Submit data on product characteristics,
performance criteria and limitations.
C.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products to meet or
exceed specified requirements.
1.5 COORDINATION
A.
Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements:
Coordination and project conditions.
B.
Coordinate the Work with Section 07260 for
installation of vapor retarder.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
COMPONENTS
A.
Batt Insulation: ASTM C665; preformed glass fiber batt;
friction fit, conforming to the following:
1.
Thermal Resistance: R of 22.
2.
Batt or Roll Size: To fit construction.
3.
Facing: Faced on one side with asphalt treated Kraft
paper.
4.
Flame/Smoke Properties: In accordance with ASTM E84.
B.
C.
Sheet Vapor Retarder: Clear polyethylene film for
above grade application, 6 mil 0.15 mm thick.
Tape: Bright aluminum Polyethylene self-adhering type, 2
inch 50 mm wide.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION
A.
Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements:
Coordination and project conditions.
B.
Verify substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation
are dry and ready to receive insulation.
INSTALLATION
A. Install in exterior walls and ceiling spaces without gaps or
voids. Do not compress insulation. Install full thick on
exterior wall framing.
February 28, 2003
07213 - 2
Batt Insulation
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
B.
Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate
miscellaneous gaps and voids.
C.
Fit insulation tight in spaces and tight to exterior side of
mechanical and electrical services within plane of
insulation.
D.
Install with factory applied vapor retarder membrane facing
warm side of building spaces. Lap ends and side flanges of
membrane over framing members.
E.
Tape seal butt ends, lapped flanges, and tears or cuts in
membrane.
F.
Metal Framing: Place vapor retarder on warm side of
insulation; lap and seal sheet retarder joints over member
face.
G.
Extend vapor retarder tight to full perimeter of adjacent
window and door frames and other items interrupting plane of
membrane. Tape seal in place.
H.
Coordinate Work of this section with construction of vapor
retarder specified in Section 07260.
3.3 SCHEDULES
A.
Ceiling Insulation: R22 batt, unfaced.
B.
Wall Insulation: 19 or 22 roll, faced; separate 6 mil vapor
retarder.
END OF SECTION
February 28, 2003
07213 - 3
Batt Insulation
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
Section 07220
Roof and Deck Insulation
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
HCFC FREE “Green” Polyiso Rigid board type roof
insulation(s) for thermal protection as part of roofing
assemblies.
B.
Recover board HCFC FREE “Green” Polyiso roof
insulation.
C.
Roofing crickets. 1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 06112 – Framing and Sheathing: Wood roof
blocking and nailers.
1.3 REFERENCES
A.
ASTM C 1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid
Cellular Polyisocyanurate Insulation Board.
B.
ASTM D 312 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Used in
Roofing.
C.
ASTM E 108 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof
Coverings.
D.
ASTM E 119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of
Building Constructions and Materials.
E.
FM 4450 - Approval Standard - Class I Insulated Steel Roof
Decks.
F.
G.
FM 4470 - Approval Standard - Class I Roof Covers.
FS HH-I-1972/1 - Insulation Board, Thermal, Polyurethane or
Polyisocyanurate, Faced with Aluminum Foil on Both Sides of
the Foam.
February 28, 2003
07220 - 1
Roof and Deck Insulation
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
H.
FS HH-I-1972/2 - Insulation Board, Thermal, Polyurethane
or Polyisocyanurate, Faced with Asphalt/Organic Felt,
Asphalt/Asbestos Felt, or Asphalt/Glass Fiber Felt on Both
Sides of the Foam.
I.
FS HH-I-1972/3 - Insulation Board, Thermal, Polyurethane or
Polyisocyanurate, Faced with Perlite Insulation Board on One
Side and Asphalt/Organic Felt or Asphalt/Glass Fiber Felt on
the Other.
J.
LTTR – Long Term Thermal Resistance, using techniques from
CAN/ULC S770 based on ASTM C1303
K.
UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and
Materials.
L.
UL 790 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Roof Covering
Materials.
M.
UL 1256 - Fire Test of Roof Deck Constructions.
N.
ASTM E 2114-01 – Standard Terminology for
Sustainability Relative to the Performance of
Buildings
O.
ASTM 2129 –01 – Standard Practice for Data Collection for
Sustainability Assessment of Building Product
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A.
HCFC FREE “Green” Polyiso Roof Board Insulation is defined as
environmentally friendly, with Zero Global Warming, Zero Ozone
Depletion (ODP) as in compliance with the US EPA requirements
of January 1, 2003 requirement to eliminate production of
HCFC 141b.
B.
LTTR (Long Term Thermal Resistance) is defined as using
techniques from ASTM C1303, CAN/ULC S770 predicting a foam’s
R-Value that has been shown to be equivalent to the average
performance of a permeably faced foam insulation product over
15 years. In Canada this method is used as the Design R-Value.
This applies to ALL foam insulation products with blowing
agents other than air, such as Polyiso, “Green” Polyiso,
extruded polystyrene and polyurethane. The new method is based
on consensus standards in the US
February 28, 2003
07220 - 2
Roof and Deck Insulation
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
and Canada. PIMA has reported this method as providing a better
understanding of the thermal performance of foam.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 01300 and 01600.
B.
Product Data:
1.
Manufacturer’s HCFC FREE “Green” Polyiso
specifications
2.
Installation instructions for HCFC FREE “Green”
Polyiso insulation board and fasteners
3.
Product Data as per ASTM 2129 – 01 Standard for Data
Collection for Sustainability Assessment of Building
Products
C.
Samples:
1.
Submit 6 by 6 inch (152 by 152 mm) samples of each
board type required.
2.
Submit samples of each fastener type required.
D.
Shop Drawings: Roof plan showing layout of boards, and
fastening patterns.
E.
Certificates: System Manufacturer’s or insulation
manufacturer’s certification that HCFC FREE “Green” Polyiso
materials meet Zero ODP (Ozone Depletion Potential) and
Zero GWP (Global Warming Potential) specification
requirements.
F.
Thermal Warranty: Submit sample warranty indicating
conditions and limitations.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
HCFC FREE “Green” Polyiso Manufacturer Qualifications:
1.
Show evidence of ability to manufacturer products
specified with sufficient manufacturing facilities.
a.
List dates of HCFC FREE “Green” Polyiso plant
conversion and/or full production operation
b.
List HCFC chemistry alternative/replacement.
B.
Regulatory Requirements:
February 28, 2003
07220 - 3
Roof and Deck Insulation
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
.
Factory Mutual (FM).
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)
Classification.
Metro-Dade County, Florida Product Control.
California State Insulation Quality Standards and Title
25 Foam Flammability Criteria.
IBC, BOCA, ICBO and SBCCI Sections on Foam
Insulation.
Canadian Compliance: CAN/ULC, CGSB.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Comply with general requirements specified in Section 01600.
B.
Deliver insulation in packages labeled with material name,
thermal value and product code.
C.
When stored outdoors, stack insulation on pallets above
ground or roof deck and cover with tarpaulin or other suitable
waterproof coverings. Slit or remove manufacturer´s packaging
before covering with waterproof covering.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Comply with insurance underwriter´s requirements
applicable for products of this Section.
B.
Do not install insulation on roof deck when water of any
type is present. Do not apply roofing materials when
substrate is damp or wet.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Acceptable Manufacturers: Atlas Roofing Corporation
1.
Atlas Roofing Corporation,
1775 The Exchange, Suite 160, Atlanta, GA 30339. Ph.
(770) 952-1442
Fax (770) 952-3170
February 28, 2003
07220 - 4
Roof and Deck Insulation
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
2.
B.
Requests for substitutions will be considered in
accordance with provisions of Section 01600.
Provide all HCFC FREE “Green” Polyiso roof board
insulation from a single manufacturer.
2.2 MATERIALS
A.
HCFC FREE “Green” Polyiso Roof Board Insulation: Provide
products that comply with the following:
1.
1. ASTM standards specified.
2.
2. Factory Mutual (FM) approvals specified.
3.
3. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)
classifications specified.
4.
4. Metro-Dade County, Florida Product Control.
5.
5. California State Insulation Quality Standards and
Title 25 Foam Flammability Criteria.
6.
6. BOCA National Building Code Sections on Foam
Insulation
7.
7. ICBO Uniform Building Code Sections on Foam
Insulation.
8.
8. SBCCI Standard Building Code Sections on Foam
Insulation.
9.
9. Canadian Compliance: CAN/ULC, CGSB, and CCMC.
10.
10. Montreal Protocol requirements to eliminate
HCFC 141b from production by January 1, 2003
B.
ACFoam Nail Base: Closed-cell HCFC FREE “Green”
polyisocyanurate foam board manufactured using HCFC ACUltra
Hydrocarbon blowing agent and bonded to 7/16 inch thick
APA/TECO rated OSB on the top side and a fiber-reinforced
felt facer on the bottom; for use with [ tile roofing] , FM
[ 1-90] wind rating; compressive strength - 20 psi.
1.
Federal Specification HH-I-1972/GEN has been
cancelled.
2.
ASTM C 1289, Type V.
3.
Miami-Dade County, Florida Product Control No. 000208.04 (with 19/32" plywood).
4.
State of California, License #TC 1231.
5.
IBC, NBC, UBC and SBC Sections on Foam Insulation
(Chapter 26) .
6.
APA/TECO rated nailable surface.
7.
FM Standard 4450/4470 Approval (1-105, 1-90, 1-60 ACFoam
Nail Base Insulation is approved for Class
February 28, 2003
07220 - 5
Roof and Deck Insulation
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
8.
9.
10.
C.
D.
1
insulated roof deck construction. Refer to FM Approval
Guide for details.
UL Standard 1256 Classification
Insulated metal deck construction assemblies Construction #120 and #123.
UL Standard 790 Classification
For use with Class A, B or C shingles, metal or tile
roof coverings.
UL Standard 263 Fire Resistance Classification (ASTM
E119
Some classifications for fire resistance are P225,
P230, P259, P508, P510, P514, P701, P717, P719, P723,
P728, P732, P734, P739, P801, P815, and P819.
Insulated Sheathing Thickness: 5.5”.
Related Materials:
1.
1. Fasteners: Factory Mutual approved as
recommended by the sheathing manufacturer.
2.
2. Base Ply: As recommended by membrane
manufacturer.
3.
3. Fasteners: For Nail Base and Vented-R: Atlas
Nail Base Fasteners.
4.
4. Asphalt Bitumen: Comply with ASTM D 312, Type III
(steep) or Type IV. USE ONLY ON APPROVED BOARD
INSULATION TYPES.
a.
Provide with labels indicating flash point,
softening point, finished blowing temperature, and
equiviscous temperature.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine roof deck for suitability to receive insulation.
Verify that substrate is dry, clean and free of foreign
material that will damage insulation or impede installation.
B.
Verify that roof drains, scuppers, roof curbs, nailers,
equipment supports, vents and other roof accessories are
secured properly and installed in conformance with
Contract Drawings and submittals.
February 28, 2003
07220 - 6
Roof and Deck Insulation
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
C.
Verify that deck is structurally sound to support
installers, materials and equipment without damaging or
deforming work.
1.
Start of installation indicates installer accepts
conditions of existing deck surfaces.
3.2 APPLICATION / INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
Install a 6 mil Vapor Retarder on all insulated roof areas.
Install specified insulation using approved [mechanical
fasteners] in accordance with manufacturer´s latest
written instructions and as required by governing codes.
Install with end joints staggered to avoid having
insulation joints coinciding with joints in deck.
3.3 CLEANING / PROTECTION
A.
Remove trash and construction debris from insulation surface
prior to application of roofing membrane.
B.
Do not leave installed insulation exposed to weather. Cover
and waterproof with completed roof system immediately after
installation.
1.
Temporarily seal exposed insulation edges at the end of
each day.
2.
Remove and replace installed insulation that has become
wet or damaged with new insulation.
C.
Protect installed insulation and roof cover from traffic by use
of protective covering materials during and after installation
END OF SECTION
February 28, 2003
07220 - 7
Roof and Deck Insulation
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 07260
VAPOR RETARDERS
PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
Section includes sheet and sealant materials for
controlling vapor diffusion.
Related Sections:
1.
Section 07213 – Batt Insulation.
1.2 REFERENCES
A.
ASTM C920 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
B.
ASTM D491 - Asphalt Mastic Used on Waterproofing.
C.
ASTM E96 - Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of
Materials.
D.
SWRI (Sealing, Waterproofing and Restoration Institute) Sealant and Caulking Guide Specification.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Maximum Vapor Permeability (Perm): 1 ng/S/m/Pa measured
in accordance with ASTM E96 Method E.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A.
Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal
procedures.
B.
Product Data: Submit data indicating material
characteristics, performance criteria and limitations.
C.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit preparation
and installation requirements, techniques.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform Work in accordance with SWRI - Sealant and
Caulking Guide Specification requirements for materials
and installation.
1.6 MOCKUP
February 28, 2003
07260 - 1
Vapor Retarders
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
A.
B.
Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for mockup.
Construct mock-up,6 x 10 feet 3 x 3 m, of exterior wall
vapor retarder including vapor retarder installation at
typical window and door intersection.
C.
Locate where directed by Architect/Engineer.
D.
Incorporate accepted mockup as part of Work. 1.7
SEQUENCING
A.
Section 01100 - Summary: Work sequence.
B.
Sequence Work to permit installation of materials in
conjunction with other retardant materials and seals.
C.
Do not install vapor retarder until items penetrating vapor
retarder are in place.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
COMPONENTS
A.
Sheet Retarder Type 1: Clear polyethylene film for above
grade application, 6 mil 0.15 mm thick.
B.
Polyurethane Sealant Type C: ASTM C920. Single component,
chemical curing, non-sagging; black color.
1.
Elongation Capability: 25 percent.
2.
Service Temperature Range: -40 to 180 degrees F -40 to
82 degrees C.
3.
Shore A Hardness Range: 20 to 35.
C.
Primer and Backer Rods: Recommended by sealant
manufacturer to suit application.
D.
Cleaner: Non-corrosive type; recommended by sealant
manufacturer; compatible with adjacent materials.
E.
Mastic Adhesive Type 1: ASTM D491, asphalt type, compatible
with sheet retarder and substrate, thick mastic of uniform
consistency.
F.
Adhesive Type 2: Compatible with sheet retarder and
substrate, permanently non-curing.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
February 28, 2003
07260 - 2
Vapor Retarders
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
A.
Tape: Bright aluminum self-adhering type, 2 inch 50 mm wide,
compatible with sheet material.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Remove loose or foreign matter capable of impairing
adhesion.
B.
Clean and prime substrate surfaces to receive adhesive and
sealants.
3.2 EXISTING WORK
A.
Clean and repair existing construction to provide positive
and continuous seal for vapor retarders.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A.
Vapor Retarder For Solid Substrate: Secure sheet retarder
to solid construction with tape. Lap edges and ends 6 inches
150 mm and caulk with sealant to ensure complete and
continuous seal.
B.
Vapor Retarder Seal For Openings: Install sheet retarder
between window and door frames and adjacent vapor retarder
and seal with sealant. Caulk with sealant to ensure complete
seal. Position laps over firm bearing.
C.
Apply sealant within recommended application temperature
ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied
within these temperature ranges or where compatibility with
adjacent materials may be in doubt.
3.4 SCHEDULES
A.
Window Frame Perimeter: Lap sheet retarder from wall vapor
retarder (with 3 inches 75 mm of contact over firm bearing)
to window frame (with 1 inch 25 mm of contact). Seal with
sealant.
B.
Wall and Roof Junction: Lap sheet retarder from wall vapor
retarder (with 6 inches 150 mm of contact over firm bearing)
to roof structure (with 4 inches 100 mm of contact). Seal with
sealant.
February 28, 2003
07260 - 3
Vapor Retarders
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
C.
Wall Retarder: Lap sheets from section to section (with 6
inches, 150 mm of contact) with adjacent sheet.
END OF SECTION
February 28, 2003
07260 - 4
Vapor Retarders
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 07322
CLAY ROOFING TILE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Clay Roofing Tile.
B.
Fasteners.
C.
Underlayment.
D.
Waterproofing Membrane.
E.
Ice Dam Protection.
F.
Flashings and Counterflashings.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry.
B.
Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry.
C.
Section 07530 - Elastomeric Sheet Roofing.
D.
Section 07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal.
E.
Section 07710 - Manufactured Roof Specialties: Snow
guards.
1.3 REFERENCES
A.
ASTM B 370 - Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip
for Building Construction.
B.
ASTM C 67 - Standard Test Methods of Sampling and Testing Brick
and Structural Clay Tile.
C.
ASTM C 387 - Standard Specification for Packaged, Dry,
Combined Materials for Mortar and Concrete.
D.
ASTM C 887 - Standard Specification for Packaged, Dry,
Combined Materials for Surface Bonding Mortar.
E.
ASTM C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric
Sealants.
F.
ASTM C 1167 - Standard Specification for Clay Roof Tiles.
February 28, 2003
07322-1
Clay Roofing Tile
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
G.
ASTM D 226 - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated
Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing.
H.
ASTM D 1970 - Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer
Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing
Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection.
I.
ASTM D 2626 - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated
and Coated Organic Felt Base Sheet Used in Roofing.
J.
ASTM D 4586 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof
Cement, Asbestos-Free.
K.
SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air
Conditioning Contractors' National Association, Inc.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive literature for products
specified in this section.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate the following:
1. Roofing tile:
a. Exposure pattern.
b. Locations and configurations of special shapes.
c. Locations and configuration of each type roof
flashing.
2. Fabricated sheet metal items:
a. Dimensioned profiles.
b. Locations and extent of each item; include joint
locations.
c. Jointing methods and materials.
d. Provisions for prevention of electrolytic action
between dissimilar materials.
e. Interface with adjacent construction.
D. Selection Samples: Two sets of color charts or samples
representing manufacturer's full range of available colors.
E. Verification Samples: Three full-size tile samples of each type
tile specified, representing actual color and finish of
products to be installed.
F. Manufacturer's printed installation instructions for each product,
including product storage requirements.
G. Closeout Submittals: Warranty documents, issued and executed
by tile manufacturer, countersigned by Contractor.
February 28, 2003
07322-2
Clay Roofing Tile
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mock-Up:
1. Construct mock-up using materials specified in this
section.
2. Construct mock-up as directed, at location indicated or
directed.
3. Construct mock-up at location indicated or directed, size
__ feet by __ feet (__ m by __ m).
4. Obtain Architect's acceptance of mock-up before beginning
construction activities of this section; accepted mock-up
will be standard by which completed work of this section is
judged.
5. Mock-up may not remain as part of Work.
6. Accepted mock-up may remain as part of Work.
B. Pre-Installation Meeting:
1. Convene at job site seven (7) calendar days prior to
scheduled beginning of construction activities of
this section to review requirements of this section.
2. Require attendance by representatives of the
following:
a.
Installer of this section.
b.
Other entities directly affecting, or affected
by, construction activities of this section.
3. Notify Architect four (4) calendar days in advance of
scheduled meeting date.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store products of this section in manufacturer's unopened
packaging until installation.
B.
Maintain storage area conditions for products of this section
in accordance with manufacturer's instructions until
installation.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty:
1. The Contractor warrants products of this section, as
installed, to be in accordance with the Contract Documents
and free from faults and defects in materials and
workmanship for a period of 3 years.
2. Combine special warranty of this section with products,
as installed, of the following sections:
a. Section 07530.
b. Section 07600.
B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Furnish tile manufacturer's warranty
against defects in product materials; warranty to include
reimbursement for labor required for replacement of defective
tiles for 20-year period,
February 28, 2003
07322-3
Clay Roofing Tile
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
replacement of defective tile materials for 75-year period.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Acceptable Tile Manufacturer: Ludowici Roof Tile, Inc.; P.O.
Box 69, New Lexington, OH 43764. ASD. Tel: (800) 945-8453 or
(740) 342-1995, Fax: (740) 342-5229.
B.
Requests for substitution will be considered in
accordance with provisions of Section 01600.
C.
Substitutions: Not permitted.
D.
Unless otherwise specified for an individual product or
material, supply all products specified in this section from
the same manufacturer.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Underlayment: CertainTeed "Roofers' Select"; asphaltimpregnated
fiberglass-reinforced organic felt designed for use on roof
decks as a water-resistant layer beneath roofing shingles.
B. Underlayment: Asphalt-saturated organic felt conforming to ASTM D
226, Type II, non-perforated, nominal weight 30 pounds per 100
square feet (1.5 kg/sq m); two layers required.
C. Underlayment: Asphalt-saturated and coated organic felt
conforming to ASTM D 2626, non-perforated, with fine mineral
surfacing one side, nominal weight 43 pounds per 100 square feet
(2.0 kg/sq m).
D. Waterproofing Membrane:
1. Acceptable product: WinterGuard Waterproofing Shingle
Underlayment, manufactured by CertainTeed Corporation.
2. Characteristics: Self-adhering rubberized asphalt membrane
conforming to ASTM D 1970, with high traction surface,
internal reinforcement, and splitback plastic release film.
E. Wood Stringers: S4S, maximum 19 percent moisture content, nominal
1 inch (25 mm) thick, of height required to support tile.
F. Flashings and Counterflashings: Copper sheet conforming to ASTM B
370, cold rolled, natural finish; 16 ounces per square foot (4882
g/sq m) minimum thickness.
February 28, 2003
07322-4
Clay Roofing Tile
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
G.
Copper Wire: 18 gage (1.2 mm) minimum.
H.
Cement Mortar for Setting Tile: 1 part Portland cement mortar
ASTM C 270 Type M and 4 parts sand.
I.
Roof Cement: Asphalt roof cement conforming to ASTM D 4586,
Type I or II.
J.
Sealant Used in Lieu of Flashing Cement: ASTM C 920
silicone.
K.
Joint Sealer: Silicone sealant conforming to ASTM C 920, Class
25.
2.3 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Clay Roofing Tile Type __:
1. Acceptable product: Classic Tile.
a.
Profile: Flat interlocking tile with smoothtextured
surface.
b.
Nominal size: 9 inches (228 mm) wide by 14 inches
(355 mm) long.
c.
Average exposure: 8-1/4 inches (209 mm) wide by 11
inches (279 mm) long.
2. Characteristics: Incombustible, vitrified tile manufactured
from shale and fire clays, having less than 3.0 percent
moisture absorption when tested in accordance with ASTM C
67, and meeting Grade 1 freeze/thaw resistance
requirements when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1167..
3. Color: Standard Clay Red.
B. Special Shapes and Fittings: Supply special shapes and fittings of
same material and finish as adjacent tile, factory-formed before
firing, as indicated on drawings or specified in manufacturer's
instructions for project conditions including, but not limited
to, the following:
1. Hip: “V” Hip & Ridge Group
2. Ridges: “V” Hip & Ridge Group
3. Rakes: Classic Detached Gable Rakes
4. Eaves: Typical Classic Under Eave
5. Valleys.
6. Termination caps: “V” Hip & Ridge Group
C. Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant; types and sizes specified in
manufacturer's instructions for indicated uses and conditions.
2.4 MIXES
A. Grout:
1. Mix the following materials in equal parts:
February 28, 2003
07322-5
Clay Roofing Tile
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
a.
2.
3.
Factory-mixed mortar meeting requirements of ASTM C 387,
Type N.
b. Factory-mixed surface bonding mortar meeting
requirements of ASTM C 887.
Add mineral oxide pigment to match color of roofing tile.
Add water and acrylic additive in accordance with mortar
materials manufacturers' instructions to obtain correct
mix for workability.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Form flashings in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions for indicated project conditions.
B. Form other indicated sheet metal items as follows:
1. Gutters: SMACNA Plate Number 1-18B – 6”
2. Downspouts: SMACNA Plate Number 1-31B – 4”
C. Fabrication of other indicated sheet metal items are
specified in Section 07600.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verification of Conditions: Ensure that decks to receive clay
tile roofing conform to requirements specified in tile
manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Installer's Examination:
1. Have installer of this section examine conditions under
which construction activities of this section are to be
performed, then submit written notification if such
conditions are unacceptable.
2. Transmit two copies of installer's report to
Architect within 24 hours of receipt.
3. Beginning construction activities of this section before
unacceptable conditions have been corrected is prohibited.
4. Beginning construction activities of this section
indicates installer's acceptance of conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Waterproofing Membrane:
1. Adhere directly to deck, following membrane
manufacturer's instructions.
2. Beginning at eave edge, install perpendicular to roof slope.
3. Overlap side joints minimum 4 inches (100 mm);
overlap end joints minimum 4 inches (100 mm).
February 28, 2003
07322-6
Clay Roofing Tile
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
4.
5.
Install additional layer on rough surfaces; install
additional layer of full-width membrane parallel to, and
centered on, hips, ridges and valleys.
Do not permit plastic cement, or other petroleum
solvent-based cements, to come in contact with
waterproofing membrane.
B. Ice Dam:
1. Adhere waterproofing membrane directly to deck,
following membrane manufacturer's instructions.
2. Beginning at eave edge, install perpendicular to roof slope;
extend to 24 inches (609 mm) past interior face of exterior
wall or as required by regulating building code, whichever
is greater.
3. Overlap side joints and end joints minimum 4 inches (100
mm) .
4. Install additional layer on rough surfaces; install
additional layer of full-width membrane parallel to, and
centered on, hips, ridges and valleys.
5. Do not permit plastic cement, or other petroleum
solvent-based cements, to come in contact with
waterproofing membrane.
C. Underlayment:
1. Beginning at eave edge, install perpendicular to roof
slope; extend minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) over
gutters and valley flashing, and minimum 6 inches
(150 mm) up abutting vertical surfaces.
2. Overlap side joints minimum 2-1/2 inches (64 mm);
overlap end joints minimum 6 inches (150 mm).
3. Install second layer parallel to first layer,
maintaining specified overlap at gutters, valley
flashings, and at side and end joints; locate side
joints minimum 18 inches (457 mm) from first layer
side joints, and locate end joints minimum 12 inches
(300 mm) from first layer end joints.
4. Install additional layer on rough surfaces; install
additional layer of full-width underlayment parallel to, and
centered on, hips, ridges and valleys.
5. Fasten sides and ends to deck with fasteners spaced at
maximum 6 inches (150 mm) on centers.
D. Valley Flashings:
1. Install minimum 24 inch (610 mm) wide flashing over fullwidth waterproofing membrane material; fasten metal to
deck with cleats.
2. Overlap end joints minimum 5 inches (127 mm); do not solder
joints.
3. Lap underlayment over edges of flashing 4 inches(100 mm) .
4. Install flashing over full-width waterproofing
membrane material.
5. Interleave roofing tiles with minimum 20 inch (508 mm)
wide prepared metal flashing sheets.
February 28, 2003
07322-7
Clay Roofing Tile
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
6. Attach roofing tiles to deck, using copper wires wired
to copper straps nailed beyond top edge of metal
flashing.
E. Intersections of Roof Surfaces and Abutting Vertical
Surfaces:
1. Install continuous 12 inch (304 mm) wide strips of
waterproof membrane material to extend 9 inches (228 mm)
across roof deck and 3 inches (76 mm) up vertical surface.
2. Install continuous metal flashing to extend 3 inches (76
mm) up vertical surface.
3. At locations where vertical surface will abut top edge of
tile, install metal flashing to extend 3 inches (76 mm) up
vertical surface, form metal flashing to extend minimum 3
inches (76 mm) over tile, and form 1/2 inch (12 mm) return
hem at edge of metal.
4. Form saddle flashings for protrusions through roof in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
F. Fabricated Sheet Metal Items: Install in accordance with shop
drawings and SMACNA ASMM.
G. Fabricated Sheet Metal Items: Installation is specified in
Section 07600.
H. Installation in Alpine Conditions: Before application of Ludowici
clay tile in alpine conditions, plans must be pre-approved in
writing by the Ludowici Technical Department (800-945-8453).
3.3 PROTECTION
A.
Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Protecting installed work.
B.
Do not permit traffic over finished roof surface. 3.4
SCHEDULES
A. Location: Roofing on the High and low roofs. 1. Tile: Standard Clay
Red as specified
END OF SECTION
February 28, 2003
07322-8
Clay Roofing Tile
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 07620
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES:
A. Parapet and flashings.
B. Scuppers.
C. Counterflashings over bituminous base flashings.
D. Counterflashings at roof mounted equipment and vent stacks. 1.02
RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 07512: Roofing system.
B. Section 07611 - Custom Sheet Metal Roofing.
C. Section 07724 - Roof Hatches.
D. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
E. Section 09900 - Painting: Prime and finish painting.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated, (Galvanized) by the HotDip Process.
B. ASTM B32 - Solder Metal.
C. ASTM B370 - Copper Sheet and Strip for Building
Construction.
D. ASTM B486 - Paste Solder.
E. ASTM D226 - Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and
Waterproofing.
F. ASTM D4586 - Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free.
February 28, 2003
SECTION 07620-1
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND
TRIM
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
G. CDA (Copper Development Association) - Contemporary Copper, A
Handbook of Sheet Copper Fundamentals, Design, Details and
Specifications.
H. CDA - Copper Roofing - A Practical Handbook.
I. FS O-F-506 - Flux, Soldering, Paste and Liquid.
J. NRCA (National Roofing Contractors Association) - Roofing
Manual.
K. SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. 1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern,
jointing details, fastening methods, flashings, terminations, and
installation details.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA standard details and
requirements.
B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.06
QUALIFICATIONS
A. Fabricator and Installer: Company specializing in sheet metal
flashing work with five years documented experience.
1.07 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.08
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under
provisions of Section 01600.
B. Stack preformed material to prevent twisting, bending, or
abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure
drainage.
February 28, 2003
SECTION 07620-2
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND
TRIM
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
C. Prevent contact with materials which may cause
discoloration or staining.
1.09 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 SHEET MATERIALS
A. Copper: Equal to York copper fabric through wall flashing 7 oz.
(asphalt both sides).
B. Copper: ASTM B370, cold rolled 20 oz/sq ft, 0.027 inch thick;
natural finish.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Same material and finish as flashing metal.
B. Underlayment: 30 asphalt saturated roofing felt.
C. Slip Sheet: Rosin sized building paper.
D. Primer: Galvanized iron type.
E. Protective Backing Paint: Bituminous.
F. Sealant: Polyurethane type, specified in Section 07900
G. Bedding Compound: Rubber-asphalt type.
H. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586, Type II.
I. Gutter and Downspout Anchorage Devices: SMACNA
requirements.
J. Gutter Supports: Straps.
K. Downspout Supports: Straps.
L. Solder: ASTM B32; 50/50 type.
2.03 COMPONENTS
February 28, 2003
SECTION 07620-3
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND
TRIM
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
Gutters: Copper (see Tile Roof Specifications).
A. Downspouts: Copper (see Tile Roof Specifications).
B. Accessories: Profiled to suit gutters and downspouts.
C. Splash Pads: Precast concrete type, of size and profiles
indicated; minimum 3000 psi (21 MPa) at 28 days, with minimum
5 percent air entrainment.
2.04 FABRICATION
A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free
from distortion or defects.
B. Fabricate cleats of same material as sheet, minimum 2
inches (50 mm) wide, interlockable with sheet.
C. Form pieces in longest possible lengths.
D. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch (13 mm); miter and seam
corners.
E. Form material with flat lock seams.
F. Solder shop formed metal joints. After soldering, remove flux.
Wipe and wash solder joints clean. Weather seal joints.
G. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch (450 mm)
long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant.
H. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4
inch (6 mm) and hemmed to form drip.
I. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches (50 mm) over
roofing gravel. Return and brake edges.
2.05 FINISH
A. Copper to be natural finish.
PART 3
EXECUTION
February 28, 2003
SECTION 07620-4
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND
TRIM
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents
through roof are solidly set, reglets in place, and nailing
strips located.
B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place,
sealed, and secure.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting
installation.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Conform to drawing details in the SMACNA manual.
B. Insert flashings into reglets to form tight fit. Secure in place
with lead wedges. Pack remaining spaces with lead wool. Seal
flashings into reglets with sealant.
C. Secure gutters and downspouts in place using fasteners.
D. Slope gutters 1/4 inch per foot (20 mm/m) minimum.
E. Connect downspouts to gutters. Seal connection watertight.
F. Set splash pads under downspouts.
G. Seal metal joints watertight.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection will be performed under provisions of
Section 01400.
B. Inspection will
installation
to
requirements.
involve surveillance of work during
ascertain
compliance
with
specified
END OF SECTION 07620
February 28, 2003
SECTION 07620-5
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND
TRIM
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 07900
JOINT SEALERS
PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
Section includes sealants and joint backing, and
accessories.
Related Sections:
1.
Section 07260 - Vapor Retarders: Sealants
required in conjunction with vapor retarders.
2.
Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies:
Acoustic sealant.
1.2 REFERENCES
A.
ASTM C834 - Latex Sealing Compounds.
B.
ASTM C919 - Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical
Applications.
C.
ASTM C920 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
D.
ASTM C1193 - Guide for Use of Joint Sealants.
E.
ASTM D1056 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or
Expanded Rubber.
F.
ASTM D1565 - Flexible Cellular Materials--Vinyl Chloride
Polymers and Copolymers (Open-Cell Foam).
G.
ASTM D1667 - Flexible Cellular Materials--Vinyl Chloride
Polymers and Copolymers (Closed-Cell Foam).
H.
ASTM D2628 - Preformed Polychloroprene Elastomeric Joint
Seals for Concrete Pavements.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal
procedures.
Products Data: Submit data indicating sealant
chemical characteristics, performance criteria,
substrate preparation, limitations, and color
availability.
C.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit
February 28, 2003
07900 - 1
Joint Sealers
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
special procedures, surface preparation, and perimeter
conditions requiring special attention.
D.
Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and
accessories failing to achieve airtight seal, exhibit loss of
adhesion or cohesion, and sealants which do not cure.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Maintain one copy of each referenced document covering
installation requirements on site.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products
specified in this section with minimum three years documented
experience.
B.
Applicator: Company specializing in performing Work of this
section with minimum three years documented experience.
1.6 MOCKUP
A.
Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for mockup.
B.
Construct mockup of sealant joints in conjunction with window,
wall, and door mockups specified in other sections.
C.
Construct mockup with specified sealant types and with other
components noted.
1.
Determine preparation and priming requirements
based on manufacturers recommendations; take
action necessary for correction of failure of
sealant tests on mock-up.
2.
Verify sealants, primers, and other components do not
stain adjacent materials.
D.
Locate where directed by Architect/Engineer.
E.
Incorporate accepted mockup as part of Work.
F.
Remove mockup when directed by Architect/Engineer. 1.7
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 01600 - Products Requirements.
February 28, 2003
07900 - 2
Joint Sealers
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
B.
Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by sealant
manufacturer during and after installation.
1.8 COORDINATION
A.
Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements:
Coordination and project conditions.
B.
Coordinate Work with sections referencing this
section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
JOINT SEALERS
A.
Products Description:
1.
High Performance General Purpose Exterior
(Nontraffic) Sealant : Polyurethane; ASTM C920,
Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, G, and A; single
component.
a.
Color: Standard colors matching finished
surfaces. Colors as selected by Architect.
b.
Applications: Use for:
1)
Control, expansion, and soft joints in
masonry.
2)
Joints between concrete and other
materials.
3)
Joints between metal frames and other
materials.
4)
Other exterior nontraffic joints for
which no other sealant is indicated.
2.
Exterior Metal Lap Joint Sealant: Butyl or
polyisobutylene, non-drying, non-skinning, noncuring.
a.
Applications: Use for concealed sealant bead
in sheet metal work and concealed sealant bead
in siding overlaps.
3.
General Purpose Interior Sealant: Acrylic emulsion
latex; ASTM C834, single component, paintable.
a.
Color: Standard colors matching finished
surfaces Colors as selected.
b.
Applications: Use for interior wall and ceiling
control joints, joints between door and window
frames and wall surfaces, and other interior
joints for which no other type of sealant is
indicated.:
4.
Bathtub/Tile Sealant: White silicone; ASTM C920, Uses M
and A; single component, mildew resistant.
February 28, 2003
07900 - 3
Joint Sealers
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
5.
a.
plumbing fixtures and floor and wall
surfaces, and joints between kitchen and
toilet room, counter tops and wall surfaces.
Acoustical Sealant: Butyl or acrylic sealant; ASTM
C920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses M and A; single
component, solvent release curing, nonskinning.
a.
Applications: Use for concealed locations
only at acoustically rated construction.
1)
Provide sealant bead between top stud runner
and structure and between bottom stud track
and floor.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A.
Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant
manufacturer to suit application.
B.
Joint
Cleaner:
Non-corrosive
and
non-staining
type,
recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint
forming materials.
C.
Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant;
ASTM D1056, sponge or expanded rubber; oversized 30 to 50
percent larger than joint width.
D.
Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant
manufacturer to suit application.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements:
Coordination and project conditions.
B.
Verify substrate surfaces and joint openings are ready to
receive work.
C.
Verify joint backing and release tapes are compatible with
sealant.
3.2 PREPARATION
A.
Remove loose materials and foreign matter impairing
adhesion of sealant.
B.
Clean and prime joints.
February 28, 2003
07900 - 4
Joint Sealers
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
C.
D.
Perform preparation in accordance with ASTM C1193.
Protect elements surrounding Work of this section from damage
or disfiguration.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A.
Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193.
B.
Perform acoustical sealant application work in
accordance with ASTM C919.
C.
Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve
the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
Width/depth ratio of 2:1.
2.
Neck dimension no greater than 1/3 of joint
width.
3.
Surface bond area on each side not less than 75
percent of joint width.
D.
Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.
E.
Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter,
ridges, and sags.
F.
Apply sealant within recommended application temperature
ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied
within these temperature ranges.
G.
Tool joints concave.
H. Precompressed Foam Sealant: Do not stretch; avoid joints
except at corners, ends, and intersections; install with
face 1/8 to 1/4 inch 3 to 6 mm below adjoining surface.
I.
Compression Gaskets: Avoid joints except at ends, corners,
and intersections; seal joints with adhesive; install with
face 1/8 to 1/4 inch 3 to 6 mm below adjoining surface.
3.4 CLEANING
A.
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Final
cleaning.
B.
Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.
3.5 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A.
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Protecting
February 28, 2003
07900 - 5
Joint Sealers
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
installed construction.
B.
Protect sealants until cured. 3.6
SCHEDULE
A.
Exterior Wall Expansion Joints.
B.
Control, Expansion, and Soft Joints in Masonry, and Between
Masonry and Adjacent Work.
C.
Lap Joints in Exterior Sheet Metal Work.
D.
Joints Between Exterior Metal Frames and Adjacent Work (except
masonry).
E.
Under Exterior Door Thresholds.
F.
Interior Joints for Which No Other Sealant is
Indicated.
G.
Control and Expansion Joints in Interior Concrete Slabs
and Floors.
H.
Joints Between Plumbing Fixtures and Walls and Floors, and
Between Counter tops and Walls.
I.
In STC-Rated Walls, Between Metal Stud Track/Runner and
Adjacent Construction, Between Outlet Boxes and Gypsum
Board.
END OF SECTION
February 28, 2003
07900 - 6
Joint Sealers
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 08211
STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Wood doors, stile and rail design.
B.
Wood and glass panels.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 08710 - Door Hardware.
B.
Section 08800 - Glazing.
C.
Section 09900 - Painting: Site finishing doors.
1.3
REFERENCES
A.
AWI - Quality Standards of the Architectural Woodwork
Institute.
B.
HPMA HP - Hardwood and Decorative Plywood.
1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
A.
Section 01300 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals.
B.
Product Data: Indicate stile and rail core materials and
construction; veneer species, type and characteristics.
C.
Shop Drawings: Illustrate door opening criteria,
elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts required,
special beveling.
D.
Samples: Submit two samples of door construction, 12 x 12 inch
(30 x 30 mm) in size cut from top corner of door.
1.5
A.
B.
1.6
SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION
Section 01300 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special
installation instructions.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with AWI Quality Standard Section
1400, Premium Grade. Maintain one copy on site.
February 28, 2003
08211 - 1
Stile and Rail Doors
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
B.
C.
1.7
A.
B.
1.8
Finish doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standard
Section 1500.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products
specified in this section with minimum three years documented
experience.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Transport, handle, store,
and protect products.
Protect doors with resilient packaging. Do not store in damp or
wet areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal
top and bottom edges if stored more than one week. Break seal on
site to permit ventilation.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings.
B.
Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame
and door hardware installation.
1.9 WARRANTY
A.
Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.
B.
Provide warranty to the following term: 1.
Exterior Doors: Five (5) years.
C.
Include coverage for delamination of veneer,
specified
installation
tolerances,
defective
telegraphing core construction.
PART 2
2.1
warping beyond
materials,
and
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
A. Select No. 1 Fir. 2.2
DOOR TYPES
A.
Exterior Doors: Restore to match existing historic dimensions
and construction; mortised and tenoned joints.
B.
Transom Panels: To match historic where missihng element occur
in the existing units.
2.3
ADHESIVE
A. Adhesive: Type I - waterproof.
February 28, 2003
08211 - 2
Stile and Rail Doors
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Molding: Wood, of same species as door facing, shaped to match
historic shape.
2.5
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standards
requirements.
B.
Astragals for Double Doors: Wood shaped, overlapping and recessed
to match historic shape.specifically for double doors.
C.
Field fit doors for frame opening dimensions at the site.
D.
Cut and configure exterior door edge to receive weather stripping
devices. Provide edge clearances in accordance with AWI 1600.
2.6
FINISH
A. Factory finish with two coats primer prior to shipping doors to
the site.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
A.
Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings: Verification of
existing conditions before starting work.
B.
Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
C.
3.2
Modifying doors to frame openings that are not plumb or are out of
tolerance for size or alignment. Historic trim is to be used first
in relocation of doors.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standards
requirements.
B.
Trim door width by cutting equally on both jamb edges.
C.
Trim door height by cutting bottom edges to a maximum of 3/4
inch (19 mm) .
D.
Machine cut for hardware.
E.
Coordinate installation of glass and glazing.
February 28, 2003
08211 - 3
Stile and Rail Doors
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
3.3
A.
INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
Conform to AWI requirements for fit, clearance, and joinery
tolerances.
B.
Maximum Vertical Distortion (Bow): 1/8 inch (3 mm) measured with
straight edge or taut string, top to bottom, over an imaginary 36
x 84 inch(915 X 2 130 mm) surface area.
C.
Maximum Width Distortion (Cup): 1/8 inch (3 mm) measured with
straight edge or taut string, edge to edge, over an imaginary 36
x 84 inch(915 X 2 130 mm) surface area.
ADJUSTING
3.4
A.
Section 01700 - Contract Closeout:
work.
B.
Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement.
C.
Adjust closer for full closure.
3.5
A.
Adjusting installed
SCHEDULE
Refer to Door and Frame Schedule on Drawings.
END OF SECTION
February 28, 2003
08211 - 4
Stile and Rail Doors
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 08212
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
Section includes flush wood doors configuration fire rated.
Related Sections:
1.
Section 08112 - Custom Steel Frames.
2.
Section 08710 - Door Hardware.
3.
Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Site
finishing of wood doors.
1.2 REFERENCES
A.
ANSI A135.4 - Basic Hardboard.
B.
ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation Class.
C.
AWI (Architectural Woodwork Institute) - Quality Standards
of the Architectural Woodwork Institute.
D.
HPVA HP (Hardwood Plywood and Veneer Association
formerly HPMA) - Hardwood and Decorative Plywood.
E.
NEMA (National Electric Manufacturers Association) LD-3 - High
Pressure Decorative Laminates.
F.
NFPA 80 (National Fire Protection Association) - Fire Doors
and Windows.
G.
NFPA 252 (National Fire Protection Association) - Standard
Method of Fire Tests for Door Assemblies.
H.
UL (Underwriters Laboratories Inc.) - Building
Materials Directory.
I.
UL 10B (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.) - Fire Tests of Door
Assemblies.
J.
WH (Warnock Hersey) - Directory of Listed Products. 1.3
SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal
February 28, 2003
08212 - 1
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Illustrate door opening criteria, elevations,
sizes, types, swings, undercuts required, special blocking for
hardware.
C.
Product Data: Submit information on door core materials
and construction, and on veneer species, type and
characteristics.
D.
E.
1.4
1.5
Samples: Submit two samples of door veneer, 6”x6” inch in
size illustrating wood grain.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special
installation instructions.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform Work in accordance with AWI Quality Standard
Section 1300, Custom Grade.
B.
Fire Door Construction:
C.
Installed Fire Rated Door Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80
for fire rated class B.
D.
Maintain one copy of each document on site.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
1.6
1.7
Conform to NFPA 252.
Manufacturer:
Company specializing in manufacturing
products specified in this section with minimum three
years documented experience.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Product storage
and handling requirements.
B.
Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with
AWI Section 1300.
COORDINATION
A.
Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements:
Coordination and project conditions.
B.
Coordinate Work with door opening construction, door frame
and door hardware installation.
February 28, 2003
08212 - 2
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
1.8 WARRANTY
A.
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Product
warranties and product bonds.
B.
Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond
specified installation tolerances, defective materials, and
telegraphing core construction.
C.
Furnish manufacturer’s “Life of Installation” warranty for
interior doors.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
A.
Product Description:
Solid core flush wood doors; wood
veneer facing material; fire rated types; site finished;
wood doors.
1.
Flush Interior Doors: 1-3/4 (44 mm) thick; solid core,
seven ply construction, fire rated, as indicated on
Drawings.
2.2 COMPONENTS
A.
Solid Core, Fire Rated: AWI Section 1300, Type FD 3/4. 1.
Wood: Select White Birch.
B.
Interior Veneer Facing: AWI Custom quality wood, rotary
cut with pair matched grain, opaque finish. 1. Wood:
Select White Birch.
C.
Facing Adhesive: Type I - waterproof. 2.3
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate fire rated doors in accordance with AWI Quality
Standards and to UL requirements. Attach fire rating label to
door.
B.
Furnish lock blocks at lock edge and top of door for closer
for hardware reinforcement.
C.
Vertical Exposed Edge of Stiles: Of same species as veneer
facing.
D.
Fit door edge trim to edge of stiles after applying
February 28, 2003
08212 - 3
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
veneer facing.
E.
Bond edge banding to cores.
F.
Factory machine doors for finish hardware in accordance with
hardware requirements and dimensions. Do not machine for
surface hardware. Furnish solid blocking for through bolted
hardware.
G.
Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions
identified on shop drawings.
H.
Provide edge clearances in accordance with AWI 1300. 2.4
SHOP FINISHING
A.
Factory finish doors in accordance with
Architect/Engineer provided sample.
B.
Seal door top edge with color sealer to match door facing.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements:
Coordination and project conditions.
B.
Verify opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
C.
Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb
or are out-of-tolerance for size or alignment.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A.
Install fire rated doors in accordance with AWI Quality
Standard, NFPA 80 and to requirements for fire rating label by
UL
B.
Trim door height by cutting bottom edges to maximum of 3/4
inch (19 mm) .
Trim fire door height at bottom edge only, in accordance
with fire rating requirements.
1.
C.
D.
Machine cut doors for hardware installation.
Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames
specified in Section 08112 and hardware
February 28, 2003
08212 - 4
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
specified in Section 08710.
E.
Install door louvers plumb and level.
F.
Site finish doors in accordance with Section 09900. 3.3
INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A.
Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances.
B.
Conform to AWI requirements for fit and clearance
tolerances.
C.
Conform to AWI Section 1300 requirements for maximum
diagonal distortion.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A.
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Testing,
adjusting, and balancing.
B.
Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement.
C.
Adjust closer for full closure.
3.5 SCHEDULE
A.
Refer to Door Schedule on the drawings.
END OF SECTION
February 28, 2003
08212 - 5
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 08550
WOOD SINGLE HUNG WINDOW
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Wood magnum single hung windows complete with hardware,
glazing, weather strip, insect screen, simulated divided
lite, jamb extension, and standard or specified anchors,
trim, attachments, and accessories.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 01300—Submittal Procedures: Shop Drawings,
Product Data, and Samples.
B.
Section 01620—Product Options.
1.
Section 01600—Product Substitution Procedures.
C.
Section 01600—Product Delivery.
D.
Section 01600—Storage and Handling Requirements.
E.
Section 01700—Examination.
F.
Section 01700—Preparation.
G.
Section 01700—Execution.
H.
Section 01700—Cleaning.
I.
Section 01700—Protecting Installed Construction.
J.
Section 07900—Joint Sealants: Sill sealant and
perimeter caulking.
K.
Section 09900—Paints and Coatings: Paint or stain other
than factory applied finish.
1.3 REFERENCES
A.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1.
E 283-91: Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage
Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors.
2.
E 330-90: Standard Test Method for Structural
Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtains Walls,
February 28, 2003
08550 - 1
Wood Single Hung Windows
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
3.
4.
5.
and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure
Difference.
E 547-93: Standard Test Method for Water Penetration
of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Cyclic
Static Air Pressure Differential.
E 774-92: Specification for Sealed Insulated Glass
Units.
C 1036-91: Standard Specification for Flat Glass.
B.
American National Standards Institute / National Wood Window
and Door Association (ANSI / NWWDA):I.S.4-94: Industry
Standard for Water Repellent Preservative Treatment for
Millwork.
C.
American Architectural Manufactures Association / Window
and Door Manufactures Association (AAMA / WDMA): 101 /
I.S.2-97: Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC)
and Wood Windows and Glass Doors.
D.
Insulating Glass Manufactures Association / Insulating Glass
Certification Council (SIGMA / IGCC).
E.
National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC): 101-97: Procedure
for Determining Fenestration Product Thermal Properties.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Design and Performance Requirements:
1.
Window Units shall be designed to comply with AAMA /
WDMA I.S.2-97 H-LC35.
2.
Air leakage shall not exceed the following when tested
at 1.57 psf according to ASTM E 283-91: 0.30 cfm per
square foot of frame.
3.
No water penetration shall occur when units are tested
at the following pressure according to ASTM E 547-93:
4.5 psf.
4.
Window assembly shall withstand the following positive
or negative uniform static air pressure difference
without damage when tested according to ASTM E 330-90:
45 psf.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings under provisions of
Section 01300.
February 28, 2003
08550 - 2
Wood Single Hung Windows
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
1.6
B.
Product Data: Submit catalog data under provisions of Section
01300.
C.
Samples:
1.
Submit corner section under provisions of Section 01300.
2.
Include glazing system, quality of construction, and
specified finish.
D.
Quality Control Submittals: Certificates: Submit
manufacture’s certifications indicating compliance
with specified performance and design requirements
under provisions of Section 01300.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.7
1.8
Emergency Requirements: Emergency Egress or Rescue:
Comply with requirements for sleeping units of Uniform
Building Code.
DELIVERY
A.
Comply with provisions of Section 01600.
B.
Deliver in original packaging and protect from
weather.
STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Prime or seal wood surfaces, including surface to be
concealed by wall construction, if more than thirty (30)
days will expire between delivery and installation.
B.
Store window units in an upright position in a clean and dry
storage area above ground and protect from weather under
provisions of Section 01660.
1.9 WARRANTY
A.
Windows shall be warranted to be free from defects in
manufacturing, materials, and workmanship for a period of ten
(10) years from purchase date.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A.
Description: Factory assembled Wood Magnum Single Hung and
related stationary units as manufactured by Marvin
February 28, 2003
08550 - 3
Wood Single Hung Windows
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
Windows and Doors, Warroad, Minnesota. 2.2
WOOD MAGNUM SINGLE HUNG MATERIALS
A.
Frame: Finger jointed edge-glued pine with interior clear
veneer, kiln dried to a moisture content no greater than
twelve (12) percent at the time of fabrication. Water
repellent preservative treated in accordance with ANSI / NWWDA
I.S.4-94. Frame thickness: 11/16 inches (17 mm) at head, 1-1/16
inches
(43 mm) at side jambs, 1-5/16 inches (33 mm) at sill, 14
degree bevel. Frame width: 5-1/2 inches (140 mm) for double
hung and single hung.
B.
Sash: Clear pine kiln dried to a moisture content no greater
than twelve (12) percent at the time of fabrication. Water
repellent preservative treated in accordance with ANSI / NWWDA
I.S.4-94. Sash thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44 mm) for operable
units; 1-3/4 inches
(44 mm). Corners slot and tenoned. Removable exterior glazing
stops. Finger pulls on bottom rail.
C.
Glazing: Select quality complying with ASTM C 1036-91.
Insulating glass SIGMA / IGCC certified to performance level
CBA when tested in accordance with ASTM E 774-92.
1.
Glazing Method: Insulated glass
2.
Glass Type: Low E II
3.
Glazing Seal: Silicone bedding.
D.
Finish:
1.
Exterior: Latex prime coat, white.
2.
Interior: Latex prime coat, white.
E.
Hardware:
1.
Balance System: Double Coil spring block and
tackle with nylon cord and metal clutch.
2.
Jamb Track: Vinyl extrusion with foam backing.
Color: Beige.
3.
Lock: High pressure zinc die-cast cam lock and
keeper. Two locks on glass sizes of 36 inches
(914 mm) and wider. Finish: Phosphate coated and
electrostatically painted bronze baked enamel.
4.
Sash retainer plates: Polycarbonate
thermoplastic. Color: Bronze.
F.
Weather strip: Continuous, leaf weather strip at head jamb
parting stop which seals against top sash; dual durometer
double leaf at check rail; bulb dual
February 28, 2003
08550 - 4
Wood Single Hung Windows
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
durometer weather strip at bottom rail. Leaf weather strip at
vinyl hardware track. Color: Beige.
G.
Jamb Extension: Factory installed jamb extension for wall
thickness indicated or required. Finish: Match interior
frame finish.
H.
Insect Screens: Factory installed screen. Screen mesh, 18 by
16: Charcoal fiberglass Black aluminum wire. Aluminum Frame
3/8 inch by 15/16 inch (10 mm by 24 mm). Finish: Bronze
Bahama brown.
I.
Simulated Divided Lites (SDL): 7/8 inch (22 mm) wide with
internal spacer bars pine, adhered to glass with double
coated acrylic foam tape.
1.
Pattern: Custom lite layout.
2.
Finish: Match sash finish.
2.3 ACCESSORIES AND TRIM
A.
Installation and Hardware Accessories:
1.
Aluminum drip cap. Finish: Evergreen.
2.
Installation brackets: 6-3/8 inches (162 mm).
3.
Masonry brackets.
4.
Sash lifts: High pressure zinc die-cast. Color:
Bronze.
B.
Exterior Wood Moulding:
1.
Profile: Brick mould casing Flat casing as
indicated on drawings.
2.
Finish: Match exterior frame finish.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verification of Conditions: Before Installation, verify
openings are plumb, square, and of proper dimension as
required in Section 01700. Report frame defects or
unsuitable conditions to the General Contractor before
proceeding.
B.
Acceptance of Conditions: Beginning of installation
confirms acceptance of existing conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with Section 01700.
B.
Assemble and install window unit according to
February 28, 2003
08550 - 5
Wood Single Hung Windows
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
manufacturer’s instructions and reviewed shop
drawings.
C.
Install sealant and related backing materials at perimeter
of unit or assembly in accordance with Section 07920 Joint
Sealants. Do not use expansive foam sealant.
D.
Install accessory items as required.
E.
Use finish nails to apply wood trim and mouldings. 3.3
CLEANING
A.
Remove visible labels and adhesive residue according to
manufacture’s instructions.
B.
Leave windows and glass in a clean condition. Final
cleaning as required in Section 01700.
3.4 PROTECTING INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A.
Comply with Section 01700.
B.
Protect windows from damage by chemicals, solvents, paint, or
other construction operations that may cause damage.
END OF SECTION
February 28, 2003
08550 - 6
Wood Single Hung Windows
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 08710
DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A.
Section includes hardware for wood, steel, and
aluminum doors.
1.
Provide door gaskets, including weatherstripping and
seals, and thresholds.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
Section 06410
hardware.
2.
Sectopm 08111
3.
Section 08114
4.
Section 08115
integral with
5.
Section 08212
6.
Section 08310
hardware.
7.
Section 10440
- Custom Cabinets: Cabinet
– Custom Steel Doors.
- Standard Steel Doors.
- Standard Steel Frames: Silencers
steel frames.
- Flush Wood Doors.
- Access Doors and Panels: Door
- Interior Signage.
1.2 REFERENCES
A.
ANSI/BHMA (Builders Hardware Manufacturers
Association) - A156 series.
B.
NFPA 80 (National Fire Protection Association) - Fire Doors
and Windows.
C.
NFPA 252 (National Fire Protection Association) - Fire Tests
of Door Assemblies.
D.
UL 10B (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.) - Safety Fire Tests
of Door Assemblies.
E.
UL 305 (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.) - Safety Panic
Hardware.
F.
UL (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.) - Building
Materials Directory.
G.
WH (Warnock Hersey) - Directory of Listed Products. 1.3
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
February 28, 2003
08710 - 1
Door Hardware
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
A.
Fire Rated Openings: Provide door hardware listed by UL or
Warnock Hersey, or other testing laboratory approved by
applicable authorities.
1.
Hardware: Tested in accordance with NFPA 252.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A.
Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal
procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type
of hardware, schedules, catalog cuts.
2.
Submit manufacturer's parts lists, and templates.
C.
Samples:
1.
Submit one sample of typical hinge, latchset,
lockset, and closer, illustrating style, color, and
finish.
2.
Approved samples may be incorporated into Work.
D.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special
procedures, and perimeter conditions requiring special
attention.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Closeout
procedures.
B.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of
installed cylinders and their master key code.
C.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit data on
operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and
inspection procedures related to preventative
maintenance.
D.
Keys: Deliver with identifying tags to Owner by
security shipment direct from hardware supplier.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform Work in accordance with the following
requirements:
1.
ANSI/BHMA A156 series.
2.
NFPA 80.
3.
UL 305.
February 28, 2003
08710 - 2
Door Hardware
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
B.
Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.7
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing
products specified in this section with minimum three years
documented experience.
B.
Hardware Supplier: Company specializing in supplying
commercial door hardware with minimum three years
documented experience.
C.
Hardware Supplier Personnel: Employ qualified person to
assist in work of this section.
1.8 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING
A.
Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements:
Preinstallation meeting.
B.
Convene minimum one week prior to commencing Work of this
section.
C.
Include persons involved with installation of doors,
frames, and hardware.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Product storage and
handling requirements.
B.
Package hardware items individually with necessary
fasteners, instructions, and installation templates, when
necessary; label and identify each package with door
opening code to match hardware schedule.
1.10 COORDINATION
A.
Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements:
Coordination and project conditions.
B.
Coordinate Work with other directly affected sections
involving manufacture or fabrication of internal
reinforcement for door hardware and recessed items. 1.
Provide templates or actual hardware as required
to ensure proper preparation of doors and frames.
C.
Sequence installation to accommodate required utility
connections.
February 28, 2003
08710 - 3
Door Hardware
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
D.
Coordinate Owner's keying requirements during course of
Work.
1.11 WARRANTY
A.
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Product
warranties and product bonds.
Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for
and door closers.
1.12 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
B.
A.
locksets
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Maintenance
materials.
B.
Furnish special wrenches and tools applicable for each
different and for each special hardware component.
C.
Furnish maintenance tools and accessories supplied by
hardware component manufacturer.
1.13 EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Spare parts and
maintenance products.
B.
Furnish one extra key lock cylinder for each master
keyed group.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
DOOR HARDWARE
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Schlage.
2.
Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product
Requirements.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A.
B.
Lock Trim: Furnish levers with escutcheon plate as
indicated in Schedule.
1.
Do not permit through bolts on solid wood core
doors.
Through Bolts: Do not permit through bolts and grommet nuts
on door faces in occupied areas unless no alternative is
possible.
February 28, 2003
08710 - 4
Door Hardware
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
1.
C.
Do not use through bolts on solid wood core
doors.
Key Cabinet:
1.
Cabinet Construction: Sheet steel construction, piano
hinged door with cylinder type lock master keyed to
building system.
2.
Cabinet Size: Size for Project keys plus
sufficient room to allow for 10 percent growth.
3.
Horizontal metal strips for key hook labeling
with clear plastic strip cover over labels.
4.
Finish: Baked enamel, manufacturer’s standard
finish, white color.
2.3 FINISHING
A.
Finishes: ANSI/BHMA A156.18; furnish following finishes
except where otherwise indicated in Schedule at end of
section.
1.
Hinges:
a.
BHMA 630 and 626, satin finish.
2.
Typical Exterior Exposed and High Use Interior Door
Hardware:
a.
BHMA 626, satin chromium plated brass or
bronze.
3.
Typical Interior Door Hardware:
a.
BHMA 626, satin chromium plated brass or
bronze.
4.
Typical Interior Toilet Room Door Hardware:
a.
BHMA 626, satin chromium plated brass or
bronze.
5.
Closers: Finish appearance to match door
hardware on same face of door.
a.
BHMA 628, satin aluminum, clear anodized.
6.
Thresholds: Finish appearance to match door
hardware on exterior face of door.
a.
BHMA 628, satin aluminum, clear anodized.
7.
Other Items: Furnish manufacturer’s standard finishes
to match similar hardware types on same door, and
maintain acceptable finish considering anticipated use
and BHMA category of finish.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A.
Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements:
Coordination and project conditions.
February 28, 2003
08710 - 5
Door Hardware
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
B.
Verify doors and frames are ready to receive door
hardware and dimensions are as indicated on shop
drawings.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Coordinate mounting heights with door and frame
manufacturers. Use templates provided by hardware item
manufacturer.
Mounting Heights From Finished Floor to Center Line of
Hardware Item: Comply with manufacturer recommendations and
applicable codes where not otherwise indicated.
1. 2. 3.
4.
Cross Bar Type Exit Devices: 38 inch 965 mm.
5.
T
o
Locksets:
38 inch 965 mm.
Push/Pulls:
42 inch 1 067 mm.
p
Dead Locks:
6.
7.
8.
48 inch 1 220 mm.
H
inge: Jamb manufacturer’s standard, but not greater
than 10 inches 254 mm from head of frame to center line
of hinge.
Bottom Hinge: Jamb manufacturer’s standard, but not
greater than 12-1/2 inches 317 mm from floor to
center line of hinge.
Intermediate Hinges: Equally spaced between top and
bottom hinges and from each other.
Hinge Mortise on Door Leaf: 1/4 inch 6.35 mm. to 5/16
inch 7.9 mm from stop side of door.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
B.
Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Testing and
Inspection Services.
Primary Hardware Manufacturer’s Representatives inspect
installation and certify hardware and installation has
been furnished and installed in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions and as specified.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A.
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Testing,
adjusting, and balancing.
B.
Adjust hardware for smooth operation.
February 28, 2003
08710 - 6
Door Hardware
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
3.5 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A.
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Protecting
installed construction.
B.
Do not permit adjacent work to damage hardware or
hardware finish.
3.6 SCHEDULES
A.
The following hardware sets are intended to establish type
and standard of quality when used together with this
section requirements. Examine Drawings and Specifications
and furnish proper hardware for door openings. Sparta
Leavers on all locks. Brass Kick Plates
Hardware Set 1: Public Toilets – D-13, D-16
3 full mortise hinges, BB SS.
Hinges:
Surface mount, ADA.
Closer:
1 each.
Push/Pull:
1” Mortise Dead bolt, Double Cylinder, Series 1992
Lock:
Yes, on push side, 8” high.
Floor mount with hold open hook.
Kickplate:
Yes.
Floor Stop:
Silencers:
Weatherstripping: PK55D by Pemko.
Hardware Set 2: Office Area – D-5, D-6, D-7, D-8.
Hinges:
Lock:
Closer:
Kickplate:
Floor Stop:
Silencers:
3 full mortise hinges, BB.
Bored lock: Office function, Series 4000, D50PD.
Surface mount.
Yes, push side, 8” high.
Dome type.
Yes.
Hardware Set 3: Staff Toilet Type – D-10, D-17
Hinges:
Closer:
Lock:
Kickplate:
Floor Stop:
3 full mortise hinges, BB.
Surface mount ADA.
Bath privacy, Series 4000, D40S.
Yes, push side, 8” high.
Wall Type.
February 28, 2003
08710 - 7
Door Hardware
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
Silencers:
Yes.
Hardware Set 4: - Entry – D-1, D-3.
Hinges:
Closers:
Lock:
8 full mortise, BB, SS
2 surface mount with hold open. ADA
Mortise lock, security classroom function, Series 1000,
L9457.
Astragals:
Pemko 354
Kickplate:
2 – push side, 8” high.
Flush bolts:
2.
Silencers:
Yes.
Floor Stop:
Raised with hook hold open.
Threshold:
Pemko 271 D
Door Bottom:
Pemko 368 DN
Weatherstripping: Pemko – PK55D
Hardware Set 5: Storage – D-2, D-4, D-11, D-12, D-18
Hinges:
Lock:
Kickplate:
Floor stop:
Silencers:
3 full mortise.
Bored lock, Storage lock function, Series 4000, D66PD.
1 – push side, 8” high.
Dome
Yes.
Hardware Set 6: Outside Entry, D-9
Hinges:
Closers:
Lock:
Floor Stop:
Silencers:
3 full mortise hinges. BB SS.
Yes, ADA.
Mortise lock, Office Entry function, Series 1000, L9176.
Dome.
Yes.
END OF SECTION
February 28, 2003
08710 - 8
Door Hardware
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 08830
MIRRORS
PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes glass mirrors for frameless installation,
and mirrors for installation into sections referencing
this section for products and installation.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Sealant and backup material.
2.
Section 10800 – Toilet, Bath and Laundry
Accessories: Metal framed mirrors.
1.2 REFERENCES
A.
ANSI Z97.1 - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of
Test for Safety Glazing Used in Buildings.
B.
ASTM C920 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
C.
ASTM C1036 - Flat Glass.
D.
ASTM C1048 - Heat-Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT
Coated and Uncoated Glass.
E.
ASTM C1172 - Laminated Architectural Flat Glass.
F.
ASTM C1193 - Use of Joint Sealants.
G.
GANA (Glass Association of North America) - Glazing Manual.
H.
GANA (Glass Association of North America) - Sealant Manual.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Limit mirrored glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of
glass with full recovery of glazing materials, whichever is
less based on loading requirements.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
February 28, 2003
08830 - 1
Mirrors
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
A.
Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal
procedures.
B.
Product Data:
1.
Mirror Types: Submit structural, physical and
environmental characteristics, size limitations, special
handling or installation requirements.
2.
Glazing Materials: Submit chemical, functional, and
environmental characteristics, limitations, special
application requirements. Identify available colors.
C.
Samples: Submit two samples 4 x 4 inch 100 x 100 mm in size,
illustrating mirrors, coloration, edge detail and finish.
D.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify mirrors meet or exceed
specified requirements.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual and
GANA Sealant Manual for mirror installation methods.
B.
Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.6
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
B.
Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less
than 50 degrees F 10 degrees C.
C.
Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24
hours after installation of glazing sealants.
1.7 WARRANTY
A.
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Product
warranties and product bonds.
B.
Furnish five year warranty to include coverage for reflective
coating on mirrors and replacement of same.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Spare parts and
maintenance products.
February 28, 2003
08830 - 2
Mirrors
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
COMPONENTS
A.
Public Toilets: Adjustable tilt mirror 0600TA for ADA by
America Specialties with Type 430 Bright Annealed Stainless
Steel Finish.
B.
Staff Toilet Mirror Glass (Type MR-F): ASTM C1036, Type 1
transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality q1 mirror type
with copper and silver coating, and organic overcoating.
1.
Edges: Beveled.
2.
Thickness: Minimum ¼ inch 6 mm unless otherwise
indicated.
3.
Size: Sizes noted on Drawings.
C.
Requests for substitutions will be considered in
accordance with provisions of Section 01600.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A.
Elastomeric Glazing Sealant: Materials compatible with
mirrors and adjacent materials.
1.
Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class
and Use as recommended by manufacturer for mirror
installation; single component; chemical curing;
capable of water immersion without loss of properties;
non-bleeding, non-staining, cured Shore A hardness of
15 to 25.
B.
Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer
hardness.
C.
Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer
hardness, self adhesive on one face.
D.
Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type.
E.
Mirror Adhesive: Chemically compatible with mirror
coating and wall substrate.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements:
Coordination and project conditions.
February 28, 2003
08830 - 3
Mirrors
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
B.
Verify openings for mirrored glazing are correctly sized
and within tolerance.
C.
Verify surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean,
free of obstructions, and ready to receive mirrors.
3.2 PREPARATION
A.
Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.
B.
Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with
substrate compatible primer or sealer.
C.
Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant. 3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
3.4
3.5
Perform installation in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual.
1.
Glazing Sealants: Comply with ASTM C1193.
2.
Set mirrors plumb and level, free of optical
distortion.
3.
Set mirrors with edge clearance free of surrounding
construction including counter tops and backsplashes.
Sealant Installation: Comply with GANA Sealant Manual.
1.
Install mirrors resting on setting blocks. Install
applied stop and center mirror by use of spacer shims at
24 inch 600 mm centers, kept 1/4 inch 6 mm below sight
line.
2.
Fill gaps between mirror and stops with glazing sealant
until flush with sight line. Tool surface to straight
line.
C.
Frameless Adhesive Installation:
1.
Set mirrors with adhesive.
2.
Place plumb and level without visible distortion.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Testing and
Inspection Services 01700 - Execution Requirements:
Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B.
Inspect for quality of glazing.
CLEANING
February 28, 2003
08830 - 4
Mirrors
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
A.
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Final
cleaning.
B.
Remove labels after Work is complete.
C.
Clean mirrors and adjacent surfaces.
END OF SECTION
February 28, 2003
08830 - 5
Mirrors
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 09260
GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A.
B.
Section includes gypsum board and joint treatment; and
textured finish.
Related Sections:
1.
Section 06112 - Framing and Sheathing: Building wood
framing system.
2.
Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Wood
blocking for support of wall attachments.
3.
Section 07213 - Batt Insulation: Acoustic Thermal
insulation.
4.
Section 08310 - Access Doors and Panels: Metal
access panels.
1.2 REFERENCES
A.
American Society for Testing and Materials:
1.
ASTM C36 - Standard Specification for Gypsum
Wallboard.
2.
ASTM C475 - Standard Specification for Joint
Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board.
3.
ASTM C514 - Standard Specification for Nails for the
Application of Gypsum Board.
4.
ASTM C557 - Standard Specification for Adhesives
for Fastening Gypsum Wallboard to Wood Framing.
5.
ASTM C630/C630M - Standard Specification for
Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board.
6.
ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber
Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction
and Manufactured Housing.
7.
ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for
Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.
8.
ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel
Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel
Products or Metal Plaster Bases.
February 28, 2003
09260 - 1
Gypsum Board Assemblies
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
9.
10.
ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory
Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of
Building Partitions and Elements.
ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of
Building Construction and Materials.
B.
Gypsum Association:
1.
GA 214 - Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board
Finish.
2.
GA 216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum
Board.
3.
GA 600 - Fire Resistance Design Manual Sound
Control.
C.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:
1.
UL - Fire Resistance Directory.
D.
Warnock Hersey:
1.
1.3
1.4
1.5
A.
B.
WH - Certification Listings.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal
procedures.
B.
Product Data: Submit data on gypsum board, joint tape.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform Work in accordance with GA-214, GA-216 and GA600.
B.
Maintain one copy of each document on site.
QUALIFICATIONS
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products
specified in this section with minimum three years documented
experience.
Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this
section with minimum three years documented experience.
February 28, 2003
09260 - 2
Gypsum Board Assemblies
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
1.6 MOCKUP
A.
Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for mockup.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
COMPONENTS
A.
Framing Materials:
1.
Fasteners: ASTM C514. ASTM C1002. GA-216.
2.
Adhesive: ASTM C557. GA-216.
B.
Gypsum Board Materials:
1.
Fire Rated Gypsum Board: ASTM C36; fire resistive type,
UL or WH rated; 5/8 inch thick, maximum available length
in place; ends square cut, tapered and beveled round
edges.
2.
Moisture Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C630/C630M;
5/8 inch thick, maximum available length in
place; ends square cut, tapered and beveled round
edges.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A.
Corner Beads: Metal.
B.
Edge Trim: GA-216; Type U exposed reveal bead.
C.
Joint Materials: GA-216; reinforcing tape, joint
compound, adhesive, and water.
D.
Fasteners: ASTM C1002, Type S12 and GA-216. PART 3
EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION
A.
B.
Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements:
Coordination and project conditions.
Verify site conditions are ready to receive work and opening
dimensions are as instructed by manufacturer.
February 28, 2003
09260 - 3
Gypsum Board Assemblies
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
3.2 EXISTING WORK
A.
Extend existing gypsum board installations using
materials and methods as specified.
B.
Repair and remodel existing gypsum board assemblies which
remain or are to be altered.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A.
Wall Installation:
1.
Install thermal insulation in conjunction with Section
07212.
B.
Gypsum Board Installation:
1.
Install gypsum board in accordance with GA-216 and
GA-600.
2.
Erect single layer fire rated gypsum board
vertically, with edges and ends occurring over firm
bearing.
3.
Use screws when fastening gypsum board to wood
furring or framing.
4.
Place corner beads at external corners as indicated on
Drawings. Use longest practical length. Place edge trim
where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials as
indicated on Drawings.
C.
Joint Treatment:
1.
Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners
to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes.
2.
Feather coats on to adjoining surfaces so that camber
is maximum 1/32inch.
3.
Taping, filling, and sanding is not required at
surfaces behind adhesive applied ceramic tile.
D.
Texture Finish: Spray apply finish texture coating. 3.4
ERECTION TOLERANCES
A.
B.
Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances.
Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from
Flat Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
END OF SECTION
February 28, 2003
09260 - 4
Gypsum Board Assemblies
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 09300
TILE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A.
B.
Section includes ceramic, tile for wall applications; using
thin-set application method.
Related Sections:
1.
Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
1.2 REFERENCES
A.
American National Standards Institute:
1.
ANSI A108.1 - Installation of Ceramic Tile, A
collection.
2.
ANSI A108.10 - Specifications for Installation of Grout
in Tilework.
3.
ANSI A108.1A - Specifications for Installation of Ceramic
Tile in the Wet-Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar.
4.
ANSI A108.1B - Specifications for Installation of
Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar
Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex Portland Cement
Mortar.
5.
ANSI A108.1C - Specifications for Contractors Option:
Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method with
Portland Cement Mortar -or-Installation of Ceramic Tile
on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with DrySet or Latex Portland Cement Mortar.
6.
ANSI A108.4 - Specifications for Ceramic Tile
Installed with Organic Adhesives or WaterCleanable Tile Setting Epoxy Adhesive.
7.
ANSI A108.5 - Specifications for Ceramic Tile
Installed with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or
Latex-Portland Cement Mortar.
8.
ANSI A108.6 - Specifications for Ceramic Tile
Installed with Chemical-Resistant, Water-Cleanable
Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy.
February 28, 2003
09300 - 1
Tile
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
ANSI A108.7 - Specifications for Electrically Conductive
Ceramic Tile Installed with Conductive Dry-Set Portland
Cement Mortar.
ANSI A108.8 - Specifications for Ceramic Tile
Installed with Chemical-Resistant Furan Mortar and
Grout.
ANSI A108.9 - Specifications for Ceramic Tile
Installed with Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout.
ANSI A118.1 - Standard Specification for Dry-Set
Portland Cement Mortar.
ANSI A118.3 - Chemical-Resistant, WaterCleanable, Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy and
Water-Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive.
ANSI A118.4 - Latex-Portland Cement Mortar.
ANSI A118.5 - Chemical-Resistant Furan Mortar and
Grout.
ANSI A118.6 - Ceramic Tile Grouts.
ANSI A118.8 - Modified Epoxy Emulsion
Mortar/Grout.
ANSI A118.9 - Test Methods and Specifications for
Cementitious Backer Units.
ANSI A136.1 - Organic Adhesives for Installation of
Ceramic Tile.
ANSI A137.1 - Ceramic Tile.
B.
American Society for Testing and Materials:
1.
ASTM C847 - Standard Specification for Metal Lath.
C.
Tile Council of America:
1.
TCA - Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A.
Section 01300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal
procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate tile layout, color arrangement,
perimeter conditions, junctions with dissimilar materials,
control and expansion joints, and setting details.
C.
Product Data: Submit instructions for using grouts and
adhesives.
February 28, 2003
09300 - 2
Tile
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
D.
Samples: Submit mounted tile and grout on one plywood panel,
12 x 12 inch in size illustrating pattern, color variations,
and grout joint size variations.
E.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed
specified requirements.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
1.5
1.6
A.
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Closeout
procedures.
B.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit recommended cleaning
methods, cleaning materials, stain removal methods, and
polishes and waxes.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform Work in accordance with TCA Handbook and ANSI
A108 Series/A118 Series.
B.
Maintain one copy of each document on site.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
B.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products
specified in this section with minimum three years documented
experience.
Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this
section with minimum three years documented experience.
1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A.
Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Preinstallation meeting.
B.
Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this
section.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Product storage and
handling requirements.
February 28, 2003
09300 - 3
Tile
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
B.
Protect adhesives and grouts from freezing or
overheating.
1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
B.
Do not install adhesives and grouts in unventilated
environment.
C.
Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees
F during installation of mortar materials.
1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Spare parts and
maintenance products.
B.
Supply two sq ft of each size, color, and surface finish
of tile specified.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
TILE
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
American Olean Tile Co. Model A Series – Unglazed Ceramic
Mosaics.
2.
Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product
Requirements.
2.2 COMPONENTS
A.
Ceramic Mosaic Tile: ANSI A137.1, conforming to the
following:
1.
Size: 2 x 2 x1/4 inch.
2.
Shape: Square.
3.
Edge: All Purpose
4.
Surface Finish: Slip resistant.
5.
Color: A-27 Sand, A-42 Cinnabar, R-23 Jewel
Green. 6.
B.
Adhesive Materials:
1.
Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1, thin-set bond type.
February 28, 2003
09300 - 4
Tile
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
2.
C.
Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A118.3, thin-set bond type.
Grout Materials:
1.
Grout: Latex-Portland cement type as specified in ANSI
A118.6.
a.
Color: To approximate the adjacent tile color.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements:
Coordination and project conditions.
B.
Verify surfaces are ready to receive work. 3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Protect surrounding work from damage.
B.
Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean.
C.
Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing
substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances.
D.
Prepare substrate surfaces for adhesive installation. 3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern
through openings.
B.
Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant
joint space. Form corners and bases neatly.
C.
Place tile with joints uniform in width, subject to
variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joints
watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or
excess grout.
1.
Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/8 inch.
D.
Form internal angles square and external angles
square.
February 28, 2003
09300 - 5
Tile
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
E.
Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.
F.
Keep control joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant
to joints.
G.
Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to
grouting.
H.
Grout tile joints. Use standard grout unless otherwise
indicated.
I.
Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar
materials and junction of dissimilar planes.
J.
Installation - Wall Tile:
1.
Over interior concrete and masonry install in
accordance with TCA Handbook Method W202, thinset with dry-set or latex-portland cement bond
coat.
3.4
3.5
3.6
CLEANING
A.
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Final
cleaning.
B.
Clean tile and grout surfaces.
PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A.
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Protecting
installed construction.
B.
Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for
4 days after installation.
SCHEDULES
A.
B.
Colors:
1.
A-27 Sand
2.
A-42 Cinnabar
3.
R-23 Jewel Green
Restrooms:
1.
Men’s: Measured from the floor, wall installation to be
36” high color #2, 48” color#1 above and finish off to
ceiling with Color #2. Adjust
February 28, 2003
09300 - 6
Tile
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
dimensions so that the top color in installed in line
with the head of the window and not partially below.
2.
Women’s: Measured from the floor, wall installation to be
36” high color #3, 48” color#1 above and finish off to
ceiling with Color #3. Adjust dimensions so that the top
color in installed in line with the head of the window and
not partially below.
END OF SECTION
February 28, 2003
09300 - 7
Tile
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 09520
ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS PART
1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general conditions of Contract, including General
and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification
sections apply to work of this section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Acoustical Wall panel units.
2. Required exposed trim and support channels.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 09260 – Gypsum Board
C
Alternates
1. Prior Approval: Unless otherwise provided for in the
Contract Documents, proposed product substitutions may be
submitted no later than TEN (10) working days prior to the
date established for receipt of bids. Acceptability of a
proposed substitution is contingent upon the Architect's
review of the proposal for acceptability and approved
products will be set forth by Addenda. If included in a Bid
are substitute products which have not been approved by
Addenda, the specified products shall be provided without
additional compensation.
2. Submittals which do not provide adequate data for the
product evaluation will not be considered. The proposed
substitution must meet all requirements of this Section.
including, but not necessarily limited to, the following:
Single source materials suppliers (if specified in Section
1.5); acoustical performance, fire resistance performance,
panel design, size, composition, color, and finish,
compliance with the referenced standards.
February 28, 2003
09520 - 1
Acoustical Wall Panels
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. ASTM C423 "Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption
Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method".
2. ASTM E84 "Standard Test Method for Surface Burning
Characteristics of Building Materials".
3. ASTM E1264 “Classification for Acoustical Ceiling
Products”.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical
literature and installation instructions.
B.
Samples: Minimum 6" x 6" samples of specified acoustical
panel; minimum 4" long samples of attachment method including
trim.
C.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing how panels are to
be laid out on the walls, details of trim members, and width
of panels. Width of panels and location of vertical seams are
critical.
D.
Certifications: Manufacturer's certifications that products
comply with specified requirements, including laboratory
reports showing compliance with specified tests and
standards.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide acoustical wall panel
units and trim components by a single manufacturer.
B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Indentify
acoustical wall panels with appropriate markings of
applicable testing and inspecting organization.
1. Surface Burning Characteristics: As follows per
ASTM E84 and complying with ASTM
E1264 for Class
A Products:
a. Flame Spread: 25 or less.
b. Smoke Developed: 50 or less.
C.
Coordination: Coordinate acoustical wall panel work
with installers of related work including, but not
February 28, 2003
09520 - 2
Acoustical Wall Panels
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
necessarily limited to, building insulation, gypsum drywall,
finish carpentry, acoustical ceiling systems, mechanical
systems, and electrical systems.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Prior to their installation, allow acoustical panel units to
reach room temperature and have a stabilized moisture content
within the acoustical panel unit manufacturer's recommended
limitations.
B.
Deliver
materials
suitably store to
sunlight,
surface
conditions.
C.
Handle components to prevent panel edge damage or any other
damage to components.
in
manufacturer's
unopened
packages;
protect against exposure to moisture,
contamination,
and
other
unacceptable
1.7 WARRANTY
Wall panels shall be free from warping and delamination as a
direct result of defects in material or factory workmanship
for ten years from date of installation of the wall
material.The warranty does not extend to any failure or defect
of any adhesive or other component of any attachment system or
accessory used in the installation of the product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Wall Panels:
1. Armstrong World Ind., Inc.
2.2 ACOUSTICAL WALL UNITS
A.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Acoustical Wall Panels, AWP1
Surface Texture: Smooth
Composition: Fiberglass
Color: White
Size: 48 inches x 96 inches x 1 inch
Edge Profile: Square cut edge
Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) :
February 28, 2003
09520 - 3
Acoustical Wall Panels
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
a. A mounting (Direct to wall) – Painted Nubby (0.70)
7. Composite Flame Spread: Class A
8. Acceptable Product: (Optima Acoustical Wall Panel, Item
#3154) (Painted Nubby Acoustical Wall Panel, Item #3104)
B.
TRIM ACCESSORIES:
1. "H" Channel, 1-5/8 inches x 8 feet x 1”, Item #3108
2. "C" Channel, 1 inch x 8 feet x 1 inch, Item #3107 PART 3
- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION
A. The building shall be properly closed and under occupancy temperature
and humidity conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Any relatively smooth interior surface such as drywall or
plaster is suitable. For block, brick or concrete, first apply
a polyethylene film to the wall as an airflow and vapor
barrier, and then apply horizontal furring strips.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A.
Panels should be installed a minimum of 6 feet above
finished floor.
B.
Application:
1. Attach the "C" Channels that will carry the weight of the
panels using mechanical fasteners appropriate for the wall
structure or furring strips. Adhesive may be used in
conjunction with the mechanical fasteners, but should not be
used as the sole means of support at the base of the
installation.
2. Furring strips, if used, should be should be horizontally
spaced 12 inches on center when panels are installed below
5 feet from the finished floor; and 24 inches on center
when installed above 5 feet from finished floor.
3. Exposed edges of furring strips may be field
painted.
February 28, 2003
09520 - 4
Acoustical Wall Panels
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
4. Fasteners used to attach “C” and “H” channels should be
installed no more than 2 feet on center.
5. "H" Channels are used at locations where two panels butt
against one another.
6. "C" Channels are used at the perimeters of the installation
and to frame any openings that may have to be cut through a
panel.
3.4 ADJUST AND CLEAN
Damaged, soiled, or discolored wall panels installed under
work in this section shall be cleaned or removed and replaced
at no additional cost to the owner.
3.5 CLEANING
Painted Nubby
A commercial vacuum system with 100-inches/H2O vacuum capacity
is recommended for removing dust particles. The vacuum system
cleaning attachment should be a 3” diameter wand with natural
hair bristle. A HEPA vacuum filter is recommended to minimize
air borne dust during the cleaning process. Avoid using a
rubbing motion directly on the surface of the Painted Nubby
panel. Use a blotting action to minimize rubbing off the Painted
Nubby particles.
END OF SECTION
February 28, 2003
09520 - 5
Acoustical Wall Panels
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 09670
FLUID-APPLIED FLOORING
PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
Section includes fluid-applied flooring.
Related Sections:
1.
Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Joint between base
and wall surface.
1.2 REFERENCES
A.
ASTM D570 - Test Method for Water Absorption of
Plastics.
B.
ASTM D638 - Test Method for Tensile Properties of
Plastics.
C.
ASTM D695 - Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid
Plastics.
D.
ASTM D905 - Test Method for Strength Properties of
Adhesive Bonds in Shear by Compression Loading.
E.
ASTM D1044 - Test Method for Resistance of Transparent Plastic
to Surface Abrasion.
F.
ASTM D1360 - Fire Retardancy of Paints (Cabinet Method)
.
G.
ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning
Characteristics of Building Materials.
H.
ASTM E96 - Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of
Materials.
I.
ASTM E648 - Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of FloorCovering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Source.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A.
Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal
procedures.
B.
Product Data: Submit data on specified products,
February 28, 2003
09670 - 1
Fluid-applied Flooring
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
describing physical and performance characteristics; sizes,
patterns and colors available.
C.
Samples: Submit two samples, 6 x 6 inch (150 x 150 mm) in
size illustrating color and pattern for each floor material
for each color specified.
D.
Manufacturer’s Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed
specified requirements.
E.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special
procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special
attention, and curing time.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Closeout
procedures.
B.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance
procedures, recommended maintenance materials, procedures
for stain removal, repairing surface, and suggested schedule
for cleaning.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products
specified in this section with minimum three years documented
experience.
B.
Applicator: Company specializing in performing Work of this
section with minimum three years documented experience.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Product storage and
handling requirements.
B.
Store materials in dry, secure area.
C.
Store materials for three days prior to installation in area
of installation to achieve temperature stability.
1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
February 28, 2003
09670 - 2
Fluid-applied Flooring
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
B.
Maintain minimum temperature in storage area of 55 degrees
F (13 degrees C).
C.
Maintain ambient temperature required by manufacturer 72
hours prior to, during, and 24 hours after installation of
materials.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Spare parts and
maintenance products.
B.
Supply 1 gal (4 l) of flooring material, of each color
selected.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FLUID-APPLIED FLOORING
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Pittsburgh Paints, Aguapon Polyamide-Epoxy Clear
Concrete Finish.
2.
Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product
Requirements.
2.2 COMPONENTS
A.
Fluid-Applied Flooring: Epoxy, two component,
thermosetting.
1.
Base Coat: 200 SF per mixed gallon maximum; color
clear.
2.
Top Coat: Two component; 250 SF per mixed gallon maximum;
color clear.
3.
Non-slip Surfacing: Mineral, grey color.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A.
Subfloor Filler: Type recommended by flooring material
manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements:
Coordination and project conditions.
Verify floor surfaces are smooth and and are ready to receive
work.
February 28, 2003
09670 - 3
Fluid-applied Flooring
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
C.
Verify concrete floors have aged 3 to 6 months, exhibit
negative alkalinity, carbonization, and dusting, and are
acceptable to flooring manufacturer.
D.
Verify floor and lower wall surfaces are free of substances
capable of impairing adhesion of adhesive and finish
materials.
3.2 PREPARATION
A.
Prepare surfaces as required by manufacturer.
B.
Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks,
joints, holes, and other defects with subfloor filler.
C.
Apply, trowel, and float filler to achieve smooth, flat,
hard surface. Grind irregularities above surface level.
Prohibit traffic until filler is cured.
D.
E.
Clean substrate.
Apply primer as required to prevent "bleed-thru" or
interference with adhesion by substances that cannot be
removed.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A.
Apply each coat of flooring within thickness range
required by manufacturer.
B.
Finish to smooth level surface. 3.4
PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A.
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Protecting
installed construction.
B.
Prohibit traffic on floor finish until cured.
C.
Barricade area to protect flooring until cured.
END OF SECTION
February 28, 2003
09670 - 4
Fluid-applied Flooring
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 09900
PAINTS AND COATINGS
PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes surface preparation and field application
of paints, stains, varnishes, and other coatings.
1.2 REFERENCES
A.
ASTM D16 - Terminology Relating to Paint, Varnish,
Lacquer, and Related Products.
B.
ASTM D4442 - Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content
Measurement of Wood and Wood-Base Materials.
C.
NACE (National Association of Corrosion Engineers) Industrial Maintenance Painting.
D.
NPCA (National Paint and Coatings Association) - Guide to U.S.
Government Paint Specifications.
E.
PDCA (Painting and Decorating Contractors of America) Architectural Specifications Manual.
F.
SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council) - Steel
Structures Painting Manual.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A.
Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this
section.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A.
Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal
procedures.
B.
Product Data: Submit data on finishing products and special
coating.
C.
Samples:
1. Submit two paper chip samples, illustrating range of colors
and textures available for each surface finishing product
scheduled.
February 28, 2003
09900 - 1
Paints and Coatings
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
2.
D.
Submit two painted samples, illustrating selected colors
and textures for each color and system selected with
specified coats cascaded. Submit on tempered hardboard,
12 x 12 inch (300 x 300 mm) in size.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special
surface preparation procedures, and substrate conditions
requiring special attention.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Closeout
procedures.
B.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning,
touch-up, and repair of painted and coated surfaces.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products
specified in this section with minimum three years documented
experience.
B.
Applicator: Company specializing in performing work of this
section with minimum five years documented experience.
1.7 MOCKUP
A.
Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Mock-up
requirements.
B.
Construct mockup panel, feet 4 (3.1 m) long by 4 feet (3.1 m)
wide, illustrating coating color, texture, and finish.
C.
Locate where directed by Architect/Engineer.
D.
Remove mockup when directed by Architect/Engineer. 1.8
PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING
A.
Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements:
Preinstallation meeting.
B.
Convene minimum one week prior to commencing Work of this
section.
February 28, 2003
09900 - 2
Paints and Coatings
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas 1.9
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Product storage and
handling requirements.
B.
Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled
containers; inspect to verify acceptability.
C.
Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint,
brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface
preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color
designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing.
D.
Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45
degrees F (7 degrees C) and maximum of 90 degrees F (32
degrees C), in ventilated area, and as required by
manufacturer's instructions.
1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
B.
Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures
are outside temperature ranges required by paint product
manufacturer.
C.
Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow when
relative humidity is outside humidity ranges, or moisture
content of surfaces exceed those required by paint product
manufacturer.
D.
Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees
F (7 degrees C) for interiors; 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) for
exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's
instructions.
E.
Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish and Shellac
Finishes: 65 degrees F (18 degrees C) for interior or
exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's
instructions.
F.
Provide lighting level of 80 ft candle (860 lx)
measured mid-height at substrate surface.
1.11 SEQUENCING
A.
Section 01100 - Summary: Work sequence.
February 28, 2003
09900 - 3
Paints and Coatings
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
B.
Sequence application to the following:
1.
Do not apply finish coats until paintable sealant is
applied.
2.
Back prime wood trim before installation of trim.
1.12 WARRANTY
A.
B.
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Product
warranties and product bonds.
Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for paints and
coatings.
1.13 EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Spare parts and
maintenance products.
B.
Supply 1 gallon (4 L) of each color; store where
directed.
C.
Label each container with color, type, texture, room
locations, and date in addition to manufacturer's label.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PAINTS AND COATINGS
A.
Manufacturers: Paint Transparent Finishes, Stain, Primer
Sealers, Block Filler, Field Catalyzed Coatings:
1.
Devoe Paint Co.
2.
The Glidden Co.
3.
PPG Architectural Finishes.
4.
Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product
Requirements.
2.2 COMPONENTS
A.
Coatings: Ready mixed, except field catalyzed
coatings. Prepare coatings:
1.
To soft paste consistency, capable of being readily
and uniformly dispersed to homogeneous coating.
2.
For good flow and brushing properties.
3.
Capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.
February 28, 2003
09900 - 4
Paints and Coatings
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
B.
Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine,
paint thinners and other materials not specifically
indicated but required to achieve finishes specified;
commercial quality.
C.
Patching Materials: Latex filler.
D.
Fastener Head Cover Materials: Latex filler. PART 3
EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION
A.
Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements:
Coordination and project conditions.
B.
Verify surfaces and substrate conditions are ready to receive
Work as instructed by product manufacturer.
C.
Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to
commencement of work. Report conditions capable of
affecting proper application.
D.
Test shop applied primer for compatibility with
subsequent cover materials.
E.
Measure moisture content of surfaces using electronic moisture
meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of
surfaces are below the following maximums:
1.
Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent.
2.
Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12
percent.
3.
Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in
accordance with ASTM D4442.
4.
Exterior Wood: 15 percent, measured in
accordance with ASTM D4442.
5.
Concrete Floors: 8 percent.
3.2 PREPARATION
A.
Surface Appurtenances: Remove electrical plates,
hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings
prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.
B.
Surfaces: Correct defects and clean surfaces capable of
affecting work of this section. Remove or repair existing
coatings exhibiting surface defects.
C.
Marks: Seal with shellac those which may bleed
February 28, 2003
09900 - 5
Paints and Coatings
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
through surface finishes.
D.
Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution
of tri-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water
and allow surface to dry.
E.
Aluminum Surfaces Scheduled for Paint Finish: Remove surface
contamination by steam or high pressure water. Remove
oxidation with acid etch and solvent washing. Apply etching
primer immediately following cleaning.
F.
Asphalt, Creosote, or Bituminous Surfaces Scheduled for Paint
Finish: Remove foreign particles to permit adhesion of
finishing materials. Apply compatible sealer or primer.
G.
Insulated Coverings: Remove dirt, grease, and oil from
canvas and cotton.
H.
Concrete Floors: Remove contamination, acid etch, and rinse
floors with clear water. Verify required acidalkali balance is
achieved. Allow to dry.
I.
Copper Surfaces Scheduled for Paint Finish: Remove
contamination by steam, high pressure water, or solvent
washing. Apply vinyl etch primer immediately following
cleaning.
J.
Copper Surfaces Scheduled for Natural Oxidized Finish: Remove
contamination by applying oxidizing solution of copper acetate
and ammonium chloride in acetic acid. Rub on repeatedly for
required effect. Once attained, rinse surfaces with clear
water and allow to dry.
K.
Gypsum Board Surfaces: Fill minor defects with filler
compound. Spot prime defects after repair.
L.
Galvanized Surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils and
wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer.
M.
Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces Scheduled to Receive Paint
Finish: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali
powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with
solution of trisodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry.
Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with
solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly
February 28, 2003
09900 - 6
Paints and Coatings
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
wetting with water. Allow to dry.
N.
Plaster Surfaces: Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and
imperfections with latex patching plaster. Make smooth and
flush with adjacent surfaces. Wash and neutralize high alkali
surfaces.
O.
Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces: Remove grease, mill scale,
weld splatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale
are evident, remove by power tool wire brushing or
sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply treatment of
phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts
are similarly cleaned. Spot prime paint after repairs.
P.
Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose
primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches
inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel
surfaces. Prime metal items including shop primed items.
Q.
Interior Wood Items Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Wipe
off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal knots, pitch streaks,
and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks
after primer has dried; sand between coats.
R.
Interior Wood Items Scheduled to Receive Transparent Finish:
Wipe off dust and grit prior to sealing, seal knots, pitch
streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and
cracks after sealer has dried; sand lightly between coats.
S.
Exterior Wood Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Remove dust,
grit, and foreign matter. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy
sections. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior paintable
caulking compound after prime coat has been applied.
T.
Exterior Wood Scheduled to Receive Transparent Finish: Remove
dust, grit, and foreign matter; seal knots, pitch streaks, and
sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes with tinted
exterior caulking compound after sealer has been applied.
U.
Glue-Laminated Beams: Prior to finishing, wash surfaces
with solvent, remove grease and dirt.
February 28, 2003
09900 - 7
Paints and Coatings
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
3.3
V.
Wood Doors Scheduled for Painting:
Seal wood door top
and bottom edge surfaces with clear sealer.
W.
Metal Doors Scheduled for Painting:
top and bottom edge surfaces.
Prime metal door
EXISTING WORK
A.
3.4
Extend existing paint and coatings installations using
materials and methods compatible with existing
installations and as specified.
APPLICATION
A.
Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow
applied coats to dry before next coat is applied.
B.
Apply each coat to uniform appearance. Apply each coat of
paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless
specified otherwise.
C.
Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve
required finish.
D.
Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth
to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next
coat.
E.
Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood.
Work fillers into grain before set. Wipe excess from surface.
F.
Prime concealed surfaces of interior and exterior
woodwork with primer paint.
G.
Prime concealed surfaces of interior wood surfaces
scheduled to receive stain or varnish finish with gloss
varnish reduced 25 percent with thinner.
H.
Finishing Mechanical And Electrical Equipment:
1.
Refer to Section 15075 and Section 16050 for
schedule of color coding and identification banding
of equipment, duct work, piping, and conduit.
2.
Paint shop primed equipment. Paint shop finished items
occurring at interior areas.
3.
Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access
panels on mechanical and electrical
February 28, 2003
09900 - 8
Paints and Coatings
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
components and paint separately.
Prime and paint insulated and exposed pipes,
conduit,
boxes,
insulated
and
exposed
ducts,
hangers, brackets, collars and supports, and except
where items are shop finished.
Paint interior surfaces of air ducts and convector and
baseboard heating cabinets visible through grilles and
louvers with one coat of flat black paint to visible
surfaces. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles,
and convector and baseboard cabinets to match face
panels.
Paint exposed conduit and electrical equipment
occurring in finished areas.
Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for
electrical and telephone equipment before installing
equipment.
Color code equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed duct
work in accordance with requirements indicated. Color
band and identify with flow arrows, names, and numbering.
Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light
fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior
to finishing.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Testing and
Inspection Services.
B.
Inspect and test questionable coated areas. 3.6
CLEANING
A.
B.
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Final
cleaning.
Collect waste material which may constitute fire hazard,
place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site.
3.7 SCHEDULE - SHOP PRIMED ITEMS FOR SITE FINISHING
A.
Metal Fabrications: Exposed surfaces of lintels. 3.8
SCHEDULE - EXTERIOR SURFACES
A.
Wood - Painted (Opaque):
1.
One coat of alkyd primer sealer.
February 28, 2003
09900 - 9
Paints and Coatings
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
2.
Two coats of latex enamel, semi-gloss.
B.
Wood - Transparent:
1.
Two coats of preservative stain.
C.
Wood Timber Members:
1.
Two coat of stain.
D.
Concrete, Concrete Block, Restored Masonry, Cement
Plaster:
1.
One coat of primer sealer latex.
2.
Two coats of latex flat.
E.
Steel - Unprimed:
1.
One coat of alkyd primer.
2.
Two coats of latex enamel, gloss.
F.
Steel - Shop Primed:
1.
Touch-up with zinc rich primer.
2.
Two coats of latex enamel, gloss.
G.
Steel - Galvanized:
1.
One coat galvanize primer.
2.
Two coats of latex enamel, gloss.
H.
Aluminum - Mill Finish:
1.
One coat etching primer.
2.
Two coats of alkyd enamel, gloss.
I.
Copper:
1.
One coat etching primer.
2.
Two coats of alkyd enamel, glos.
3.9 SCHEDULE - INTERIOR SURFACES
A.
Wood - Painted:
1.
One coat of alkyd prime sealer.
2.
Two coats of latex enamel, semi-gloss.
B.
Wood - Transparent:
1.
Filler coat (for open grained wood only Latex Wood
Dough by DAP, Inc.).
2.
One coat of stain varnish.
3.
Two coats of varnish satin.
C.
Cabinet Interior: If not laminate covered
1.
One coat of alkyd prime sealer.
2.
One coat of latex enamel, semi-gloss.
February 28, 2003
09900 - 10
Paints and Coatings
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
D.
Wood Timber Members:
1.
One coat of sealer/stain.
2.
Two coats of varnish satin.
E.
Concrete, Concrete Block, Restored Masonry, Cement Plaster:
1.
One coat of primer sealer latex.
2.
Two coats of latex semi-gloss.
F.
Steel - Unprimed:
1.
One coat of alkyd primer.
2.
Two coats of latex enamel, semi-gloss.
G.
Steel - Primed:
1.
Touch-up with alkyd primer.
2.
Two coats of latex enamel, gloss.
H.
Steel - Galvanized:
1.
One coat galvanize primer.
2.
Two coats of latex enamel, gloss.
I.
Aluminum - Mill Finish:
1.
One coat etching primer.
2.
Two coats of alkyd enamel, gloss.
J.
Concrete Floors:
1.
Two coat of acid stain. (see related
specifications)
2.
Two coats of epoxy sealer.(see related
specifications)
K.
Gypsum Board and Plaster Walls:
1.
One coat of white Shellac primer sealer.
2.
Two coats of latex acrylic enamel, semi-gloss.
L.
Gypsum Board and Plaster Ceilings:
1.
One coat of white Shellac primer sealer.
2.
Two coats of latex acrylic enamel, eggshell.
3.10 SCHEDULE – See Drawings
END OF SECTION
February 28, 2003
09900 - 11
Paints and Coatings
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 10160
METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A.
Stainless steel compartment work includes the
following:
1.
Floor-supported, overhead-braced partitions.
B.
Furnish all labor and materials necessary for the
completion of work in this section as shown on the
contract drawings and specified herein.
C.
Work
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Related work specified elsewhere shall include accessories
and anchorage/blocking for attachment of compartments.
in this section shall include, but is not limited to:
Toilet compartments.
Hardware for toilet compartments.
Shop drawings and working drawings.
Manufacturer's guarantee.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
B.
Submit six sets of shop drawings, and details, for
architect's approval
A sample of #4 satin finish stainless steel and hardware
samples shall be submitted for approval to the architect
upon request.
February 28, 2003
10160 – 1
Metal Toilet Compartments
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
2.2 MANUFACTURER
A.
Toilet compartments to be supplied by GLOBAL Steel
Products Corp., Deer Park, New York, or approved equal.
2.3 MATERIALS
A.
Doors and panels shall be 1" thick, constructed of two sheets
of.031 ±.001 gauge galvanized, stretcherleveled quality
stainless steel, formed and bonded under pressure with a nontoxic adhesive to resinimpregnated, sound-deadening full-face
honeycomb core.
B.
Pilasters shall be 1-1/4-thick, constructed of two sheets
of,031 ±,001 gauge, stainless steel, formed and bonded under
pressure with a non-toxic adhesive to a full resinimpregnated, sound-deadening full-face honeycomb core.
2.4 CONSTRUCTION
A.
Doors and panels shall be 1" thick. The edges shall be sealed
with a.031 ±.001 gauge interlocking molding. Molding corners
shall be welded to each other and to face sheets and ground
smooth to form a rigid frame around the component.
B.
Pilasters shall be 1-1/4" thick. Edges shall be sealed
with.031 ±.001 gauge interlocking molding. An inverted stirrup
with a jack bolt for leveling during installation and
permanent height adjustment shall be welded within the base of
each pilaster. "L" brackets shall be coupled to the stirrup
bracket and floor for full range adjustment. A shoe shall
conceal each floor mounting having an internal cross section
conforming to the pilaster, and being formed of type 304
stainless steel having a #4 finish.
C.
Headrail shall be provided to bridge all compartments and
brace the end free standing pilasters to the wall: the
headrail to comprise anodized aluminum with satin finish,
contoured to provide anti-grip features.
February 28, 2003
10160 – 2
Metal Toilet Compartments
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
2.5 HARDWARE
A.
All exposed door hardware shall be of chromium-plated diecast
Zamac and shall be as noted:
1.
Upper door hinge is recessed and interlocked in door and
includes a nylon pin within the plane of the door. Lower
door hinge is recessed in door and includes mating box
and pintle nylon cams which provide the bearing surface.
The cams are adjusted to allow the door to rest at any
position within a 270-degree range.
2.
Door hardware shall include a coat hook, a bumper, a
stop, a keeper, and a concealed latch with emergency
access,
3.
Fasteners shall be of chrome-plated steel: door hinges
will be mounted with theft-proof barrel nuts and
machine screws; hooks and handles will be mounted with
theft-proof, full-thread screws. All other fasteners
will comprise full-threadtheft proof screws.
B.
Wall brackets shall be secured to walls with anchoring and/or
expansion shields.
C.
Pilaster shoes shall be of type 304 stainless steel having
a #4 finish.
D. Headrail shall be provided to bridge all compartments and brace
the end free-standing pilasters to the wall; the headrail to
comprise anodized aluminum with satin finish, contoured to
provide anti-grip features.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Examine areas to receive toilet compartments for correct
height and spacing of anchorage/blocking and plumbing
fixtures that may affect installation of compartments.
Report any discrepancies to the architect.
B.
Take complete and accurate measurements of complete toilet
compartment locations.
February 28, 2003
10160 – 3
Metal Toilet Compartments
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
C.
Start of work constitutes acceptance of job. 3.2 INSTALLATION
A.
Install compartments in a rigid, straight, plumb and level
manner, with steel laid out as shown on the shop drawings and
manufacturer's installation instructions.
B.
All doors and panels to be mounted at 12" above the
finished floor.
C.
Clearance at vertical edges of door shall be uniform top to
bottom.
D.
No evidence of cutting, drilling, and/or patching shall
be visible on the finished work.
E.
Finished surfaces shall be cleaned after installation and be
left free of all imperfections.
3.3 WARRANTY
A.
GLOBAL Steel Products Corp. guarantees its stainless steel
units, properly maintained, against corrosion or discoloration
for 5 years from the date of receipt by the customer. If
materials are found defective during that period for the
reasons listed above, the materials will be replaced free of
charge. No credits or allowances will be issued for any labor
or expenses relating to the replacement of components covered
under the warranty plan. All such expenses are to be born by
the buyer.
PART 4 EXECUTION 4.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements:
Coordination and project conditions.
B.
Verify field measurements are as indicated on shop
drawings.
C.
Verify correct spacing of and between plumbing
fixtures.
February 28, 2003
10160 – 4 Metal Toilet Compartments
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
D. Verify correct location of built-in framing, anchorage,
and bracing.
4.2 INSTALLATION
4.3
4.4
A.
Maintain 3/8 to 1/2 inch space between wall and panels and
between wall and end pilasters.
B.
Attach panel brackets securely to walls using anchor
devices.
C.
Attach panels and pilasters to brackets. Locate head rail
joints at pilaster center lines.
D.
Field touch-up of scratches or damaged enamel finish will
not be permitted. Replace damaged or scratched materials
with new materials.
ERECTION TOLERANCES
A.
Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances.
B.
Maximum Variation From Indicated Position: 1/4 inch.
C.
Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/8 inch.
ADJUSTING
A.
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Testing,
adjusting, and balancing.
B.
Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at
vertical edge of doors, not exceeding 3/16 inch.
C.
Adjust hinges to position doors in partial opened position
when unlatched. Return out swinging doors to closed position.
D.
Adjust adjacent components for consistency of line or plane.
4.5 SCHEDULES
A.
Women’s toilet
END OF SECTION
February 28, 2003
10160 – 5 Metal Toilet Compartments
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 10440
INTERIOR SIGNAGE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes interior signs.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
Section 15075 - Mechanical Identification.
1.2
REFERENCES
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal
procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate sign styles, lettering font,
foreground and background colors, locations, overall
dimensions of each sign.
C.
Samples: Submit two signs, 5 x 6 inch (95 x 115 mm) in size
illustrating type, style, letter font, and colors
specified; method of attachment.
D.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit
installation template and attachment devices.
1.4 QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products
specified in this section with minimum three years documented
experience.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Product storage and
handling requirements.
B.
Package signs, labeled in name groups.
C.
Store adhesive attachment tape at ambient room
temperatures.
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
February 28, 2003
10440 - 1
Interior Signage
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
A.
Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Environmental
conditions affecting products on site.
B.
Do not install signs when ambient temperature is lower than
recommended by manufacturer.
C.
Maintain this minimum temperature during and after
installation of signs.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 INTERIOR SIGNS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product
Requirements.
2.2 COMPONENTS
A.
Raised Letter Signs, Base Material: Solid color acrylic
plastic:
1.
Total Thickness: 1/8 inch (3 mm).
2.
Height: 3 inches (75 mm).
3.
Edges: Beveled.
4.
Character Font: Helvetica.
B.
Graphic Style: Handicapped type.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A.
Tape Adhesive: Double sided tape, permanent adhesive. PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A.
Section 01310 - Project Management and Coordination:
Verification of existing conditions before starting Work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A.
Install signs after doors and surfaces are finished, in
locations as directed by Owner.
B.
Position sign to meet ADA requirements from strike side
of door.
C.
Locate sign on wall surface, level.
February 28, 2003
10440 - 2
Interior Signage
The Canadian Visitor’s Center
Canadian, Texas
3.3 SCHEDULES
A.
Each space, open to the public, is to have a sign with letters
and Braille to indicate the room name and number. The signs
are to be mounted to meet ADA requirements.
END OF SECTION
February 28, 2003
10440 - 3
Interior Signage
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 10800
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A.
B.
Section includes toilet accessories and utility room
accessories.
Related Sections:
1.
Section 08830 - Mirrors: Public toilet mirrors and
staff toilet mirror.
2.
Section 10160 - Metal Toilet Compartments.
1.2 REFERENCES
A.
American Society for Testing and Materials:
1.
ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc
(Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel
Products.
2.
ASTM A269 - Standard Specification for Seamless and
Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General
Service.
3.
ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel
Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron AlloyCoated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
4.
ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Austenitic
Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar.
5.
ASTM B456 - Standard Specification for
Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus
Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium.
6.
ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat
Glass.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A.
Section 01300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal
procedures.
B.
Product Data: Submit data on accessories describing size,
finish, details of function, attachment methods.
February 28, 2003
10800 - 1
Toilet, Bath, and
Laundry Accessories
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
C.
D.
illustrating color and finish.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special
procedures and conditions requiring special attention.
1.4 COORDINATION
A.
Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements:
Coordination and project conditions.
B.
Coordinate the Work with placement of internal wall
reinforcement and reinforcement of toilet partitions to
receive anchor attachments.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
American Specialties, Inc.
2.
Bobrick Washroom Accessories Model.
3.
Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product
Requirements.
2.2 COMPONENTS
A. Accessories - General: Shop assembled, free of dents and
scratches and packaged complete with anchors and fittings,
steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for
installation.
1.
Grind welded joints smooth.
2.
Fabricate units made of metal sheet of seamless
sheets, with flat surfaces.
B.
Keys: Furnish 3 keys for each accessory to Owner.
C.
Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666, Type 304.
D.
Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A269, stainless steel.
E.
Mirror Glass: See Section 08830.
F.
Adhesive: Two component epoxy type, waterproof.
February 28, 2003
10800 - 2
Toilet, Bath, and
Laundry Accessories
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
G.
Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Stainless Steel.
H.
Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended
by accessory manufacturer for component and substrate.
2.3 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES
A.
Toilet Paper Dispenser: Roll-in-reserve type, designed to
allow automatic activation of reserve roll when needed, or
manual activation by pressing release bar, surface-mounted,
stainless steel unit with pivot hinge, tumbler lock.
B.
Paper Towel Dispenser: Folded paper type, stainless steel,
surface-mounted, with viewing slots on sides as refill
indicator and tumbler lock.
1.
Capacity: 1000 single-fold minimum.
C.
Waste Receptacle: Stainless steel, freestanding style with
swing top.
1.
Liner: Removable seamless stainless steel
receptacle.
D.
Soap Dispenser: Soap lather dispenser, wall-mounted, surface,
for with stainless steel cover and horizontal stainless steel
tank and working parts; push type soap valve, check valve,
and window gage refill indicator, tumbler lock.
1.
Minimum Capacity: 48 ounces.
E.
Seat Cover Dispenser: Stainless steel, surfacemounted,
reloading by hinged front panel, tumbler lock.
1.
Minimum capacity: 250 seat covers.
F.
Grab Bars: Stainless steel, 1-1/2 inches outside diameter,
minimum 0.05 inch wall thickness, nonslip grasping surface
finish, concealed flange mounting; 1-1/2 inches clearance
between wall and inside of grab bar.
1.
Length and configuration: As indicated on
Drawings.
2.
Length: inches.
February 28, 2003
10800 - 3
Toilet, Bath, and
Laundry Accessories
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
G.
Combination Sanitary Napkin/Tampon Dispenser:
Stainless steel, surface-mounted.
1.
Door: Seamless 0.05 inch door with returned edges and
tumbler lock.
2.
Cabinet: Fully welded, 0.03 inch thick sheet.
3.
Operation: Free.
4.
Identify dispensers without using brand names.
5.
Minimum capacity: 15 napkins and 20 tampons.
H.
Sanitary Napkin Disposal Unit: Stainless steel, surfacemounted, self-closing door, locking bottom panel with
full-length stainless steel piano-type hinge, removable
receptacle.
2.4 UTILITY ROOM ACCESSORIES
A.
Combination Utility Shelf/Mop and Broom Holder: 0.05 inch
thick stainless steel, Type 304, with 1/2 inch returned
edges, 0.06 inch steel wall brackets.
1.
Drying rod: Stainless steel, 1/4 inch diameter.
2.
Hooks: 2, 0.06 inch stainless steel rag hooks at shelf
front.
3.
Mop/broom holders: 3 spring-loaded rubber cam
holders at shelf front.
4.
Length: 36 inches.
5.
Length: Manufacturer's standard length for number of
holders/hooks.
2.5 FACTORY FINISHING
A.
Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin brushed finish.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements:
Coordination and project conditions.
B.
Verify exact location of accessories for installation.
C.
Verify field measurements are as indicated on product data.
February 28, 2003
10800 - 4
Toilet, Bath, and
Laundry Accessories
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
D.
See Section 06114 for installation of blocking in walls.
3.2 PREPARATION
A.
Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely
installation.
B.
Provide templates and rough-in measurements as
required.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to
substrate.
Mounting Heights and Locations: As required by
accessibility regulations:
3.4 SCHEDULES
A.
Public Toilets.
1.
Women’s
Toilet
a.
2 – Toilet paper dispensers
b.
1 – Paper towel dispenser
c.
1 – Waste receptacle
d.
1 – Soap dispenser
e.
2 – Seat cover dispensers
f.
2 – Grab Bars
g.
2 – Sanitary Napkin/Tampon Dispensers
h.
2 – Sanitary Napkin Disposal Units
2.
Men’s
Toilet
a.
1 – Toilet paper dispenser
b.
1 – Paper towel dispenser
c.
1 – Waste receptacle
d.
1 – Soap Dispenser
e.
1 – Seat cover dispenser
f.
2 – Grab Bars
END OF SECTION
February 28, 2003
10800 - 5
Toilet, Bath, and
Laundry Accessories
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 15010
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
SUMMARY
1. The requirements set out in Bidders Documents, Contract Forms,
General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions and Special
Conditions apply to all work specified in the sections of this
Division.
2. While these specifications may be arranged in sections which
describe work associated with particular trades or subcontracts,
such sections are not intended to describe all the work of any
particular trade or sub-contract. Work required of a particular
trade or sub-contract may also appear in other sections of the
Specifications, and any given section may describe work of several
different trades or subcontracts. The particular sub-division of
work between the Contractor and his sub-contractors shall be resolved
by those parties, and not necessarily limited nor defined by any
particular section of the Specification. The Contractor for the
project shall be responsible for all work, regardless of which trade
or sub-contract may actually perform the work. The reference to
"Contractor", as used herein, refers to the single, prime,
Contractor for the total project, who will enter into an Agreement
with the Owner for the total performance of the work.
3. Work covered by the Mechanical Sections of these Specifications
shall include the furnishing of all materials, labor, taxes,
transportation, safe working conditions, tools, permits, fees,
inspections, utilities and incidentals necessary for the complete
and operable installation of all mechanical systems.
4. Under these Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide an
installation that is complete in every respect. It shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor to provide all material and
equipment which is usually furnished with such systems in order to
complete the installation, whether mentioned or not.
5. The Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination
proper relation of his work to the building structure and to
work of all trades. The Contractor shall visit the premises
thoroughly familiarize himself with the existing site conditions,
all details of the work and the working conditions and to verify
dimensions and elevations in the
January 13, 2003
15010 - 1
Basic Mechanical Requirements
and
the
and
and
all
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
field. The Contractor shall advise the Architect of any
discrepancy prior to bidding. The submission of bids shall be
deemed evidence of the Contractor's site visit, the verification
and coordination of all existing conditions, and the inclusion of
all considerations related to the existing conditions.
6. The responsibility for the furnishing of the proper equipment and/or
material and the responsibility for seeing that it is installed as
intended by the manufacturer, rests entirely upon the Contractor.
The Contractor shall consult and request advice and supervisory
assistance from the representative of the specific manufacturer
for proper
installation, operation, and startup. The manufacturers' published
instructions
shall
be
followed
for
preparing,
assembling,
installing, erecting, and cleaning manufactured materials or
equipment. The Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect in
writing of any conflict between the requirements of the Contract
documents and the manufacturers' directions and shall obtain the
Architect's instructions
before proceeding with the work. Should the Contractor perform any
such work that does not comply with the manufacturer's directions
or such instructions from the Architect, he shall bear all
resulting costs that may arise from any system or equipment
deficiencies.
1.2
DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
1. These Specifications are accompanied by Drawings of the building
and details of the installations indicating the locations of
equipment, piping, ductwork, outlets, light fixtures, etc. Items
specifically mentioned in the Specifications but not shown on the
Drawings and items shown on the Drawings but not specifically
mentioned in the Specifications shall be installed by the Contractor
under the appropriate section of work as if they were indicated by
both.
2. If departures from the Drawings are deemed necessary by the
Contractor, details of such departures and the reasons therefor
shall be submitted to the Architect for review. No departures shall
be made without prior written acceptance of the Architect.
3. The interrelation of the Specifications, the Drawings, and the
schedules is generally as follows: The Specifications determine
the nature and setting of the several materials, the Drawings
establish the quantities, dimensions, and details, and the
schedules give the performance characteristics.
January 13, 2003
15010 - 2
Basic Mechanical Requirements
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
4. Should
the
Drawings
disagree
in
themselves
or
with
the
Specifications or with the various codes and regulations, the better
quality or greater quantity of work or materials shall be assumed and
estimated, and unless otherwise directed by the Architect in
writing,
shall
be
performed
or
furnished.
In
case
the
Specifications should not fully agree with the schedules, the
latter shall govern. Figures indicated on Drawings govern scale
measurements and larger scale details govern small scale Drawings.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
1. After the Contract is awarded, but prior to proceeding with the
Work, the Contractor shall obtain, check, certify, and submit
complete Shop Drawings and Brochures from Manufacturers, Suppliers,
Vendors, etc., for all materials and equipment specified herein.
Submit Shop Drawings and Brochures in sufficient time so as not to
impede the progress of Work. Three weeks will be required for the
processing of Shop Drawings and Brochures in the Engineer's
office, exclusive of transmittal time. This time shall be considered
by the Contractor when scheduling submittal data. After the
Contract is awarded, the Contractor will advise the Engineer in
writing of the schedule for submission of shop drawings and product
data and the persons authorized to sign submittal data on behalf of
the Company.
2. The Engineer's review of Shop Drawings and Brochures shall not
relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for dimensions,
errors that may be contained therein, or deviations from Contract
Document requirements. It shall be clearly understood that the
Engineer's noting some errors but overlooking others does not grant
the Contractor permission to proceed in error. Regardless of any
information contained in the Shop Drawings, the requirements of the
Contract Documents shall govern and are not waived or superseded in
any way by the submittal data review.
3. Before submission of Shop Drawings and Brochures, the Contractor
shall certify that each Shop Drawing and each item of material or
equipment complies with the Contract Documents for this Project.
Such certification shall be made by the Owner, a Partner, a
Corporate Officer of the Contractor, or by a person duly
authorized to sign for the Contractor. Unless so certified, Shop
Drawings and/or Brochures will be returned for resubmittal.
Certifications shall be in the
January 13, 2003
15010 - 3
Basic Mechanical Requirements
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
form of rubber stamp impressions or typed letter which states:
I hereby certify that this Shop Drawing
and/or brochure and the equipment and
material shown on this Shop Drawing and/or Brochure
complies in all respects (except as noted*) with the
requirements of the Contract Documents for this
Project. I further certify that all data shown
herein as to performance, dimensions, construction,
materials, and other pertinent items are true and
correct.
(Name of Contractor)
Signed
Position
Date
* Refer to exception requirements herein.
4. Each Shop Drawing shall indicate in the lower right hand corner and
each Brochure shall indicate on the front cover the following:
Title of the Sheet or Brochure; name and location of the building;
names
of
the
Architect,
Engineer,
Contractor, Manufacturer,
Supplier, Vendor, etc., the date of submittal; and the date of each
correction and revision. So far as is practical, each Shop Drawing
and/or Brochure shall bear a cross-reference note to the sheet number
or numbers of the Contract Drawings and Specifications showing the
same work. Shop Drawings and Brochures shall be prepared as
follows:
1. Shop Drawings: Drawings shall be newly prepared and not
reproduced from the Contract documents, drawn to a scale that
can be easily read and shall contain sufficient plans,
elevations, sections, and isometrics to describe clearly the
items in question. Drawings shall be prepared by a draftsman
skilled in this type of work. All ductwork, equipment layouts
and similar Shop Drawings shall be drawn to at least 1/4" = 1'0" scale.
2. All Shop Drawings shall indicate the equipment actually
purchased and the exact routing for all lines such as piping,
conduit and ductwork. The elevation, location, support points,
load imposed on the structure at support and anchor points, and
size of all lines shall be
January 13, 2003
15010 - 4
Basic Mechanical Requirements
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
3.
indicated. All beam penetrations and slab penetrations shall be
indicated and sized and shall be coordinated. All Design
Drawing space allocations shall be maintained, such as ceiling
height, chase walls, equipment room size, etc., unless proper
written authorization is received from the Architect to change
them. All associated equipment, ductwork, piping and conduit
shall be coordinated and clearly shown on the Shop Drawings.
Brochures: Brochures submitted to the Engineer shall be
published by the Manufacturers and shall contain complete and
detailed engineering and dimensional information to show that
the equipment will fit into the allotted space.
4.
Brochures submitted shall contain only information which is
relevant to the particular equipment or materials to be furnished.
Do not submit catalogs that describe several different items
other than those items to be used unless all irrelevant
information is marked out or relevant information is clearly
marked.
5.
The submittal format shall follow the Specifications format
with a submittal required for each section of Division 15. The
submittal shall be contained in a three-ring hard back binder.
Copies of each submittal shall be three-hole punched and arranged
(or folded if required) for the Engineer's filing convenience.
Provide one copy of updated TABLE OF CONTENTS and progressivetabbed index sheets also for the Engineer's filing convenience.
6.
Submittal data for each section must be complete. Partial
submittals will not be reviewed. To the greatest extent possible
all sections shall be submitted with the first submission. No more
than three additional submissions will be allowed to complete the
submittal package.
7.
Unless a greater number is indicated within Division One of
these specifications, submit six (6) copies of all Brochures for
review. Submit one (1) reproducible and one (1) blueprint of shop
drawings for review. Comments will be made on the reproducible to
facilitate copying.
8.
Any submittal that is disapproved must be resubmitted within
two (2) weeks following notification of such disapproval. If no
satisfactory material is submitted within the two-week period, the
Architect reserves the right to require the Contractor to furnish
items exactly as described in the Contract Documents.
January 13, 2003
15010 - 5
Basic Mechanical Requirements
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
9.
No allowances will be made for submittals which are not made in a
timely fashion or which are turned down because they do not meet the
specifications. Should delivery problems arise due to the above,
affecting the completion time of the project, the Contractor will
furnish and install acceptable alternates until the proper materials
arrive and then replace the alternate materials with the approved
materials, all at no cost to the Owner. If the Contractor is not
able to furnish an acceptable alternate until the proper materials
arrive, he will assume all costs for furnishing and installing all
alternates as directed by the Architect and/or will pay a suitable
penalty for the inconvenience experienced by the Owner. This penalty
will be set by the Owner based on the particular circumstances.
[0.1 RECORD DRAWINGS
10.The Contractor shall keep a set of Drawings on the job, noting
daily all changes made in these Drawings in connection with the final
installation, including exact dimensioned locations of all new and
uncovered existing active and inactive utilities outside the
building, and shall turn over a clean, neatly marked set of sepia
reproducible
Drawings
showing
"as-installed"
work
to
the
Architect/Engineer for delivery to the Owner. All underground
utilities, services, and systems shall be accurately located by the
Contractor and dimensioned on the "as-installed" Drawings.]
1.4
SPACE LIMITATIONS
1. Equipment has been chosen which will fit into the physical spaces
provided and indicated, allowing ample room for access, servicing,
removal and replacement of parts, etc. Adequate space shall be
allowed for clearance in accordance with the Code requirements and
the requirements of the local inspection department.
2. In the preparation of Drawings, a reasonable effort to
accommodate approved Equipment Manufacturers'
space
requirements has been made. However, since space requirements and
equipment arrangement vary according to each Manufacturer, the
responsibility for initial access and proper fit rests with the
Contractor.
3. Physical dimensions and arrangements of equipment to be installed
shall be subject to the Architect's review.
January 13, 2003
15010 - 6
Basic Mechanical Requirements
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
1.5 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. Prepare and submit to the Architect for delivery to the Owner two
sets of an indexed manual with complete technical data for every
piece of equipment and material installed under this Contract.
1. Complete mechanical submittals that were approved for the
project.
2. Manufacturer's installation instruction brochures.
3. Manufacturer's local representative and/or distributor's name
and address.
4. Manufacturer's operating and maintenance brochures.
5. Manufacturer's internal wiring diagrams.
6. Contractor's installation wiring diagrams.
7. Control system installation Drawings and typed control
sequences.
8. Replacement part number listings and/or descriptions including
prices and source of supply.
9. Lubrication materials required, with instructions.
10.Valve tag list and schematic diagram.
11.All warranties and guarantees.
12.Testing and Balancing Report.
2. These manuals shall include all of the listed data bound into a
permanent hard-back binder identified on the cover as "Operating
and Maintenance Manual". Provide a title page listing the name and
location of the Building, the Owner, the Architect, the Engineers,
the General Contractor, and the Trade-Contractors installing
equipment represented in the brochure.
3. Contents of the manual shall be grouped in sections according to the
various sections of Division 15, and shall be listed in a Table of
Contents.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. The Contractor shall comply with all applicable city, county,
state, or federal rules, codes and ordinances.
2. None of the terms or provisions of this Specification shall be
construed as waiving any rules, regulations, or requirements of
these authorities.
3. A competent foreman or superintendent, initially approved by the
Architect, shall be kept by the Contractor at the building to
receive instructions and to act for the
January 13, 2003
15010 - 7
Basic Mechanical Requirements
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
Contractor. Once this superintendent has been approved, no change
shall be made without approval of the Architect. Architect's
and/or Owner's representatives shall have the right to observe the
work at any time. The Contractor shall have a representative
present when his work is being observed, and he shall give
assistance, as may be required, to the Architect's representative.
Recommendations made shall be promptly carried out, and all
unsatisfactory material and/or workmanship shall be replaced at once,
to the satisfaction of the Architect.
4. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to consult the
Architectural and Engineering Drawings and details so as to
thoroughly familiarize himself with the type and quality of
construction to be provided on this project.
5. The Mechanical Drawings are diagrammatic in character and cannot
show every connection in detail or every pipe and duct in its exact
location. These details are subject to the requirements of codes,
ordinances and also electrical, structural and architectural
conditions.
The
Contractor
shall carefully investigate all
electrical, structural and finish conditions and shall coordinate
the separate trades in order to avoid interference between the
various phases of work. Work shall be laid out so that it will be
concealed in furred chases or above suspended ceilings, etc., in
finished portions of the building, unless specifically noted or
indicated to be exposed. Work shall be installed to avoid
crippling of structural members; therefore, inserts to accommodate
hangers shall be set before concrete is poured, and proper openings
through floor, walls, beams, etc., shall be provided as hereinafter
specified or as otherwise indicated or required before concrete is
poured. All work shall be run parallel or perpendicular to the
lines of the building unless otherwise noted.
6. The approximate location of each item is indicated on the
Drawings. These Drawings are not intended to give complete and
exact details in regard to location. Exact locations are to be
determined by actual measurements at the building and will in all
cases be subject to the approval of the Architect. The Architect
and Engineer reserves the right to make reasonable changes in the
locations indicated without additional cost.
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
January 13, 2003
15010 - 8
Basic Mechanical Requirements
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
1. The Contractor shall not receive material or equipment at the job
site until ready for installation or until there is suitable space
provided to properly protect equipment from rust, weather,
humidity, dust, or physical damage.
1.8
UTILITIES
1. The Contract Documents reflect the general location, size, and
elevations of sewer lines; location, size and pressure of water and
other lines; and manner of routing for all utilities known to be
required on this project. It shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor to visit the site, meet with the local utility companies
in order to coordinate and confirm the exact requirements for each
utility to provide a complete and operative system. The bid
submitted by the Contractor shall include costs for all such
coordinative work, as well as any and all utility company charges
and/or fees.
1.9
TEMPORARY SERVICES
1.
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide a
temporary system for each utility that is required during
construction with all such temporary utility costs being billed to
the Contractor.
1.10 GUARANTEE
1. The Contractor shall guarantee all materials and workmanship for a
period of twelve (12) months after the final acceptance of work.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
1. The specifications contain the names of manufacturers which are
considered acceptable based on the quality of the product.
2. Where acceptable manufacturers are listed, only products of those
manufacturers may be provided. Additionally, the product must meet
all the detailed requirements of the specifications.
January 13, 2003
15010 - 9
Basic Mechanical Requirements
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
3.
4.
If no manufacturer's name is mentioned, the Contractor shall
provide equipment and material which meet the specifications.
The drawings represent the manufacturer's equipment scheduled.
The listing of acceptable manufacturers in the specifications
is not intended to imply that equipment of these other
manufacturers will fit in the space provided or have the same
electrical, structural or other requirements as the equipment
scheduled. The Contractor must insure that the equipment
provided will meet all project requirements prior to submitting
data on that equipment.
2.2 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
1. All materials shall be listed, inspected, and approved by the
Underwriters Laboratories and shall bear the UL label where
labeling service is available. The label or listing of the
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. will be accepted as evidence that
the materials or equipment conform to the applicable standards
of that agency. In lieu of this listing, the Contractor may
submit a statement from a nationally recognized, adequately
equipped testing agency, indicating that the items have been
treated in accordance with required procedures, and that the
materials and equipment comply with all Contract requirements.
2. Materials and equipment shall be new and shall be the standard
catalog products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the
manufacture of products conforming to these Specifications, and
shall essentially duplicate materials and equipment that have
been in satisfactory use at least two years prior to bid
opening. Where custom or special items are required, these shall
be fully described using Drawings, material lists, etc., which
fully describe in detail the item proposed for use on this
project.
3. All metallic materials shall be protected against corrosion.
Exposed metallic parts of outdoor apparatus made of ferrous
metals but not of corrosion-resistant steel, shall be zinccoated in accordance with ASTM A123 or A153, except where other
equivalent protective treatment is specifically approved in
writing.
4. Capacities shall be not less than those indicated but shall be
such that no component or system becomes inoperative or is
January 13, 2003
15010 – 10
Basic Mechanical Requirements
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
damaged because of start-up or other overload conditions. Where
approved equipment requires electrical power other than those
used for design purposes, the Contractor shall be responsible
to adjust protective devices, starter sizes, conductors,
conduits,
etc.
to
accommodate
this
approved
device
electrically.
5. Each major component of equipment shall have the manufacturer's
name, address, and catalog number on a plate securely attached
to the item of equipment. All data on nameplates shall be
legible at the time of final inspection.
6. Equipment vibration shall not exceed the following criteria:
Maximum Allowable
Vibration Peak to Peak
Displacement (MIL)
Equipment
1800 RPM
3600 RPM
2
1
Centrifugal Compressors
Screw Compressors
1
1
Fans (Centrifugal and Axial)
Under 600 RPM
600 RPM to 1000 RPM
1000 RPM to 2000 RPM
Over 2000 RPM
4
3
2
1
7. All pipe, fittings, appurtenances, and other material required
for complete installation of these systems shall be new to
conform to manufacturer's recommendations, unless otherwise
specified. All equipment injured or damaged in transit from
factory, during delivery to premises, while in storage on
premises, while being erected and installed, and while being
tested, until time of final completion, shall be replaced by this
Contractor without extra cost to the Owner.
Scratched equipment shall be repainted with factory paint to
match existing or cold galvanized as required.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
January 13, 2003
15010 – 11
Basic Mechanical Requirements
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
1. Provide and install unions or flanges at proper points to
permit removal of pipe and various equipment and machinery items
without injury to other parts of system. No union or flange will
be required in welded lines or lines assembled with solder joint
fittings, except at flanged valve or union connected equipment
items, machinery items, and other special pieces of apparatus.
Unions in 2 inches and smaller ferrous lines shall be 300 lb.
AAR, malleable iron unions with iron to brass seats, and 2-1/2
inches and larger shall be ground flange unions. Unions in
copper lines shall be 125 lbs. ground joint brass unions, or
150 lbs. brass flanges, if required by the matching item of
equipment. Companion flanges on lines at various items of
equipment, machines and pieces of apparatus, shall serve as
unions to permit removal of the particular items. Unions or
flanged devices connecting ferrous pipe to copper or brass pipe
shall be dielectric type.
2. All equipment shall be installed
parts requiring service without
other equipment. Access panels
with the Architect and provided
equipment service or removal.
in a manner to permit access to
disassembly of piping mains and
or doors shall be coordinated
where necessary to permit valve
3. Any large piece of apparatus which is to be installed in any
space in the building, and which is too large to permit access
through stairways, doorways, or shafts shall be brought to the
job and placed in the space before the enclosing structure is
completed. Following placement in the space, such apparatus
shall be thoroughly and completely protected against damage.
4. This Contract includes many different systems furnished and
installed by different trades. Each trade shall coordinate their
work with that of all other trades so that it may be installed
in the most direct and workmanlike manner without hindering or
handicapping any other trades. Where space requirements
conflict, the following order of precedence shall, in general,
be observed:
1. Building lines.
2. Structural members.
3. Soil and drain piping.
4. Vent piping.
5. Refrigerant piping.
6. Condensate piping.
January 13, 2003
Requirements
15010 - 12
Basic Mechanical
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
7. Electrical bus duct.
8. Supply ductwork.
9. Exhaust, return, and outside air ductwork.
10.Domestic hot and cold water piping.
11.Electrical conduit.
3.2 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
1. The
Contractor
shall
perform
all
excavation
of
every
description required in the execution of his work. Excavation
shall be through whatever substance encountered, to the depths
indicated on the Drawings, or as required. Excavated material
suitable for backfill shall be piled in an orderly manner a
sufficient distance from the trench to prevent overloading
sides and cave-ins. Excavated materials not suitable for
backfill shall be removed from the site or stored as directed.
Grading shall be done to protect the excavation from surface
water. Trenches shall be maintained in a dry condition by
bailing, pumping, or other approved methods. Pipe shall not be
laid in wet trenches.
2. Sheeting and shoring shall be provided as required for the
protection of the work and the safety of personnel. All
excavations in excess of five (5) feet shall be in accordance with
OSHA requirements relating to trench safety systems. Contractor
shall certify that all trench safety systems will be in
accordance with OSHA requirements. Certifications of trench
safety systems shall be filed with the authority having
jurisdiction.
3. Trenches shall be of the necessary width and depth to provide
for proper laying of pipe and appurtenances, with banks as
nearly vertical as possible. Bottoms of trenches shall be
excavated to the grade and depth indicated or required, and
barrel of pipe shall be laid on a minimum 12-inch sand bed. Bell
holes, of a size to permit proper makeup of grading, shall be
provided as required. Existing underground piping shall be
protected from damage during excavation and backfilling, and if
damaged, shall be repaired to the Architect's satisfaction, at the
Contractor's expense. Provide 3,000 pound concrete of 3 inches
minimum enclosure around lines that cross electrical utility
lines or telephone cables.
4. Trenches shall not be backfilled until all required tests have
been performed. This requirement does not preclude
January 13, 2003
Requirements
15010 - 13
Basic Mechanical
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
sectional testing and backfilling of the various systems.
Trenches shall be carefully backfilled with approved sand, free
from large earth clods, rocks, and/or foreign materials, laid in
6-inch layers, moistened thoroughly, and carefully rammed to an
elevation of one foot above top of pipe. The remainder of the
backfill to finish grade shall be placed in one foot layers
soaked with water, and well tamped. Under roadways, backfill to
bottom of road bed material with sand only. Where settlement
occurs, trenches shall be re-opened to depth required for
proper compaction, refilled, and compacted.
5. Open trenches abutting foundation or basement excavations,
building walls, and grade beams, will not be permitted, but
shall be backfilled and completed, for a distance of not less than
10' from the above features, as soon as possible. All damage
resulting from flooding or other stresses due to open trenches
shall be paid for by the Contractor.
6. Where excavation requires, existing walks, street, drives, or
other existing pavement to be cut to install new lines and to make
new connections to existing lines, the size of the cut shall be
held to a minimum, consistent with the work to be accomplished.
After the installation of the new materials is completed and the
excavation has been backfilled, the paving shall be patched,
using materials to match those cut out. The patches shall be
thoroughly bound with the original surfaces, and shall be level
with them.
3.3
CUTTING AND PATCHING
1. Where it becomes necessary to cut through any wall, floor, or
ceiling to permit installation of any work under this section of
the Specifications or to repair any defects that may appear, up
to the expiration of the guarantee period, such cutting shall be
done under the supervision of the Architect by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall not be permitted to cut or modify any
structural members without the written permission of the
Architect.
2. Patching of all openings cut by the Contractor, or repairing of
any damage to the work of other trades occasioned by cutting
operations, or occasioned by the failure of any par to work
installed under this Contract, shall be performed by the trade
whose work is involved, but shall be paid for by the
Contractor.
January 13, 2003
Requirements
15010 - 14
Basic Mechanical
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
3. Any openings cut through exterior walls or roofs shall
provided with suitable covers, while they are left open,
protect the property or materials involved. Any openings
through walls below grade shall be properly protected
prevent entrance of water or other damaging elements.
3.4
be
to
cut
to
HOISTING, SCAFFOLDING, AND TRANSPORTATION
1. The Contractor shall provide his own hoisting facilities and
scaffolding to set his materials and equipment in place, as
indicated on Drawings and for subsequent cleaning, testing, and
adjusting.
2. The Contractor shall provide necessary transportation to
facilitate the delivery of all materials, equipment, tools, and
labor to the job, in accordance with intent of these documents.
3.5
CLEANING
1. The Contractor shall, at all times, keep the premises free from
accumulations of waste material or rubbish caused by him, his
employees, or his work. This debris shall be removed, not only
from the building, but also from the project site.
2. At completion of the job, the Contractor shall remove all of
his tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials. He shall leave
the area "broom clean".
3.6 ELECTRICAL WIRING OF MOTORS AND EQUIPMENT
1.
Unless specifically shown, indicated, or specified to the
contrary, each item shown or required by the Mechanical
Drawings or specified in the Mechanical Specifications shall be
accompanied by all motors and starting and controlling
equipment necessary for the items proper operations. These
motors shall be integrally attached to and/or installed with
their associated equipment item and electrically connected as
specified in Division 16 - Electrical. Equipment controlled
from motor control centers shall be supplied with motors only.
Motor control centers are specified in Division 16 and shown on
the Electrical Drawings.
END OF SECTION
January 13, 2003
15010 – 15
Basic Mechanical Requirements
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 15011
DESIGN CONDITIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1. The requirements of the General Conditions, Supplementary
Conditions, and Section 15010 apply to all work herein.
1.2
DESIGN CONDITIONS
1. Outside design conditions are as follows:
Dry Bulb
F
Summer Outside Air Temperature
Wet Bulb
F
100
78
15
--
Winter Outside Air Temperature
100
Summer Outside Air Temperature*
78
10
Winter Outside Air Temperature**
-*To be used for outside air handling unit cooling coil
calculations.
**To be used for outside air handling unit
preheat coil calculations.
2. Cooling inside design conditions are as follows:
Dry Bulb
Wet Bulb
75
Inside Temperature
F
F
(Offices & Lobbies)
-3. Heating inside design conditions are as follows:
Dry Bulb
Wet Bulb
75
F
F
Inside Temperature
(Offices & Lobbies)
January 13, 2003
15011 - 1
Design Conditions
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
4. Schedule of Working Pressure:
Normal Operating
Working
Temperature
Pressure
Range
Chilled Water System:
150 psig
42
150 psig
85
150 psig
40
to 56F
Condenser Water System:
to 95F
Domestic Cold Water System:
to 60F
Normal Operating
Temperature
Range
Working
Pressure
Domestic Hot Water System
Lavatories:
150 psig
100to
120F
END OF SECTION
January 13, 2003
15011 - 2
Design Conditions
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 15060
PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
1.
1.2
This section lists requirements for materials and methods
independent of the service for which they are used. Refer to other
sections of these Specifications for requirements based on the type
of service. The following material types are included:
1. Steel Pipe, Fittings and Connections.
2. Copper Pipe, Fittings and Connections.
3. Cast Iron Pipe, Fittings and Connections.
4. Plastic Pipe and Fittings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. Pipe and Pipe Fittings: Manufactured in the United States. PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPE, JOINTS AND FITTINGS
1.
Steel Pipe:
1. Pipe: ANSI/ASTM A53, black and galvanized, standard or extra
strong weight.
1. Threaded Fittings:
ANSI/ASTM B16.3, black and
galvanized malleable iron.
2.
Copper and Brass Pipe and Fittings:
1. Pipe and Water Tube: ASTM B88, seamless copper, drawn temper
or annealed temper, Type K or L.
2. Brass Pipe: ANSI/ASTM B43, IPS 85 red brass.
3. Drainage Tube: ASTM B306, Type DWV, copper, drawn temper.
4. Refrigeration Tube: ASTM B280, Type ACR, copper, drawn temper
or annealed temper.
5. Pressure Fittings:
1. ANSI B16.15, cast bronze threaded fittings.
2. ANSI B16.18, cast bronze solder joint fittings.
3. ANSI B16.22, wrought copper solder joint pressure fittings.
4. ANSI B16.24, bronzed flanged fittings.
5. ANSI B16.26, cast copper alloy fittings for flared tubes.
January 13, 2003
15060 – 1
Pipe and Pipe Fittings
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
6. Copper Drainage Fittings:
1. ANSI B16.23, cast copper alloy solder joint drainage
fittings, Type DWV.
2. ANSI B16.32, cast bronze solder joint fittings for
"Solvent" drainage system.
7. Bronze Companion Flanges:
ANSI B16.24, Class 150,
threaded or screwed, flat face.
3. Cast Iron Pipe and Fittings:
1. Cast Iron Soil Pipe:
ANSI/ASTM A74, coated, service weight,
bell and spigot.
2. Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe:
Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute,
CISPI 301.
3. Cast Iron Soil Pipe Fittings: ANSI/ASTM A74, ASTM C564 rubber
gasket bell and spigot joints or CISPI 310 hubless joint.
4. Cast Iron Flanged Fittings: ANSI/ASTM B16.1 Class 125 flanged
fittings.
4. Plastic Pipe and Fittings:
1. Drainage Waste and Vent Pipe: Schedule 40 PVC, ASTM D-1785,
ASTM D-2265.
2. Drainage Waste and Vent Fittings: Schedule 40 PVC, ASTM D2665.
3. Domestic cold water under ground outside of building. Schedule
80 CPVC ASTM F441-88.
2.2
ESCUTCHEONS
1. Escutcheons shall be chrome plated sectional type. Solid type
escutcheon plates with set screws shall be used when sectional
plates are not available of adequate size or where sectional
plates will not stay in place.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
PREPARATION
1. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs.
2. Clean the ends of copper pipe and the inside of soldered fittings
with emery cloth, metallic wool, or other suitable means prior to
joining.
January 13, 2003
15060 – 2
Pipe and Pipe Fittings
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
3.2
1.
2.
INSTALLATION
Provide the longest available commercial standard lengths of
piping to minimize number of piping joints.
Accurately cut piping to field measurements to permit placement
without forcing, except where requirements for cold springing are
shown.
3.
Install piping straight and parallel with adjacent walls.
4.
Provide cathodic protection for below grade ferrous piping with
appropriate isolation at surface interface.
5.
Grade piping for proper drainage.
6.
Make connections to equipment with unions or flanges.
7.
Make reductions in water pipes with eccentric reducing fittings
installed to provide drainage and venting.
8.
Group piping at common elevations whenever practical.
9.
Provide clearance for installation of insulation and for access
to valves, air vents, drains and unions.
10.Install same type piping material specified for inside building to
five feet outside of building.
3.3
STEEL PIPE CONNECTIONS
1. Use galvanized fittings, flanges and couplings for galvanized
pipe.
2. Provide threaded joints for steel piping up to and including 2
inches.
3. Die cut screwed joints with full cut standard taper pipe threads
using cutting oil. Make joints using non-toxic joint compound
applied to male threads only.
4. Joints for Threaded End Pipe: Coated with pipe lubricant
compound.
January 13, 2003
15060 – 3
Pipe and Pipe Fittings
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
3.4
COPPER PIPE CONNECTIONS
1. Form hot soldered joints in copper, brass or bronze fittings with
95-5 solder.
3.5
CAST IRON PIPE CONNECTIONS
1.
Joints for Bell and Spigot Pipe: Neoprene gasketing system.
2.
Joints for Hubless Pipe: Neoprene gasket and stainless steel band
clamp, mechanical fastener.
3.
Joints for Pressure Pipe: Rubber gasket and mechanical joint
connection.
3.6
PLASTIC PIPE CONNECTIONS
1.
Joints for DWV-PVC: Solvent weld in accordance with IAPMO 15 990.
2.
Joints PVC Pressure Pipe: Solvent weld in accordance with IAPMO
15 8-89.
3.
Solvent weld in accordance with IAPMO IS20-90.
3.7
ESCUTCHEONS
1. Provide escutcheons around all exposed pipes passing through walls,
floors and ceiling in finished areas. Plates shall be sized to fit
tight around the outside of the pipe or pipe insulation.
3.8
DIELECTRIC UNIONS
1. Install dielectric unions or flanges where copper or brass
piping connects to ferrous piping or equipment and where
ferrous piping connects to copper or brass piping or
equipment.
END OF SECTION
January 13, 2003
15060 – 4
Pipe and Pipe Fittings
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 15100
VALVES
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
1. Gate Valves.
2. Check Valves.
3. Ball Valves.
4. Hose Bibbs.
5. Appliance Valves.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
1. Submit manufacturer's product data by valve type listed in these
specifications showing dimensions, sizes, materials, and pressure
rating.
2. Submit valve schedule identifying by service the valve type to be
used as listed in these specifications, size, pressure rating,
class, manufacturer, figure number and purpose.
1.3
2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.
Provide valves of same manufacturer throughout where possible.
2.
Provide valves with manufacturer's name and pressure rating
clearly marked on outside of body.
3.
All valves shall be manufactured in the United States. PART
PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
1. Gate Valves: 1
. Hammond .
2. Milwaukee.
3. NIBCO.
4. Stockham.
January 13, 2003
15100 - 1
Valves
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
2. Check Valves: 5
. Hammond .
6. Marlin.
7. Milwaukee.
8. NIBCO.
9. Stockham.
10.Victaulic.
11.Metraflex.
12.Mueller.
13.Centerline.
3. Ball Valves:
1. Apollo.
2 . Hammond .
3.
Jamesbury.
4. Milwaukee.
5. Mueller.
6. NIBCO.
7. Stockham.
2.2 VALVE CONNECTIONS
2.3
1.
Provide valves suitable for connection to adjoining piping. Use
line size valves unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Provide threaded ends for valves 2-1/2 inches and smaller.
3.
Provide flanged or grooved ends for valves 3 inches and larger.
GATE VALVES
1. Type A: Class 150, ASTM B-62 bronze body, solid disc and union
bonnet, rising stem of bronze ASTM B-62, copper silicon alloy ASTM
B-371 alloy 694 or machined bronze alloy containing less than 15%
zinc and listed in MSS-SP80, threaded ends, malleable iron
handwheels. Stockham B-120, Hammond IB-629.
2. Type B: Class 125, ASTM A-126 Class B cast iron body solid disc
and bolted bonnet, brass ASTM B-16 or copper silicon alloy ASTM
B-584 alloy 875 rising stem, outside screw and yoke, bronze
mounted, flanged ends. Stockham G-623, Hammond IR-1140.
January 13, 2003
15100 - 2
Valves
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
3. Provide Gate Valves as follows:
SERVICE
Domestic Cold Water
Domestic Hot Water
GATE VALVE TYPE
2-1/2" and Under 3" and Larger
A
A
B
B
2.4 GLOBE OR ANGLE VALVES
1. Type A: Class 150 ASTM B-62 bronze body and union bonnet, rising
stem of bronze ASTM B-62, copper silicon alloy ASTM B-371 alloy
694 or machined bronze alloy with less than 15% zinc content and
listed in MSS-SP80, replaceable Teflon disc, threaded ends.
Stockham B-22, Hammond IB-413T straight pattern. Stockham B-222T,
Hammond IB-454T angle pattern.
2. Type B: Class 125 ASTM A-126 Class B cast iron body and bolted
bonnet, copper silicon alloy ASTM B-584 alloy 875 or brass ASTM B16 rising stem, outside screw and yoke, renewable seat and disc,
bronze mounted flanged ends. Stockham G-512, Hammond IR-116.
3. Provide globe or angle globe valves as follows:
SERVICE
Domestic Cold Water
Domestic Hot Water
2.5
1.
GLOBE OR ANGLE
2-1/2" and Under
3" and Larger
A
B
A
B
CHECK VALVES
Type A: Class 150, ASTM B-62 bronze body, Teflon disc, T-pattern,
swing check design, threaded ends. Hammond IB-946, Jenkins 141,
Grinnel 3330.
2.
Type B: Class 125, ASTM A-126 Class B cast iron body, bolted cap,
bronze disc, bronze mounted, swing check design, flanged ends.
Stockham G-931, Hammond IR-1124.
3.
Type H: Grooved end, ductile iron body, UL listed and FM
approved, rated for a maximum working pressure
January 13, 2003
15100 - 3
Valves
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
4. Provide Check Valves as follows:
SERVICE
CHECK VALVE TYPE
2-1/2" and Under
3" and Larger
A
A
Domestic Cold Water
Domestic Hot Water
B
B
2.6 BALL VALVES
1. Type A: Bronze two piece body, stainless steel ASTM A-276 Type 316
ball and stem, reinforced Teflon seat, 600 psi WOG, threaded ends.
Stockham S-216-BR1-R-T, NIBCO T-585-70-66, Hammond 8503.
2. Provide ball valves as follows:
SERVICE
BALL VALVE TYPE 21/2" and Under
Domestic Cold Water
Domestic Hot Water
2.7
A
A
WALL HYDRANTS (3/4-inch WH)
1. Wall hydrant shall be concealed type [Wade No. W-8607 Series] 3/4inch non-freeze wall hydrant with straight inlet connection,
bronze casing, vacuum breaker-backflow preventor, loose tee key,
[satin bronze] box.
2.8
HOSE BIBBS (3/4-inch HB)
1. Toilet rooms (below lavatories) - hose bibb shall be [Chicago No.
293 with E27] chrome plated finish, brass wall faucet with vacuum
breaker backflow preventor and loose tee key handle.
2. Mechanical rooms - hose bibb shall be [Chicago No. 293 with E27]
brass finish, brass wall faucet with vacuum breaker backflow
preventor and loose tee key handle.
2.9
APPLIANCE STOPS
1. For size 3/8-inch to 1-inch provide AGA approved, ASTM B-584 alloy
844 bronze body and plug with integral bottom check and lever
handle.
January 13, 2003
15100 - 4
Valves
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
2.10 VALVE OPERATORS
1.
Provide cast or malleable iron handwheels for gate, globe, or
angle, drain valves, and inside hose bibbs.
2.
Provide extension stems for ball valves installed in insulated
lines so that handle operation does not damage the insulation.
PART 3EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION
1.
Install gate and globe valves with stems upright within
degrees of vertical, not inverted. Butterfly valves shall
mounted with the stem horizontal whenever possible.
15
be
2.
Install gate valves for shut-off and isolating service, to
isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers.
3.
Install globe or angle valves for throttling service and control
device for meter by-pass.
4.
Provide shut-off valves and check valves on discharge of pumps.
5.
All valves shall be located so that the bonnets can be removed.
6.
Where valves are installed concealed in pipe chases or above
inaccessible ceilings, provide Zurn Z-1460-4 access doors with
concealed hinge and key operated locks. Door shall be large enough
to service valves and shall be installed flush with finished
walls and ceilings.
7.
Install underground fire protection service valves in Alhambra
A-3000 road box.
8.
underground domestic water valves in pre-cast concrete valve box
with a cast iron lid with "water" cast into lid.
END OF SECTION
January 13, 2003
15100 - 5
Valves
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 15110
PLUMBING GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
Scope:
1. The work covered by this section of these specifications comprises
the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools and
appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the
various piping systems, in accordance with the materials contained
herein and the applicable drawings and subject to terms and
conditions of the Contract. The entire work shall be delivered
complete and in perfect working order and to the entire
satisfaction of the Architect.
1.2
Related Work:
1. Division 15 - Mechanical: 1. Section 15000 - General
Mechanical Conditions
2. Shop drawings will be submitted per Section 15000. PART
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
Description:
1. All materials and equipment furnished will be new, of the quality
indicated, manufactured in the USA, and conforming to all
standards, codes, or requirements regarding same.
2. Defective materials or equipment shall be completely repaired or
replaced. This shall include material or equipment damaged during
installation or tests.
2.2
Domestic Water Piping (Hot and Cold):
1. Domestic water piping, 3 inches and smaller in size, located below
the building slab, shall be Type "K" commercially pure copper
water pipe. This pipe shall be installed in a schedule 40 PVC
sleeve with a minimum of 1 inch between sleeve and pipe surface
and/or insulation passing through it.
The use of joints in the piping beneath concrete slabs will be
avoided and will be permitted only to the extent of long runs
where a single roll of copper tubing is not of sufficient length
to complete the piping run. Should a joint be required, the joint
shall be made with silver solder and wrought solder joint copper
fittings.
January 13, 2003
15110 – 1
Plumbing Conditions
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
2. Domestic water piping, 3 inches and smaller in size, located above
the building slab, shall be Type "L" hard drawn commercially pure
copper water pipe. Piping shall be assembled with wrought copper
joint fittings and hard solder.
Solder shall be of ninety-five percent (95%) tin and five
percent (5%) antimony. Flux shall be a non-corrosive paste type.
Cored solder will not be allowed; all solder shall be solid string
or wire type. Where soldered, copper piping must be connected to
screwed brass pipe, a cast brass adapter shall be used. Piping
subjected to pressure exceeding 80 psi and hot water piping
exceeding 150° F shall be assembled with 95-5 tin/antimony solder.
3. Water piping connections to fixtures or equipment shall be made
by use of brass pipe or nipples, chrome plated where exposed to
view in finished areas, and screwed into copperto-IPS adapter
fittings. Ferrous piping connections will not be acceptable in
copper piping systems. No flex type connections will be accepted.
4. Dielectric insulating couplings shall be provided between ferrous
and copper piping systems.
5.
Domestic water piping control and service valves shall be
provided by this Contractor where required to adequately control
and isolate the various domestic water piping systems. Valves
shall be provided at the connection to all items of equipment and
in a location easily accessible from the finished floor. Valves
shall be as manufactured by Nibco, Crane, Stockham, Jomar,
Jenkins, Kennedy, Walworth or Grinnell and equal to Nibco numbers
as stated below:
1. Only one valve, the main shut-off valve,outside the
building on the domestic water supply will be a gate
valve. Provide the valve equal to Nibco solder joint, 125
lb. bronze gate with rising stem and double-disc. This
valve shall be selected at one pipe size larger than that
specified on the plan.
2. All other valves throughout the domestic water piping shall be
equal to Nibco S-585-70 solder joint, 125 lb., brass ball
valves with full port openings.
3. Check valves shall be equal to Nibco, 125 lb., brass check
valve with "Buna-N" disc, model S-413 solder.
4. Temperature and pressure relief valves shall be ASME rated
Watts valve or approved equal.
6. On each cold water supply line serving a flush valve or valves,
and on hot water lines serving restroom fixtures
January 13, 2003
15110 – 2
Plumbing Conditions
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
provide a manufactured water hammer protective device equal to
Wade "Shokstop". These shall be of the size scheduled on the
drawings for the particular application and installed in accordance
with Plumbing and Drainage Institute Standard PDIWH201. On all
other cold and hot water supplies provide an air chamber one size
larger than the supply to the fixture and not less than 18 inches
long. These air chambers shall be located at the high point to the
supply connection to the fixture. These air chambers shall have a
capped top, shall be constructed of the same material as the
piping system in which they are installed, and shall be insulated
in the same manner as the balance of the piping system in which
they are installed. All fixtures serving janitor's sinks shall be
equipped with the appropriate anti-siphon/backflow prevention
devices integral with the trim.
2.3
Sanitary Drainage:
1. All sanitary drainage line (soil, waste and vent) shall be cast
iron soil pipe and fittings, coated inside and out and shall be
labeled with the C.I. mark of quality and permanence as illustrated
in Commercial Standard CS-188-59, which indicates that it
complies with this standard. Weight of pipe shall be Class "SV"
service weight. Compression type joints similar to Tyler Pipe and
Foundry's "Ty-Seal" or "No Hub" piping will be utilized. "No Hub"
piping shall be limited to above ground installations. Only
underground sanitary sewer drainage piping and fittings may be
Schedule 40 PVC, DWV, NSF meeting standard CS-272-65. Approved
fittings shall be installed with all piping and shall be
equivalent to Fern-Co or approved equal.
2. At the Contractor's option and where allowed by applicable code,
sanitary sewer pipe and fittings (soil, waste and vent) may be
Schedule 40 PVC, DWV, NSF meeting commercial standard CS-272-65.
3. Horizontal waste and soil pipe shall be given a grade of 1/4 inch
per foot where possible and not less than 1/8 inch per foot. Where
practicable, two or more vents shall be connected together and
extended as one vent through the roof. Vent and waste connections
to stacks shall be made by the appropriate use of forty-five
degree (45°) wyes, long sweep quarter bends, sixth, eighth, or
sixteenth bends, except that sanitary tees may be used on the
vertical stacks. Do not allow underground waste lines to come in
contact with under ground refrigerant lines. Provide a minimum of
12 inches between waste and refrigerant lines.
January 13, 2003
15110 – 3
Plumbing Conditions
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
4. Vents shall be extended at least 15 inches above roof.
5.
Clean-Outs shall be provided at each change in direction of
the soil lines, at the end of each continuous waste line, at the
foot of each riser within the building, and at 80'-0" intervals
in long horizontal lines, unless otherwise noted. The sizes of
clean-outs shall be identical with the size of the soil or waste
lines in which they are placed, except where that clean-outs
larger than four inches (4") in diameter will not be required.
Clean-Outs must be placed in accessible locations. Where they
occur in pipe chases, these clean-outs shall be placed above the
floors in such a manner that they will be accessible through doors
or they shall be brought through wall and provided with flush
covers. Exact locations of each shall be approved by the Architect
before installation. All clean-outs shall be of the types
specifically designed for installation in the types of wall in
which they are installed. Wherever clean-outs shall occur in
finished floors, they shall be specifically designed for the type
of floor in which they are installed. All cleanouts located in
exterior locations shall be encased in 24" x 24" x 6" concrete pad
unless installed in a concrete walk, drive or other concrete
areas. All clean-outs installed in walls or other painted surfaces
shall be of a type furnished in prime coat to be painted on the
job to match the surface in which they are installed. All cover
plates on clean-outs shall be attached with vandal-proof screws.
6. Clean-Outs shall be by Wade, Jay R. Smith, Josam, or Zurn.
7.
Exterior - Wade figure number W-6000-Z-I-TY inside caulk, lead
seal clean-out, adjustable head with heavy duty cast iron secured
cover.
8.
Finished concrete floors - Wade figure number W-6030-Z-1
inside caulk, lead seal clean-out, adjustable scoriated top with
round ductile/tractor with nickel bronze veneer top.
9.
Wall - Wade figure number W-8470-R clean-out ferrule with
round smooth polished stainless steel top and frame.
10.Each fixture and piece of equipment requiring connection to the
sanitary drainage system except fixtures with integral traps,
shall be equipped with a trap.
January 13, 2003
15110 – 4
Plumbing Conditions
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian,
2.4
Texas
Drains:
1. This Contractor shall furnish and install all of the drains as
shown by the drawings; including roof drains and piping shown on
architectural drawings and specified hereinafter. Floor drains
shall be provided with deep seal type "P" traps and/or other
required mounting appurtenances. All floor drains shall have
galvanized bodies with galvanized ductile iron tops or satin
nickel bronze tops.
2. The floor drains shall be as manufactured by the Wade Mfg. Co.,
Jay R. Smith, Josam or Zurn.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
Piping Installation:
1. The several piping systems required under the Mechanical division
of these specifications shall be installed in a neat and
workmanlike manner. All pipe hangers shall be of the type
mentioned in this section, and shall be so spaced and installed
as to maintain a rigid piping system, adequately supported both
laterally and vertically.
2. All domestic piping systems shall be installed level and the low
points of all risers shall have ball valves 1/2 inch in size
installed with hose ends and caps in order to adequately drain the
system.
3. At each group of plumbing fixtures and at each piece of
equipment, there shall be furnished and installed by this
Contractor, full port ball valves on each and every piping system
so that these groups of fixtures or pieces of equipment may be
isolated from accessible locations. Provide General Contractor
with locations of all access doors. Access doors required for
these valves shall be furnished by this Contractor. All valves
shall be readily accessible. 1. Access Doors. This Contractor
shall furnish and install
any access doors not furnished by the General Contractor
which may be required to provide convenient access to
valves or other appurtenances (shoktrols, trap primers,
mech-equipment and devices, etc.) concealed within walls
or chases of the building. Specific locations of access
doors shall be coordinated with the Architect's office
before installation.
Situate the full port ball valves
behind the door so as not to impede closing the door when
January 13, 2003
15110 – 5
Plumbing Conditions
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
the valve is shut-off.
4. Each of the piping systems shall be installed to provide for
expansion and contraction and the joints shall be soldered at such
time that the system is not under any strain. 1. All exterior
piping, whether the "Blue Brute" piping
option is taken or not, shall have thrust blocks and
anchorage at fittings.
Blocking sized according to
pressure, pipe size, kind of soil and type of fitting,
following all of the recommendations of the pipe
manufacturer.
5. Necessary spring pieces and offsets shall be furnished by this
Contractor as required.
6. Each of the piping systems shall be concealed in several chases,
above ceilings, in walls in all finished areas, and shall be run
exposed only as shown on the drawings in machinery spaces or
unfinished areas.
7. Exposed piping shall be held close to the walls and ceilings, and
necessary fittings shall be provided and installed to allow for
offsets to hold the piping close to walls and ceilings. Where
these lines run exposed a clearance shall be obtained from the
Architect in writing before making the installation.
8. All valves shall be so located as to make the removal of their
bonnets possible. All flanged valves shown in horizontal
positions shall be mounted with valve stem inclined on bolt hold
above the horizontal position. Screwed pattern valves placed in
horizontal lines shall be "made-up" with valve stem inclined at an
angle of thirty (30) degrees above the horizontal position. All
valve stems must be true and straight at the time the system is
tested for final acceptance.
3.2
PIPING JOINTS:
1. Screwed joints shall have full cut pipe threads Joints shall be
assembled with an approved compound applied to only the male
threads. A maximum of three pipe threads shall remain exposed
where the joint is assembled.
2. Solder joint shall be assembled with square cut pipe using a pipe
cutter. Hack saw cut pipe ends will not be acceptable. Open pipe
end shall be reamed to full size. Both the pipe
January 13, 2003
15110 – 6
Plumbing Conditions
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
and fitting shall be furnished absolutely clean. Brazing flux
shall be applied to both the pipe and fittings. The use of
corrosive acid flux will not be permitted. During the brazing, the
pipe and fittings must be charged with nitrogen gas.
3. Refer to Section 15000 for other requirements. 3.3
PIPE HANGERS (ADJUSTABLE CLEVIS):
1. Pipe hangers used are to be manufactured and installed according
to specifications SP-58-1975 (pipe hangers and supports materials, design and manufacture) and SP-89-1978 (pipe hangers and
supports - fabrication and installation practices) of the
Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS) .
2. Pipe hanger selection and application shall follow recommendations
of MSS SP-69-1976 (pipe hangers and supports - selection and
application). Hangers and accessories meeting these criteria are
manufactured by Elcen Metal Products Company, Grinnell Co., and
Fee & Mason Co.
3. Hangers used directly on copper pipe shall be copper or cadmium
plated. All other hangers and channels, angles, and supporting
steel shall be carbon steel with a black finish. Four (4) or more
pipes running parallel may be supported on trapeze hangers.
4. Hangers shall be located at within 2' of each change of direction
and spaces at or within the following maximum limits:
Pipe Diam.
1/2 – 1 in
1-1/4 – 2 in
2-1/2 – 3 in
3-1/2 – 4 in
5 – 6 in
Fluid
7 ft
7 ft
11 ft
13 ft
16 ft
Carbon Steel
Vapor
Fluid
8 ft
5 ft
9 ft
7 ft
14 ft
9 ft
16 ft
11 ft
19 ft
13 ft
Copper
Vapor
6 ft
9 ft
13 ft
15 ft
18 ft
1. For cast iron pressure piping, hanger spacing not to exceed 10
feet. Minimum of one hanger per pipe section close to joint on
barrel and at change of direction and branch connections.
2. For cast iron soil piping, hanger spacing not to exceed 10
feet. Minimum of two hanger per pipe section close to joint on
barrel spigot end and at change of direction and branch
connections.
January 13, 2003
15110 – 7
Plumbing Conditions
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
3. For fiberglass reinforced and plastic piping, space hangers
according to manufacturer's recommendations.
5.
Total hanger rod load (including piping, insulation, and fluid)
shall not exceed the following scheduled limits (min. rod size is
3/8 inch).
Nominal Maximum Rod
Diam. Load (Lbs.)
0-3/8
610
0-1/2
1,130
0-5/8
1,810
0-3/4
2,710
0-7/8
3,770
1-0/0
4, 960
1-1/8
6, 230
1-1/4
8,000
1-1/2
11, 630
1-3/4
15, 700
2-0/0
20,700
6.
Size and Hanger Schedule - Hangers are specified with regard to
fluid temperatures and whether or not pipe is insulated. Services
indicated are not exclusive but intended as a representative
class. MSS types with equivalents by Fee & Mason and Elcen are
given for each class of piping. For situations not covered herein
see MSS-SP-69-1976.
Temp. Range
Service
102-450°F Hot Water MSS Type 1,
1.
2.
Insulated Bare
1,3,4,5,6,7
3, 5, 7, 9&10
9,10,11&24
NOTE: Insulated hot lines must be provided with insulation
protecting saddles (MSS Type 39) or shields (MSS Type 40). For
special insulation considerations at support points, see
Paragraph G.
NOTE: MSS Type 10 (Elcen Fig. 89 and F&M Fig. 400) shall be
limited to use on pipe sizes 6 inches and less for all
services.
Temp. Range
Service
60-119°F
Domestic MSS Type
Waste,
Vent Comp.
Relief Vents
January 13, 2003
15110 – 8
Insulated Bare
1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7,
9,10,11&24
Elcen Equiv.
2,3,10C,12
Plumbing Conditions
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
33-59°F
Dom. C.W. MSS Type 1,3,4,5,6,7,
Condensate
Elcen Equiv.
2,3,10C,12
Drain (all 3,12,13,89, 13,68,89,90, piping re- 90,94 92 quiring
Fee&Mason
176,199,201,
vapor
Equiv.
232,236,239,
barrier)
201,232,239, 400, 261,400
1. NOTE:
All cold insulated lines must be provided with
insulation protecting shields (MSS Type 40).
For special
insulation considerations at support points, see Paragraph G.
7. Where individual hangers are used outside of insulation, apply a
9-inch length of 15 lb. density urethane insulation or foamglas to
pipe at point of hanging. Place hangers outside of insulation. As
an option, pipe shall be protected at the point of support by a
360 degree insert of high density, 100 psi, water-proofed calcium
silicate, encased in a 360 degree sheet metal shield. Insert to be
same thickness as adjoining pipe insulation. Shield length and
minimum sheet metal gauges shown in chart below. Insulation
insert to extend 1 inch beyond sheet metal shield on all refrigerant
lines. If pipe hanger spacing exceeds 10 feet, utilize double
layer shield on bearing surface.
Shield
Minimum
Pipe Size
Length
Gauge
1/2 - 1-1/2
12
26
2 - 6
12
20
(Insert and shield as manufactured by Pipe Shields Inc. are
acceptable.)
8. Trapeze Hangers - Suspend piping installed on trapeze hangers
from concrete insets or approved structural clips. Construct
trapeze hangers of angle iron, channels or other structural shapes
with flat surfaces for point of support.
9. Vertical Pipe Supports - Support all vertical pipe runs in pipe
chases at base or rise. Support pipes for lateral movement with
clamps or brackets. Supports for these areas shall be equal to
SUMNER STAKFIX.
10.Concrete Inserts - Install individual or continuous slot concrete
inserts for use with hangers from piping and equipment exposed.
Furnish and install concrete inserts in cooperation with
Contractor as concrete forms are installed. 1. Continuous Slot
Inserts:
Elcen
Figure 1150 and 9000
Fee & Mason
Figure 9000
January 13, 2003
15110 – 9
Plumbing Conditions
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
2.
Individual Insert:
Elcen
Grinnell
Mason
Figure 65,88 or 266
Figure 282 or 281 Fee &
Figure 186, 178 or 2570
11.Beam Clamps:
1. Pipe size - 3 in. and less: Fee & Mason Fig. 255L or equal.
2. Pipe size - 4 in. and over: Fee & Mason Fig. 249 or equal.
12.Hangers in General - Install all piping so that it will be free
to expand and Contract without creating undue stresses in piping
system.
13.Where copper pipe passes through sheet metal studs, utilize CPVC
inserts from "Plastic Oddities" to isolate pipe from the studs. Use
CPVC clamps in areas where copper domestic water line can be
attached to a wall or sheet metal studs for bracing. Attach clamp
to wall or stud with dedicated tool. Also, UPC approved type
Polyken isolation tape can be used on/around the circumference of
all domestic copper water tubing, where steel pipe supports and
steel pipe clamps would come in contact with copper tubing.
Install two to three wraps at each pipe support, etc.
3.4
SCHEDULE OF PLUMBING BRANCHES
1. The size of branches or run-outs to each fixture shall be as
indicated on the drawings. Where no size of connections is
indicated, connections shall be not less than in accordance with
the following schedule, or local plumbing code:
H.W.
Vent C.W.
Waste
Fixture
l inch
2 inches
4 inches
Water Closets
1/2
1/2 inch
2 inches
2 inches
Lavatories
Urinals
Sinks
(wall mtd)
2 inches
2 inches
2 inches
2 inches
3/4 inch
1/2 inch
1/2
inch
inch
Mop & Svc Sinks
1/2 inch
Floor Drains
Hose Bibbs
Drinking Fountains
January 13, 2003
3 inches
3 inches
2 inches
15110 – 10
2 inches
2 inches
2 inches
1/2
inch
1/2 inch
1/2 inch
Plumbing Conditions
-
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
3.5 EQUIPMENT PLUMBING CONNECTIONS
1. The Plumbing Contractor shall rough-in for connections to all
miscellaneous equipment noted on the drawings. Final connections
to the equipment shall be a part of this Contract.
2. The Plumbing Contractor shall make all final connections to all
pieces of equipment furnished under this (general) Contract that
require natural gas, water, drain, waste or vent connections,
furnishing all required shutoff cocks, valves, drain valves,
traps, and clean-outs.
3.6
CLEAN-OUTS
1.
Clean-outs shall be installed flush with finished surfaces
through which they extend. Closure plugs shall be counter sunk.
2.
Clean-outs shall not be located in carpeted areas. Contractor
shall coordinate with architectural drawings for carpeted areas,
avoid such areas, and extend clean-out arm to uncarpeted area.
3.7 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
1. The backflow preventers shall be installed in an area with an
acceptable drain to accept the small quantity of water normally
released from such a device. If location of installation is not
suitable for an exposed drip, provide a galvanized drain pan
located under the vent opening but not interfering with this "open
sight" drain, as required by the plumbing code. Pipe the drain
from the pan to an acceptable drain point with type "L" copper or
DWV plastic pipe, no less than 1 in. (25 mm) in size. Slope drain
in direction of flow.
2. Secure acceptance by the Plumbing Official. 3.8
BALANCING AND PERFORMANCE TESTS
1.
On a date predetermined and agreed upon by manufacturer,
Engineer, and Installer, prior to acceptance or installation by
Owner, conduct various tests witnessed by Engineer to determine
operational and functional acceptability of equipment installed.
Tests will determine that all items of equipment and materials
installed fully meet all requirements
January 13, 2003
15110 – 11
Plumbing Conditions
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
as to type, quality, design, and performance as stipulated in
Contract Documents. If any work is required or any equipment is
required as a result of the test, it will be done at no extra cost
to Owner. A re-test will also be done at no extra cost to Owner.
If after re-tests installation is still found to be inadequate,
remove defective equipment; furnish and reinstall equipment of
operational adequacy to satisfy Engineer that Contract Documents
have been satisfied. Perform this work at no additional cost to
Owner.
2. Remove from systems, during testing, all equipment which would be
damaged by test. Replace removed equipment after testing. Systems
may be tested in sections as work progresses; however, any
previously tested portion shall become a part of any later test of
composite system. Correct leaks by remaking joints with new
material. Test time will be accrued only while full test pressure
is on system.
3. Do all testing before insulating or concealing. 3.9
GUARANTEE
1. Guarantee that all mechanical systems remain free from defects in
workmanship and materials, and perform to specific capacities. If
defects appear during a period of one year from date of
substantial completion, remedy such defects to satisfaction of
Engineer, at no extra cost to Owner. Correct all defects within a
reasonable period.
3.10 IDENTIFICATION
1. Provide "OPTI-CODE" Pipe Markers and Brass Valve Tags as
manufactured by Seton Nameplate Corporation or an approved equal.
Pipe markers shall be spaced 20'-0" on center and 10'-0" from all
90° elbows. Do not mark pipes in open sales area with no ceiling.
2. The mechanical and plumbing contractors will each provide final
as-built drawings of the plumbing and the mechanical system
layouts in 1/8-inch minimum scale. Each valve and each piece of
mechanical equipment shall be numbered sequentially with a legend
on the side of the page corresponding to each number. This shall
be mounted on the mechanical room or mezzanine wall under plexiglas
with a wood frame.
January 13, 2003
15110 – 12
Plumbing Conditions
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
3.11 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS
1. All exposed traps and related connections shall be chrome plated
cast brass.
END OF SECTION
January 13, 2003
15110 – 13
Plumbing Conditions
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 15140
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
1.
Inserts and Rods.
2.
Pipe Hangers and Supports.
3.
Duct Hangers and Supports.
4.
Flashing for Mechanical Piping, Ductwork and Equipment.
5.
Pipe and Duct Penetration Sleeving and Sealing for All Services.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
1. Submit shop drawings on proposed methods and materials including
hangers, hanger attachments, wall supports, trapeze supports, floor
supports, HVAC unit suspension, submit details of pipe and duct
penetrations, sleeves, sealing and UL
approved
fire
stop
assemblies.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
1. B-Line.
2. Grinnell.
3. Unistrut. 2.2
INSERTS AND RODS
1. Use inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs
and sides of reinforced concrete beams wherever practicable.
2. Provide electrogalvanized steel hanger rods, threaded both ends,
threaded one end or continuous threaded.
3. Size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods.
January 13, 2003
15140 - 1
Supports and Anchors
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
2.3
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
1. Hangers: Pipe sizes 1/2 inch to 1-1/2 inches: adjustable wrought
steel ring.
2. Hangers: Pipe sizes 2 inches to 4 inches; adjustable wrought
steel clevis.
3. Hangers: Pipe sizes 6 inches and over; adjustable steel yoke.
Provide cast iron roll for all hot piping, Elcen Fig. 14.
4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers
and hanger rods, metal slide for pipe sizes 6 inches and over.
Provide cast iron roll and stand for hot pipe sizes 6 inches and
over.
5. Wall Support: Pipe sizes to 3 inches; cast iron hook.
6. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Over: Welded steel
bracket and wrought steel clamp, adjustable steel yoke and metal
slide for pipe sizes 6 inches and over. Provide cast iron roll for
pipe sizes 6 inches and over.
7. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.
8. Floor Support for Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches: Cast iron adjustable
pipe saddle, locknut nipple, floor flange and concrete pier to
steel support.
9. Steel Beam Clamps: Elcen Figure 33, Type 3.
10.Expansion Anchors: Phillips Red Head.
11.Design hangers to impede disengagement by movement of supported
pipe.
12.Provide copper plated hangers and supports, or two layers of PVC
tape, where hangers and supports are in direct contact with the
copper pipe.
2.4
DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
1. Comply with SMACNA Standards Section 4.
January 13, 2003
15140 - 2
Supports and Anchors
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
2.5
FLASHING
2.
3.
Lead Flashing: 5 lb./sq. ft. sheet lead for water-proofing, one
lb./sq. ft. sheet lead to soundproofing.
4.
Safes: 5 lb./sq. ft. sheet lead or 8 mil thick neoprene.
5.
Caps: Steel, 22-gauge minimum, 16-gauge at fire resistant
structures.
2.6
SLEEVES AND SEALANTS
1.
Piping Through Masonry or Concrete Walls, Concrete Footings and
Beams and Concrete Floor: Standard weight galvanized steel pipe.
2.
Piping Through Fire Rated Walls: 18-gauge galvanized sheet metal.
Seal with UL approved fire stop assembly utilizing an intumescent
foam sealant.
3.
Ducts Through Fire Rated Walls or Floors:
18-gauge
galvanized sheet metal.
Seal with UL rated fire stop
assembly utilizing an intumescent foam sealant.
4.
Pipes Penetrations Below Grade: "Link Seal" penetration seal with
Century galvanized after fabrication steel sleeve set in place
prior to concrete placement.
5.
Soil Pipe Penetrating Floors with Membrane Seal: Wade W-3600 cast
iron stack sleeve and seal with waterproofing flange and clamp
device.
PART 3
3.1
Steel Flashing: 26-gauge galvanized steel.
EXECUTION
INSERTS
1. Use inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs
and sides of reinforced concrete beams wherever practicable.
2. Set inserts in position in advance of concrete work. Provide
reinforcement rod in concrete for inserts carrying pipe over 4
inches or ducts over 60 inches wide.
January 13, 2003
15140 - 3
Supports and Anchors
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
3.2
Canadian, Texas
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
1. All structures and appurtenances employed for the purpose of
supporting the pipe and guiding it properly shall be carefully
fabricated in such a manner as to preserve the true grade of the
pipe without subjecting either the pipe or the supporting and
guidance members to any undue strain.
2. Support horizontal piping and provide hangers and rods at each
change in direction. Spacing shall comply with Manufacturer's
Standardization Society (MSS) Standard Practice SP-69. In cases
of conflict between the specifications and this Standard, the
most stringent requirements shall govern.
3. Support horizontal soil pipe near each hub, with 5 feet maximum
spacing between hangers.
4. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch clear space between
finished covering and adjacent work.
5. Place a hanger within one foot of each horizontal elbow.
6. Use hangers which are vertically adjustable 1-1/2 inches minimum
after piping is erected.
7. Support piping at each change of direction, at ends of branches,
at base and top of riser pipes and drops, and wherever necessary
to prevent sag, bending or vibration, in addition to above-listed
hanger spacing.
8. Pipe hangers on insulated lines shall be sized to fit the outside
of the insulation.
9. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at the same
elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers, designed to support
loads per ANSI B31.1.
10.Where practical, support riser piping independently of connected
horizontal piping.
3.3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR DUCTWORK
1. Comply with SMACNA Standards Section 4.
January 13, 2003
15140 - 4
Supports and Anchors
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
2. Externally insulated ducts shall be supported on full trapeze
hangers in accordance with SMACNA Standard 4-5.
3.4
EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS
1. Except as otherwise specified or indicated on the drawings,
provide for major equipment minimum four inches thick, 6 X 6 10/10 mesh reinforced concrete house-keeping bases poured
directly on structural floor slab pinned in place and extended 6
inches minimum beyond machinery bedplates. Provide 45 degrees by
one inch bevel of top surface edge along concrete base. Provide
templates, anchor bolts and accessories required for mounting and
anchoring equipment. Coordinate with other trades.
2. Construct supports of structural steel members or steel pipe and
fittings. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure.
3. Grout all bases of base mounted pumps in solid to concrete pad
with non-shrink epoxy grout.
3.5
PRIMING
1. Prime coat non-galvanized or non-plated steel hangers,
reinforcements and supports.
3.6
FLASHING
1. Flash and counterflash where mechanical equipment passes through
weather or waterproofed walls, floor, and roofs.
2. Flash vent and soil pipes projecting 12 inches minimum above
finished roof surface with lead worked 1-inch minimum into hub, 8
inches minimum clear on sides with minimum 24"x24" sheet size.
For pipes through outside walls, turn flange back into wall and
caulk.
3. Flash floor drains over finished areas with lead 10 inches clear
on sides with minimum 36"x36" sheet size. Fasten flashing to
drain clamp device.
4. Provide curbs for mechanical roof installation 12 inches minimum
high. Flash and counterflash with steel, soldered
January 13, 2003
15140 - 5
Supports and Anchors
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
and waterproofed.
3.7
SLEEVES
1.
Set sleeves in position in advance of concrete work. Provide
suitable reinforcing around sleeves.
2.
Extend sleeves through floors 2 inches above finished floor.
Caulk sleeves full depth.
3.
Sleeves through walls shall be flush with the finished wall
surface.
4.
Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion,
to allow insulation to extend through the sleeve uninterrupted
and to allow space for proper sealing.
5.
Install
fire
stop
assemblies
in
strict
accordance
with
manufacturer's printed installation instructions and provisions
of UL rating.
6.
Install chrome plated escutcheons where piping passes through
finished surfaces.
7.
Pipe and duct sleeves, pitch pockets, and flashings compatible
with the roofing installation shall be provided for roof
penetrations.
END OF SECTION
January 13, 2003
15140 - 6
Supports and Anchors
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 15150
CLEANING AND TESTING
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL CONDITIONS
SCOPE
1. This Contractor shall, at his own expense, during the progress of
the work or upon its completion, make such tests of his work as
are herein specified in accordance with all laws, governing
authorities, or as are required by Architect or by state or
municipal
bureaus
having
jurisdiction
and
under
their
supervision.
The
Contractor
shall
provide
all
apparatus,
temporary piping connections or any other requirements necessary
for such tests. He shall take all due precautions to prevent
damage to building or its contents incurred by such tests, as he
sill be required to repair and make good, and test shall be
repeated until the test requirements are fully complied with.
Repairs to piping shall be made with new material. No caulking or
peening of screwed joints and holes will be acceptable.
2. No work of any nature shall be insulated, covered, enclosed or
otherwise concealed until properly inspected, tested and approved.
Any leaks which develop during any of the tests shall be
corrected with new material and made as good as required; said
tests shall be repeated until the work is satisfactory to
Architect and the mechanical and plumbing inspectors in every
way.
3. Each separate system with its various components shall be
operated by this contractor for a reasonable length of time to
demonstrate the performance of all equipment and piping in
accordance with the true intent and purpose of the plans and
specifications. All necessary adjustments shall be made to the
satisfaction of the Architect.
4. All motor driven equipment shall be proved operable generally in
accordance with the intent of these specifications.
5. All electrical power and water for testing of air conditioning
and/or heating equipment and plumbing systems shall be provided
by the General Contractor.
1.2 RELATED WORK - DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
1.
General Mechanical Conditions - Section 15000
2.
Plumbing - Section 15100
January 13, 2003
15150 - 1
Cleaning and Testing
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
3.
Plumbing Fixtures, Equipment and Drains
PART 2PRODUCTS - Products are not a part of this spec.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
TESTING AND ADJUSTING
1. All testing shall be conducted in the presence of the HEB
Plumbing Superintendent.
2. Water Piping Systems: Water piping systems shall be properly
tested to a hydrostatic pressure of one hundred and fifty pounds
(150 psi) per square inch gauge for a period of not less than
eight hours. During this test period, all leaks in pipe, fittings
and accessories, in the particular piping system which is being
tested, shall be stopped and the hydrostatic test shall again be
applied. This procedure shall be repeated for an entire eight
hour period and no leaks can be found while the system being tested
is subjected to the pressure mentioned above.
3. Sanitary Drains: Pipe shall have all outlets temporarily plugged.
The pipes shall be filled with water testing the system in section
such that no section shall be tested with less than 10 foot (10')
head of water. If after twenty-four (24) hours, the level of the
water has been lowered by leakage, the leaks must be found and
stopped by this Contractor, and the water level shall again be
raised and the test repeated until after twenty-four hour
retention period there shall be no perceptible lowering of the
water level of the system being tested.
4. Gas piping shall be leak tested at 150 psi. All welds shall be
subject to x-ray if a visual inspection is not acceptable.
3.2
CLEANING
1. Before final inspection, the plumbing and HVAC installation shall
be thoroughly cleaned. Equipment, pipe, valves, fixtures and
fittings shall be cleaned or grease, metal cuttings, plaster,
concrete, and other debris.
2. Domestic water system shall be flushed out progressively by
opening outlets and flowing until water runs clear. Flushing shall
be done after testing and prior to sterilization.
January 13, 2003
15150 - 2
Cleaning and Testing
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
3. Factory applied prime coat paints shall be touched up covering
bare places and scratches. Non-galvanized metal surfaces on
equipment, equipment bases and supports and pipe supports shall be
cleaned and painted with two coats of rustinhibitive paint. This
includes fan bases, isolators, and anchor bolts.
4. Damage to building, finish, and furnishings due to failure to
properly clean piping systems, and due to piping system leaks or
damage caused by repair, shall be repaired or replaced by the
Contractor at no cost to the Owner.
5. All cleaning shall be conducted in the presence of the HEB
Plumbing Superintendent.
3.3
STERILIZATION
1. After completion of the testing, the entire domestic cold and hot
water piping systems with attached equipment shall be thoroughly
sterilized with a solution containing not less than 50 parts per
million
of
available
chlorine,
conforming
to
U.S.
Army
Specification #4-1, or calcium Hypochlorite or chlorinated line
conforming to the requirements of Federal Specification 0-C-114,
and shall be pumped into the system through the connection
described below. The sterilization solution shall be allowed to
remain in the system for a period of twenty-four (24) hours,
during which time all valves and faucets shall be opened and
closed several times. After sterilization, the solution shall be
flushed from the system with clean water until the residual
chlorine content is not greater than 0.2 parts per million. The
exact procedure actually used shall meet or exceed local code
requirements.
2. The sterilization solution shall be introduced into the water
system through a 3/4" opening to be provided in the water main on
the house side of the water meter and shall be at the plumbers
expense.
3. The sterilization process shall be conducted under the direction
of the local health department and upon completion of the process,
the health department shall test and verify the cleanliness of the
water piping system.
4. Written copies of certification that the system has been
sterilized and tested as specified shall be forwarded by the
Contractor to the Owner's representative.
January 13, 2003
15150 - 3
Cleaning and Testing
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
5. All sterilization shall be conducted in the presence of the HEB
Plumbing Superintendent
3.4
TESTING LOW PRESSURE GAS PIPING
1. Apply 50 psig air pressure.
2. Test all joints with a soap solution while lines are under
pressure.
3. Repair all leaks.
4. Make a final 24-hour standing pressure test with air at 20 psi
before connecting equipment.
5. All sterilization shall be conducted in the presence of the HEB
Plumbing Superintendent.
3.5
TESTING MEDIUM PRESSURE GAS PIPING
1. Apply 100 psi air pressure.
1. Test all joints with a soap solution while lines are under
pressure.
2. Repair all leaks.
3. Make a final test under 250 psig cold water hydrostatic
pressure.
4. Repair all leaks.
5. Retest the system until it is proven free of leaks.
6. All sterilization shall be conducted in the presence of the
HEB Plumbing Superintendent.
TEST RECORD
Job _________________________________________________________________
Contractor __________________________________________________________
Piping System _______________________________________________________
General Location ____________________________________________________
Boundaries of Test __________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
Test Method _________________________________________________________
Pressure __________________ Duration ________________________________
Leakage Allowed ___________ Spec No. ________________________________
Visual Examination __________________________________________________
Joints, Fittings, Etc. ______________________________________________
Compaction __________________________________________________________
January 13, 2003
15150 - 4
Cleaning and Testing
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
Other Tests _________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
The above test was conducted and/or supervised by the undersigned
on __________________ . The above test represents partial/complete
testing of this item and the undersigned certifies that the pipe (is/is
not) ready for backfill.
Owner Representative
Title
Test Witnessed By:
1. ___________________________________
Signature
Title
____________________________
2. ___________________________________
Signature
Title
___________________________
3. ___________________________________
Signature
Title
____________________________
Remarks:________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
END OF SECTION
January 13, 2003
15150 - 5
Cleaning and Testing
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 15170
MOTORS AND CONTROLLERS
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
1. Motors: Furnished and installed under Division 15.
2. Controllers: Furnished under Division 15, installed under
Division 16.
3. Variable Speed Controllers: Furnished under Division 15,
installed under Division 16.
1.2
GENERAL
1. Submit manufacturers product data for motors and controllers with
each specific item of equipment. Data shall include motor
horsepower, efficiency, voltage, phase, frequency, controller
ratings, fuse size, heater sizes, and dimensional data.
2. Submit certification that equipment complies with IEEE Standard
519.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. Motors and Controllers: Comply with NEMA Standards.
2. Installation and Wiring: Comply with National Electrical Code and
Division 16 requirements.
3. Variable Frequency Drives: Comply with IEEE Standard 519. The
total harmonic distortion reflected to the source shall not exceed
5% with all variable frequency drives operating as outlined in IEEE
Standard 519, 1981.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
1. Motors and Controllers:
Baldor.
Century.
General Electric.
Furnas.
Louis-Allis.
January 13, 2003
15170- 1
Motors and Controllers
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
Marathon.
Reliance.
Square D.
U.S. Electric Motors.
10. Westinghouse Electric.
2. Variable Speed Motor Controllers:
1. Eaton Dynamatic.
2. Graham.
3. ABB
4. Magnetek.
5. Robicon.
2.2
MOTORS
1.
For alternating current, fractional and integral horsepower
motors, NEMA Publications MG1 and MG2 shall apply.
2.
Voltage ratings shall be as follows:
1. Single phase:
1. Motors
connected to 120 volt systems:
115 volts.
2. Motors
connected to 208 volt systems:
200 volts.
3. Motors
connected to 240 volt systems:
230/460 volts,
dual connection.
2. Three phase:
1. Motors connected to 208 volt systems: 200 volts.
2. Motors, less than 100 HP, connected to 240 volt or 480
volts systems: 230/460 volts, dual connection.
3. Motors,
100
HP or larger,
connected
to
240 volt
230 volts.
systems:
4. Motors,
100
HP or larger,
connected
to
480 volt
systems:
460 volts.
3. Number of phases shall be as follows:
1. Motors, less than 3/4 HP: Single-Phase.
2. Motors, 3/4 HP and larger: 3-Phase.
3. Exceptions:
1. Hermetically sealed motors.
2. Motors for equipment assemblies, less than one HP, may be
single phase provided the manufacturer of the proposed
assemblies cannot supply the assemblies with three phase
motors.
4. Horsepower ratings shall be adequate for operating the connected
loads continuously in the prevailing ambient temperatures in areas
where the motors are installed, without exceeding the NEMA Standard
temperature rises for the motor insulations.
January 13, 2003
15170- 2
Motors and Controllers
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
5. Motor designs, as indicated by the NEMA code letters, shall be
coordinated with the connected loads to assure adequate starting
and running torques.
6. Bearings:
1. Motors shall be equipped with pre-lubricated steel ball or
roller bearings.
2. Bearings shall have a rated fatigue life of 20,000 hours (L-10
minimum) assuming bearing load calculated with the minimum NEMA
pulley size so located that the centerline of the belt load is
at the end of the NEMA standard shaft extension (worst
condition).
3. Bearings housings shall be equipped with grease openings for
simultaneously adding new grease and purging the old grease.
Provide corrosion resistant plugs or caps on grease openings
which are easily accessible.
4. Rotating shaft seals or slingers at both fan and shaft ends
shall be provided to prevent entry of contaminants and prevent
grease leakage.
7. Motor insulation shall be NEMA Design B for standard duty motors.
Severe duty motors shall have Class F insulation. Temperature
rise will be in accordance with NEMA limits for class of
insulation, service factor, and enclosure specified.
Unless otherwise noted, motors shall be rated for 40° C ambient
temperature.
8. Motor enclosures shall be open drip-proof construction, except
where exposed to the weather where they shall be splash-proof
with rodent screens. Where adverse vapors or dust conditions
prevail, enclosures shall be totallyenclosed, or totally-enclosed
fan-cooled. In explosive atmospheres, explosion-proof fan-cooled
enclosures with nonspark fans shall be provided. Motor frames
shall be of heavy duty construction using steel, aluminum or cast
iron. End brackets shall be of cast iron or aluminum
construction. Aluminum must have steel inserts in the bearing
cavity. Severe duty motors shall be cast iron construction
(frame, end brackets and terminal box) and have all external
hardware including fan and fan cover or plated to prevent corrosion
or be of corrosion resistant material. The air gap surfaces shall
be coated with epoxy or zinc chromate to resist corrosion.
9. Polyphase motors shall be squirrel cage design with NEMA Design B
locked-rotor, break-down and pull-out torque as standard unless
otherwise specified.
For heavy inertia
January 13, 2003
15170- 3
Motors and Controllers
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
loads, provide motors having design torque characteristics.
10.Motor sizes as indicated on the drawings are for guidance purposes
only, and is not intended to limit the equipment size.
11.Motor loading under normal conditions shall not exceed the motor
nameplate loads, at applied temperature. Motors shall not be tied
to operate within the service factor range of the motor.
12.Motor enclosures shall be thoroughly cleaned and painted at the
factory with manufacturers prime coat and standard finish.
Special painting shall be as specified.
13.Motor speeds shall be nominally 1800 RPM when applied to a 60 Hz
system.
14.Belts, chains, pulleys, couplings, motor shafts, gears and other
moving parts shall be enclosed and guarded. The guards shall be
metal, not less than No. 14-gauge, and removable for servicing of
the motors without disassembling any pipes or fittings.
15.Energy Efficiency:
1. Motors will have a power factor rating at full load and rated
voltage of at least 85%. If a motor draws less than 1000 watts
at full load, it is excluded from the 85% P.F. requirement.
2. The minimum full load efficiency (P.F. x Eff.) shall meet or
exceed the values below when the motors are tested in
accordance with IEEE Test Procedure 112A, Method B.
January 13, 2003
15170- 4
Motors and Controllers
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
Minimum
Minim
Efficiency
Efficiency
HP
(Percent)
HP
(Percent)
1
1-1/2
81.5
2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
81.5
86.5
86.5
88.5
88.5
91.7
91.7
25
81.5
93.0
30
93.0
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
200
94.0
94.0
94.0
95.0
95.0
95.0
95.8
95.8
16.Additional requirements for specific motors, as indicated in other
sections, shall also apply.
2.3 MOTOR CONTROLLERS
1. Motor controllers shall be provided for each piece of motor
driven equipment except when such motor is below 1/8 HP, and when
internally protected. Controllers having thermal protective
devices shall be provided on all motors 1/8 HP and above.
2. Manual Starters:
1. Manual motor starters shall consist of a manually operated
toggle switch equipped with a melting alloy type thermal
overload relay. The thermal unit shall be of a one-piece
construction and shall be interchangeable. Starters shall
be so designed that when the thermal unit is removed, the
starter is rendered inoperative. Starter contacts shall
be double-make, double-break, silver alloy, visible for
both sides of the starter, and shall have a direct
mechanical linkage to operator for positive break.
2. Manual motor starters shall be either single or three
phase as required by the motor being controlled.
3. Fractional horsepower manual motor starters shall be
suitable for single gang outlet box mounting. Surface
mounted units shall have an appropriate enclosure to suit
the environment in which the switch is installed.
4. Integral horsepower manual motor starters shall be
supplied with melting alloy type thermal overload relays
January 13, 2003
15170- 5
Motors and Controllers
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
in each phase and supplied with an enclosure suited to the
environment in which it is installed.
5. Provide each starter with a red indicating light in the cover
when controlling a motor that is out of sight of the starter.
6. Following installation, provide thermal overload units which
are sized for the specific motor being controlled, in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
3. Magnetic Starters:
1. Motor starters shall be across-the-line magnetic type built
and rated in accordance with NEMA Standards, sizes and
horsepower ratings. Starter size zero through size seven shall
be equipped with double-break silver alloy contacts. Singlebreak contacts shall be supplied on size
8.
All contacts shall be replaceable without removing power
wiring or removing starter from the panel or enclosure.
Starter shall have straight through wiring. Size 00 starters
shall not be used on this project.
2. Magnetic motor starter coils shall be of molded construction
through size seven. Coils on size eight starters shall be form
wound, taped, varnished and baked.
Coils shall be replaceable from the front without removing
the starter from the panel or enclosure.
3. Control Coil Voltage shall be limited to 120 volts. For
starters operating at above 120 volt, provide a fused control
transformer in each starter to transform the voltage to the
desired voltage. Control voltages for individual starters shall
be derived from the power source supplying power to the motor
being controlled.
4. Overload relays shall be of the melting alloy type with a
replaceable control circuit module. Thermal units shall be of
one-piece construction and interchangeable. The starter shall
be inoperative if the thermal unit is removed.
5. Each starter shall be suitable for at least four external
interlocks of any arrangement, normally open or normally
closed, and shall be field convertible. Provide a minimum of
one spare interlock per starter.
6. Enclosures shall be provided of the NEMA approved type to suit
the environment where the starter is installed unless specified
otherwise elsewhere.
7. Provide "Hand-Off-Auto" selector switch in starter enclosure
cover
when
the
motor
being
controlled
is
controlled
automatically. Otherwise starters shall have momentary contact
"start-stop" pushbutton in the cover unless indicated to be
remotely mounted. Each starter
January 13, 2003
15170- 6
Motors and Controllers
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
shall also have one red ("ON") and one green ("OFF")
indicating light installed in the door or cover.
8. Following installation, provide thermal overload units which
are sized for the specific motor or motors being controlled in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
4. Combination Starters:
1. General: Combination starters shall be manufactured in
accordance with the latest published NEMA standards, sizes and
horsepower ratings. Disconnect switch combination starters
shall consist of a fused disconnect switch and a motor starter.
Combination starters shall be mounted in general purpose
enclosures unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
2. Starters: Combination starters shall be mounted in general
purpose manufactured in accordance with the latest published
NEMA standards, sizes, and horsepower ratings. These starters
shall be furnished with a melting alloy
type thermal overload relays in each phase. Starter operating
coils and contacts shall be as required in "Starters,
Magnetic".
3. Thermal Units:
Thermal units shall be of one-piece
construction and interchangeable.
The start shall be
inoperative if a thermal unit is removed.
4. Disconnect Handle: The disconnect handle used on combination
starters shall always be in control of the disconnect device
with the door opened or closed. The disconnect handle shall be
clearly marked providing positive indication whether the
disconnect device is "ON" or "OFF".
1. Disconnecting switches shall be NEMA sized and approved for
the application, and be provided with fuse holder having
rejection feature for the fuse specified. All contact
surfaces
shall
be
silver
plated,
have
visibleblade
construction, and have quick-make, quick-break non-tease
operating mechanism. Fuse holders shall have spring assembly
to assure uniform pressure over the blade to reduce
heating.
2. Each combination starter shall be furnished with type
"RK5" fuses sized appropriately for motor load.
5. Each starter shall be suitable to have at least four external
interlocks of any arrangement, normally-open, or normallyclosed, and shall be field convertible. Provide a minimum of 1
spare interlock per starter.
6. Enclosures shall be provided of the NEMA approved type to suit
the environment where the starter is installed,
January 13, 2003
15170- 7
Motors and Controllers
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
unless specified otherwise elsewhere.
7. Provide "Hand-Off-Auto" selector switch in starter enclosure
cover
when
the
motor
being
controlled
is
controlled
automatically. Otherwise starters shall have a momentary
contact "start-stop" pushbutton in the cover. Also each
starter shall have on red ("ON") and one green ("OFF")
indicating light installed in the door or cover.
8. Following installation, provide thermal overload units which
are sized for the specific motor or motors being controlled,
in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
5. Reduced Voltage Starters: Provide reduced voltage starters on each
motor 50 horsepower and larger:
1. General Specification: Motor starters shall be rated in
accordance with NEMA sizes and horsepower ratings. Timing relays
shall be pneumatic type, adjustable to at least one minute.
2. Contacts: All starters NEMA Size 7 and smaller shall have
double break silver alloy contacts. All contacts must be
capable of being inspected, and must be removable, without
removing line or load wiring.
3. Coils: Coils on starters, NEMA Size 7 and smaller, and on all
control and timing relays shall be molded construction. Coils
on starters Size 8 and above shall be form wound, taped,
varnished, and baked.
4. Overload Relays and Thermal Units: Overload relays shall be
melting alloy type. Thermal units shall be of onepiece
construction
and
interchangeable.
The
starter
shall
be
inoperative unless thermal units are installed.
5. Enclosure: All starters shall be furnished in general purpose,
NEMA 1, enclosures unless otherwise specified. Starters in
NEMA 1 enclosures which are automatically controlled shall have
a "Hand-Off-Auto" selector switch in the cover, otherwise units
shall be provided with a momentary contact "start-stop"
pushbutton in the cover. Also each starter shall have on red
("ON") and one green ("OFF") indicating light installed in the
door or cover.
6. Type of Reduced Voltage Starter:
1. Autotransformer Starters: The autotransformer used shall
have 2-coil construction, with taps for 50, 65, and 80%
starting voltage, and shall be designed for
Medium Duty, per NEMA standard ICS 2-214. Closed transition
starting shall be provided. Three melting alloy overload
relays shall be provided for overload protection.
January 13, 2003
15170- 8
Motors and Controllers
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
7.
2. Part Winding Starters: Part winding starters NEMA Size 4 and
smaller shall consist of a 4-pole "START" and a 2-pole "RUN"
Starter. For NEMA Size 5 and larger both "START" and "RUN"
shall be 3-pole starters. Six melting alloy overload relays
shall be provided for overload protection of both motor
windings.
Following installation, provide thermal overload units which
are sized for the specific motor being controlled, in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
2.4 VARIABLE SPEED MOTOR CONTROLLER
1. Provide a complete drive system for speed control of a standard
three phase induction motor, including an input disconnect, an
integral bypass system, motor overload protection, and input line
filters.
2. The controller shall be of NEMA 1 construction suitable for wall
mounting. An amp meter and frequency meter shall be provided in
the front panel of the VFD enclosure.
3. The unit shall transform 60 Hz input power into frequency and
voltage controlled three phase output power suitable to provide
positive speed control to standard induction motors. The speed
control shall be stepless throughout the speed range under
variable torque loads on a continuous basis. The control shall
incorporate a non-switching input section with a minimum 95% power
factor at all speeds.
4. All discrete electronic components shall be assembled in modular
printed circuit boards which can be replaced without soldering of
connections.
5. The motor speed controller shall be controlled from the automatic
control system. Coordinate and provide suitable interface. The
unit shall be provided with an input signal offset adjustment to
allow zero speed operation from input signals above zero, and an
input signal gain adjustment to allow full speed operating from
signals which do not reach full nominal control signal. A method
to allow the unit to operate in an inverse mode (maximum speed at
minimum control signal, and minimum speed at maximum control signal)
shall be provided.
6. The controller shall be furnished with integral input line
reactors with minimum 2-1/2% impedance.
January 13, 2003
15170- 9
Motors and Controllers
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
7. The controller shall have the following features:
1. The current limiter shall be capable of limiting output
current to 110% of the inverter rating. The current limiter
shall be signed to function automatically to prevent over
current trip due to momentary overload conditions, allowing
the inverter to continue operation.
2. The instantaneous overcurrent trip shall safely limit the
output current to 200% of rated current in under 50
microseconds due to phase short circuit or severe overload
conditions.
3. An undervoltage trip shall protect the inverter due to
nonmomentary power or phase loss. the undervoltage trip shall
activate automatically when the line voltage drops 10 - 15%
below rated input voltage.
4. The overvoltage trip shall protect the inverter due to voltage
levels in excess of 10 - 15% of nominal line voltage.
5. An over temperature trip shall protect the inverter from
elevated temperatures in excess of component rating. The over
temperature trip indicator shall illuminate continuously if
the unit is tripped on over-temperature.
6. The inverter logic shall allow a trip condition resulting from
momentary power less or undervoltage to automatically reset, and
the inverter shall automatically restart upon correction of the
trip condition. The number of restart attempts shall be limited
to five (5). If after five (5) attempts, the restart is not
successful, the inverter shall shutdown safely and require
manual restart. If a successful restart occurs, the restart
circuit counter shall reset to zero (0) counts after
approximately ten (10) minutes of uninterrupted operation.
7. Illuminated readout indication of conditions described above
shall
be
provided
on
the
front
panel
of
the
unit.
Additionally, illuminated indication showing power on, output
speed (if any) and a drive enable condition shall be provided.
A SPDT contact for remote indication of trip condition and
drive "run" shall be provided.
8. The drive logic shall be microprocessor based [PWM voltage
output] or [diode bridge six step voltage source design].
9. In event of a power loss, the control shall be designed to
shutdown safely without component failure. Upon return of
power, the system shall be designed to automatically return to
normal operation and restart into a rotating motor or shutdown
and then restart without component damage.
10.In the event of a phase-to-phase short circuit, the control
shall be designed to shutdown safely without
January 13, 2003
15170- 10
Motors and Controllers
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
component damage.
11.No damage to the unit shall result in the event that an
input or output disconnect switch, or circuit breaker is
opened or closed while the control is activated.
12.To facilitate startup and service, the controller shall be
designed to operate without a motor or auxiliary equipment
connected to the inverter output.
13.A dedicated terminal strip to allow the controller to be
interconnected with external shutdown contacts. The system
must be capable of shutdown whether in the drive or in the
bypass mode by remote signals.
8. A nominal 0 to 10 volt DC or 4-20 ma signal shall be provided.
The signal shall vary in direct proportion to the controller
speed. The controller shall have the capability to accept either
type of signal.
9. The controller shall be suitable for operation in a 104° F/95% RH
(noncondensing) environment. The unit shall not be installed in
direct sunlight or mounted on any surface exceeding 104° F.
10.A "Hand/Off/Auto" switch and manual speed adjustment shall be
provided on the front of the enclosure. When the switch is in the
"hand" position, the unit shall be enabled and the manual speed
adjustment shall control speed. When the switch is in "auto"
position, the controller shall be controlled by an input control
signal provided an external "enabling" contact is closed.
11.Acceleration time from zero to full speed shall be adjustable from
two (2) to three hundred (300) seconds. Deceleration time shall
be independently adjustable for the same range. A maximum
frequency (speed) adjustment shall be available to limit drive
output to less than 60 Hz frequency selectable.
12.Provide a bypass consisting of the following:
1. A compartment with door interlocked main input [disconnect
switch] or [circuit breaker];
2. Power on light;
3. "Drive-Off-Bypass" manual mode selector switch;
4. Drive and bypass status lights;
5. A method to facilitate static testing of the drive at startup
or while the motor is operating in the bypass mode.
6. The bypass switch design shall allow the drive to be operated
at constant speed while simultaneously servicing
January 13, 2003
15170- 11
Motors and Controllers
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
or testing the controller.
7. Full voltage across the line magnetic contacts with thermal motor
overload relays in each phase.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 MOTOR INSTALLATION
1. Where applicable Contractor shall:
1. Install loose motor on base.
2. Install pulleys and belts.
3. Adjust belt tension.
4. Install necessary internal wiring.
5. Adjust speed on driven device to
capacity.
6.
Check
motor
load
electrically
to
determine the motor is not overloaded
when the driven device is operating at
prescribed capacity.
3.2
obtain prescribed
CONTROLLER INSTALLATION
1. Deliver motor controllers with wiring diagrams to the project site
for installation and final connection under Division 16.
3.3 VARIABLE SPEED MOTOR CONTROLLER INSTALLATION
1. Startup shall be performed by factory authorized personnel. Prepare
a certified report listing the drive and motor nameplate data,
name of the driven equipment and startup data pertinent to proper
drive operation.
END OF SECTION
January 13, 2003
15170- 12
Motors and Controllers
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 15190
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
1.
Pipe Identification.
2.
Valve Identification.
3.
Equipment Identification.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
1. Submit product data describing materials and methods of
attachment for each type of identification device.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
1. Brady.
2. Seton. 2.2
PIPE
IDENTIFICATION
1.
Pipe markers shall be suitable for all temperatures anticipated
in system down periods as well as operational times.
2.
Adhesive markers shall be made of vinyl cloth with extra strong
adhesive (32 oz. per inch width) and shall have a silicone
plastic overcoating. Surface preparation shall be as prescribed by
the manufacturer. The adhesive marker shall be used on indoor
applications only.
3.
All plastic snap over type pipe identification shall be outdoor
grade acrylic plastic. Strap on construction shall be used on pipe
size (including insulation) six inches and over.
January 13, 2003
15190 - 1
Mechanical Identification
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
2.3
VALVE IDENTIFICATION
4. Valve tags shall have valve number corresponding with the valve
schedule.
5. Each valve tag shall be minimum 20-gauge polished brass not less
than 1-1/2 inches in diameter. Each tag shall identify service
(1/4-inch stamped letters) and valve number (1/2-inch letters ) .
6. Tags shall be secured to the valve with approved meter seal,
Brass "S" hook, Brass jack chain, or other approved methods.
7. Abbreviations for service shall be as follows with the system
designation indicating the system served. (Note: color coded
aluminum tags may be used for this purpose in lieu of brass tags).
ABBREVIATIONS For Service
DCW
Domestic Cold Water
DHWS Domestic Hot Water Supply
RS
Freon Suction
RL
Freon Liquid
SW
Soft Water
2.4
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
1. Equipment identification tags shall identify the function and use
of the equipment in language corresponding to the drawings and
schedules.
2. Aluminum nameplates shall be minimum 2-1/2"x 3/4" with black
enamel background with etched or engraved natural aluminum
lettering not less than 1/4-inch high.
3. Engraved laminated plastic nameplates may be used on indoor
equipment minimum 2-1/2" x 3/4" with 1/4-inch high lettering and
contrasting letter color.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
1. All identification shall be located so that the view is
unobstructed.
January 13, 2003
15190 - 2
Mechanical Identification
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
2. Attachment of all identification tags or plate shall be
permanent, suitable for the location and located so as to not
interfere with system operation or maintenance.
3. Equipment manufacturers nameplates or identification shall not be
obscured.
3.2
PIPE IDENTIFICATION
1. Use a pipe marker at each valve to show proper identification of
pipe contents. Where several valves exist on one header, it is
necessary to mark only the header.
2. Apply a pipe marker and an arrow marker at every point of pipe
entry or exit or where line goes through a wall.
3. Apply pipe markers and arrow markers at intervals not exceeding
25 feet.
4. Apply markers around circumference of pipe where view is
unobstructed in open and service areas above ceiling.
5. Pipe identification markers and arrow flow markers shall be
provided on the following piping systems:
1. Domestic Hot Water
2. Domestic Cold Water
3. Soft water
4. Return air duct
5. General Exhaust duct
6. Smoke exhaust
6. The legend shall be explicit in identifying the contents.
Examples are shown below:
Examples of Legends
High Temp Water 400° 250 psi Air
100 psi
Foam
3.3 VALVE IDENTIFICATION
1. Identify each valve in a manner that will permit free operation
of the valve.
January 13, 2003
15190 - 3
Mechanical Identification
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
2. Charts of all valves shall be furnished in duplicate by the
Contractor, said charts to include the following items:
1. Valve Identification Number.
2. Location.
3. Purpose.
4. Type.
5. Service.
6. Pressure.
7. Class.
8. Manufacturer.
9. Figure number.
3. One chart shall be mounted in an aluminum frame with plexiglass
and secured on a wall in the main machine room, or in a location as
directed by the Engineer.
4. A second chart shall be prepared for use outside of the machine
room, and shall be provided with transparent plastic covering on
both sides. Provide two holes at the top of the chart reinforced
with grommets each with an 8-inch length of nickel plated bead
chain.
3.4
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
1. All pieces of major equipment shall be identified as to function
and distinguishing number.
2. Plates shall be attached with screws or rivets.
END OF SECTION
January 13, 2003
15190 - 4
Mechanical Identification
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 15250
MECHANICAL INSULATION
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
1. Piping, Equipment and Duct Insulation. 1.2
SUBMITTALS
1. Submit manufacturer's product data including:
1. Schedule of materials by service showing thickness and
finish.
2. Thermal properties.
3. Adhesives and sealants.
4. Installation procedures.
5. Letter of Certification and Guarantee as stated in Section
15250, Part 1, Paragraph 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. Deliver material to job site in original non-broken factory
packaging, labeled with manufacturer's density and thickness.
2. Perform work at temperatures recommended by the adhesive
manufacturer.
3. Insulation shall be applied to clean dry surfaces. Piping shall
be tested before insulation is applied or joints shall be left
uncovered until leak tests have been performed.
4. All insulation shall have composite fire and smoke hazard ratings
(insulation, jacket and adhesive used to adhere jacket or facing
to the insulation), as tested by procedure ASTM E-84, NFPA 255
and UL 73 not exceeding Flame Spread of 25, Fuel Contributed of
50 and Smoke Developed of 50. All other components such as
adhesives, mastics (except joint sealer), cements, tapes and
cloths, etc. shall also meet these ratings. ASTM-E84-25/50 rating
should be clearly marked on each joint of insulation.
January 13, 2003
15250 - 1
Mechanical Insulation
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
1. Insulation:
1. Certain Teed.
2. Schuller.
3. Knauf.
4. Owens-Corning.
5. Pittsburg Corning.
6. Innova
2. Adhesives, Sealants and Finishes:
1. Childers.
2. Foster.
3. 3M.
4. Pittsburg Corning.
2.2
MATERIALS
1. Foamglass: 8.5 pcf density, 0.45 K factor at 200° F, pipe
covering, valve and fitting covers, curved segments and block.
2. Calcium Silicate: 14 pcf density, asbestos free, 0.42 K factor at
200° F, pipe covering, segments and block.
3. Perlite: 14 pcf density, 1.2% maximum water absorption in 2 hours
by ASTM C-209 Test, 0.44 K factor at 200° F, pipe covering, valve
and fitting covers and block.
4. Fiberglass Pipe Insulation: pre-molded pipe covering with white
all service vapor barrier jacket and pressure sensitive adhesive
longitudinal lap seal, 0.23 K factor at 75° F.
5. Fiberglass Insulation Board: 3.0 pcf density, semi-rigid glass
fiber board with FSK vapor barrier jacket, 0.23 K factor at 75° F.
6. Fiberglass Blanket: 1.0 pcf density, glass fiber blanket with foil
scrim Kraft vapor barrier jacket, 0.23 K factor at 75° F.
7. Elastomeric Insulation: Flexible, closed cell elastomeric thermal
insulation with 0.27 K-factor at 75° F. Armstrong Armaflex or
approved equal.
January 13, 2003
15250 - 2
Mechanical Insulation
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
PREPARATION
1.
Do not install covering before ductwork and equipment have been
tested and approved.
2.
Ensure surface is clean and dry prior to installation.
3.
Apply finishes with system at operating conditions. 3.2
INSTALLATION
1.
Install all insulation and apply all sealants, and finishes in
strict
accordance
with
manufacturer's
printed
installation
procedures.
2.
Insulation shall be continuous through wall, floor and ceiling
openings and sleeves.
3.
At all pipe hanger locations where the insulation must resist
compression and piercing, supporting devices must be used in
combination with metal hanger shields. Supporting devices such as
cork stoppers, short lengths of wood dowels, wood blocks, or
polyolefin dowels which have the same thickness of the insulation
my be used. Coat the dowel with an approved adhesive before
insertion into the insulation and coat the outer surface to
provide a vapor seal.
4.
Repair separation of joints or cracking of insulation due to
thermal movement or poor workmanship.
5.
Locate seams in least visible locations.
6.
Foamglass Piping Insulation:
1. Insulation shall be applied to piping with butt joints
staggered and all joints tightly butted and sealed with Pit
Seal 444 or equal joint sealant.
2. The joint sealer shall cover the joint surface through the
entire thickness of the insulation and shall be applied to the
mating butt ends of succeeding sections of insulation to insure
that a thin continuous seal is provided for the full length and
depth of each joint.
January 13, 2003
15250 - 3
Mechanical Insulation
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
3. Insulation shall be secured with stainless steel bands at a
rate of two bands per section of insulation.
4. Care must be taken that insulation is not cracked when secured
with stainless steel bands. Cracked or broken insulation shall
be replaced.
5. Over the installed and sealed insulation apply a tack coat of Pit
Coat 404 or equal vapor barrier mastic at the rate of two to
three gallons per one hundred square feet. Embed a layer of
reinforcing fabric into the tack coat (PC Fabric 79 or equal)
while wet, overlapping all joints a minimum of 3 inches.
Fabric shall be applied smooth without wrinkles. Over the
fabric apply a second coat of mastic (before the tack coat
cures) at the rate of four gallons per one hundred square
feet. There shall be no fabric visible through the final coat
of mastic.
6. Apply all service vapor barrier jacketing with a tack coat of Pit
Coat 404 or equal vapor barrier mastic, overlap longitudinal
joint. Seal butt joints and longitudinal joints with 4-inch
wide pressure sensitive all service jacket tape.
7. Valves, Fittings, Strainers and Flanges: Fabricate covers of
foamglass of the same thickness as the adjoining pipe. Seal
andfinish in the same fashion as pipe insulation.
7. Calcium Silicate and Perlite Pipe Insulation:
1. Apply insulation to piping with butt joints staggered and all
joints tightly butted and secured in place with stainless
steel wire or bands at a rate of two per section.
2. Finish with 10x10 weave white glass fabric embedded in white
mastic.
3. Fittings, valves and strainers: Fabricate covers of insulation
material of the same thickness as the adjoining pipe. Seal and
finish in the same fashion as pipe insulation.
8. Calcium Silicate and Perlite Equipment Insulation:
1. Apply curved segments or to the equipment with all joints
staggered and tightly butted.
2. Secure in place with stainless steel bands.
3. Take care not to crack or break insulation. Replace broken or
cracked insulation sections.
4. Finish with 10x10 weave white glass fabric embedded in white
mastic.
January 13, 2003
15250 - 4
Mechanical Insulation
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
9. Fiberglass Pipe Insulation:
1. Apply insulation to pipe and seal longitudinal seam with
pressure sensitive adhesive lap. Seal butt joints with vapor
barrier adhesive. Finish with vapor barrier adhesive and 4inch strips of facing material. Overlap adjacent pipe 2 inches
minimum.
2. Seal ends of pipe insulation at valves, fittings, flanges,
etc. and at 21-foot intervals on continuous runs with vapor
barrier sealant.
3. Fittings: Apply insulation to the same thickness as the
adjoining pipe. Finish with white PVC fitting covers and seal
all joints with PVC adhesive and PVC tape. Finish shall
overlap adjacent insulation by 2 inches minimum.
4. Valves, Strainers and Flanges Cold Service: Provide covers
fabricated from insulation of the same thickness as the
adjoining pipe. Overlap the adjacent insulation by 4 inches
minimum. Pack voids with glass fiber blanket. Apply vapor
barrier adhesive to all butt joints. Fabricate in a minimum of
sections to facilitate service and replacement. Finish with
white PVC fitting covers and seal all joints with PVC adhesive
and PVC tape.
5. Valves, and Strainers Hot Service: Insulate valves as
described above for cold service. Do not insulate unions,
flanges and expansion joints. Terminate insulation on a bevel
with plastic troweled material.
6. Protect insulation at hangers, guides and rollers with 16gauge galvanized metal saddles and a section of rigid
foamglass insulation a minimum of 12 inches long.
7. Insulate P-traps of floor drains and hub drains receiving
condensate
from
air
conditioning
units
[and
kitchen
refrigeration equipment].
10.Fiberglass Equipment Insulation:
1. Apply insulation board of the same thickness as the adjoining
pipe. Overlap the adjacent insulation by 4 inches minimum.
Pack voids with glass fiber blanket. Apply vapor barrier
adhesive to all butt joints. Fabricate in a minimum of sections
to facilitate service and replacement. Finish with vapor
barrier adhesive and 4-inch strips of facing material
overlapping all joints 2 inches minimum. Seal all joints with
PVC adhesive and PVC tape.
11.Fiberglass Duct Insulation:
1. Concealed ducts shall be insulated with blanket insulation.
January 13, 2003
15250 - 5
Mechanical Insulation
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Ducts exposed to view, outdoors or indoors, shall be insulated
with board insulation.
Apply insulation to duct with ends firmly butted. Compress
duct wrap a maximum of 25%.
Adhere insulation with adhesive applied in 6-inch wide
strips around the duct perimeter 16 inches on center.
On ducts 18 inches wide or over, additionally secure with
mechanical fasteners 16 inches on center.
Overlap the facing on longitudinal seam a minimum of 2 inches
and seal with 100% coverage of adhesive. Staple in place with
outward clinch staples.
Seal all staple and fastener penetrations and any other breaks
in the vapor barrier with vapor barrier mastic and 6-inch wide
strips of the same facing material as the adjacent insulation
adhered with 100% coverage of adhesive.
Air distribution devices shall be insulated with blanket
insulation.
Provide a section of rigid foamglas insulation a minimum of 12
inches wide at trapeze hangers.
12.Flexible Elastomeric Insulation:
1. Apply pipe insulation as recommended by the manufacturer.
2. Stagger all butt joints and longitudinal joints. Cover joints
when multiple layers are used.
3. Seal all joints and seam with Armstrong 520 adhesive or equal.
4. Paint exterior insulation with approved pigmented plasticized
vinyl lacquer. Apply per manufacturer’s specification.
3.3
FINISHES
1. Finish piping exposed outdoors, and up to seven feet above floor
in mechanical rooms shall be insulated with 0.016-inch thick
corrugated aluminum jacketing secured with aluminum bands. Provide
pre-molded aluminum fitting covers for fittings, valves, etc. Seal
all joints with clear silicone sealant.
2. Finish insulated ductwork exposed outdoors with 0.016-inch thick
textured aluminum overlapped and adhered with rivets so as not to
penetrate the vapor barrier. Seal all joints with clear silicone
sealant. On outdoor ducts, overlap and seal rivets in a manner to
shed rainwater and provide a weathertight seal.
January 13, 2003
15250 - 6
Mechanical Insulation
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
3.4
1.
MATERIAL SCHEDULE
Piping:
1. Refrigerant Suction.
elastomeric
2. Domestic Cold Water.
3. Domestic Hot Water.
4. Condensate Drain.
-flexible
- fiberglass
- fiberglass
- fiberglass
2. Equipment:
1. Domestic Hot Water Storage Tank.
3.
Ductwork:
1. Supply Air Ducts.
2. Outside Air Ducts.
3. Return Air Ducts.
4. Relief Air Ducts.
5. Exhaust Ducts.
- fiberglass
-
fiberglass
fiberglass
fiberglass
fiberglass
fiberglass
3.5
INSULATION THICKNESS SCHEDULES
1. Hot and Cold Piping:
PIPE SIZE INCHES
1
OR
LESS
1-1/4
TO
3
4
TO
6
8
TO
10
12
AND
OVER
PIPE TEMPERATURE - F
251 TO 350
2.0
2.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
211 TO 250
1.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.5
100 TO 210
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.0
2.5
40 TO
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
2.5
1.0
1.5
---------
60
RS FOR DX REFRIGERATION
DOMESTIC CW SUPPLY
0.5
1.0
1.0
1.5
---
DOMESTIC HW SUPPLY
0.5
1.0
1.5
1.5
---
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
PIPING EXPOSED TO AMBIENT
TEMPERATURES. - *
January 13, 2003
15250 - 7
Mechanical Insulation
3.5
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
* DENOTES ALL PIPING OUTSIDE THE
INSULATEDENVELOPE
OF
A
BUILDING,
IE.CRAWL
SPACES,
ATTICS,
TUNNELS,
COVERED WALKWAYS, ETC. [THIS ALSO
INCLUDES ALL HEAT TRACED PIPING.]
2. Equipment:
Item
Minimum Thickness
Domestic Hot Water Storage Tank
1.5 inches
3. Ducts:
Service
Compressed Thickness
Minimum Labeled Thickness
Supply Air Ducts
Return Air Ducts
Outside Air Ducts
inches
2 inches
2 inches
2 inches
Exhaust Air Ducts
Installed
1.5 inches
1.5 inches
1.5
2 inches 1.5 inches
Insulation is not required on double wall ducts.
END OF SECTION
January 13, 2003
15250 - 8
Mechanical Insulation
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 15405
PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALTIES
PART 1
1.1
1.2
GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
1.
Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping Systems.
2.
Domestic Cold and Hot Water Piping Systems.
3.
Cleanouts.
4.
Strainers.
5.
Vacuum Breakers.
6.
Water Hammer Arrestors.
7.
Trap Primers.
8.
Backflow Preventors.
9.
Thermometers and Pressure Gauges.
SUBMITTALS
1. Submit minimum 1/4-inch scale shop drawings of piping systems,
double lined for piping 4 inches and over, accurately drawn and
carefully coordinated with all other trades. Show bottom of pipe
elevations or sections.
2. Pipe and Pipe Fittings:
Manufacturer's data showing materials,
ASTM designation, dimension and schedule.
3. Cleanouts: Manufacturer's product data showing dimensions,
materials and surface application.
4. Strainers: Manufacturer's product data showing dimensions and
materials.
5. Backflow Preventor:
Manufacturer's product data showing
dimensions, materials and capacity.
6. Thermometers and Pressure Gauges: Manufacturer's product data
showing dimensions, materials and scale ranges.
January 13, 2003
15405 - 9
Plumbing Piping
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
1. Cleanouts:
1. J.R. Smith.
2. Josam.
3. Wade.
4. Zurn.
2. Vacuum Breakers:
1. Cla-Val.
2. Febco.
3. Watts.
4. Weksler.
3. Water Hammer Arrestors:
1. Josam.
2. Wade.
3. Zurn.
4.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.2
Backflow Preventors:
Cla-Val.
Febco.
Hersey.
Watts.
Thermometers and Pressure Gauges:
1. Ernst.
2. Trerice.
3. Weksler.
PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS
1. Refer to Section 15060 for general materials and methods.
2. Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping underground to 5 feet outside the
building shall be service weight cast iron, pipe, bell and spigot
with neoprene gaskets.
3. Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping aboveground shall be hubless cast
iron pipe with clamped connections, or Type DWV copper
January 13, 2003
15405 - 10
Plumbing Piping
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
T
pipe with cast brass fittings.
4. Domestic Water Piping aboveground shall be Type L hard temper
copper tube with wrought copper fittings.
5. Domestic Water Piping underground:
1. 2 inches and smaller: Type K soft copper.
2. 2-1/2 inches and 3 inches: Schedule 80 PVC, bell end.
3. 4 inches and larger: Class 150 PVC, AWWA C-900.
2.3
VALVES
1. Valves shall be in accordance with Section 15100.
2.4
SUPPORTS, ANCHORS AND SEALS
1. Provide supports, anchors and seals in accordance with Section
15140.
2.5 CLEANOUTS AND CLEANOUT ACCESS COVERS
1. Provide caulked or threaded type extended to finished floor or
wall surface. Provide bolted cover plate cleanouts on vertical
rainwater leaders only. Ensure ample clearance at cleanout for
rodding of drainage system.
2. Floor Cleanout Access Covers in Unfinished Areas: Round with
nickel bronze scored frames and plates. Provide access covers in
finished areas with depressed center section to accommodate floor
finish. Wall cleanouts to have chrome plated caps.
3. Cleanouts to be suitable for floor surface.Refer to Architectural
Plans.
2.6 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS
1. Install stainless steel bellows type water hammer arrestors on
water lines connected to flush valves and to groups of fixtures.
Provide access doors at all water hammer arrestor locations,
similar to Wade. Selection of water hammer arrestors shall be per
Plumbing and Drainage Institute rating for fixture unit capacity
served. Refer to plumbing risers or plans for location and size.
January 13, 2003
15405 - 11
Plumbing Piping
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
2.7
TRAP PRIMER VALVES
1. Provide
Products,
1/2-inch
breaker.
2.8
trap primer valves equal to Precision
Plumbing
Inc. where indicated or required.
Primer valve is
size of bronze construction and has integral vacuum
SEDIMENT STRAINERS
1.
Strainers shall be Y-Pattern, line size, threaded or flanged as
dictated by pipe size. An arrow shall be cast on the side of the
strainer to indicate the direction of flow. The basket shall be
made of stainless steel or monel.
2.
Strainers for water services shall have a Class 125 cast iron body
with a removable cover and a sediment screen. Cover shall have
threaded 3/4-inch blow-off port.
3.
Provide strainers as follows:
Pipe Size
Manufacturer’s Model
Up to 2 inches
20 Mesh Stainless Steel
2-1/2 inches, 3 inches
.045 inch perforation
4 inches thru 16 inches
.125 inch perforation
2.9 VACUUM BREAKERS
1. Vacuum breakers shall be designed to prevent any possible
backflow through them. They shall be of the pressure type or
Atmospheric type. Where they are installed in chrome-plated lines,
they shall be chrome-plated to match.
2.10 BACKFLOW PREVENTION
1. Provide a reduced pressure principle backflow assembly in the
main water line to the building and/or as indicated on plans:
1. All backflow preventers shall meet with the approval of U.S.C.
Cross Connection Control Lab/U.S. Army Corps of Engineers/U.S.
Navy/Southern Building Code Congress/AWWA/ASSE/CSA B64.4.
2. Complete with gate valves on both sides of backflow preventer.
3. Bronze and stainless steel trim.
January 13, 2003
15405 - 12
Plumbing Piping
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
4. B
Canadian, Texas
r
onze ball valve test cocks.
5. Provide air gap funnel for all units installed inside the
building.
2.11 THERMOMETERS AND THERMOMETER WELLS
1.
Provide 9-inch, aluminum case, brass stem, adjustable angle,
mercury red reading type thermometers where shown on the
drawings.
2.
Provide brass separable sockets of the correct length for the
pipe size in which they are installed, with extension necks when
installed in insulated piping.
3.
Ranges shall be as follows: Domestic Hot Water
30° F to 240° F
4.
Brass industrial test wells, 3/4-inch N.P.T., with cap and
chain. Test wells shall be the correct length for the pipe size in
which they are installed.
2.12 PRESSURE GAUGES
1.
Provide 4-1/2-inch dial, bourdon type pressure gauges where
shown on the drawings.
2.
Case shall be cast aluminum with black finish.
3.
Gauges shall have adjustable pointer and bronze movement with 1%
accuracy over middle half of scale range and 1-1/2% accuracy over
the balance of the range.
4.
Gauges shall have brass socket and be provided with brass
pressure snubbers.
5.
Ranges shall be as follows:
Domestic Hot Water
0 to 150 psi
Domestic Soft Water
0 to 100 psi
January 13, 2003
15405 - 13
Plumbing Piping
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
Install
in
instructions.
strict
accordance
with
manufacturer's
Lubricate cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed
oil.
Prior to building turnover, remove cleanout plugs,
relubricate and reinstall using only enough force to ensure
permanent leakproof joint.
3.
Slope drainage lines minimum 1/8-inch per foot, 1/2-inch per foot
maximum for waste lines.
4.
Coordinate pad requirements for both size and vibration control.
Provide auxiliary water piping and drains necessary to the
operation of the equipment. Vent as required and approved by
authorities having jurisdiction.
5.
Furnish vibration isolation mounting pads for equipment as
required.
6.
Provide flexible connections in piping where indicated on
drawings or required.
7.
Confirm final connections to fixtures and equipment prior to
performing work.
8.
Bring exterior cleanouts up to grade. Provide concrete box with
cast iron cover over each exterior cleanout.
9.
Flush piping clean with water after installation.
10.When conditions are such that the connecting pipe cannot be
adequately supported on undisturbed earth or compacted
backfill, it shall be encased in concrete or supported in a
concrete cradle.
11.Install pressure reducing valves to limit maximum static pressure
at plumbing fixtures to 80 psi.
January 13, 2003
15405 - 14
Plumbing Piping
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
3.2
WATER PIPING
1. Provide water cut-off gate valve and a wall hydrant drain on water
supply line where it enters building. Provide cut-off gate valves
to zone building as required and as indicated on drawings.
2. Provide water hammer arrestors where indicated on drawings.
3. Notify Engineer one week prior to sterilization of domestic water
piping system so that procedure may be witnessed.
4. Before sterilizing, thoroughly flush all domestic water lines.
5. Disinfect lines with fluid chlorine or hypochlorite. Introduce
sufficient chlorine to provide an initial concentration of 50
p.p.m. Disinfect for 24 hour period, opening and closing valves in
system
at
various
points
during
disinfection.
Following
chlorination, thoroughly flush complete system until replacement
water is comparable in quality to water from the water supply
system.
Submit
certification
that
specification
and
all
ordinances and regulations have been complied with.
6. Insulate piping in accordance with Section 15250. 3.3
WASTE AND VENT PIPING
1.
Slope soil and waste lines inside and outside building in
accordance with requirements of governing Plumbing Codes, in flow
direction shown on drawings.
2.
Establish grade lines with surveyor's level. Verify location of
sewer taps before start of work and make necessary grade
adjustments. Drain vent lines back to waste lines.
3.
Locate cleanouts at each change of line direction of more than 45
degrees and at maximum 50' intervals within the building and 100'
intervals outside the building. Cleanouts shall be line size for
mains up to 4 inches and shall be 4 inches for all larger mains.
3.4
SEDIMENT STRAINERS
January 13, 2003
15405 - 15
Plumbing Piping
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
1. Each drip trap assembly, each control valve, and each pressure
reducing valve assembly regardless of its size shall be preceded by
a sediment strainer. The arrangement of these sediment strainers
shall be such that the screens may be removed for cleaning.
2. Sediment strainers shall be installed in piping systems wherever
shown on the drawings and at such other points as may be required
for the removal of foreign material from the piping system.
3. All strainers shall be provided with full size blowdown ball
valve with nipple and cap.
3.5
DIELECTRIC UNIONS
1. Install dielectric unions or flanges where copper or brass piping
connects to ferrous piping or equipment.
3.6 THERMOMETERS AND THERMOMETER WELLS
1.
Install thermometers with scales upright and in a location where
they may be easily read.
2.
Install thermometer wells where shown and where required to test
and adjust the system.
3.
Replace any damaged thermometers. Do not repair.
3.7
PRESSURE GAUGES
1.
Provide gauge cocks or needle valves at all gauges suitable for
the pressures and service involved.
2.
Replace any damaged gauges. Do not repair.
3.8
TESTING
1. Notify the Engineer one week prior to all testing.
2. Test piping systems prior to the application of insulation.
3.
For piping installed in concealed space or buried, test piping
before system is concealed or backfilled.
January 13, 2003
15405 - 16
Plumbing Piping
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
4. Test water piping and pumped sanitary piping to a hydrostatic
pressure of 100 psig for a continuous period of not less than eight
hours. During this time, carefully inspect the system for leaks.
If necessary, repair leaks and test again until no leakage is
detected.
5. Test sanitary drainage system below grade by plugging lines and
filling system with water to a static head of 10 feet of water.
Observe water level for 24 hour period. If level is lowered
indicating leakage, repair leaks and test again until no leakage is
detected.
6. After testing and whenever conditions permit, operate systems at
normal operating pressure and temperature for not less than five
consecutive days. The piping systems must remain free from leaks
during this period.
7. All testing shall be approved by the Engineer.
8. Use higher pressure if required by authorities having
jurisdiction.
END OF SECTION
January 13, 2003
15405 - 17
Plumbing Piping
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 15425
COMMERCIAL ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
SCOPE
1. This section specifies commercial electric domestic hot water
heating systems, including hot water heaters, recirculating pumps,
control valves, and pressure and temperature relief valves, as
required.
2. Water heater shall be completely factory assembled.
1.2 RELATED WORK
1.
Section 15000 - General Mechanical Conditions
2.
Section 15100 - Plumbing
3.
Section 15150 - Cleaning and Testing
4.
Section 15165 - Equipment Support
1.3
2.1
CERTIFICATION
1.
Provide water heater, tested according to D.O.E. test procedures,
as a circulating-tank water heater and automatic storage water
heater for outlet water temperature of 120oF.
2.
Provide water heaters that are U.L. tested and meet with the
recovery efficiency and standby loss requirements of ASHRAE 90A1980 (1982 Requirements).
3.
Provide a three-year tank warranty against tank leaks. PART 2
PRODUCTS
CAPACITY
1. Water heaters must have the storage capacity and gallons per hour
recovery at 60oF rise as scheduled.
2.2
TANK
1. Provide a heavy duty solid steel shell protected with a double
coating of glass lining to resist the corrosive action
January 13, 2003
15425 - 1
Water Heaters
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
o
f
Canadian, Texas
hot water chemicals. This tank shall be hydrostatically tested
and designed for a rating of 150 psi working pressure and a 300
psi hydrostatic test.
2.
Provide a field-replaceable rigidly supported magnesium resistor
anode rod(s) for cathodic protection of this tank.
3.
Provide 3/4-inch water connections for full flow delivery to
fixtures.
2.3
HEATING ELEMENT
1.
2.4
Provide a direct contact "Nichrome" immersion type "screw-in"
element in magnesium oxide and sealed in seamless copper tubing.
INSULATION
1. Insulate the water heater with factory-applied moisture proof rigid
polyurethane foam.
2.5
CONTROLS
1. Furnish a surface mounted thermostat that automatically cycles on
and off to maintain the water temperature at a desired preset
level, from 100° F to 170° F.
2. Furnish a temperature limiting control that automatically cuts
off power if the water temperature exceeds 190° F.
2.6 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
1. Rheem
2. A. O. Smith
3. State
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
1. Install a line size full port, sweat-type ball valve, NIBCO #S585S
in the cold and hot water supply close to each heater and a line
size plug cock in the gas supply close to each heater. No flex
connections on supply lines.
January 13, 2003
15425 - 2
Water Heaters
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
2.
P
rovide approved dielectric couplings at all cold water and hot
water connections to the tank, and an ASME pressure and temperature
relief valve connection.
3.
Install according to manufacturer's specifications.
4.
Install a pre-fabricated galvanized drain pan under the water
heater. Provide a 1-inch drain connection in the wall of the pan and
at the base. Route the 1-inch drain to the hub drain provided and
as shown on the construction documents. The drain pan shall extend
a minimum of 6 inches beyond all edges of the water heater and shall
be a minimum of 4 inches deep.
3.2 WARRANTY
1. Provide a three-year limited warranty against tank leaks with a 100%
replacement guarantee.
END OF SECTION
January 13, 2003
15425 - 3
Water Heaters
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 15440
PLUMBING FIXTURES [COMMERCIAL]
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES 1.
Plumbing Fixtures.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
1. Fixture and Associated Trim: Manufacturer's product data showing
dimensions, materials and installation instructions.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.
All plumbing fixtures and trim shall be manufactured in the
U.S.A.
2.
All water faucets and valve bodies shall be cast bronze.
3.
All faucets, fittings and similar devices shall be of one
manufacturer, unless otherwise specified. Faucets shall contain
standardized, interchangeable cartridges with model seats.
4.
All exposed parts shall be chrome plated.
5.
Flush valves shall withstand 100# pull in all directions. 1.4
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1. Plumbing fixtures shall be stored in their own shipping boxes and
protected from damage during construction.
PART 2
2.1
1.
PRODUCTS
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
Lavatories, Urinals, Water Closets:
1. American Standard.
2. Ceco.
3. Eljer.
4. Kohler.
5. Universal-Rundle.
January 13, 2003
15440 - 1
Plumbing Fixtures
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
2. Electric Drinking Fountains:
1. Elkay.
2. Filtrine.
3. Halsey Taylor.
4. Haws.
5. Oasis.
6. Western.
3. Mop Basins:
1. American Standard.
2. Ceco.
3. E.L. Mustee & Sons.
4. Eljer.
5. Fiat.
6. Kohler.
7. Williams.
4. Stainless Steel Sinks:
1. Elkay.
2. Just.
5. Floor Drains:
1. Ceco.
2. J.R. Smith.
3. Josam.
4. Wade.
5. Zurn.
6. Flush Valves:
1. Delany.
2. Sloan.
3. Zurn.
7. Toilet Seats:
1. Bemis.
2. Beneke.
3. Church.
4. Centeco.
5. Olsonite.
8. Carriers:
1. J.R. Smith.
2. Josam.
3. Wade.
4. Zurn.
9. Faucets:
1. American Standard.
2. Bradley.
3. Chicago.
January 13, 2003
15440 - 2
Plumbing Fixtures
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
4. Delta.
5. Eljer.
6. Elkay.
7. Just.
8. Kohler.
9. Royal Brass.
10 . Symmons .
11.T&S Brass.
10.Faucet Supplies, Stops and Drain Fittings:
1. American Standard.
2. Chicago.
3. Eljer.
4. Elkay
5. Just.
6. Kohler.
7. McGuire.
8. Royal Brass.
9. T&S Brass.
2.2
WATER CLOSETS
1. Type WC-1: [American Standard #2234.015]; floor mounted, vitreous
china, 1.5-gallon flush, elongated bowl design, siphon jet
flushing, 2-1/4-inch passageway, 1-1/2-inch top spud and floor
outlet.
1. Flush Valve: Sloan #111; low consumption, 1.5 gallons per
flush, 1-1/2-inch top spud, 1-inch screwdriver stop and vacuum
breaker.
2. Seat: Solid plastic, elongated, open front with heavy duty
check hinge less cover.
2.
Type WC-2 (Handicapped): [American Standard #3043.102] floor
mounted, vitreous china, 1.5-gallon flush, elongated bowl design,
17-1/2 inches high, siphon jet flushing, 2-1/4-inch passageway, 11/2-inch top spud and floor outlet.
1. Flush Valve: Sloan #111; low consumption, 1.5 gallons per
flush, 1-1/2-inch top spud, 1-inch screwdriver stop and vacuum
breaker.
2. Seat: Solid plastic, elongated, open front with heavy duty
check hinge less cover.
January 13, 2003
15440 - 3
Plumbing Fixtures
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
2.3 LAVATORIES/WASH FOUNTAINS
1. Type L-1: (Handicapped) [American Standard #0373.050]; wall hung,
vitreous china, 20"x18", low back, front overflow, concealed
arms, punched for centerset fittings.
1. Faucet:
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.4
1. Bradley 90-75 GSW; centerset fitting with cast brass body
chrome plated, vandal resistant metering faucet, rose spray
diffuser, internal flow control to deliver .75 gpm total
rate at 80 psi, .125 gallons total flow in 10 second cycle.
1) Thermostatic Mixing Valve Assembly: Bradley "TMA";
thermostatic mixing valve, two stops, strainer and
check valves.
Strainer: cast brass grid drain strainer with 1-1/4-inch O.D.
offset drain assembly.
Supply: wall flange, loose key stops, size 1/2-inch I.P.S.
with 3/8-inch O.D., 12-inch long flexible riser, chrome
plated.
P-Trap: 1-1/4"x1-1/2", cast brass adjustable swivel Ptrap with cleanout, slip joint inlet and female outlet,
chrome plated. Wall nipple threaded both ends, cast brass
wall flange and set screw, 6"x 1-1/2".
Carrier: concealed arm carrier with non-slip locking devices.
URINALS
1. TypeU-1 (Handicapped): [American Standard #6540.017]; wall hung,
vitreous china, siphon jet, 3/4-inch top spud, integral trap with
2-inch female flanged outlet, wall hangers.
1. Flush Valve:
Sloan #186-1 Series; low consumption, 1
gallon per cycle flush, 3/4-inch screwdriver angle stop,
vacuum breaker, 3/4-inch top spud.
2. Carrier: hanger plate carrier, pipe uprights, block base feet.
2.5 ELECTRIC DRINKING FOUNTAINS/DRINKING FOUNTAINS
1. Type __ EDF-1:
Elkay #Obfavr-FR-8, vandal-resistant, wall
mounted stainless steel finish, vandal-resistant push button and
bubbler, frost resistant heating element All steel, brass, copper
and aluminum major interior component construction with no lead
silver solder connections.
January 13, 2003
15440 - 4
Plumbing Fixtures
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
1. P-Trap: 1-1/4"x1-1/4", cast brass adjustable swivel P-trap
with cleanout, slip joint inlet and female outlet,
chrome plated, wall nipple threaded both ends, cast brass
wall flange and set screw, 6"x1-1/4".
2. Supply: single, wall flange, wheel handle stops, 3/8-inch
I.P.S. with 3/8-inch O.D., 12-inch long flexible riser, chrome
plated.
3. Carrier: top and bottom hanger plate carrier, pipe uprights,
block base feet.
2. Type EDF -2 (Handicapped) :
Elkay #OBFAVR-FR-8, vandal –
resistant, wall mounted stainless steel finish, vandal resistant
push button and bubbler, frost resistant heating element. All steel
copper and aluminum major interior component construction with no lead
silver solder connections.
1. P-Trap: 1-1/4"x1-1/4", cast brass adjustable swivel Ptrap with cleanout, slip joint inlet and female outlet,
chrome plated, wall nipple threaded both ends, cast brass
wall flange and set screw, 6"x1-1/4".
2. Supply: single, wall flange, wheel handle stops, 3/8-inch I.P.S.
with 3/8-inch O. D., 12-inch long flexible riser, chrome plated.
3. Carrier: top and bottom hanger plate carrier, pipe uprights,
block base feet.
2.6
JANITOR SINKS/MOP BASINS
1. Type MS-1: [American Standard #7692.049]; acid resisting, enameled
cast iron, 12-inch high back, wall hangers, back punched for 8inch center with [American Standard #4706.07] ; stainless steel ushaped rim guard.
1. Faucet:
1. [American Standard #8344.111] ; exposed, chrome plated brass
valve body, renewable valve and seats with integral stops,
vacuum breakers, lever handles, spout with pail hook and
hose end, top single brace, 1/2-inch I.P.S. female inlets.
2. P-Trap: cast iron trap standard to wall, acid resisting enamel
inside, painted outside, with cleanout plug and strainer.
Outlet for 3-inch iron pipe.
January 13, 2003
15440 - 5
Plumbing Fixtures
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
2.7
STAINLESS STEEL SINKS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.8
Type _ SK-1:Elkay #LR1716; single compartment, 18-gauge,
Type 302 stainless steel, self-rimming, 17”x 16”x 7 ½” deep, 31/2-inch opening.
Faucet:
1. [Chicago Faucets #1100, #317 handles and E32 aerator] ; top
deck mounted, chrome plated brass faucet, renewable unit and
valve seat, 8-inch swing spout and 2.25 GPM or less flow
restrictor.
Strainer: wrought sink strainer for 3-1/2-inch opening, 11/2-inch O.D. tailpiece, chrome plated.
Supply: wall flange, loose key stops, size 1/2-inch I.P.S.
with 3/8-inch O.D., 12-inch long flexible riser, chrome
plated.
P-Trap: 1-1/2"x1-1/2", cast brass adjustable swivel Ptrap with cleanout, slip joint inlet and female outlet,
chrome plated, wall nipple threaded both ends, cast brass
wall flange and set screw, 6"x1-1/2".
FLOOR DRAINS
1. Type FD-1: [Wade #W-1100 Series] (Finished Area); cast iron drain
with
flange
integral
reversible
clamping
collar,
seepage
openings, 6-inch diameter, satin nickel bronze strainer.
2. Type FD-2: [Wade #W-1200-12] (Equipment Room); medium duty, cast
iron drain, cast iron deep flange, non-tilting 12-inch ductile
iron round grate.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
1. Check millwork shop drawings. Confirm location, size of fixtures
and openings before rough-in and installation.
2. Mounting heights of all fixtures shall be verified with
Architectural Drawings prior to roughing in.
January 13, 2003
15440 - 6
Plumbing Fixtures
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
3.2
INSTALLATION
1. Anchor piping securely in wall or wall space to prevent damage
when supply nipples are installed or removed and to prevent
vandalism to exposed piping and flush valves.
2. Secure floor outlet fixtures to floor with cast iron or brass
floor flange caulked to soil or waste pipe. Seal joint with
beeswax gasket. Do not use putty.
3. Secure floor mounted fixtures to floor with brass bolts and
expansion anchors.
4. Stub all piping symmetrically with fixtures and at correct and
uniform height.
5. Seal around all fixtures with white Silicone flexible grout.
END OF SECTION
January 13, 2003
15440 - 7
Plumbing Fixtures
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 15530
REFRIGERANT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
1. Refrigerant Piping Systems.
2. Liquid Indicators.
3. Strainers.
4. Refrigerant Driers.
5. Filter-Driers.
6. Solenoid Valves.
7. Expansion Valves.
8. Refrigerant Charging Valves.
9. Flexible Connections.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
1. Submit minimum 1/4-inch scale shop drawings of piping systems,
double lined for piping 4 inches and over, accurately drawn and
carefully coordinated with all other trades. Show bottom of pipe
elevations or sections.
2. Pipe and Pipe Fittings:
Manufacturer's data showing materials,
ASTM designation, dimensions and schedule.
3. Specialties:
Submit
manufacturer's
product
data
showing
materials,
dimensions,
capacity
and
performance
data
and
installation instructions.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. Install refrigerant specialties in accordance with manufacturer's
printed installation instructions.
January 13, 2003 15530 - 1 Refrigerant Piping and Specialties
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
1.4 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
2. Specialties:
1. Henry.
2. Sporlan.
1.5
PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS
1. Refer to Section 15060 for general materials and methods.
1.6
REFRIGERANT PIPING
1. Type ACR copper tubing, hard temper with wrought copper fittings
for systems over 5 tons. For systems 5 tons and less annealed
Type ACR tubing may be used.
2. Brazed, phos-copper alloy or bronzed, silver alloy shall be used.
1.7
LIQUID INDICATORS
1. Double port type with copper or brass body, and flared or solder
ends.
2. Provide removable seal caps on each port for inspection of
refrigerant condition.
3. Provide full size liquid indicators in main liquid line leaving
condenser. If receiver is used, install in liquid line leaving
receiver.
1.8
1.
STRAINERS
Angle type with brass shell and replaceable cartridge.
2.
Suitable for refrigerant and piping material utilized in the
system.
3.
Provide full size strainer ahead of each automatic valve. Where
multiple expansion valves with integral strainers are used install
single main liquid line strainer.
4.
Provide shut-off valve on each side of strainer to facilitate
maintenance.
January 13, 2003 15530 - 2 Refrigerant Piping and Specialties
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
1.9
REFRIGERANT DRIERS
1.
In-line or angle type with copper or brass shell.
2.
Employ replaceable desiccant drier material.
3.
Provide full flow permanent refrigerant drier in low temperature
systems and systems utilizing hermetic compressors.
4.
Provide three-valve bypass assembly.
1.10 FILTER-DRIERS
1. Angle type, with brass shell and using combined straining and
drying material.
2. Employ replaceable desiccant material.
3. Acceptable in lieu of separate strainers and driers.
4. Provide three-valve bypass assembly.
1.11 SOLENOID VALVES
1.
Copper or brass body with flared or threaded ends.
2.
Use replaceable coil assembly.
3.
Provide a manually operated stem to permit operation in case
of coil failure.
4.
Provide solenoid valves in liquid line of systems operating
with single pump-out or pump-down compressor control, in
liquid line of single or multiple evaporator systems, and
in oil bleeder lines from flooded evaporators to stop flow
of oil and refrigerant into the suction line when system
shuts down.
1.12 EXPANSION VALVES
1. Angle type or straight through design suitable for the
refrigerant utilized in the system.
2. Brass body, internal or external equalizer, and adjustable
superheat setting, complete with capillary tube and remote
sensing bulb.
January 13, 2003 15530 - 3 Refrigerant Piping and Specialties
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
3. Size expansion valves to avoid of being undersized at full load
and excessively oversized at partial load.
4. Evaluate refrigerant pressure drop through system to determine
the available pressure drop across each valve.
5.Select valves for maximum load at design operating pressure and
minimum 10° F of superheat.
1.13 CHARGING VALVES
1. General purpose type with brass body, flared or solder ends, and
removable valve core.
2. Provide valve inlet with quick coupling connection for ease of
charging.
3. Provide refrigerant charging connections in liquid line between
receiver shut-off valve and expansion valve.
1.14 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
1. Close pitch corrugated bronze hose with single layer of exterior
braiding.
2. At least 9 inches long with bronze fittings.
3. Utilize only at or near compressor where it is not physically
possible to absorb vibration within piping configuration.
PART 2
2.1
EXECUTION
PIPING
1. Grade and trap piping as necessary to facilitate oil return.
2. Install piping with careful regard to expansion. Refer to Section
15160, Expansion Compensation.
3. Joints shall be made up in the presence of dry nitrogen only and
shall be tested before any coverings applied using dry nitrogen
and freon under pressure as described hereinafter. High side
shall be tested at 400 psig and the low side at 250 psig.
January 13, 2003 15530 - 4 Refrigerant Piping and Specialties
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
4. After the system has been found tight, the system shall be
charged in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. All
joints shall be carefully tested with liquid soap and electronic
leak detectors, and if a leak is found the joint shall be remade
as described above. If no leaks are found, system shall be
evacuated to a deep vacuum using an approved auxiliary vacuum
pump. A vacuum dehydration indicator shall be used--dial type
gauges will not be acceptable. The vacuum pump shall be operated
until a reading of 250 microns is obtained with a wet bulb
temperature less than 35 is obtained. The vacuum pump shall be
valved off and the vacuum in the system shall be broken with dry
nitrogen. The system shall be evacuated again to 250 microns.
5. Provide expanded rubber insulation to suction return line and
paint exterior insulation with approved pigmented plasticized vinyl
lacquer. Apply per manufacturer's specification.
2.2
TESTING
1.
Test piping systems prior to the application of insulation.
2.
For piping installed in concealed spaces or buried, test piping
before system is concealed or back filled.
3.
2.3
After testing, and whenever conditions permit, operate systems at
normal operating pressure and temperature for not less than five
consecutive days. The piping systems must remain free from leaks
during this period.
REFRIGERANT DRIERS
1. Mount drier vertically in liquid line adjacent to receiver with
bypass assembly to permit isolation of drier for servicing.
2.4
FILTER-DRIERS
1. Install with bypass assembly to permit isolation for servicing.
2.5 EXPANSION VALVES
1. Locate expansion valve sensing bulb immediately after evaporator
outlet on suction line.
END OF SECTION
January 13, 2003 15530 - 5 Refrigerant Piping and Specialties
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 15795
ELECTRIC DUCT HEATERS
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
1. Electric Duct Heaters.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
1. Submit manufacturer's product data, including the following:
1. Schedule of heaters.
2. Performance data.
3. Electrical characteristics.
4. Dimensional data.
5. Accessories.
6. Maintenance and operating manuals.
7. Power and control wiring diagrams.
8. Materials of construction.
2. An individual wiring diagram shall be furnished for each heater.
Diagram shall include recommended supply wire gauges per NEC and
fuse sizes. Typical wiring diagrams are not acceptable.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. Heaters shall be UL listed for zero clearance and shall meet NEC
requirements.
2. Three phase heaters shall have the currents balanced in each
phase.
1.4 WARRANTY
1. Manufacturer shall provide two year warranty for heating elements;
other components and accessories to be warranted for one year.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
1. Brasch.
2. Chromalox.
January 15, 2003
15795 - 1
Electric Duct Heaters
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
3. Indeeco.
2.2
CONSTRUCTION
1. Duct heaters shall be slip-in type.
2. Heating elements shall be 80% nickel and 20% chromium and shall
have steps arranged to prevent stratification when operating at
less than full capacity. Elements for draw through air handling
units and duct heaters over 100 kW shall be derated to 35 watts per
square inch; blow through air handling coils and variable volume
reheat coils shall be 25 watts per square inch.
3. Element terminals shall be stainless steel; insulators and
bracket bushings shall be non-porous ceramic and securely
positioned. Terminals shall be machine crimped to elements.
4. Frame shall be constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel with
galvanized steel brackets, stiffening ribs and gussets spot welded
to the casing.
5. Terminal box shall be spot welded construction with solid hinged
cover, totally enclosed, without louvers or grilles per UL
Standard 1096.
6. Recessed terminal box shall be provided when coils are installed
in ducts with internal insulation of greater than 1-inch.
7. Direction of airflow heaters shall
horizontal left or right or vertical
position sensitive mercury contactors or
In these cases airflow direction shall
a remote mounted box is required, all
wiring between terminal box heater
Mechanical Contractor.
2.3
be interchangeable for
up airflow except when
SCR's are built-in.
be as scheduled. In event
costs for interconnecting
shall be borne by the
SAFETY INTERLOCK COMPONENTS
1. A disc-type automatic reset thermal cutout shall be furnished for
primary over temperature protection. For secondary protection, a
sufficient number of replaceable load carrying disc cutouts in the
power lines shall de-energize elements if the primary cutout fails.
Fuse links are not acceptable. All safety devices shall be
serviceable through the terminal box without removing the heater
from the duct.
January 15, 2003
15795 - 2
Electric Duct Heaters
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
2. Wiring diagrams: A unique wiring diagram shall be furnished for
each heater. Diagram shall include recommended supply wire gauges
per HEC and fuse sizes. Typical wiring diagrams are not
acceptable.
3. Built-in components shall include safety interlocking disconnect
switch, transformer with primary fusing per UL, pressure-type
air-flow switch set at .07-inch wg., supplementary circuit fuses
per NEC, and separate load and control terminal blocks to accept
conductors as shown on the electrical plans. All components shall
be bracket mounted, with bracket welded to box.
2.4
SPECIAL FEATURES
1. The following special features are required where indicated:
1. Construction:
1. Heater suitable for round duct application where scheduled.
2. Protective screens on [inlet side] [and] [outlet side]
[only] .
2. Over Current Protection:
1. Automatic circuit breaker in lieu of fuses in each heater
branch circuit.
2. Main breaker.
[Required only in units smaller than
48A.]
3. Switching Devices:
1. Magnetic Contactor.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
1.
Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's installation
instructions and NEC requirements.
2.
Install in such a manner so as to facilitate service and insure
uniform airflow across the elements. Install 4'-0" minimum down
stream of duct elbow or transition.
END OF SECTION
January 15, 2003
15795 - 3
Electric Duct Heaters
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 15870
FANS
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
1.
In-Line Centrifugal Fans.
2.
Roof Mounted Fans.
3.
Utility Vent Sets.
4.
Propeller Fans.
1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. Fans shall be tested and rated in accordance with AMCA
requirements for both sound and air flow performance.
2. Fans shall bear AMCA rating seals for both sound and air flow
performance.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
1. Submit product data including dimensional data, material
specifications, capacity data and installation procedures.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
1. In-Line Centrifugal Fans: (small fans)
1. Acme.
2. Bayley.
3. Cook.
4. Carnes.
5. Greenheck.
6. Ilg.
7. Penn.
8. Breidert.
2. Roof Mounted Fans:
1. Acme.
2. Cook.
3. Carnes.
January 13, 2003
15870 - 1
Fans
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
4.
5.
6.
7.
Greenheck.
Ilg.
Penn.
Breidert.
3. Utility Vent Sets:
1. Barry Blower.
2. Bayley Fan.
3. Buffalo Forge.
4. Cook.
5. Ilg.
6. Twin City.
7. Penn.
4. Propeller Fans:
1. Acme.
2. Bayley Fan.
3. Carnes.
4. Cook.
5. Greenheck.
6. Ilg.
7. Penn.
8. Breidert.
2.2
IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS
1. Fans shall be direct driven or belt driven as scheduled.
2. Casing shall be fabricated of heavy gauge spun aluminum
construction or formed galvanized steel and shall have a hinged
panel to allow service of the fan and drive assembly without
dismantling the fan. Fan housing shall be internally lined with 1inch thick neoprene coated fiberglass insulation. Steel housings
shall be epoxy coated. Housing shall have collars for duct
connections.
3. Fans shall be furnished with built-in disconnect switch. (Direct
drive units shall have speed controls mounted on the fan housing.)
4. Fans
wheels
shall
be
backward
inclined
centrifugal
statically and dynamically balanced. Fan shall have a
Venturi inlet.
type
spun
5. Motors shall be self-cooled with air from outside the duct
system.
Direct drive unit motors shall be located in a
January 13, 2003
15870 - 2
Fans
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
compartment separate from the exhaust air stream. Belt driven
units shall have drives sized for 150% of the motor nameplate
rating and adjustable sheaves. Fan bearings shall be permanently
lubricated pillow block ball bearings or cast iron lubricated
bearings.
2.3 ROOF MOUNTED FANS
1.
Fans shall be belt or direct driven as scheduled.
2.
Ventilator housing shall be of heavy gauge spun aluminum
construction and shall be weatherproof, incorporating an integral
weather shield.
3.
Ventilators shall be furnished with bird screen, back-draft
dampers, built-in prewired disconnect switch and (roof curb,
extended roof curb, sound attenuating roof curbs).
4.
Fan wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced.
5.
Housing shall be provided with wiring channel and is to be of the
direct discharge design.
6.
Motor and fan assembly shall be on neoprene vibration isolating
mounts.
7.
Motors shall be self-cooled with clean, cool,
shall be located in a compartment separate from
stream so that no lint, heat, grease, fumes,
exhaust air can come in contact with the motor.
15170.
8.
Kitchen hood exhaust fans shall be upblast type and be UL 762
listed.
2.4
outside air and
the exhaust air
or dust in the
Refer to Section
PLENUM FANS
1. Frame:
1. The frame and bearing supports shall be constructed of welded
steel structural construction with a baked enamel finish
structurally reinforced to support the fan, shaft, bearing and
motor.
2. Provide steel inlet cone and panel with enamel finish.
January 13, 2003
15870 - 3
Fans
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
2. Wheel:
1. The fan wheel shall be of the centrifugal type either backward
inclined or airfoil as scheduled on the drawings.
2. The fan wheel shall be aluminum, galvanized steel or steel
with a baked enamel finish. The rotating assembly shall be
statically and dynamically balanced at the factory and be
stable throughout the operating range of airflows.
3. The fan shall be keyed to solid ground and polished carbon
steel shaft and mounted in self aligning pillow block ball
bearings having a minimum average life of 200,000 hours.
3. Motors and Drives:
1.
Motors shall be in accordance with Section 15170.
2.
Provide adjustable motor mounts.
3.
Fans shall be direct drive or belt drive as scheduled.
4.
Fan drive shall be at a minimum of 120% of motor nameplate
horsepower. Motor sheave shall be fixed.
5.
Provide an additional set of sheaves on belt driven units, if
required to obtain the scheduled air flow.
4. Guards:
1. Provide inlet screen and wise screen discharge cage.
2.5
UTILITY VENT SETS
1. Housing:
1. The Housing and frame shall be constructed of aluminum or
steel with a enamel finish structurally reinforced to
withstand the pressures involved and support the fan and motor.
2. Discharge arrangement shall be as shown on the drawings.
Scroll shall be bolted in place and not welded and capable of
being rotated in the field.
3. Provide drain in bottom of scroll.
4. Provide flanged connections.
2. Wheel:
1. The fan wheel shall be of the centrifugal type either forward
curved, backward inclined or airfoil as scheduled on the
drawings.
2. The fan wheel shall be aluminum, galvanized steel or steel.
The rotating assembly shall be statically and dynamically
balanced at the factory and be stable throughout the operating
range of airflows.
January 13, 2003
15870 - 4
Fans
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
3. The fan shall be keyed to solid carbon steel shaft and mounted
in self aligning pillow block ball bearings having a minimum
average life of 200,000 hours.
3. Motors and Drives:
1.
Motors shall be in accordance with Section 15170.
2.
Provide adjustable motor mounts.
3.
Fans shall be direct drive or belt drive as scheduled.
4.
Fan drive shall be at a minimum of 120% of motor nameplate
horsepower. Motor sheave shall be adjustable.
5.
Provide an additional set of sheaves on belt driven units, if
required to obtain the scheduled air flow.
4. Weather Housing:
1. The motor and drives shall be protected from weather by a steel
or aluminum weather cover with louvers for motor ventilation.
2.6
PROPELLER FANS
1.
Provide belt driven propeller fans that meet or exceed scheduled
performance.
2.
Fan housings shall be of heavy gauge spun aluminum construction,
formed galvanized steel, or steel with an enamel finish.
3.
Fans shall be furnished with wall mounting collar and builtin
disconnect switch.
4.
Fan wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Tip
speed, rpm, and motor horsepower shall not exceed the maximums
scheduled on the drawings. Propeller blades shall be constructed
of die formed steel with reinforcing gussets welded to each blade
and to the hub.
5.
Motor pulleys shall be cast iron machined sheaves. The drive belt
and sheaves shall be sized for a minimum of 150% of the driven
horsepower. Shafts shall rotate in heavy duty ball bearing pillow
blocks. Bearings shall be selected for a minimum average life of
200,000 hours at maximum operating speed.
6.
Fans shall have continuous duty sealed ball bearing motors.
Refer to Section 15170.
January 13, 2003
15870 - 5
Fans
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
1.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
2.
Provide flexible connections at inlet and outlet for all fans
except grease hood exhaust and wall or roof mounted propeller fans.
3.
Roof mounted fans shall be installed on roof curbs provided by
the fan manufacturer.
4.
Propeller wall fans shall be mounted in collars provided by the
fan manufacturer. Carefully coordinate exact collar dimensions.
END OF SECTION
January 13, 2003
15870 - 6
Fans
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 15890
DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
1. Ductwork and accessories including the following:
1. Supply air, return air, outside air and exhaust systems.
2. Duct lining.
3. Acoustical apparatus casing.
4. Low pressure corrosion resistant exhaust systems
including the following:
1. Wet air exhaust.
2. Laboratory fume hoods.
5. Medium pressure (negative) exhaust systems.
6. Duct Leakage Testing.
1.2
DEFINITIONS
1. Seal or sealing: Use of liquid or mastic sealant, with or
without compatible tape overlay, or gasketing of flanged joints,
to keep air leakage at duct joints, seams and connections to an
acceptable minimum.
2. Duct Pressure Classification:
1. Low Pressure: Static pressure rating up to 2 inches wg
(water gauge), positive or negative.
2. Medium Pressure: Static pressure rating up to 4 inches wg
positive, or 3 inches wg negative pressure.
3. High Pressure: Static pressure rating up to 10 inches wg
positive pressure, greater than 3 inches wg negative pressure.
3. Exposed duct: Exposed to view in a finished room. 1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. Refer to paragraph, Quality Assurance, in Section 15010, Basic
Mechanical Requirements.
2. Fire Safety Code: Comply with NFPA 90A, 90B, and 96.
3. Duct System Construction: SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction
Standards, First Edition 1985, are minimum acceptable quality.
When specific requirements for ductwork is made in the
specification or drawings, these requirements will take
precedence over SMACNA Standards.
January 13, 2003
15890 - 1
Ductwork and Accessories
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
4. Duct accessories exposed to the air stream, such as dampers of
all types and access openings, shall be of the same material as
the duct or provide at least the same level of corrosion
resistance.
5. A representative sample of the duct system will be leak
tested.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
1. Refer to paragraph, Submittals, in Section 15010, Basic
Mechanical Requirements.
2. Manufacturer's Literature and Data:
1. Ductwork:
1. Schedules of duct systems, materials, joint and seams,
gauge and reinforcement type, spacing and pressure
class.
2. Duct liner.
3. Sealants and gaskets.
4. Manufacturer's details for round and flat oval duct and
fittings.
5. Manufacturer's details for double wall internallyinsulated duct and fittings.
2. Duct supports.
3. Access door sizes and construction.
4. Volume dampers, backdraft dampers.
5. Fire dampers, smoke dampers and fire doors with
installation instructions.
6. Flexible ducts and clamps, with manufacturers
installation instructions.
7. Spin in collars with dampers.
8. Flexible connections.
9. Air intake/exhaust hoods.
10.Instrument test fittings.
11.Perforated distribution plates.
12.Air flow measuring stations.
3. Ductwork drawings at 1/4 inch equal 1'-0" scale drawings clearly
showing the pressure class to which all ducts have been
constructed and referencing construction details.
4. Construction details of Air Conditioning Apparatus Casing
including mounting of coils, filters, etc.
January 13, 2003
15890 - 2
Ductwork and Accessories
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
DUCT MATERIALS
1. General: Except for systems specified otherwise construct ducts,
casings, and accessories of galvanized sheet steel. Galvanized
sheet steel shall have minimum ASTM A525, G90 coating.
2.2
JOINT SEALING
1. Joint Sealing:
1. Sealant: Water based, non-toxic, non-combustible and flame
resistant in wet or dry state, maximum 25 flame spread and 50
smoke developed compounded specifically for sealing ductwork.
Sealant shall be Type MP as manufactured by Trans Continental
Equipment Ltd. or water based duct sealer as manufactured by
United McGill Corporation.
2. Gaskets in flanged joints: Soft preformed mastic strip.
Minimum thickness 1/8 inch for ducts up to 48 inches
wide, for larger ducts the gasket material shall be not
less than 3/16 inch thick.
2. Approved joints such as DUCTMATE SYSTEM or approved equal may be
used. All corners shall be secured with bolts and intermediate
flange clips shall be provided at 12 inches o.c. for joints on
duct side of 24 inches or larger.
2.3 LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK
1. Low pressure ductwork, gauges, reinforcement, joints, seams,
sealing, fittings, supports and other details shall be in
accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards except
as modified below.
2. Gauges: Low pressure ducts shall be constructed in accordance
with Table 1-5 except that the minimum sheet metal thickness
shall be 24-gauge.
3. Cross Joints: The following limitations shall apply to the cross
joints listed below:
1. Standing drive slips will not be acceptable.
2. Single Standing S slips will not be acceptable.
3. Hemmed S, inside slip and double S slips may be used in
combination with a drive slip for duct sides not
exceeding 24 inches long.
January 13, 2003
15890 - 3
Ductwork and Accessories
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
4. Double Standing S slips (T10, T11, T12) will be acceptable for
duct sides not exceeding 30 inches long provided that both
upstream and downstream sides of the slip joint are sealed at
the junction of the duct and the slip.
5. Combination cross joints of Double Standing S or Pocket Lock
slips on the long side and flat drive slips on the short side
are acceptable provided the length limitations stated in 3)
and 4) are not exceeded.
6. Joint spacing or joint/reinforcement spacing for
approved joints such as Ductmate, exus, etc.
Maximum duct size
(large side)
24" 32" 40" 48" 60" 70"
Pressure Joint Size
Max. spacing between joints and stiffeners
4.
5.
up to
7/8" Flange ht.
78"
2"
1-3/8" Flange ht.
78"
60"
24"
60"
48"
32"
32"
48"
40"
Seams: Button punch snap lock seams shall be sealed along their
entire length. Sealant may be applied during or after
construction.
Elbows: All elbows having a side length less than 12 inches in
the plane of rotation shall be standard radius elbows. Elbows
with side length 12 inches or greater, may be, standard radius,
short radius with internal concentric full length splitters bolted
to duct sides or square with turning vanes as SMACNA Fig. 2-2
page 2-3. Short radius elbow splitters shall be positioned to
ensure that the first splitter radius does not exceed twice the
throat
January 13, 2003
15890 - 4
Ductwork and Accessories
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
Canadian, Texas
radius of the elbow. Subsequent splitters radii shall not exceed
twice the previous splitter radius.
6. Offsets: Offsets shall be formed as partial angle radius
elbows. 90-degree turning vanes will not be acceptable. Mitered
offsets will be acceptable provided the angle of offset does
not exceed 30 degrees.
7. Branches: All branch connections shall be provided with a manual
volume control damper in the branch duct. Rectangular 90-degree
branch connections supplying two or more outlets shall connect
to the main duct with a 6-inch long 45-degree taper on the
leading edge. Circular 90-degree branch connections supplying
two or more outlets shall connect to the main duct with conical
or bell mouth connectors. Circular branch connections to an air
outlet device may use a spin-in collar fitting.
8. Volume Dampers: Single blade or opposed blade, multilouver type
as detailed in SMACNA Standards, Figures 2-14 and 2-15. Provide
end bearing for all dampers. Quadrant or other operator for
externally insulated duct shall have stand-off mount so operation
is clear of the insulation. Internally insulated duct shall have
sheet metal liner of same gauge as duct for one lineal foot
before and after the damper.
9. Automatic Operated Dampers: Section 15950 - Controls.
10.Backdraft Dampers: Self-operating, multi-blade damper to open
fully on 0.06 inch wg pressure difference and close by gravity.
Aluminum, 16-gauge frame, 0.023 inch blades of flat or elliptical
shape, with tie-bar to connect blades for parallel operation.
Provide resilient gasket for air seal and quiet operation. Blade
pivots shall be in nylon bushings. Provide adjustable counterbalance weight(s) where indicated.
2.4
DUCT LINING
1. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1.
Lining material:
1.
Schuller Linacoustic.
2.
Owens Corning Aeroflex.
3.
Certainteed Manson.
4.
Knauf.
January 13, 2003
15890 - 5
Ductwork and Accessories
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
Canadian, Texas
2. Adhesive:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Benjamin Foster.
Childers.
GEMCO.
3M.
United McGill.
2. Materials:
1. All insulation materials, adhesives, jackets, etc.,
shall be vermin-proof and non-combustible and shall have
a flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 or less.
2. Lining shall have the following features:
1. 1.5 LB/CF density for ducts and 2 LB/CF density for
casings.
2. Mat facing on the air stream side.
3. Rated for 5,000 FPM.
4. Rated for 250° F.
3. Provide lining only where indicated on the drawings. Lining shall
be 1 inch thick unless indicated otherwise on the drawings.
2.5
DUCT ACCESS DOORS, PANELS AND SECTIONS
1. Provide hinged access doors, sized and located for maintenance
work, upstream where possible, in the following locations:
1. Each coil and humidifier.
2. Each fire damper (for link service), smoke damper,
combination fire/smoke damper, and automatic control
damper.
3. Each duct mounted smoke detector.
4. Each change in direction at required intervals and at
grease reservoirs of kitchen exhaust ducts for cleaning.
5. In hospitals as required for cleaning operating room
supply air duct downstream of final filter, operating
room return air ducts and operating room exhaust ducts.
2. Openings shall be as large as feasible in small ducts, 12 inches
by 12 inches minimum where possible and 18"x18" in 20 inches or
wider cuts. Access doors in insulated ducts shall be doublewall, insulated, and mounted on stand off frames to insulation
thickness.
1. For rectangular ducts: Refer to SMACNA (Figure 2-12).
January 13, 2003
15890 - 6
Ductwork and Accessories
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
Canadian, Texas
2. For round and flat oval duct: Access sections shall be not
less than 20-gauge housing welded or riveted to a duct
section. Typical units are United Sheet Metal Type AR.
3. All access doors shall be labeled (1/2-inch high lettering) to
indicated device to be serviced.
2.6 CURTAIN TYPE FIRE DAMPERS
1. Use in ducts and openings under 3 sq.ft.
2.
Galvanized steel, interlocking blade, curtain type fire damper
with UL listing and label, 1-1/2 hour rating, 165° F. fusible
link, with pressure drop performance equal to blade stack out of
air stream. Fire dampers in fume hood exhaust, wet air exhaust or
in salt air application shall be stainless steel construction.
Provide fire dampers where indicated on the Drawings and where
required by local codes.
3.
Fire dampers for grilles, where walls will not accommodate
standard fire dampers, shall be thinline type, same construction
as standard fire dampers.
4.
Dampers shall be furnished with sleeves in accordance with UL
555.
5.
All dampers shall be in accordance with NFPA 90A and in
accordance with UL for the fire rating indicated.
2.7 COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS
1. Combination fire and smoke dampers shall meet the requirements
for Smoke Dampers (2.09) with the following exception:
1. Thermal actuation shall be by means of a UL 33 reusable
manual thermal link with quick release that will
automatically release the damper when the temperature within
the duct reaches or exceeds 165°F.
2. The damper shall be capable of being reset upon command
through the fire alarm system. Refer to Division 16. The
damper shall not be capable of being reset if the manual
thermal link has been activated unless the temperature has
dropped to below the thermal link setting of 165° F.
January 13, 2003
15890 - 7
Ductwork and Accessories
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
Canadian, Texas
2. Dampers shall be furnished with sleeves in accordance with UL 555.
2.8
FLEXIBLE AIR DUCT
1. General: Factory fabricated, comply with NFPA 90A. Flexible
ducts shall not penetrate any fire or smoke barrier. Provide
insulated, acoustical flexible duct in supply air duct systems.
Provide only where permitted by local codes and licensing
standards. Maximum length of flexible duct shall be six feet.
Provide rigid round as required.
2. Insulated Flexible Air Duct: Factory made including corrugated
aluminum duct and mineral fiber insulation with maximum C factor
of 0.20 at 75° F mean temperature, encased with a polymer vapor
barrier outer jacket.
3. Flexible ducts shall be listed by Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc., complying with UL 181. Ducts larger than 8
inches diameter shall be Class 1. Ducts 8 inches in diameter and
smaller may be Class 1 or Class 2.
4. Flexible ducts shall be Omniair Model 1800 or equal.
2.9 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
1. Where duct connections are made to fans and air handling units,
install a non-combustible flexible connection of 29-ounce
neoprene coated fiber glass fabric approximately six inches wide.
For connections exposed to sun and weather provide hypalon
coating in lieu of neoprene. Burning characteristics shall
conform to NFPA 90A. Refer to SMACNA Standards Section 2, Fig. 219.
2.10 INSTRUMENT TEST FITTINGS
1. Manufactured type with a minimum two inch length for insulated
duct, and a minimum one inch length for duct not insulated. Test
hole shall have a flat gasket for rectangular ducts and a
concave gasket for round ducts at the base, and a screw cap to
prevent air leakage.
2. Provide instrument test holes at each duct or casing mounted
temperature sensor or transmitter, and at entering and leaving
side of each heating coil, cooling coil, sound attenuator and
duct mounted filter units.
January 13, 2003
15890 - 8
Ductwork and Accessories
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
Canadian, Texas
2.11 ACOUSTICAL APPARATUS CASING
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Commercial Acoustics.
2. Industrial Acoustics Company.
3. Rink Corporation.
4. Semco.
5. Spiral Pipe of Texas
6. Titus
7. Transonics, Inc.
8. United Sheet Metal.
2. Insulated Metal Panels: The panels shall be factoryfabricated,
minimum (four) (three) (two) inch double wall, insulated metal.
1. Exterior Panel: The exterior of the panel shall be constructed
of 16-gauge galvanized steel exterior panels supported by
galvanized steel internal channels properly spaced to limit
panel deflections to 1/200th of span at design loadings. All
galvanizing shall be hot dipped conforming to ASTM A525 and
shall provide a minimum of .90 oz. of zinc per square foot.
2. Interior Liners: Interior liner shall be .030-inch thick
perforated aluminum or 20-gauge galvanized steel liner which
shall protect the insulation while allowing acoustical
absorption. Aluminum liner shall be electrically insulated from
the galvanized steel housing to prevent galvanic action of the
two dissimilar metals by use of an acrylic adhesive/sealant.
3. Insulation: The panels shall be insulated with adhesive
fastened 4-inch thick neoprene coated fiberglass insulation
which shall have an inner facing to prevent airflow erosion.
Insulation shall be: 3 PCF density. Materials shall by inert,
vermin and moisture proof and odorless. A tightly woven
fiberglass cloth equal to BDG Industries or JPS Style 7628
shall be installed between the acoustical blanket and
perforated panel. Material shall comply with ASTM E-84, NFPA
90A-1993 and Ul requirements, and shall have the following
maximum fire classification values:
1. Flame Spread 25.
2. Fuel Contributed 20.
January 13, 2003
15890 - 9
Ductwork and Accessories
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
3. Smoke Developed 0.
Insulation shall be adequate to prevent condensation on the
outside of the casing under normal operating conditions.
Panels shall be mounted using neoprene gaskets and rubber
washered, cadmium plated screws.
4. Acoustical Performance: The panels shall have been
tested by an independent laboratory for acoustical
performance and shall meet the following values:
Sound Transmission Loss DB ATSM E-90-75 & E-413-73
Octave band
Construction
2
Perforated Liner,
39
3 PCF Insulation
3
4
5
6
7
STC*
22
25
37
43
53
56
* Sound transmission class
Sound Absorption ASTM C423-81 &
E795
Octave Band
Construction
Perforated Liner,
.95
3 PCF Insulation
2
3
.26
4
.70
5
6
7
1.08 1.00 .94
NRC*
.82
* Noise reduction coefficient
5.
Doors: Hinged access doors shall be provided into
January 13, 2003
15890 - 10
Ductwork and Accessories
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
sections requiring regular inspection or maintenance.
Removable hatches or panels without hinges are not acceptable
for those areas. Doors shall be constructed and insulated as
described for the housing, and shall include a 25-gauge
galvanized steel inner liner.
Each door shall be hinged with stainless steel piano hinges
in an extruded aluminum frame and shall seal against a
specially formed closed cell foam gasket. Doors shall be
hinged to swing against static pressure.
Door shall be the maximum height that housing will accommodate
up to 72 inches maximum, and shall be secured with a multipoint latching mechanism operated by a single stainless steel
handle. Doors 48 inches and less in height shall utilize two
independent zinc-coated adjustable grip latches. Both latching
systems shall include an inside handle.
PART 3
3.1
3.2
EXECUTION
DUCT SEALING
1.
Seal all transverse joints and all duct wall penetrations of
low pressure and medium pressure ducts.
2.
Seal all transverse joints, longitudinal joints and duct wall
penetrations of high pressure ducts.
3.
Seal joints and seams by applying layers of glass fabric tape
embedded in coat of sealant. Tape shall overlap the joint a
minimum of two inches. Apply finish coat of sealant to
completely cover the tape.
4.
Apply sealant within the slip joints of round and flat oval
ducts during construction. Additionally, seal the joints as
described above.
DUCT LEAKAGE TESTING
1. Randomly test 10% of all duct systems for leakage in accordance
with Section 4 of SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. If
leakage test results exceed SMACNA's allowable leakage rates,
then entire duct systems shall be tested.
January 13, 2003
15890 - 11
Ductwork and Accessories
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
2.
3.
3.3
The duct system shall be tested in sections at a static
pressure equal to or greater than the highest static
pressure duct classification contained in the system.
Leakage test pressure and allowable leakage (including
exhaust ducts ) :
1. Medium pressure ducts: Test pressure 4 inches, allowable
leakage shall not exceed 0.04 CFM/SF duct surface area.
2. Low pressure ducts: Test pressure 2 inches, allowable leakage
shall not exceed 0.08 CFM/SF duct surface area.
FIRE, SMOKE, FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS
1. Install fire, smoke, and fire and smoke dampers in accordance
with local code requirements and with the manufacturer's
instructions to conform to the installation used for the rating
test.
3.4 CONTROL DAMPER INSTALLATION
1. Provide necessary blank-off plates required to install dampers
that are smaller than duct size. Provide necessary transitions
required to install dampers larger than duct size.
2. Assemble multiple section dampers with required interconnecting
linkage and extend number of shafts through duct for external
mounting of damper motors.
3. Provide necessary sheet metal baffle plates to eliminate
stratification and provide air volumes specified. Locate baffles
by experimentation, and affix and seal permanently in place, only
after stratification problem has been eliminated.
3.5 AIR FLOW MEASURING STATIONS
1. Install units where shown with minimum straight run distances,
upstream and downstream as recommended by the manufacturer.
3.6 ACOUSTICAL APPARATUS CASING
1. Panels shall be installed in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's installation instructions and as herein
specified.
January 13, 2003
January 13, 2003
15890 - 12
15890 - 12
Ductwork and Accessories
Ductwork and Accessories
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
2. Panels shall be secured with an acrylic adhesive/sealant applied
between the panel and each support channel and with screws
installed around the panel perimeter. Screw spacing shall not be
greater than nine (9) inches. Screws shall be stainless steel and
shall have a stainless steel washer and sealant gasket.
3. Seal all joints and seams air and water tight.
4. Fill void in panel joints with acoustic fill.
3.7 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
1. Adequately protect material against physical damage. Protect
material and ducts during construction against entry of foreign
matter to the inside and clean both inside and outside before
operation and painting. When new ducts are connected to existing
ductwork, clean both new and existing ductwork inside and outside
before operation. Clean ducts shall be free of all foreign matter
including oil and other residue.
3.8 DUCT LEAKAGE REPAIR
1. Repair all audible leaks.
2. All leaks shall be repaired until acceptable rates are
achieved.
January 13, 2003
15890 - 13
Ductwork and Accessories
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
3.9
SCHEDULE OF MATERIALS
AIR SYSTEM
Supply duct
construction
[Low] [Medium] pressure
General:
Return air ducts
pressure construction
Outside air ducts
pressure construction
[Low] [Medium]
[Low] [Medium]
[Low] [Medium] pressure
construction
Exhaust ductwork
END OF SECTION
January 13, 2003
15890 - 14
Ductwork and Accessories
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 15925
AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
1. Supply, Return, Transfer and Exhaust Air Devices and Accessories.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
1.
2.
3.
Submit in accordance with Section 15010.
Submit product data and shop drawings covering each item
together with schedule of outlets, listing cfm, neck velocity, NC
level and Ak factor and air flow measurement procedures.
Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. Manufacturer shall perform air flow tests and sound level
measurements for the products specified.
2. Manufacturer shall certify cataloged performance and ensure
correct application of air outlet types.
1.4
JOB CONDITIONS
1. Review requirements of outlets as to size, finish, and type of
mounting prior to submitting shop drawings and schedules of
outlets.
2. Check location of outlets and make necessary adjustments in
position to conform with architectural features, symmetry, and
lighting arrangement.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
1. Anemostat.
2. Carnes.
3. Hart & Cooley.
January 13, 2003
15925 - 1
Air Distribution Devices
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
4.
J & J Register
5.
Krueger.
6.
Metal Aire.
7.
Titus.
2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.
2.
Provide air devices equal in all respects to those scheduled on
the drawings.
All air devices shall be the product of one manufacturer.
3.
Rate units in accordance with ASHRAE standards.
4.
Base air outlet application on space noise level of NC 35 maximum
in all areas.
5.
Provide supply outlets with sponge rubber seal around edge.
6.
Provide baffles to direct air away from walls, columns, or other
obstructions within radius of diffuser operation.
7.
Provide plaster frame for diffusers located in plaster surfaces.
8.
All devices shall be factory finished.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
1.
Install items in accordance with manufacturer's printed
instructions.
2.
Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets matt black.
3.
Seal square to round adapters air tight to diffusers or grilles
using caulking compound suitable for materials and service.
END OF SECTION
January 13, 2003
15925 - 2
Air Distribution Devices
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 15936
AIR INLET AND OUTLET LOUVERS
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
1. Outside Air Louver.
2. Combustion Air Louver.
3. Exhaust/Relief Air Louver.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
1. Submit manufacturer's product data indicating performance data,
louver size, materials, finish, mounting type and accessories.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. Louvers shall be rated in accordance with AMCA Standard 500 for
water penetration and louver performance.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
1. Air Balance Inc.
2. Arrow United.
3. AWV.
4. Louvers & Dampers, Inc.
5. Ruskin.
2.2
FIXED LOUVERS
1. Frame:
6063T5 extruded aluminum .081-inch wall thickness with
caulking slots.
2. Blades: 6063T5 extruded aluminum .081-inch wall thickness. Blades
at approximately 3-inch centers at 37-1/2 degree angle.
3. Screen: Expanded flattened aluminum bird screen 3/4"x.051"
mounted on rear.
January 13, 2003
15936 - 1
Air Inlet and Outlet Louvers
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
4. Finish: Mill.
5. Frame: Box (Provide front flange if indicated on drawings).
2.3 COMBINATION LOUVER/DAMPER
1. Frame:
6063T5 extruded aluminum .125-inch wall thickness with
caulking slots.
2. Blades: 6063T5 extruded aluminum .081-inch wall thickness. Blades
at approximately 4-1/2-inch centers at 37-1/2 degree angle.
3. Adjustable louver section with low leakage blade and jamb seals
and operating quadrant.
4. Electric adjustable louver operator bracket and interconnecting
linkage to be factory supplied. Motor to be 115v/1 PH and shall
fail closed.
5. Screen: Expanded flattened aluminum bird screen 3/4"x.051"
mounted on rear.
6. Finish: Mill.
7. Frame: Box channel type with front flange. PART
3
EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
1. Fasten box frame to construction with bolts through clip angles.
2. Caulk around frame for weathertight perimeter.
END OF SECTION
January 13, 2003
15936 - 2
Air Inlet and Outlet Louvers
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 15990
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
1. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of the following systems:
1. Air Systems.
2. Hydronic Systems.
3. Refrigeration Systems.
4. Steam Systems.
2. Combustion Testing.
3. Sound and Vibration Testing.
1.2 APPROVED TEST AND BALANCE CONTRACTORS
1.
Engineered Air Balance.
2.
P.H.I. Service Agency, Inc.
3.
Testing Specialties Inc.
4.
T.R.M.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
1.
Submit qualifications and certification of personnel within 30
days after the award of the Contract.
2.
Submit proposed testing and balancing procedures with sample
forms for each system for approval prior to testing.
3.
Specific procedures used in all tests shall be included in the
test report. Contractor shall identify all equipment by the
identification code as shown on the drawings.
4.
Submit a complete test report certified correct by an officer of
the Testing Adjusting and Balancing Agency. The report shall be
bound and shall contain the following:
1. Title Page.
2. Certificate verifying that the testing and balancing has been
done in accordance with the specifications and the results
achieved are correct.
3. System diagrams.
January 13, 2003 15990 - 1 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
4.
5.
6.
7.
Recommended testing procedures.
Test reports for systems and equipment on AABC or NEBB
standard forms.
Instrument calibration reports.
Control system verification report.
5. Submit certification of Workmen's Compensation Insurance.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. All testing and balancing shall be done by an independent Test and
Balance Agency that specializes in the testing and balancing of
heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems. The firm shall
not be affiliated with the Contractor or equipment supplier.
2. The Test and Balance Firm shall be certified by AABC or NEBB to
perform air, hydronics, sound and vibration measurements.
3. All work shall be done under the direct supervision of a Test and
Balance Supervisor, who is certified by AABC or NEBB to perform
air, hydronics, sound and vibration measurements. If requested, the
test shall be conducted in the presence of the Engineer.
4. The environmental systems including all equipment, apparatus and
distribution systems shall be tested, adjusted and balanced in
accordance with the latest edition of the NEBB Procedural
Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental
Systems or the AABC National Standards except where superseded by
these specifications.
5. Instruments used in all HVAC systems and equipment tests shall be
as recommended by the AABC, AMCA, ASHRAE, NEBB, or as approved by
the Engineer. Test instruments used shall be initially checked and
periodically checked thereafter to verify their calibration
accuracy. Verification of the calibration of each instrument
required for a test is to be provided with each test report.
6. All test equipment shall be furnished by the Contractor and shall
remain his property.
1.5 WARRANTY
1. The Test and Balance Agency shall include an extended
January 13, 2003 15990 - 2 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
warranty of 90 days, after final acceptance of the project, during
which time the Engineer at his discretion may request a recheck or
resetting of any item listed in test report. The firm shall
provide technicians to assist the Engineer in making any tests he
may require during this period of time.
PART 2
2.1
Not applicable for this section.
PART 3
3.1
PRODUCTS
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
1. The Contractor shall provide to the Test and Balance Agency one
(1) set of approved shop drawings on all equipment which will be
tested and balanced.
2. The Contractor shall provide all thermometer wells, gauge cocks
and test ports required to perform the testing and balancing
work.
3. The Test and Balance Supervisor shall review the HVAC design
drawings and shop drawings prior to fabrication and installation
of the HVAC systems to insure that all of the necessary balancing
dampers, valves, test ports, etc. required to test and balance
the systems are provided.
4. The Test and Balance Supervisor shall be kept informed during the
construction of the project of major changes made to the HVAC
system.
5. The Test and Balance Supervisor will make periodic inspections
during construction to familiarize himself with the project and
submit a written report to the Engineer of each visit.
3.2
PREPARATION
1. Put all equipment into full operation and continue its operation
during each working day of testing and balancing. No test and
balancing work shall start until all of the air handling equipment
has new filters installed and coils and strainers have been
cleaned.
January 13, 2003 15990 - 3 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
3.3 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
1. Perform all work in accordance with approved testing and balancing
procedures published by AABC or NEBB that have been approved by the
Engineer.
2. Test, adjust and balance the following systems and all associated
equipment.
1. Supply Air.
2. Return Air.
3. Outside Air.
4. Exhaust Air.
5. Relief Air.
6. Chilled Water.
7. Hot Water.
8. Condenser Water.
9. Cooling Water.
10.Steam.
11.Domestic Hot Water Recirculation.
12.Refrigeration System.
3.
Test, adjust and balance all air and hydronic systems and
individual components to within -0% to +10% of the values shown
on the drawings.
4. Perform pitot traverse measurements of all main and sub-main ducts.
5. Test, adjust and balance all fume hoods and exhaust hoods
including face velocities.
6. Perform cooling tower performance testing in accordance with the
standard C.T.I. Code ATC-105. Flow quantities shall be determined
by calibrated orifice, venturi or pitot traverse measurements.
3.4
VIBRATION TESTING
1. After all systems have been tested, adjusted and balanced to meet
specifications, perform vibration measurements of all rotating
equipment in accordance with AABC procedures.
2. Vibration measurements shall be
Chapter 57 of the ASHRAE 1987
Handbook.
evaluated in
HVAC Systems
accordance with
and Application
January 13, 2003 15990 - 4 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
3. Vibration measurements shall be compared to the following
acceptable criteria:
Maximum Allowable
Vibration Peak to Peak
Displacement
Equipment
Centrifugal Compressors
Fans (Centrifugal and Axial)
Under 600 RPM
600 RPM to 1000 RPM
1000 RPM to 2000 RPM
Over 2000 RPM
1
4
3
2
1
4. Vibration amplitude shall not exceed the values listed at the
final balanced rotating speed of the machine. Predominant
vibration at frequencies other than rotational speed is not
acceptable.
5. The amplitude of axial vibration at the bearings shall not exceed
radial vibration.
6. Test and report the vibration isolation system efficiency for all
isolated equipment.
END OF SECTION
January 13, 2003 15990 - 5 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 16050
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
SUMMARY
1. Description of Work:
1. This section is a general introduction to the below listed
sections. Materials and methods are described throughout
Division 16 and the referenced Divisions 1 and 15. 1. Sections
16050 through 16999 inclusive. (Some sections
are omitted.)
2. The Contractor shall familiarize himself and all of his
employees assigned to this project with all the requirements
of this Division.
2. Related Work: This section is a Division 16 specification and as
such will be taken as an integral part of other Divisions 16
sections, including Section 16010, "General Requirements For
Electrical Work".
3. Extent of the work shall be as shown on the drawings or herein
specified in Division 16.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
1. Refer to individual sections.
2.2
MATERIALS
1. In general, all materials shall be new, UL approved and listed
for the specific application, as specified or as required, and
properly installed. Where sole source manufacturers are stated,
the Contractor may submit equivalent product manufacturers for
approval by the Architect/Engineer if done within 30 days of
receipt of bids in accordance with Division 01300.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
METHODS
1.
All work shall be performed in accordance with acceptable
industry
standards
of
workmanship
except
where
specific
procedures are called for in these Specifications, in which
January 13, 2003
Methods
16050 - 1
Basic Materials and
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
case they shall be followed. It is strongly suggested all
procedures are reviewed with the Architect/Engineer prior to
beginning the work in order to avoid costly mistakes to the
Contractor.
2. Comply with the NEC, ANSI Code C2-1978, National Electrical
Safety Code, and all applicable State, Federal and local codes.
The Contractor and his employees are responsible for helping to
accomplish this end.
3. All conductors installed under this Contract shall be properly
tagged at each terminal point or junction box.
4. Concrete Work and Pads:
1. All concreting, reinforcing, and form work necessary in
connection with the construction of pads, manholes, and the
concreting around raceway runs underground shall be provided
by the Contractor. Refer to Division 3 for concrete forms,
materials, and other requirements.
1. Furnish
and
install
reinforced
concrete
pads
for
the
transformer, switchgear, of size, etc. as shown on the
drawings or required. Unless otherwise noted, pads shall be 4
inches high for interior locations and 8 inches for exterior
locations. They shall exceed dimensions of equipment being set
on them, including future sections, by 6 inches on all sides,
except when equipment is designed to set flush against a wall,
then the side or sides of the pads against the wall shall be
flush with the equipment.
2. Chamfer top edges 1/2 inch. Trowel all surfaces smooth.
Reinforce pads with 6"x6" 6/6 welded wire fabric.
END OF SECTION
January 13, 2003
Methods
16050 - 2
Basic Materials and
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 16120
WIRE AND CABLE
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
SUMMARY
1. Description of Work: Wire and cable for lighting, power,
control, and special systems rated 600 volts or less shall be
furnished and installed as a part of this section.
2. Related Work: This is a Division 16 specification and as such
shall be taken as an integral part of other Division 16 sections,
including Section 16010, "General Requirements For Electrical
Work".
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
1. National Electrical Code (NEC).
2. Underwriters Laboratories (UL).
3. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA).
4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
5. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM).
6. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. Manufacturers: Wire and cable shall be manufactured by firms
that have been regularly engaged in the manufacture of wire and
cable of the types and sizes required for at least five years.
2. Installer's Qualifications: Installers of electrical wiring and
cables shall have a minimum of three years of successful
installation experience on projects with electrical work similar
to that required for this project.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
1. Submit manufacturer's technical data on wire and cable
demonstrating compliance with this Specification.
January 13, 2003
16120 - 1
Wire and Cable
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
1. American Insulated Wire Corp.
2. Capitol Wire and Cable Corp.
3. Carol.
4. Essex International, Inc.
5. Hi-Tech.
6. Laribee.
7. Rome Cable.
8. Royal Electric.
9. Southwire/Senator Company.
10.Triangle.
2.2
MATERIALS
1. Copper conductor for wire and cable shall be 98% conductivity
annealed copper per ASTM B3, UL Standard 83, and Federal
Specification J-C-30A, and shall be tinned or untinned in
accordance with established standards for the type of insulation
applied over the conductors. #10 AWG and smaller shall be solid
and #8 AWG and larger shall be stranded. Unless indicated or
specified otherwise, conductor sizes are based on copper. [All
conductors shall be copper].
2. Aluminum conductors may be substituted for feeders and branch
circuits, #4 AWG and larger except where copper conductor is
specifically indicated.
Type EC/1350 aluminum is not
acceptable. Aluminum conductors shall be Aluminum Association
8000 Series compact, stranded, aluminum alloy, Alcan Cable
"Stabaloy", Southwire "Triple E", Kaiser "817", or as approved.
When aluminum conductors are substituted for copper, they shall
have a minimum ampacity equal to that of the copper conductors
specified. When substituting aluminum conductors for copper, the
Contractor shall be responsible at his own expense for:
2. Increasing the conductor size to have the same ampacity as
January 13, 2003
16120 - 2
Wire and Cable
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
the copper size indicated.
2. Increasing the conduit and pull box sizes to accommodate the
larger size aluminum conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.
3. Ensuring that the pulling tension rating of the aluminum
conductor is sufficient.
4. Providing terminals and connectors, including those in
panelboards,
switchboards,
motor
control
centers,
transformers, and other fabricated equipment, that are UL
listed for use with aluminum, and so labeled.
5. Relocating
equipment,
modifying
equipment
terminations,
resizing equipment, and resolving to the satisfaction of the
Architect all problems that are direct results of the use of
aluminum conductors in lieu of copper.
3. Wire and cable shall be permanently marked approximately every 2'
to indicate size, voltage, and temperature rating in accordance
with NEC.
4. Wire and Cable Wire Shall:
1. Be rated 600 volt A.C.
2. Be installed in approved raceways or conduit.
3. Be not less than #12 AWG.
4. #14 AWG may be used for control and low voltage wiring.
January 13, 2003
16120 - 3
Wire and Cable
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
5. Have type insulation as follows:
WIRE AND CABLE INSULATION FOR GENERAL USE
USE
TYPE INSULATION
Dry Locations
THW or THHN-THWN
Damp or Wet Locations
THW or THHN-THWN
Feeders
THW, THHN-THWN, or
XHHW
Service Entrance and
Buried Distribution
THW, THHN-THWN, or
XHHW
Cable Tray
EP or TC
THHN-THWN = Dual rated wire
5. Conduit sizes are based on THW insulated conductors and shall not
be changed regardless of insulation type used.
6. Control/Communications (Low Voltage) Type Wires and Cables:
1. Shall be of the size, type, and materials as called for
under the specific system and as required by the system
equipment manufacturer.
2. When run in raceways separate from the power wiring and not
mixed with the power wiring, control/communications cables may
have 300-volt insulation.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
1. Wires or cables shall be installed in NEC approved raceways,
unless otherwise specifically noted.
2. Service, feeder, and branch circuit wiring shall be installed
using color coded conductors, as follows:
208/120v
480/277V
January 13, 2003
ALL SYSTEMS
16120 - 4
Wire and Cable
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SYSTEMS
SYSTEMS
Phase
A
Blac
k
Phas
e A
Purpl
e
Equipment Ground
Green
Phase
B
Red
Phas
e B
Brown
Single & ThreeWay Return
Orange
Tracer
Phase
C
Blue
Phas
e C
Yello
w
Three-Way
Traveler
Yellow
Tracer
Neutra
l
Whit
e
Neut
ral
Gray
Isolated Ground
Green w/
Yellow
Tracer
For conductors #6 and smaller, color coding shall be by factory
applied, color impregnated insulation. For conductors #4 and
larger, color coding shall be by plastic coated self-sticking
markers, colored nylon cable ties, or heat shrink type sleeves.
3. A minimum of 6 inches of looped or free end conductor shall be left
at each outlet for the installation of devices or fixtures.
Conductors in outlet boxes not for connection to devices or
equipment under this Contract shall be neatly identified by
circuit number and "spare" and coiled, with the cut ends insulated
and taped together.
4. Branch Circuit Sizing:
1. Branch circuit homeruns to panels from any housekeeping
outlet on the circuit shall be a minimum #10 AWG.
2. Conductors for branch circuits of 120 volts over 100 feet
long and of 277 volts over 230 feet long shall be a
minimum #10 AWG.
3. Class 1 remote control and signal circuit conductors shall be
minimum #14 AWG.
4. Class 2 low energy remote control and signal conductors shall
be minimum #16 AWG.
5.
Special signal, communications, or similar systems wires
(cables) shall be sized as shown on the Drawings or as required by
the manufacturer.
6.
Parallel conductors shall be terminated on multiple barrel lugs
or on a combination of multiple barrel lugs on a common bus. Under
full load operating conditions, the division of the load between
conductors shall be checked. Where load
January 13, 2003
16120 - 5
Wire and Cable
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
differential between any two conductors of a phase exceeds 10%,
corrective
measures
shall
be
taken
to
establish
a
load
differential between conductors of less than 10%. A record of such
tests shall be made for each feeder, indicating the conductor
size, load in each conductor, voltage, and
identification of
feeder. Each test record, as well as retesting following
corrective measures, shall be signed by the individual conducting
and the individual witnessing the test. Copies of this test shall
be provided as prescribed in Section 16010.
6. Conductor Identification: Provide identification for all feeder
conductors within each enclosure where a tap, splice, or
termination is made. Identification shall be by means of nylon
marker ties, Type "PLM" as manufactured by Panduit Corporation,
or as approved.
7. Wiring within switchboards, panelboards, terminal cabinets, and
similar enclosures shall be neatly trained and bundled using
nylon locking type cable ties, as manufactured by Thomas & Betts,
Panduit, Ideal, or as approved.
8. Conductor Installation:
1. Conductors shall be carefully handled and installed to ensure
that maximum tensile and compressive strengths of conductor and
insulation are not exceeded and that the conductors are not
kinked or the insulation damaged.
2. Wire pulling compound, when used, shall be UL listed, Ideal
"Yellow 77", Holub "Hi Green", or approved equal. The use of
soap
flakes,
liquid
detergents,
or
vegetable
oils
is
unacceptable.
9.
For the purpose of this Specification and the accompanying
Contract Drawings, a homerun shall be defined as the conduit and
wire from an outlet, fixture, receptacle, switch, or similar
device to a panelboard, motor control panel, or similar power
distributing equipment. Homeruns may be grouped as long as no more
than three phase conductors (none of which are the same phase) are
grouped together. Installations involving more than three phase
conductors must be reviewed and approved prior to installation.
10.Splices and Terminations:Shall be in accordance with
Section 16140, "Wire Connections and Splices".
January 13, 2003
16120 - 6
Wire and Cable
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
END OF SECTION
January 13, 2003
16120 - 7
Wire and Cable
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 16130
BOXES
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
SUMMARY
1. Description of Work: This section includes work required to
provide boxes, including but not limited to outlet, floor, pull,
junction, and cable tap boxes and supports associated therewith.
2. Related Work: This section is a Division 16 specification and as
such shall be taken as an integral part of other Division 16
sections, including Section 16010, "General Requirements For
Electrical Work".
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
1. Codes and Standards:
1. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
2. National Electrical Code (NEC).
3. Underwriters Laboratories (UL).
4. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
1.3
SUBMITTALS
1. Submit manufacturer's data for standard outlet boxes up to six
gang, including floor type, demonstrating compliance with this
specification and the drawings in accordance with Section 16010.
2. Submit shop drawings for all other special, pull, outlet, and
junction boxes demonstrating compliance with the NEC and this
specification. Drawings shall indicate dimensions and location in
building where boxes shall be used.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
1. Appleton Electric.
2. Bell.
3. Bowers Manufacturing Company.
January 13, 2003
16130 - 1
Boxes
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
4. BWF Manufacturing Company.
5. Crouse-Hinds.
6. Hoffman Engineering Company.
7. Hubbell.
8. Killark.
9. LEW.
10. O.Z. Electrical Manufacturing Company.
11.Raco.
12.Steel City.
13.Walker.
2.2 PRODUCTS
1. Outlet Boxes and Covers:
1. Concealed and exposed dry locations except where prohibited
herein: One piece die formed 14 gauge zinc galvanized steel,
in accordance with UL 514.
2. Damp and Wet Locations: Cast aluminum with aluminum polymer
enamel or malleable iron with zinc electroplate and aluminum
polymer enamel, in accordance with UL 514 and UL 498.
3. Classified Hazardous Locations: Malleable iron with zinc
electroplate and aluminum polymer enamel, in accordance with
UL 886.
2. Floor Outlet Boxes:
1. Class I, Single Service:
1. Rectangular: Steel City Series 640 or approved equal.
2. Round: Steel City Series 600 or approved equal.
2. Class II, Single Service:
1. Round: Steel City Series 68 or approved equal.
3. Class II, Dual Service:
1. Steel City 664 with 664CST cover.
4. Above Floor Service Fitting: Steel City Series "SF" or
approved equal.
3.
Junction and Pull Boxes: UL 514.
4.
Wireways: UL 870.
January 13, 2003
16130 - 2
Boxes
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
1. General Requirements: Electrical installations shall conform to
the requirements of NEC and the requirements specified herein.
2. Boxes, Outlets and Supports: Provide boxes in the raceway system
wherever required for pulling conductors, making connections, and
mounting devices and fixtures.
1. Each box shall have the volume required by NEC for the number
and size of conductors installed.
2. Boxes for use with raceway systems shall be not less than 11/2" deep except where shallower boxes required by structural
conditions are approved.
3. Boxes shall be cast metal hub type when located in wet
locations, when surface mounted outside of exterior walls, and
when installed in hazardous areas. Boxes in other locations
shall be zinc galvanized steel. Provide gaskets for cast metal
boxes installed in wet locations and for boxes installed flush
with the outside of exterior walls.
4. Boxes for other than lighting fixture outlets shall be not
less than 4" square. [, except that 4" x 2" boxes may be used
when only one raceway enters the box.]
5. Boxes for use in masonry blocks and tile walls shall be
square cornered masonry boxes or standard boxes having square
cornered tile rings.
6. Boxes for mounting lighting fixtures shall be not less than 4"
square or octagonal, except that smaller boxes may be approved
for use as required by fixture configuration.
Provide separate boxes for flush or recessed fixtures when
required by fixture terminal operating temperature; fixtures
shall be readily removable for access to the boxes unless
ceiling access panels are provided.
7. Boxes for ganged devices shall be 4" square for two devices
and solid ganged boxes for more than two devices.
8. Boxes for switches and receptacle outlets shall be provided
with maximum 1" maximum depth device rings when installed in
plaster or tile walls.
9. Thru-wall boxes are not acceptable.
10.Supports:
1. Support boxes and pendants for surface mounted fixtures on
suspended ceilings independent of ceiling supports, or make
adequate provisions for distributing the load
January 13, 2003
16130 - 3
Boxes
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
over the ceiling supporting members using approved bar
hangers or 1-1/2" lathers channel.
2. Fasten boxes and supports with wood screws to wood, with
expansion bolts on concrete and brick, with toggle bolts on
hollow masonry units, and with machine screws on steel work.
3. Support receptacle outlets installed in light weight stud
construction using bar hangers and box clips, Caddy
Fasteners BHA/BHC or as approved. Support boxes for
switches using sheet metal screws or Caddy Fasteners Series
"MF" clips or approved equal.
4. Outlet boxes shall not be used to support fixtures or loads
of 50 lbs . or more, or for supporting ceiling fans. Such
loads shall be supported from the building structure,
independent of box, raceway, or suspended ceiling supports.
5. Cast metal boxes shall be supported by means of integral
mounting lugs or by the raceway system in which installed.
Drilling of cast boxes is not acceptable.
11.Locations of Outlets: In order that all outlets may come in
proper relation to paneling, decorated areas, etc., the
Contractor shall familiarize himself with the details of these
spaces and shall carefully layout all outlets so that the
equipment or piping of other trades passing under, over,
across, or in close proximity to same, will not cause the
device or fixtures at or in these outlets to be inaccessible for
use or maintenance. The Contractor shall procure all details
of the various locations so as to make the outlet boxes,
panelboards, etc., come in proper relation to the work of all
other divisions. He shall be responsible for the exact and
proper location of his work.
12.Mounting Heights: Unless otherwise noted, mounting heights for
outlets shall be as listed below. Dimensions are from finished
floor or work surface to centerline of outlet.
OUTLET MOUNTING HEIGHT
Wall Switches
48"
* Receptacles
January 13, 2003
15" To bottom of
box (24" in storage
16130 - 4
Boxes
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
and 52" in shop
areas )
*
Toggle Switches
48"
Desk Telephone Outlets
15"
Wall Telephone Outlets
36"
Disconnect Switches
66"
Clock Outlets
90"
Fire Alarm Bells and Visual
Alarms
80" or 6" below
ceiling whichever
is lowest
Fire Alarm Breakglass
Stations
48"
Alarm Bells
80" or 6" below
ceiling whichever
is lowest
Wall Speaker Outlets
90"
Pushbutton Stations
48"
Emergency Lighting Units
96"
Wall Mounted Light Fixtures
78"
* A.C. - 6" above counter unless otherwise indicated.
Coordinate and verify with architectural elevations and
details.
13.Provide blank covers for all boxes which are not covered by
device plates or lighting fixtures.
14.Provide 1/2" raised galvanized device covers for exposed
conduit work in dry areas.
15.Install boxes so that device covers are plumb and tight
against the wall finish.
16.Center wall bracket outlets on columns and above doors where
shown at these locations.
17.In noncombustible walls and ceilings, recessed boxes and
fittings shall be installed so that the front edge is not set
back more than 1/4" from the finished surface. The front edge
shall be flush with combustible walls and ceilings (370-10).
January 13, 2003
16130 - 5
Boxes
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
18.No gaps or open spaces greater than 1/8" shall be permitted at
the edge of the box or fitting in plaster, drywall, or
plasterboard surfaces (370-11).
3. Floor Outlet Boxes:
1. Where installed in damp or wet locations and in slabs in
direct contact with earth, shall be Class I water tight type.
Other locations may be Class II, concrete tight.
2. Box for slabs 3" thick shall be 2" deep maximum and for slabs
4" or greater thick, 3-5/8" deep (nominal) maximum.
3. Unless otherwise indicated, each single service power outlet
box shall be provided with a 20A 125V 3-wire duplex receptacle
and with bronze hinged lift lid duplex coverplate. In carpeted
locations, provide with a bronze carpet flange.
4. Boxes indicated for telephone or communications service shall
be provided with bronze coverplate having combination 1"/2"
round concentric screw-in plugs. In carpeted locations,
provide, in addition, bronze carpet flange.
5. Dual service (power and communications) shall be provided with
20A 125V 3-wire duplex receptacle. Finish top lid by inserting
floor covering material matching adjacent flooring.
4. Junction and Pull Boxes and Wireways:
1. Shall be not less than the minimum size required by NEC.
2. Shall be code gauge galvanized sheet metal, except where cast
metal boxes are required in locations specified above.
3. Provide with screw fastened covers and install such that cover
is accessible.
4. Furnish boxes which are 36" in any direction with internal
cable supports.
5. Boxes exceeding 36" in any direction shall be hinge cover type
with multiple point screw clamps unless installation prohibits
access.
END OF SECTION
January 13, 2003
16130 - 6
Boxes
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 16160
PANELBOARDS
PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY
1.
Description of Work: The work covered in this section of the specifications includes fusible and circuit
breaker panelboards and accessories as covered by Article 384 of the National Electrical Code and as shown
on the drawings.
2.
Related Work: This section is a Division 16 Specification and as such will be taken as an integral part of
other Division 16 sections, including Section 16010, "General Requirements For Electrical Work".
1.2
REFERENCE STANDARDS
1.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
2.
Underwriters Laboratories (UL).
3.
National Electrical Code (NEC).
1.3
SUBMITTALS
1. Submit manufacturer's data and shop drawings demonstrating compliance with this specification and the
drawings in accordance with Section 16010. Information shall include, but not be limited to:
1. A panel schedule indicating the voltage, number of phases, the branch circuit numbers, the size, type,
and number of poles, and the interrupting capacity of each overcurrent device.
2. Equipment integrated short circuit current rating.
3. Bus material.
4. Demonstrate means of identification of each circuit and of each panel by mark corresponding to the
Drawings. Explain any deviations.
5. All dimensions clearly indicated with a statement that the Contractor has verified that the equipment
will fit into place.
6. All accessories such as ground bus kits.
7. Finish (flat prime or baked enamel).
8. UL listing for application being submitted.
2. Submit test reports certifying the equipment integrated short circuit current rating.
3. Maintenance and operating instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
1.
Cutler-Hammer/Westinghouse Electric.
2.
General Electric Company.
3.
Siemens.
January 13, 2003
16160 - 1
Panelboards
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
4.
2.2
Square D Company.
SCHEDULE
1. The following schedule designates equivalent products:
PANELBOARD EQUIVALENTS
SQUARE D
WESTINGHOUSE
GENERAL ELECTRIC CO.
CO.
2.3
NQOD
POW-R-LINE 1
SERIES A TYPE AQ
----
POW-R-LINE 2
----
NEHB
POW-R-LINE 3
SERIES A TYPE AE
I-LINE
POW-R-LINE 4B
CCB
QMB
POW-R-LINE 4F
QMR
MATERIALS
1. Panelboards shall:
1. Be enclosed in a code gauge steel cabinet.
2. Have dead front construction.
3. Be flush or surface mounted type as indicated on the drawings.
4. Have one-piece trim with no exposed hinges.
5. Have an equipment ground bus.
6. Have minimum bus current and short circuit ratings of 22kAIC at 480V and 18 kAIC at 250V or less,
unless otherwise noted on the drawings. (Bus rating to be integrated equipment rating established
according to UL 67.)
7. Have solderless main lugs or main overcurrent device and insulated solid neutral.
8. Have overcurrent protective devices as shown on the drawing and as specified in Section 16180.
9. Have terminals rated for copper or aluminum.
10. Be UL listed.
11. Have bus bars of 98% conductivity copper and minimum cross-sectional area based on UL 67 for heat
rise.
12. Have doors which are equipped with:
1. Hinges as required for proper support and alignment.
2. Spring latch with a key lock. All locks shall be keyed alike.
3. Framed directory on inside with 1/16-inch thick glass or plastic cover and typewritten directory
card identifying the load fed by each circuit including room and number. Spares and spaces shall be
noted in pencil.
13. Be finished as called for on the drawings. If not called for, finish shall be the manufacturer's standard
finish.
14. Be designed so as to permit a combination of one, two, or three pole breakers to be readily assembled
(breaker type panels only).
January 13, 2003
16160 - 2
Panelboards
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
15. Have branch circuit breakers operable in any position and removable from the front of the panel without
disturbing adjacent units (breaker type only).
16. When used as service entrance equipment, shall be UL labeled as service entrance type.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION/APPLICATION
1.
All panels shall be installed plumb and level with the highest device handle not more than 6'-6" above
finished floor.
2.
Flush mounted panels shall be set so as to assure that the panel trim will be flat against the finished wall
surface.
3.
Flush type panels shall be securely fastened to structural members of the wall. Provide additional supports
as required for a secure installation.
4.
Surface mounted panels shall be securely bolted to the mounting surface.
5.
Prior to setting panels, the Contractor shall coordinate with the Architect and all other trades having work in
the area to verify conduits have adequate space to leave and enter the panel and for code clearance.
6.
Provide a means of keeping unauthorized hands out of live panels during construction when panel fronts
have not been installed.
7.
All wiring in panels shall be neat with rounded corners and shall be tied in bundles with approved ties (see
Section 16120).
8.
Comply with all requirements as noted on the drawings.
9.
To facilitate future expansion of circuitry from lighting and power panelboards, provide a minimum of three
3/4-inch spare conduits to a clear space above an accessible ceiling and to an accessible area below the floor.
Distribution panelboards to have minimum of three 2-inch conduits above and below for future.
10. In damp locations, install panelboard enclosures with a minimum 1/4-inch space between the wall and the
enclosure.
11. Tops of panels shall be installed with 3'-0" minimum clearance from nonfireproof ceilings.
12. Flush panelboard cans shall be installed with less than 1/4-inch setback from noncombustible wall surfaces
and flush or slightly projecting from combustible walls.
13. Close all unused openings in enclosures and spare conduits.
14. Torque all lugs to manufacturer's specifications.
15. Do not use blowers or compressed air to clean panelboards.
3.2
TESTING
1.
Before energizing each panel, megger all buses phase-to-phase, phase-to-ground, and phase-to-neutral with
all devices in both the open and closed position. The minimum acceptable resistance with all devices open is 1
megohm. Submit testing report as required by Section 16010.
January 13, 2003
16160 - 3
Panelboards
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
2.
After completion of the installation, record under full load conditions the current flow in each phase feeder,
and submit four copies, giving name and location for each panel.
END OF SECTION
January 13, 2003
16160 - 4
Panelboards
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 16170
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
SUMMARY
1. Description of Work: This section includes work required to
provide disconnecting means for motor circuits, branch circuits,
and feeder circuits.
2. Related Work: This section is a Division 16 specification and as
such will be taken as an integral part of other Division 16
sections, including Section 16010, "General Requirements For
Electrical Work".
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
1. All equipment and materials furnished under this section shall
conform to the following standards:
1. National Electrical Code (NEC).
2. Underwriters Laboratories (UL).
3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
1.3
SUBMITTALS
1. Manufacturer's Data:
1. Submit manufacturer's data demonstrating compliance with the
drawings and these specifications in accordance with Section
16010.
2. Manufacturer's data shall include the following data:
1. Name (mark) of motor(s), or loads to which applicable.
2. Horsepower, continuous current, and short circuit
current rating.
3. Voltage rating.
4. Number of poles and neutral.
5. Fuse size and class.
6. NEMA enclosure type.
7. Dimensions.
3.
Maintenance data and operating instructions in accordance with
Section 16010.
January 13, 2003
16170 - 1
Disconnect Switches
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
1. Cutler-Hammer/Westinghouse Electric.
2. General Electric Company.
3. Siemens.
4. Square D Company.
2.2
MATERIALS
1. Safety switches shall be:
1. NEMA Type HD: Heavy duty, conforming to NEMA KS-1 and UL 98,
quick-make and quick-break type having overcenter toggle
action to preclude contact teasing.
2. Horsepower rated for use as a motor disconnect.
3. Capable of interrupting the locked rotor current of the motor
served.
4. Furnished with switch blades which are fully visible in the
OFF position when the door is open.
5. Of deadfront construction with removable arc suppressor.
6. Furnished with front removable 60° C./75° C. UL listed
terminals suitable for use with copper or aluminum
conductors.
7. Furnished with all current-carrying parts plated by an
electrolytic process.
8. Furnished in a NEMA enclosure based on ANSI/NEMA 250-1979,
suitable for the conditions of the location, and in accordance
with NEC.
9. NEMA 1 enclosures shall be code gauge sheet steel and the
cover enclosures shall be equipped with pin type hinges. NEMA
3R and 12 enclosures shall be code gauge galvanized steel and
the covers shall be provided with means of securing in the open
position. NEMA 4 enclosures shall be code gauge stainless steel.
NEMA 1, 3R, and 12 enclosures shall be treated with a rustinhibiting phosphate and finished in gray baked enamel.
10.Rated for 240 volt A.C./D.C. or 600 volt A.C. as indicated on the
drawings.
11.Equipped with Class R fuseholders and fuses where
January 13, 2003
16170 - 2
Disconnect Switches
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
indicated to be fusible type.
12.Capable of being padlocked in the open position.
2. Toggle Switches: Toggle switches where indicated for motor
disconnecting means shall be horsepower rated.
3. Receptacles:
Where receptacles are indicated for motor
circuit, disconnecting means shall be horsepower rated.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION/APPLICATION
1. Disconnects shall be labeled in accordance with Section 16010.
2. Switches used as service entrance equipment shall be UL labeled,
"Suitable for Service Equipment", and shall be provided with
insulated groundable and bondable neutral bus.
3. Switches shall be provided with an insulated solid neutral
terminal unless otherwise indicated.
4. Disconnect switches shall be located so that they are in sight
from and within 60' of the associated controller.
5. Switches shall be located to provide minimum front clear working
space of 36 inches for 240 volt and 42 inches for 600 volt.
6. Fusible switches shall not be mounted more than 6'-6" above finish
floor to the operating handle in its highest position.
7. Switches shall be mounted in the vertical position with ON
position being the up position.
8. Switch enclosures installed in wet locations or outdoors shall be
mounted with a minimum of 1/4-inch clearance between the enclosure
and the mounting surface.
9. Provide a label inside of each fused switch indicating the fuse
type, ampere rating, and interrupting rating originally specified
and installed and indicating that the fuses should be replaced only
with the same class of fuse.
January 13, 2003
16170 - 3
Disconnect Switches
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
10.Where separate control voltages are used for control circuits within
the motor controllers, the disconnect device shall disconnect
simultaneously the control circuits and the power circuits (see
430-74 NEC).
11.Switches shall be furnished as an integral part of a combination
motor disconnect/controller where indicated on the drawings.
12.Disconnect switches above hard ceilings for mechanical and
electrical equipment (i.e., transformer, VAV boxes, etc.) shall
be supported independent of the equipment. In addition, the
Contractor shall furnish a 2' x2' trimmed-out access panel in
ceiling, whether shown on plans or not.
13.Switches which can be energized by "backfeed" shall be labeled:
"WARNING - LOAD SIDE OF SWITCH MAY BE ENERGIZED BY BACKFEED".
END OF SECTION
January 13, 2003
16170 - 4
Disconnect Switches
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 16180
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
SUMMARY
1. Description of Work: This section covers fuses and molded case
circuit breakers rated 600 volts or less in panelboards,
switchboards,
individual
enclosures,
motor
control
centers,
combination motor starters, busway plug-in units, etc.
2. Related Work: This section is a Division 16 specification and as
such shall be taken as an integral part of other Division 16
sections, including Section 16010, "General Requirements For
Electrical Work".
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
1. National Electrical Code (NEC).
2. Underwriters Laboratories (UL).
3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
1.3
SUBMITTALS
1. Submit manufacturer's data as hereinafter specified in accordance
with Section 16010.
2. Fuses: Submit manufacturer's data showing fuse name, symbol,
voltage rating, UL class, interrupting capacity, I2t
characteristics and time-current curves.
3. Circuit Breakers:
1. Submit manufacturer's data demonstrating compliance with the
drawings and these specifications.
2. Data shall clearly indicate type of breaker, size, trip
characteristics, interrupting capacity, accessories, and timecurrent curves.
4. Maintenance data and operating instructions
January 13, 2003
16180 - 1
Overcurrent Potective Devices
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
1. Fuses:
1. Bussman Manufacturing Division.
2. Gould-Shawmut.
3. Little Fuse.
2. Breakers:
1. Cutler-Hammer/Westinghouse Electric.
2. General Electric Company.
3. Siemens.
4. Square D Company.
2.2
MATERIALS
1. Fuses:
1. Fuses, 600 volts and less, shall meet the following criteria:
1. Be of the same manufacturer.
2. Fuses rated 1/10 to 600 amperes shall be current limiting
UL Class [RK1] [RK5] [with] [without] time delay. [Time
delay should be at least 10 seconds at 500% of rated
amperes.]
3. Fuses rated 601 to 6000 amperes shall be UL Class L [with]
[without] time delay. [Time for fuse to open shall be at
least 4 seconds at 500% of rated amperes.]
4. Motor circuit fuses rated 1/10 to 600 amperes should be
sized at 125% of the motor nameplate FLA or the next
standard size unless otherwise directed by the equipment
manufacturer.
5. Motor circuit fuses rated 601 to 6000 amperes shall be
sized between 150% and 175% of motor nameplate FLA or the
next size larger.
6. Provide one spare set of three of each size and type of
fuse rated at more than 600 amperes, and 10% of each size
and type of fuse rated 600 amperes or less, but in no case
less than one set of three of each size.
7. Provide a cabinet of adequate dimensions to store the
specified spare fuses. Cabinet shall be of panelboard type
construction, having separate labeled compartments for each
fuse class and rating. Install the cabinet where indicated
on the Drawings or as directed by the Architect.
January 13, 2003
16180 - 2
Overcurrent Potective Devices
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
8. Fuses for Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts: Bussman Type GLR with
Type HLR fuseholder.
2. Circuit Breakers:
1. All circuit breakers shall:
1. Have inverse time tripping characteristics with fixed
thermal trip action.
2. Have a permanent trip unit containing individual thermal
and magnetic trip elements in each pole.
3. Have variable magnetic trip elements for frame sizes
larger than 100 amperes which are set by a single
adjustment (to assure uniform tripping characteristics in
each pole) .
4. Be magnetic only where indicated. Each breaker shall be
provided
with
a
single
magnetic
adjustment
which
simultaneously sets the magnetic trip level of each
individual pole.
5. Be calibrated for operation in a minimum ambient
temperature of 40° C.
6. Clearly indicate their current and voltage rating.
7. Have interrupting capacity compatible with the panelboard or switchboard integrated equipment rating.
8. Have a minimum AIC of 18,000A on 208/120V wye systems,
and 22,000A on 480/277V wye systems unless otherwise
indicated.
9. Be one, two, or three pole molded case circuit breakers as
specified on the Drawings.
10.Be common trip type for all multipole breakers. Wires, pins,
etc. between single pole breakers to form common trip will
not be acceptable.
11.Not require more space than the equivalent number of single
pole breakers when indicated to be a multipole breaker.
12.Have overcenter toggle type mechanisms, providing quickmake, quick-break action.
13.Be "bolted" type when group mounted.
14.Have operating handle that visually indicates ON, OFF, or
TRIPPED condition.
15.Have reverse connection capability and be suitable for
mounting and operating in any position.
16.Furnish
circuit
breaker
with
electronic
trip
where
indicated. Electronic trip shall furnish characteristic
trip-curve adjustment for Long-time (L),
January 13, 2003
16180 - 3
Overcurrent Potective Devices
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
Short-time (S), Instantaneous (I), and Ground (G) faults.
17.Have removable lugs.
Lugs shall be UL listed for
copper and aluminum conductor. Breakers shall be UL
listed for installation of mechanical type lugs.
18.Accessories shall be UL listed field replaceable. 19.Be
suitable for switching lighting loads when used for
switching light circuits and shall be so marked (SWD).
2. Current limiting circuit breakers (where use is approved) shall
comply with the items listed above except as follows:
1. On high level fault currents, limit peak current and letthru
energy
and
provide
a
voltage
transient-free
interruption at near unity power factor. On fault currents
below the threshold of limitation, provide conventional
overload and short circuit protection.
2. Shall be recognized by Underwriters Laboratories and shall
appear in the Recognized Component Directory under the
"Circuit Breakers -Series Connected" product category DKSY2
when combinations for series connected interrupting ratings
are used to allow the use of branch circuit breakers with
lower interrupting capacities on systems capable of
delivering fault currents up to 200,000 RMS symmetrical
amperes at 480V, A.C. and 100,000 RMS symmetrical amperes at
600V, A.C.
3. Accessories shall be UL listed, installed, and calibrated
at the factory to assure proper alignment and operation.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION/APPLICATION
1.
2.
3.
Provide overcurrent protection for all wiring and equipment in
accordance with the NEC.
Should equipment nameplate data disagree with the size or
application of an overcurrent protective device indicated on the
drawings, it should be brought to the attention of the
Architect/Engineer.
A label shall be placed inside each fused switch door. The
January 13, 2003
16180 - 4
Overcurrent Potective Devices
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
label should indicate the fuse type, ampere rating, __________ and
interrupting rating, and should indicate that fuses should be
replaced only with fuses of the same class, ampacity, and
interrupting rating.
4. Breakers must clear panel doors and be mounted on frame allowing
outward and inward adjustment. The depth of the panel shall also
permit adjustment.
5. Each breaker shall be provided with a numerical designation
strip.
6. In general, 120 volt lighting and receptacle circuits shall be
fed from 20 ampere single pole breakers. Unless specifically
called for or NEC required, breakers less than 20 amperes shall
not be allowed.
7. The use of tandem "Multi", "Push-O-Matic", or "Quicklag" breakers
will not be permitted.
8. Breakers shall have AIC ratings equal to or in excess of the
available short circuit current indicated for the panelboard or
switchboard in which they are installed [unless they are installed
in a panel which has a UL listed main/branch device series
combination rating and the panelboard or switchboard is clearly
labeled with the acceptable combination rating]. [Series rated
circuit breakers are not acceptable.]
9. Fuses shall NOT be shipped in fused switches.
10.Devices shall be stored in a moisture-free area until installed.
END OF SECTION
January 13, 2003
16180 - 5
Overcurrent Potective Devices
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 16450
GROUNDING
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
SUMMARY
1. Description of Work: All electrical systems and equipment shall
be grounded as required by Articles 200 and 250 of the NEC, as
specified herein, and as shown on the drawings. Nothing in this
specification or on the drawings shall be construed as exempting
the installation from compliance with NEC Articles 200 and 250 or
local requirements.
2. Related Work: This section is a Division 16 specification and as
such will be taken as an integral part of other Division 16
sections, including Section 16010, "General Requirements For
Electrical Work".
1.2 REFERENCE AND STANDARDS
1. National Electrical Code (NEC): All grounding systems shall
comply with the applicable sections of the NEC pertaining to
construction and installation.
2. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): All grounding system products and
components shall bear a UL listing and label where there is a
listing and label available for the product or component.
Components shall comply with the applicable requirements of the
UL safety standards pertaining to electrical grounding systems,
including UL Standard 467 and 869 pertaining to electrical
grounding and bonding.
3. National
Electrical
Manufacturers
Association
(NEMA):
All
grounding equipment shall comply with the applicable requirements
of NEMA standard publications pertaining to grounding.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. Manufacturers: All grounding system equipment and components used
on this project shall be manufactured by firms that have been
regularly engaged in the manufacture of grounding equipment and
components,
such
as
electrical
connectors,
terminals
and
fittings, of types and ratings required, and ancillary grounding
materials, including stranded cable, copper braid and bus, ground
rods and plate electrodes, for at least five years.
January 13, 2003
16450 - 1
Grounding
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
2.
1.4
Installer Qualifications: Installers of all grounding systems
shall have a minimum of three years of successful installation
experience on projects with electrical grounding systems similar to
that required for this project.
SUBMITTALS
1.
PART 2
Submit manufacturer technical product data on all grounding
systems, equipment, and components, including specification,
installation, and instruction substantiating that the materials
comply with this specification.
PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
1. Connectors:
1. Blackburn.
2. Buchanan Electrical Products Corp.
3. Burndy Corp.
4. Cadweld.
5. Ilsco.
6. O.Z. Electrical Manufacturing Company.
7. Teledyne Penn-Union.
2. Ground Rods:
1. Apache.
2. Blackburn.
3. Carolina Galvanizing.
4. Copperweld Corp.
5. Knight Metalcraft.
6. Nehring.
2.2
MATERIALS
1. Ground rods shall be copper clad steel rods. The minimum size
shall be 3/4-inch diameter by 10'-0" long.
2. Connectors
shall
be
industry
standard
type
for
ground
connections, taps and the like. Connectors shall be of hot dip
galvanized malleable iron, cast bronze, or copper alloy nonferrous
material which will not cause galvanic action between the contact
surfaces.
3. Clamps, connectors, mechanical lugs, or wire terminals shall be
used to bond ground wires together or to junction and panel
boxes.
January 13, 2003
16450 - 2
Grounding
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
4. All ground conductors shall be copper.
5. All equipment grounding conductors shall have a green jacket.
6. Ground electrode conductors and bonding jumpers shall be bare
copper.
7. All materials shall be UL listed.
8. Conductors #8 AWG and larger shall be stranded except that pool
bonding conductors shall be #8 AWG solid. Conductors smaller than
#8 AWG shall be solid wire.
9. Ground buses shall be provided in all electrical distribution
equipment.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
ITEMS TO BE GROUNDED
1. All conduit systems, cabinets, junction boxes, receptacles, motor
frames, electrically operated and/or controlled cooling-heating
units, lighting fixtures, miscellaneous equipment, etc. shall be
grounded by being connected to the common grounding system.
2. All exterior grade mounted equipment shall have their enclosures
grounded directly to a separate driven ground rod at the equipment
in addition to the building ground connection. This includes
lighting standards 10' high or greater.
3.2
SYSTEM GROUNDS
1.
A ground electrode system shall be provided for the service
entrance equipment at each building and at each building which is
subfed from another building. This ground electrode system shall
be installed in accordance with NEC Section 250-81 whether or not
it is shown on the drawings. All of the available and made ground
electrodes shall be connected to the main service equipment
ground bus by means of a ground electrode conductor. A main
bonding jumper sized in accordance with NEC Table 250-94 shall be
provided between the service equipment ground bus and the neutral
bus.
January 13, 2003
16450 - 3
Grounding
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
2. The ground electrode system shall include as a minimum:
1. The grounded service conductor (usually the neutral) shall be
grounded at the exterior transformer secondary as well as at
the service disconnect equipment.
2. A concrete encased electrode shall be provided by the
Contractor. It shall consist of a minimum of 20' of 1/2-inch
diameter rebar or may consist of at least 20' of #2 AWG bare
copper conductor with a minimum of 3 inches of concrete cover.
The rebar or bare copper conductor shall be located near the
bottom of the foundation footing or pier. A minimum #2 AWG
ground electrode conductor shall be provided.
3. Effectively grounded building structural steel shall be
utilized as a ground electrode. A ground electrode conductor
sized in accordance with NEC Table 250-94 shall be provided.
4. An available metal underground water pipe shall be used for a
ground electrode if permitted by the local authorities and if
it is in direct contact with earth for at least 10'. A ground
electrode conductor sized in accordance with NEC Table 250-94
shall be provided. This shall always be supplemented by at
least one other ground electrode as specified herein. Provide
bonding jumpers around electrically noncontinuous joints in
metal water pipe.
5. A made electrode consisting of two ground rods shall be
provided. They shall be located at least 10'-0" apart. The
ground electrode conductor shall be #2 AWG copper minimum.
3. Dry type transformer secondaries shall be considered as
separately derived systems and shall be grounded in
accordance with NEC Section 250-26 and as follows:
1. The secondary neutral terminal in all stepdown power
transformers shall be bonded to the metal enclosure of the
transformer. The bonding conductor shall be sized in
accordance with NEC Table 250-94.
2. A grounding electrode conductor sized in accordance with NEC
Table 250-94 shall be connected to the transformer secondary
neutral terminal and connected to a grounding electrode as near
as practicable to and preferably in the same area as the
transformer.
The
transformer
primary
circuit
equipment
grounding conductor shall be bonded to the transformer
enclosure but shall not be used as the ground for the
transformer.
January 13, 2003
16450 - 4
Grounding
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
3. The ground electrode shall consist of the nearest available
effectively grounded structural steel. If effectively grounded
steel is not available, the nearest available effectively grounded
metal water pipe shall be
used. If neither of the above is available, other electrodes
may be used. Where metal water pipe is used, bonding jumpers
must be provided around unions and valves.
4. Standby generators shall be considered as separately derived
systems when 4-pole transfer switches (which switch the neutral)
are utilized and the generator neutral shall be grounded as
described above for transformers. When 3 pole transfer switches
with solid neutrals are utilized, the generator is not considered
a separately derived system and the generator neutral shall not be
grounded or bonded to the grounding conductor at the generator.
5. Ground electrode conductors shall be so installed as to permit
the shortest and most direct path from equipment to ground.
6. Ground electrode conductors shall be installed in metal conduit
with both the conductor and the conduit bonded at each end.
7. All interior metal water piping systems shall be bonded to the
service equipment enclosure, the grounded conductor at the
service, the grounding electrode conductor, or to one or more of
the grounding electrodes used. All bonding jumper connections
must be accessible.
8. Ground conductors shall be installed in conduit or other
acceptable raceway to protect them from physical damage.
9. No unguarded length of ground rods shall be left above ground.
10.All connections (except concrete encased or buried) shall be
accessible for inspection and servicing.
11.Exothermic weld type connections shall be used for all buried or
concrete encased connections.
12.All connections to steel shall be made with a bolted fitting.
13.Clamp type fittings shall be used for pipe connections.
January 13, 2003
16450 - 5
Grounding
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
3.3 SUPPLEMENTAL GROUNDING
1. All noncurrent carrying parts of the electrical system, including
enclosures,
receptacles,
motor
frames,
lighting
fixtures,
electrically operated and/or controlled coolingheating units, etc.
shall be grounded by metal raceway (where used) as described in
Paragraph 3.04 and by a supplemental equipment grounding
conductor.
2. The supplemental grounding conductor shall be insulated with a
green cover for Wire #6 AWG and smaller. Larger conductors may be
identified with green tape at every point where the conductor is
accessible in lieu of a continuous green cover.
3. Supplemental equipment grounding conductors shall be routed in
the same conduit with the circuit conductors. In the case of
multiconductor cable, the conductor should be run inside the cable
sheath or jacket.
4. Supplemental equipment grounding conductors shall in no case be a
current carrying conductor.
5. The equipment grounding conductor to exterior lighting standards
greater than 10' high shall be supplemented by a separate ground
rod bonded to the noncurrent carrying metallic parts.
6. Where isolated ground type receptacles are indicated, an
insulated isolated ground conductor shall be routed in the
associated branch circuit raceway and feeder raceway back to the
transformer grounding lug. Provide an isolated ground bus in each
panelboard as required for connection of isolated grounding
conductors. This bus shall be insulated from the panel enclosure.
7. Metal faceplates on nonmetallic boxes shall be grounded.
8. Receptacles must be connected by means of a jumper to the
box.
This connection shall not be made directly to the
ground wires. All ground wires entering a box must be solidly
connected together and bonded to the box or enclosure.
3.4 RACEWAY AND ENCLOSURE BONDING
1. Bonding jumpers shall be provided around remaining concentric
January 13, 2003
16450 - 6
Grounding
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
or eccentric knockouts that are punched or otherwise formed in the
enclosures and boxes of all 480Y/277 volt systems.
2. Conduit expansion joints shall be made electrically continuous by
equipment bonding jumpers or other means.
3. All metal raceways, equipment, frames, enclosures, and all other
metal noncurrent carrying parts must be bonded together in
accordance with NEC Section 250-75. This bonding shall be
independent of the green equipment grounding conductor.
4. Under slab metallic conduits stubbed-up into electrical enclosures
such as switchboards and MCC's shall be bonded to the enclosure.
5. Metal raceways, enclosures, frames, and other noncurrent carrying
metal parts of electrical equipment shall be located more than 6'-0"
from lightning rod conductors where feasible.
They shall be bonded to lightning rod conductors where this
clearance is not feasible.
6. The noncurrent carrying metal parts of all enclosures containing
service conductors shall be bonded together in accordance with
NEC Article 250-72.
3.5
GENERAL
1. All contact surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned before
connections are made to insure good metal-to-metal contact.
2. Splices shall not be permitted in ground conductors except in
boxes and enclosures where permitted by the NEC.
3. All conductors and connections must be protected from physical
damage.
4. All receptacles installed on 15A and 20A branch circuits shall be
grounding type.
5. Communications equipment shall be grounded in accordance with NEC
Section 800-31.
6. Radio and television antennas shall be grounded in accordance
with NEC Article 810. Antenna discharger units shall be provided
where required by NEC Article 810.
January 13, 2003
16450 - 7
Grounding
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
7. Cable television systems shall be grounded in accordance with NEC
Article 820.
8. Wiring in hazardous (classified) locations shall comply with the
grounding provisions of Articles 500 through 517.
3 . 6
POOLS
1. All pools, fountains, etc. shall be grounded in accordance with
NEC Article 680.
2. Bonding:
1. All metallic, noncurrent carrying components of a pool system
shall be bonded together. This includes forming shells of
underwater lights, ladders, rails, fill spouts, drains,
reinforcing bars, transformer enclosures supplying underwater
lights, and pump equipment. This includes parts of pool cover
mechanisms and drive motor housings if applicable.
2. All metallic conduit piping, reinforcing steel, and other
noncurrent carrying components located in or within 5' of a pool
must likewise be bonded together and grounded.
3. Bonding conductors shall be solid #8 copper. They may be
insulated, covered, or bare.
4. All metallic components shall be bonded to a common bonding
grid. This grid can be pool structural reinforcing steel, a
metal pool wall, or a solid copper conductor loop not smaller
than #8. The pool structural reinforcing steel may be used as
the common grid where metal tie wire is used to tie the rebar
together.
5. Bond connections to iron reinforcing bar shall be made with
exothermic welds.
6. Connectors for connection to aluminum parts shall be listed or
indicated for that purpose.
3. Grounding:
1. All wet nitch and dry nitch underwater lighting fixtures, all
electric equipment within 5' of the inside walls of the pools,
all electric equipment associated with the pumps, junction
boxes and transformer enclosures, GFCI's, and panelboards
supplying the pool electrical equipment must be grounded.
2. The equipment grounding conductor shall be an insulated
conductor.
3. The equipment grounding conductor shall not be smaller than
#12.
January 13, 2003
16450 - 8
Grounding
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
4. The equipment grounding conductor shall be installed without
joints or splices except in boxes and enclosures where allowed
in the code.
3.7
TESTS: The resistance between the ground electrode system
and absolute earth shall not exceed [25] ohms. If this resistance
exceeds 25 ohms, the Contractor shall add ground rods or other
grounding means until the ground resistance is reduced to less
than 25 ohms. All ground measurements shall be measured by the
Contractor using the fall of potential method of measurement and
recorded and submitted to the Architect/Engineer before any
equipment is placed in
operation.
Ground tests shall be made in normally dry
weather or not less than 24 hours after rainfall. The Contractor
shall provide a report containing the date that the readings were
taken, the person making the report, the person making readings
(if different), the method of measurement, and the weather
conditions at time of test. Include the report with the final
submittal or record documents. See Section 16010 of these
specifications.
END OF SECTION
January 13, 2003
16450 - 9
Grounding
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 16500
LIGHTING
(FIXTURES, CONTACTORS, DIMMERS)
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
SUMMARY
1.
Description of Work: This section covers
ballasts, lamps, dimming equipment, and
controls.
lighting fixtures,
automatic lighting
2.
Related Work: This section is a Division 16 specification and as
such will be taken as an integral part of other Division 16
sections, including Section 16010, "General Requirements For
Electrical Work".
3.
Restoration of Existing Luminaires to be Reused: Reused
Luminaires are to be stripped of electrical components and
completely refitted with new wiring, lamp sockets, and lamps as
herein specified or called for on the Drawings.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
1.
Underwriters Laboratories (UL).
2.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
3.
National Electrical Code (NEC).
4.
Illuminating Engineering Society (IES).
5.
Certified Ballast Manufacturers (CBM).
1.3
SUBMITTALS
1.
Submit manufacturer's data demonstrating compliance with this
Specification and the Schedule on the Drawings in accordance with
Section 16010.
2.
Manufacturer's data, Shop Drawings, and reports shall employ the
terminology, classifications, and methods prescribed by the IES
Handbook, as applicable, for the lighting systems specified.
3.
Manufacturer's Data:
1.
Should
include
certified
test
reports:
Candle
power
distribution data in horizontal plane at angles of every 10
degrees between 0 degree and 180 degrees, coefficients
January 13, 2003
16500 - 1
Lighting
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
PART 2
of utilization, efficiencies, and distribution class. Testing
shall be by an independent testing laboratory. Excerpts of test
data on manufacturer's letterhead are not acceptable.
Shall clearly indicate the characteristics of each lamp type
for each fixture type.
Recessed light fixtures should clearly indicate the
ceiling type(s) in which the fixture may be installed.
Shall specifically note recessed incandescent light
fixtures as being supplied with a thermal protector in
compliance with the NEC and Underwriters Laboratories.
Shall show UL listing/labeling.
Shall indicate proposed hanging/mounting methods for special
fixtures.
PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
1. Ballasts:
1. High Intensity Discharge:
1. Advance Transformer Company.
2. General Electric Company.
3. Hevi-Duty.
4. Holophane.
5. Valmont.
6. Universal Manufacturing Company.
7. Wide-lite Corp.
8. Magnetek
2. Fluorescent:
1. Magnetek
2. Motorola
3. Advance
4. Valmont
2. Lamps:
1. Incandescent (quartz included):
1. General Electric Company.
2. Lite-tronics.
3. Osram/Sylvania.
4. Philips.
2. Fluorescent:
1. General Electric Company.
2. Osram/Sylvania.
3. Philips.
3. Halide, Mercury Vapor, and Sodium Vapor Type:
1. General Electric Company.
2. Osram/Sylvania
3. Philips.
January 13, 2003
16500 - 2
Lighting
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
4. Venture
4. Time Switches:
1. Paragon.
2. Tork.
5. Photoelectric Cells:
1. Tork.
2. McGraw-Edison.
3. Paragon.
6. Lighting Contactors:
1. Asco.
2. General Electric Company.
3. Square D Company.
4. Westinghouse Electric.
7 . Dimmers :
1. Leviton.
2. Lutron.
3. Prescolite.
2.2
MATERIALS
1. Fixtures shall be:
1. Furnished with proper outlet boxes, hangers, hardware,
supports, canopy extensions, and plugs.
2. Furnished complete with lamps of specified size, type,
manufacturer, color, and voltage.
3. Furnished complete with plaster frames and light tight gaskets
when recessed in drywall or plaster ceilings or overhangs.
4. Of the specified finishes.
5. Furnished with 5'-0" of flexible conduit prewired.
6. For
recessed
fluorescents,
unless
otherwise
indicated,
furnished with virgin acrylic prismatic diffusers having a
minimum thickness of 0.125".
2. Lighting shall be coordinated with the Light Fixture Schedule on the
Drawings.
3. Ballasts:
1. Fluorescent Electronic:
1. High frequency type incorporating discrete component
technology, operating lamps and frequency of 20kHz to
35kHz, producing no detectable flicker.
2. UL listed and FCC and CBM certified.
3. Compliant
with
FCC
and
NEMA
limits
governing
electromagnetic and radio interference and free of
interference with the operation of other electrical
equipment.
January 13, 2003
16500 - 3
Lighting
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
4. Provide with integral transient voltage protection.
5. High Power Factor > 90%: 10% maximum THD.
6. Be class "P".
7. Not exceed 90° C. operating temperature.
8. Minimum 3 year warranty.
9. Sound rated "A" or better (20 to 24 db).
10.Ballasts for all other fluorescent fixtures shall be energy
efficient, state of the art, which consumes the least energy
as provided by the three major ballast manufacturers.
2. High Intensity Discharge (HID) - Interior shall:
1. Auto-transformer-constant wattage type CWA, 90% pf, 18%
maximum loss, low starting current (single lamp - all
types ) .
2. Sount rated 20 to 24 db.
3. Free of magnetic hum.
4. Isolated for vibration.
3. High Intensity Discharge (HID) - Exterior
1. Lag type high reactance auto-transformer, HPF, (50 -100
watt), constant wattage auto-transformer (150 - 1000 watt),
90% pf, single lamp type for high pressure sodium fixtures.
2. UL listed and labeled for application.
4. Lamps:
1. Incandescent lamps shall be 130 volt inside frosted unless
otherwise specified in the Light Fixture Schedule.
2. Fluorescent lamps shall be cool white unless otherwise
specified in the Light Fixture Schedule.
3. Mercury vapor lamps shall be "warm tone" or "style-tone" type
"N" if not otherwise specified in the Light Fixture Schedule.
4. Incandescent fixtures mounted above 18' AFF shall have lamps
rated for 20,000 hours, except when fixtures can be lamped from
a catwalk or fixtures can be lowered for relamping.
5. Time Switches:
1. Time switches shall be microprocessor based, digitally
controlled with programmable channels for day of week, holiday
scheduling,
astronomic
capability,
and
daylight
savings
option. Unit provided with battery back-up.
2. Controller shall provide 365 day programming with minimum of
30 on/off operations per week.
3. Controllers shall have 48-hour memory capability with
rechargeable battery back-up.
4. Time switches shall have manual ON/OFF to allow for
January 13, 2003
16500 - 4
Lighting
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
testing and manual control.
6. Photoelectric Controls: UL 773 or UL 773A:
1. Photoelectric controls shall be a self-contained unit
having 1800 watt load rated contacts, having an adjustable
light level 1.5 footcandles for ON to 10 footcandles for
OFF control.
2. Unit shall be weatherproof, supplied with swivel mount and
appropriate conduit fittings and/or outlet boxes to allow for
orientation to approximately due north.
3. Photoelectric controls shall fail in the ON position.
7. Lighting Contactors: NEMA ICS2:
1. Contactors shall be 30 amp, 600 volt rated, mechanically
held.
2. Lighting contactors shall be provided with manual on/off
switches for testing and manual control.
3. Provide the appropriate number of poles based on the number
of lighting circuits controlled.
8 . Dimmers :
1. Provide solid state flush wall mounted with slide operator or
remote type dimmers, of the ratings required for connected
loads properly derated when ganged, and at locations shown on
the Drawings. Dimmers and/or exposed parts shall be matching
and of one manufacturer.
2. Units, unless otherwise noted or specified on the Drawings,
shall be furnished with positive ON-OFF position, be UL
listed, mounted at wall switch height, or as shown or directed
by the Architect/Engineer.
3. Wherever fluorescent fixtures are to be dimmed, the fixture
supplier shall coordinate the type of dimming ballast to be
used with the dimmer supplier to insure compatibility. Care
shall be taken to have the same dimming ballasts from the same
manufacturer in fixtures to be dimmed. Lampholders shall be the
circuit interrupting type.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION/APPLICATION
1.
Provide fixtures complete as herein specified and as called for
in the Light Fixture Schedule on the Drawings.
2.
Set fixtures plumb, square, and level with ceilings and
January 13, 2003
16500 - 5
Lighting
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
walls, in alignment with adjacent lighting fixtures, and secure
in accordance with manufacturer's directions and approved Shop
Drawings. The installation shall meet the requirements of NFPA
70.
3. Mounting heights specified shall be to the bottom of fixtures for
ceiling mounted fixtures and to the center of fixtures for wall
mounted fixtures.
4. Recessed and semi-recessed fixtures installed in suspended
ceilings shall be supported from the structural members of the
building. Fluorescent fixtures shall be supported by means of 2
steel wires, each of 300 lb. tensile strength, attached at
diagonal corners of the fixture and extending to building
structural members. For round fixtures or fixtures smaller than
the ceiling grid, support independently by means of 4 steel wires
as described above or by means of at least two 3/4-inch metal
channels spanning, and secured to the ceiling supporting
structure. Do not support fixtures by ceiling acoustical panels.
Provide wires under this section of the Specifications.
5. Bodies of fluorescent fixtures utilized as raceways for branch
circuit wiring shall be UL approved for such application and
through wiring shall be secured within the body to ensure that
conductors do not come into contact with ballasts.
6. Air Handling Fixtures: Slot covers and duct connectors shall be
included with air handling fixtures. Final connections shall be
Division 15 work.
7. Provide integral thermal protection in recessed fixtures that will
be subjected to thermal insulation.
8. Fluorescent lamps shall be burned-in for 100 hours prior to final
acceptance.
9. Fixtures shall be clean and free of dirt, dust, grease, finger
prints, etc. at the completion of the job.
10.The finish appearance of the workmanship on fixtures installed
under
this
Contract
shall
have
the
approval
of
the
Architect/Engineer before final payment is made.
END OF SECTION
January 13, 2003
16500 - 6
Lighting
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 16680
TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
SUMMARY
1. The following specification describes the requirements for a
Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor (TVSS) protection system
indicated on the drawings and schedules. These specifications are
based on the Cutler-Hammer Clipper Power System.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
1. The individual units shall be UL Listed under UL 1449 (Rev
7/2/87), complimentary Listed under UL 1283 and CSA certified
(CSA 22.2). The UL 1449 suppression voltage ratings (SVR) and CSA
label shall be permanently affixed to the TVSS unit. Equipment
mounted units shall meet UL 67.
1.3
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. The TVSS application covered under this Section is for
switchgear and panelboard locations. The service entrance TVSS
shall be tested and suitable for ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category C3
environments.
2. The TVSS suppressors shall be installed by the manufacturer of
switchgear and panelboards as herein described and as shown on
drawings.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
2.2
1.
Cutler-Hammer
2.
Square D (Advance protection Technology)
3.
Siemens
4.
General Electric
5.
Current Technologies
MATERIALS
January 13, 2003 16720 - 1
Fire Alarm and Detection System
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
1. All material shall be coordinated with other section of
Division 16 and be UL listed.
2.3 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSORS
1. Provide TVSS equipment as indicated on drawings and as
described herein.
2. Surge Current Capacity:
Min Surge Current Min Surge
Current
Per Phase
Application
Per Mode
*
Service Entrance
(Switchboards,
Switchgear, MCC main entrance)
250 kA 125
kA
Distribution panelboards
160 kA
80 kA
Electronic Data Grade
Panelboards
120 kA
60 kA
* L-G, L-N and N-G (WYE system)
3.
Protection Modes. The device must have directly connected
suppression elements between line-neutral (L-N), lineground (LG), and neutral-ground (N-G).
4.
UL 1449 SVRs. The maximum UL 1449 SVR for the device must not
exceed the following:
Modes
L-L
208Y/120
L-N; L-G; N-G
800 V
400 V
1500
V
480Y/
800 V
5. ANSI/IEEE Cat C3 Let Through Voltage. The let through voltage based
on IEEE C62.41 and C62.45 recommended procedures for Category C3
surges (20 kV, 10kA) shall be less than:
Modes
L-N
January 13, 2003 16720 - 2
208Y/120
480Y/27 7
470 V
900 V
Fire Alarm and Detection System
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
6. ANSI/IEEE Cat. B3 Let Through Voltage. Let Through voltage
based on IEEE C62.41 and C62.45 recommended procedures for
the ANSI/IEEE Cat. B3 ringwave (6 kV, 500 amps) shall be
less than:
Modes
208Y/120
L-N
150 V
480Y/2
77
200 V
7. Balanced Suppression Platform. The surge current shall be equally
distributed to all MOV components to ensure equal stressing and
maximum performance. The surge suppression platform must provide
equal impedance paths to each matched MOV. Designs incorporating
TVSS modules which do not provide a balanced impedance path to
each MOV shall not be acceptable.
8. Electrical Noise Filter. Each unit shall include a high
performance EMI/RFI noise rejection filter. Noise attenuation for
electric line noise shall be 55 dB at 100 kHz using the MIL-STD220A insertion loss test method. The unit shall be complimentary
listed to UL 1283. Products not able to demonstrate noise
attenuation of 55 dB @ 100 kHz shall be rejected.
9. Internal Connections. No plug-in component modules or printed
circuit boards shall be used as surge current conductors. All
internal components shall be hardwired with connections
utilizing low impedance conductors and compression fittings.
10.Safety and Diagnostic Monitoring. Each unit shall be equipped
with 200 kAIC internal fuses. Each unit shall provide the
following three levels of monitoring:
1. Continuous monitoring of fusing system.
2. Internal infrared sensor system for monitoring individual
MOVs (including neutral to ground). The system must be
capable of identifying open circuit failures not monitored
by conventional fusing systems.
3. Thermal detection circuit shall monitor for overheating in
all modes due to thermal runaway.
January 13, 2003 16720 - 3
Fire Alarm and Detection System
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
A green/red solid state indicator light shall be provided on
each phase. The absence of a green light and the presence of a
red light, shall indicate which phase(s) have been damaged.
Fault detection will activate a flashing trouble light. Units
which can not detect open circuit damage, thermal conditions,
and over current will not be accepted.
11.Warranty - The manufacturer shall provide a full five year
warranty from the date of shipment against any TVSS part failure
when installed in compliance with manufacturer’s written
instructions and any applicable national or local electric code.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
TVSS INSTALLATION
1.
2.
Service entrance suppressors shall be installed in the
switchgear and panelboards as shown on drawings and
scheduled herein.
Locate suppressor on load side of main disconnect device, as
close as possible to the phase conductors and ground/neutral
bus.
3.
Provide a 30 Amp disconnect. This disconnect shall be directly
integrated to the suppressor and bus using bolted bus bar
connections.
4.
The suppressor and disconnect shall be connected to the
switchgear, panelboards or motor control center using a direct
bus bar connection (no cable connection between bus bar and TVSS
device). TVSS units that use a wire connection do not meet the
intent of this specification.
5.
All monitoring diagnostics as indicator lights, trouble alarms
shall be mounted on the front of the switchgear or panel as
shown on plans.
END OF SECTION
January 13, 2003 16720 - 4
Fire Alarm and Detection System
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 16720
FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM
****OLD HARDWIRED FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM****
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
SUMMARY
1. Description of Work: The Contractor shall provide and install a
manually and automatically operated fire alarm system with local
alarm devices as shown on the Drawings. Provide all labor and
materials required to produce a complete operating system in
accordance with State and local code authorities.
2. Related Work: This section is a Division 16 specification and as
such will be taken as an integral part of other Division 16
sections, including Section 16010, "General Requirements For
Electrical Work".
3. It is the responsibility of the contractor to provide a complete
system which complies with the latest code requirements,
including all devices, zoning, etc. required whether shown or not
shown on the drawings.
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM
1. The system as designed shall be electrically supervised,
noncoded, remote annunciated, closed circuit, zoned, Class "B",
and low voltage.
2. The contact closure of any automatic or manual alarm initiating
device, including but not limited to air duct smoke and heat
detectors associated with air handling equipment, sprinkler
waterflow detectors, manual stations, and smoke and heat
detectors, shall cause the following:
1. Actuate control panel to cause evacuation alarm to sound
continuously throughout the building.
2. Indicate alarm origin by zone circuit on the Fire Alarm
Control Panel (FACP) [and remote annunciator].
3. Deactivate all building air handlers in accordance with NFPA
90A (A83 ) .
4. Recall elevators to floor of entry or as designated by the
authority having jurisdiction. In the event the floor of alarm
is the level designated for recall, the elevator shall report
to an alternate level designated by the authority having
jurisdiction. All elevators shall be
January 13, 2003 16720 - 1
Fire Alarm and Detection System
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
under manual control for use by only the firefighters or other
authorized personnel.
5. Tamper switches shall initiate a trouble indication separate
and distinct from any other system trouble. Tamper switches
shall be zoned independently of any other alarm initiating
device. Cross zoning to annunciate floor or area is permitted
if acceptable by the authority having local jurisdiction.
6. Once an alarm has been acknowledged and signals silenced, zone
in alarm shall remain illuminated until the system has been
restored to normal. Acknowledgement of any alarm shall still
allow any subsequent alarm to be received sounding the general
alarm evacuation.]
7. Transmit remote signal via polarity reversing circuit.]
*** THE FOLLOWING SHOULD APPEAR ON PROJECTS WITH KITCHENS. BE SURE TO
HAVE SHUNT TRIPS WHERE REQUIRED, ELECTRIC OR MANUALLY OPERATED GAS
VALVES, AND MANUAL PALM OPERATED PUSHBUTTON BY DOOR TO MANUALLY TRIP THESE
SYSTEMS. ***
3. Kitchen hood extinguishing systems shall have both manual and
automatic means of entering an alarm. Both schemes shall indicate
an alarm on the Fire Alarm Control Panel, sound evacuation alarm
throughout the building, and automatically shutdown all sources of
heat and fuel to the kitchen food preparation areas. This system
operation shall be coordinated with the Mechanical Contractor
installing the extinguishing system to produce a coordinated,
complete, and operating system according to requirements of the
regulating organizations.]
1.3 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
1.
2.
1.4
Installation of the system shall be subject to the approval,
inspection, and testing of all authorities with jurisdiction.
All components of the system shall conform to the approval
requirements of the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or the
Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation. The label or listing of
the above mentioned laboratories will be acceptable evidence.
REFERENCE STANDARDS: System shall comply with the applicable
provisions of the current NFPA Standards:
1.
70 (National Electrical Code).
2.
72A (Local Protective Signaling Systems).
January 13, 2003 16720 - 2
Fire Alarm and Detection System
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
3.
72B (Auxiliary Protective Signaling Systems).
4.
72C (Remote Station Protective Signaling Systems).
5.
72D (Proprietary Protective Signaling Systems).
6.
72E (Automatic Fire Detectors).
7.
101 (Life Safety Code).
8.
1.5
UBC/UFC (Uniform Building Code/Uniform Fire Code) with local
amendments.
SUBMITTALS
1.
Sbmit riser diagram, typical device wiring Drawings, and product
data in accordance with Section 16010.
2.
Indicate system components, size of components, location, and
provide full schematic or wiring system showing building and
operation details.
3.
Submit
manufacturer's
instructions.
PART 2
installation
and
operating
PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
1. ADT.
2. Edwards.
3. Johnson Controls.
4. Pyrotronics.
5. Simplex.
6. Substitutions of items of the same function and performance are
acceptable
in
conformance
with
Section
16010
providing
documentation as defined in 1.06 above is made available and
subsequently approved within the appropriate time limit.
January 13, 2003 16720 - 3
Fire Alarm and Detection System
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
2.2 MANUAL STATIONS
1. Shall be Pyrotronics Model MS-5. The single action station, which
shall be of the noncode type, shall consist of a molded housing
fitted with a pulldown lever, which, when operated, locks in
position after releasing a spring-loaded contact switch to effect
activation of the alarm circuit. The body of the manual station
shall be hinged to a backplate assembly to which it is loaded.
Resetting the station after operation shall require opening the
station momentarily and then locking the body to the backplate.
Provision shall be made for surface or semiflush mounting to
conduit boxes.
2. Mounting shall be semiflush on a standard single gang plaster
ring.
2.3
SMOKE DETECTORS
1. Ceiling mounted photoelectric type smoke detectors, Pyrotronics
DP-3.
2. Ceiling mounted ionization type smoke detectors, Pyrotronics DI3.
3. Duct mount smoke detectors shall be Electro Signal Laboratories
Model 609. Each supply duct mounted unit shall be supplied with a
Model 606U2 remote test/indicator. Mounting shall be as directed
by the Electrical Engineer.
4. Sampling tubes shall be provided to extend at least 3/4 the
distance of the duct width.
2.4
CEILING TYPE HEAT DETECTORS
1. Heat detector shall be Pyrotronics Type DT-135R (rate of rise) .
2.5
HORN/STROBE (ALARM DEVICES)
1.
Shall be Pyrotronics Model HSD-24 combination horn/strobe units
with SFP trim plate.
2.
Mounting shall be on a standard 4-inch square electrical box.
January 13, 2003 16720 - 4
Fire Alarm and Detection System
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
2.6 ANNUNCIATOR (REMOTE)
1.
2.7
Shall be Pyrotronics Model RA-31 and shall provide supervised
alarm zones for all presently specified zone circuits and
accommodations for 10 future circuits.
2.
Mounting shall be semiflush in a custom hinged cover cabinet
Pyrotronics Model EB/ED-32.
3.
The unit shall include supervised alarm and trouble indicators
with alarm trouble buzzer and key reset/key lamp test.
CONTROL PANEL
1. Shall be Pyrotronics Model System 3. The panel shall provide power
and necessary components for the operation of a basic two zone,
supervised detector circuit and one supervised audible signal
circuit utilizing either 120 VAC or 240 VDC devices. The detector
circuit shall accommodate ionization, photoelectric, flame, or
thermal detectors as well as shorting type contact devices
intermixed as desired on the
same circuit.
The Model CP-31 shall operate from a
three-wire 120/240 VAC supply. Each input shall be separately
fused within the panel. It shall include lamps for system power,
alarm, and trouble as well as LED indicators for zone alarm, zone
trouble, and audible signal
circuit trouble. Momentary contact switches shall be provided for
"Reset/Lamp Test" and "Trouble Silence" which shall silence the
internal trouble signal sounding device. Alarm receipt shall
override trouble. The control panel shall have one set of normally
open and normally closed alarm operated relay contacts and one set
of normally open and
normally closed trouble operated relay contacts. All contacts
shall be rated at 120 VAC, 3 amp. The alarm relay coil shall be
supervised. In addition, the panel shall have built-in ground
detection as well as plug-in connectors for emergency power. It
shall be arranged so that alarm signal annunciation shall take
precedence over a trouble signal. Terminals shall be provided so
that the trouble indicators and controls can be located remotely.
The Model CP-31 shall permit expansion of system capability to
incorporate any combination of Pyr-A-Larm System 3 modules not
exceeding a maximum current demand of 4 amp.
January 13, 2003 16720 - 5
Fire Alarm and Detection System
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
2. Dual detection line circuit monitoring shall be provided by a
Pyrotronics Dual Contact Zone Module, Model ZN-31. This module
shall be system interconnected by a ten-pin plug and harness
assembly and shall be operable with the main control panel. Each
detector line shall consist of a two-wire circuit terminating in
an end-of-line device and shall accommodate contact type devices.
Each circuit shall provide Class "B" supervision. Upon operation
of any contact device installed in the circuit, the system shall
lock into alarm and the red LED alarm indication lamp (one for
each circuit) mounted on the face of the module shall illuminate. A
yellow LED trouble indicating lamp (one for each circuit) also on
the face of the module shall illuminate should a break occur in the
detection circuit. All LED's shall be lamp tested from the system
control panel. Systems using a common LED for both alarm and
trouble will not be acceptable.
3. An audible signal circuit for operating either A.C. or D.C.
audible devices shall be provided by a Pyrotronics Alarm Extender
Module, Model AE-30. This module shall be system interconnected
by a ten-pin plug and harness assembly and shall be operable with
the main control panel. The module shall contain a yellow LED
indicator lamp to indicate either an open or a shorted alarm line
when the system is in normal condition. The LED shall be lamp
tested from the control panel.
4. The Pyrotronics Enclosures Series EA are designed to accommodate
System 3 control panels, input and output modules, and all power
supplies utilized in the system. They can be either surface or
flush mounted. Each enclosure consists of a back box and door
cover assembly fabricated of heavy gauge sheet steel. The back
box, which is finished in a black baked enamel, contains the "Z"
brackets and "U" channel supports on which are mounted the
controls, modules, and power supplies. The door cover, which is
contrasted in medium blue vinyl textured baked enamel, is mounted
with a steel piano hinge and is fitted with a key locking
arrangement. Left hand or right hand mounting can be made on all
enclosures as desired.
5. Fire alarm panel zones shall be as shown on the Drawings
Enclosure shall be large enough to accommodate 10 future zones.
January 13, 2003 16720 - 6
Fire Alarm and Detection System
.
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
2.8 AUXILIARY FUNCTION RELAY
1. Fire alarm control relays (fan shutdown, elevators, etc.) shall
be Deltrol 900 Series with no less than 30 amp rated contacts and
shall be mounted in metal box. Relay shall be double-pole,
double-throw (DPDT).
2.9
SPRINKLER SYSTEM FLOW SWITCHES
1. Shall be Potter Model VSR-D paddle type with adjustable delay
contacts.
2.10 SPRINKLER SYSTEM VALVE SUPERVISORY SWITCH
1. Shall be OSYS'B and shall operate if valve handle is turned more
than 1/4 turn from the fully open position.
2.11 POWER SUPPLY
1. Take power supply from independent 120 volt, 15 ampere circuit.
2. Provide rectifier as part of control panel or as separate unit to
automatically maintain standby battery bank fully charged under
normal conditions and sized to recharge standby batteries in 12
hours maximum following emergency operation.
Rectifier to operate the system when batteries are disconnected.
3. Provide standby battery bank floating across the line. Provide
batteries of sufficient capacity to operate system under
supervision load conditions without recharging for 24 consecutive
hours and then have sufficient power left to operate sounding
devices for ten minutes.
PART 3
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
3.1
WIRING
1.
Wiring shall be in accordance with NFPA 72, the National
Electrical Code, and Local Codes. Wiring sizes shall conform to
recommendations of the equipment manufacturer, and as
January 13, 2003 16720 - 7
Fire Alarm and Detection System
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
indicated on the engineered shop drawings.
2. Wire shall be UL Listed FPL for limited energy (300 V) and fire
alarm applications and shall be installed in conduit. Limit
energy FPLP or MPP wire may be run open in return air ceiling
plenums provided such wire is UL listed for such applications and
is of the low smoke producing fluorocarbon type and complies with
NEC Article 760 if so approved by the local authority having
jurisdiction.
3. No AC wiring or any other wiring shall be run in the same conduit
as fire alarm wiring.
4. Wiring
for
SLC
signaling
circuits
shall
be
of
the
twisted/shielded, low capacitance type to reduce outside RF and
EMF interference and introduced noise.
5. End of line supervisory devices shall be installed with the last
device on the respective circuits. Said device(s) shall be
appropriately marked designating it as the terminating device on
the circuit.
3.2
OPEN WIRING
1. Systems utilizing open wiring techniques with low smoke plenum
cable shall provide conduit in inaccessible locations, inside
concealed walls, mechanical/electrical rooms, or other areas where
wiring might be exposed and subject to damage.
2. Support wire clear of knock out panels, access panels, and
maintenance spaces for equipment. Wire and cable shall be run
using wire management techniques supporting cable as close as
possible to within one foot of the floor or roof rafters. Wire
supports shall be directly fastened to the structure on a maximum
of five foot centers. Wire routing shall be parallel and
perpendicular to building lines. The wire and cable shall be
secured with tie wraps or carrier wire.
3.3
1.
CONDUIT/RACEWAY
Wire shall be installed in an approved conduit/raceway system
(except where permitted by NEC and the local authority having
jurisdiction). Maximum conduit “fill” shall not exceed 40% per
NEC.
January 13, 2003 16720 - 8
Fire Alarm and Detection System
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
2. Conduit and raceway system shall be installed as specified in
Section 16110 of the specifications, and per NEC.
3. Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4-inch EMT. Install conduit per
engineered shop drawings.
3.4
TEST AND REPORTS
1. A state licensed and factory trained representative of the
manufacturer shall supervise the final control panel connections
and testing of the system. Upon completion of the acceptance
tests, the Owner and/or his representatives shall be instructed
in the proper operation of the system.
2. The Installing Contractor shall functionally test each and every
device in the entire system for proper operation and response. In
addition, each circuit in the system shall be fully tested for
wiring supervision. Any items found not properly installed or
non-functioning shall be replaced or repaired and retested.
Testing
shall
be
performed
by
a
licensed
fire
alarm
superintendent.
3. The Installing Contractor shall provide a complete written report
to the Architect, on the functional test of the entire system. A
signed written statement equal to the following: ‘The undersigned
having been engaged as the Electrical Contractor on [Project
Name] confirms that the fire alarm equipment was installed in
accordance with the specifications and also in accordance with
wiring diagrams, instructions, and/or directions provided to us
by the equipment manufacturer.’ A copy of the test report shall
be provided with maintenance manuals. The test shall be signed and
dated by the licensed fire alarm superintendent responsible for
supervising the final system test and checkout.
4. The Installing Contractor’s fire alarm superintendent shall test
the entire system in the presence of authorities having
jurisdiction.
5. It
is
the
intent
of
these
specifications
and
of
the
Architect/Engineer that a continued program of system maintenance
be continued by the Owner in compliance with NFPA Standard 72. It
is mandatory that the Installing Contractor provide such services
and make available these services to
January 13, 2003 16720 - 9
Fire Alarm and Detection System
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
the Owner upon completion of the project. 3.5
WARRANTY
1. The fire alarm system, including labor and material, shall be free
from defects in workmanship and materials, under normal use and
service, for a period of one year from the date of acceptance.
Any equipment or workmanship shown to be defective shall be
repaired, replaced or adjusted during normal working hours at no
cost to the Owner.
END OF SECTION
January 13, 2003 16720 - 10
Fire Alarm and Detection System
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 02110
SITE CLEARING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A.
Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all site clearing, stripping topsoil, and demolition as
indicated,
in
accordance
with
provisions
of
Contract
Documents.
B.
Completely coordinate with all other trades.
C.
Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and
install
all
supplementary
or
miscellaneous
items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure, and complete installation.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A.
Perform work in accord with OSHA, TCEQ, and EPA requirements
and state and local requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Section not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PROTECTION:
A.
Provide barricades, coverings, and other protection necessary
to prevent damage to existing improvements that are to remain.
Protect improvements on adjoining properties as well as those
on Owner's property. Restore any improvements damaged by this
work to original condition, as acceptable to Architect/Owner
or other authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Protect existing vegetation to remain against damage.
3.2 SITE CLEARING - GENERAL:
A. Remove vegetation, improvements, or obstructions that interfere
with new construction. Removal includes stumps of trees and
their roots greater than 2 inches in size.
March 17, 2004
02110 - 1
Site Clearing
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
B. Remove other items when specifically indicated.
3.3 TOP SOIL REMOVAL AND SALVAGE:
A.
Definitions:
1.
Topsoil: As found on site, typically an organic clay
varying from low to medium plasticity. Found in varying
depths.
2.
Satisfactory topsoil: Reasonably free of objects over 2
inches in diameter, subsoil, roots greater than 2 inch
size, weeds and vegetation, and approved by Owner
and/or Architect.
a.
Obtained on site through stripping and site
clearing procedure.
b.
Consists of cleaned or screened material obtained
from top 6 inches of soil.
B.
Stripping:
1.
Stripping is required to remove surface vegetation
within limits of construction.
a.
Include all areas within roadways, parking lots,
as well as areas outside of and adjacent to roads
and parking lots which are to be graded.
b.
Permissible but not required in open areas
where at least 1 foot of fill is to be placed.
c.
Limited to removal of sod and other
vegetation.
d.
Strip topsoil to 6-inch depth throughout limits of
construction;
prevent
intermingling
with
underlying subsoil or objectionable material.
e.
Strippings
to
be
wasted
outside
limits
of
construction at locations directed by Owner or offsite at locations selected by Contractor if
required by Owner.
C.
Stockpile topsoil in an area so as not to impede surface
drainage, interfere with construction, or cause soil erosion.
Construct topsoil piles to freely drain surface water. Protect
topsoil piles from erosion.
3.4 CLEARING:
A.
B.
Clear from surface of existing ground all brush, vegetation,
heavy growths of grass and weeds, rubbish, debris and stones
over 6 inches in size.
Limits of clearing to include all areas within limits of
construction.
March 17, 2004
02110 - 2
Site Clearing
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
3.5 REMOVAL OF IMPROVEMENTS:
A.
Remove surfacing and pavements, concrete slabs, valve boxes,
concrete and masonry walls, posts, poles, and fences which
interfere with new construction.
B.
Remove foundations, footings, walls, cisterns, septic tanks,
utility lines, underground storm pipe and other items
indicated or which interfere with new construction.
3.6 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS:
A.
Do not burn combustible materials on site.
B.
Remove all waste materials from site or dispose of in a legal
manner.
C.
Do not bury organic matter on site.
END OF SECTION
March 17, 2004
02110 - 3
Site Clearing
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 02210
SITE EXCAVATION AND ROUGH GRADING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A.
Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and services
for site excavation and rough grading as indicated, in accord
with provisions of the Contract Documents.
B.
Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
C.
Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and
install
all
supplementary
or
miscellaneous
items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A.
Compaction density test: Standard Proctor ASTM D698.
B.
Layout work by surveyor registered in State of Texas.
C.
Subsurface soils investigation has not been made at
project site. Contractor shall examine soils and
determine character of materials to be encountered.
D.
Tolerance of subgrade:
1.
Unsurfaced areas:
0.10 feet plus/minus from required
elevations.
2.
Paved areas: 0.05 feet plus/or minus from required
elevations.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A.
Compaction curves for fill and backfill material.
B.
Sieve analysis for granular fill if from off- site.
C.
Atterburg limits for fill and backfill material if from offsite.
1.4 JOB CONDITIONS:
A.
Protect existing improvements. Repair damaged items.
B.
Locate, disconnect, cap and remove existing utilities
March 17, 2004
Rough Grading
02210 - 1
Site Excavation and
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
within the site. Make arrangements as required to relocate
and/or reroute those utilities serving others off site.
C.
D.
Protect graded areas against erosion. Re-establish grade
where settlement or washing occurs at no extra cost.
Carefully maintain all bench marks, monuments and other
reference points. Replace if disturbed or destroyed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS:
A. Fill outside of structures to be as specified in this section.
Fill under structures to be as specified in other sections.
B.
Fill and backfill material to be clean material from site
excavations or, if excavated material is not sufficient, from
borrow areas which are approved by the Owner and/or Architect.
If from borrow areas, the material shall meet the following
parameters:
1.
Plasticity index to be greater than 4 and less than 15.
2.
Liquid limit to be less than 35.
3.
Percentage passing the No. 200 sieve to be between 25
and 45 percent.
C.
Submit ASTM compaction curves and Atterburg limits for each
type of fill and backfill material.
D.
Material to be free of roots, organic material, trash, frozen
matter and stones larger than 2 inches.
E.
Allow wet material to dry, as required.
F.
Add water to dry material, as required.
G.
Provide additional borrow or fill as required. Include cost
in bid submitted.
H. Surplus material is to be spread and compacted to 92 percent
dry density in locations designated by Owner or disposed of
off-site if required by Owner.
March 17, 2004
Rough Grading
02210 - 2
Site Excavation and
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION:
A.
Layout all structures, piping, roads, parking areas, and
walks and establish their elevations.
B.
Perform all other layout work required.
C.
Replace property corner markers and benchmarks to original
location if disturbed or destroyed.
D.
Preparation for embankments and fills:
1.
Strip topsoil including all vegetation a minimum of 6
inches.
2.
Before fill is started, scarify soil to a minimum of 6
inches for all roads, parking lots, aprons, sidewalks,
and similar construction. Bring to optimum moisture
content. Compact to 95 percent maximum dry density for
embankment for paved areas and 92 percent maximum dry
density for embankment in unpaved areas.
3.2 GENERAL:
A.
Excavate and grade site to subgrades of paved and unpaved
areas as indicated.
B.
Excavation and grading to be unclassified. Excavate and grade
all materials encountered.
C.
Excavate for miscellaneous footings, slabs, walks, curbs,
roadways and other structures.
D.
Fill as required to bring existing grades to rough grades
indicated.
E.
Furnish and place all additional approved material required
to bring subgrade to proper line and grade.
F.
During construction shape and drain embankments and
excavations.
G.
Maintain ditches and drains to provide drainage at all times.
H.
Provide pumping if required. Pumping to be done in such a
manner that it will not loosen existing soils or cause the
subsoil to be removed or shifted from its original position.
I.
Do not fill under footings. If excavation is deeper than
March 17, 2004
Rough Grading
02210 - 3
Site Excavation and
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
necessary, fill with concrete of same quality as footing
concrete.
J.
Remove materials which cannot be compacted as specified
and replace with suitable material.
Dispose of
unsuitable material off site in a legal manner.
K.
Remove materials unsuitable to receive fill. Replace with
suitable material and compact to specified density.
L.
Provide shoring and/or bracing required to support adjoining
soils, buildings, and similar items.
3.3 CONSTRUCTION OF EMBANKMENTS AND FILLS:
A.
Construct embankments and fills to lines and grades
indicated.
B. Make complete fill correspond to shape of typical cross section
or contour indicated regardless of method used to show shape,
size, and extent of line and grade of work.
C.
Insure that stones larger than 4 inches are not placed in the
upper 6 inches of fill or embankment.
D.
Place material in lifts, maximum 8-inch loose thickness and
maximum 6-inch compacted thickness.
E.
Place layers horizontally and compact each layer prior to
placing additional fill.
F.
Compact using suitable equipment.
1.
Control moisture to meet
requirements
of
compaction.
2.
Do not place fill materials in embankments or fills in
paved areas which exceed minus 0 percent or plus 3
percent of optimum moisture content at the time of
compaction and in unpaved areas which exceed minus 0
percent or plus 3 percent of optimum moisture content
at the time of compaction.
G. Under paved areas including roadways, parking areas, fire lanes,
service drives, walks, and embankments for roadways, and
extending 2 feet beyond proposed paved areas and embankments
measured perpendicular from centerline, compact to 95 percent
of maximum dry density.
H. For embankments and fills which are not under paving or not
associated with roadway construction, compact to 92 percent of
maximum dry density.
March 17, 2004
Rough Grading
02210 - 4
Site Excavation and
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
3.4 LAYOUT FOR ROUGH GRADING:
A.
B.
Install grading stakes for checking rough and
throughout area to be graded.
1.
Set at 50 foot maximum grid intervals,
to reflect all grade variations on
sections.
2.
Set at 25 foot maximum grid intervals,
to reflect all grade variations on
sections.
finished grade
and as required
straight grade
and as required
vertical curve
Maintain stakes until Architect/Engineer has reviewed rough
grade and finished grade.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A.
Perform necessary number of soil tests (ASTM D698
Standard Proctor) to determine moisture/density relationship
of existing materials and any imported materials used for
subgrade and embankment. At a minimum perform one test for
each type of fill and each 1, 000 cubic yards of material.
B.
Perform tests (ASTM D4318 Atterberg Limit Series) for each
type of fill to be imported to determine that Atterberg
Limits are in accordance with the specifications for use.
C.
Perform tests (ASTM D1140) for each type of fill to be
imported to determine the percentage of material finer than
the No. 200 sieve is in accordance with the specifications
for use.
D.
Perform one field density test (ASTM D2922) per 2,500 square
yards or fraction thereof of subgrade and embankment for each
lift prior to placement of additional fill material or
pavements.
END OF SECTION
March 17, 2004
Rough Grading
02210 - 5
Site Excavation and
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 02220
EXCAVATION, TRENCHING, AND BACKFILLING FOR UTILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A.
Furnish all labor, material, tools, equipment, and services
for excavation, trenching, backfilling and compacting for all
underground utilities as indicated, in accordance with
provisions of the Contract Documents.
B.
Completely coordinate work with other trades.
C.
Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and
install
all
supplementary
or
miscellaneous
items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A.
Compaction density test procedure to be ASTM D 698.
B.
Comply with all aspects of safety rules and regulations for
excavations promulgated by the State of Texas.
C.
Comply with OSHA requirements.
1.3 JOB CONDITIONS:
A.
All excavation shall be "unclassified" and involves the
removing of all materials necessary to permit the carrying on
and completion of the work. The Contractor, prior to
submitting a proposal, must satisfy himself as to the actual
subsurface conditions.
B.
Verify location and existence of all underground
utilities.
Omission or inclusion of located utility
items on drawings does not constitute non-existence or
definite location.
Secure and examine local utility
surveyor records for available location data.
C.
Protect utilities and adjacent structures from damage due to
any construction activity. Repair all damages to utility
items and structures at Contractor's expense.
D.
Keep surcharge sufficient distance back from edge of
excavation to prevent slides or caving.
March 17, 2004
02220 - 1
and Backfilling for Utilities
Excavation, Trenching
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
E.
1.4
Topsoil removal to be in accordance with Section 02110.
SUBMITTALS:
A.
Atterburg limits and sieve analysis of granular bedding
material.
B.
Source of granular bedding material.
C.
Compaction curves for fill and backfill materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 BACKFILL MATERIAL:
A.
B.
Backfill to be in accordance with specified subgrade
requirements for site improvements.
Fill and backfill outside of specified subgrade requirements
to be clean material from site excavations. Material used from
site excavation shall have a maximum dimension of 1/2 inch
and shall be sand, clayey sand, sandy clay or clayey gravel
and shall not contain organic material, frozen material,
trash, debris, concrete, or rock. Sand may be substituted
for the excavated material.
2.2 EMBEDMENT MATERIAL:
A.
Class I material per ASTM D2321. Angular, 1/4 inch to 1 1/2
inch, graded stone, including slag, cinders or crushed
stone.
B.
Class II material per ASTM D2321. Material shall be course
sand or gravel from an approved source. Maximum particle size
of 1 1/2 inch and less than 5% passing the No. 200 sieve. The
plasticity must be less than 4. Bottom ash sand from an
approved source may be approved as Class II material.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL:
A.
B.
Excavation and backfill shall be performed in a safe and
proper manner with appropriate precautions being taken.
The contractor shall do all clearing and grubbing
necessary for construction operations.
Clearing and
March 17, 2004
02220 - 2
and Backfilling for Utilities
Excavation, Trenching
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
grubbing shall be done so as not to injure or damage adjacent
property.
C.
No trees are to be removed without authorization from the
Owner unless designated for removal.
D.
Remove and dispose of material which is unsuitable and
outside of specifications. Replace with suitable material
approved by the Architect/Engineer.
E.
Contractor must satisfy himself as to the actual existing
subsurface conditions, including but not limited to the depth,
location and sizes of pipes, cables and lines of various kinds
in place.
F.
Contractor shall uncover pipe, conduits and utilities ahead
of the construction area when required in order to obtain
horizontal and vertical data to avoid conflicts.
No blasting will be permitted.
G.
3.2 SAFETY:
A.
The contractor is advised that this project work area is
adjacent to existing pipelines and crosses existing pipelines
and cables. The soils are subject to vibration from traffic
and equipment and in areas of construction may have been
disturbed and may be unstable.
B.
The contractor shall have sole responsibility for determining
what safety procedures and equipment are necessary for
protecting his employees and the general public. The
contractor shall have sole responsibility for implementing
safety procedures and for the proper use of all safety
equipment to insure a safe working place and working
environment.
C.
The contractor shall use as a minimum standard the
Occupational
Safety
and
Health
Administration
(OSHA)
regulations and guidelines concerning trench safety.
3.3 TRENCH EXCAVATION:
A.
Excavate trenches by open cut method to depth indicated and
necessary to accommodate the work.
B.
Pile material suitable for backfilling in an orderly manner
far enough from the bank of the trench to avoid overloading,
slides, or cave-ins. Traffic should not be blocked. Driveways
must be immediately cleared to permit free ingress and egress.
Gutters and drainage channels
March 17, 2004
02220 - 3
and Backfilling for Utilities
Excavation, Trenching
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
shall be kept clear or other means of securing proper
drainage shall be provided.
C.
The Owner or his authorized representative shall have the
right to limit the amount of trench which may be opened or
partially opened at any time in advance of the completed
line; and also the amount of trench left not backfilled.
Except by permission of the Owner, the maximum length of
open trench shall be three hundred feet. The trench shall,
however, be backfilled up to the trenching machine at the end
of the days work.
D.
Avoid excavating below indicated grades unless required to
remove unsuitable material. Backfill areas which have been
excavated below indicated grades in compacted 6 inch lifts to
95% of maximum dry density.
E.
Where rock, cemented gravel, boulders or unyielding shale or
marl are encountered in the trench bottom, all such
materials shall be removed to a depth of not less than three
inches below subgrade for the full width of the trench. The
excavation below subgrade in rock or unyielding material
shall be backfilled to the proper grade with Class II
material. The use of material removed from the trench will
not be permitted.
F.
Trench size: Excavate sufficient width to accommodate free
working space.
1.
Cut trench walls vertically from bottom of trench to
one foot above top of pipe, conduit, or utility service.
2.
Trench width at top of pipe or conduit may not exceed
outside diameter of utility service by more than the
following dimensions unless otherwise recommended by
manufacturer:
Overall Diameter
Excess Dimension
of Utility Service
less than 33
in.
16 in.
33 in to 42
in.
24 in.
more than 42
in.
36 in.
G.
Keep trenches free of water.
H.
Brace and sheet or slope trenches to OSHA and state law
requirements, and as soil conditions dictate. Do not remove
shoring until backfilling has progressed to a stage that no
damage to piping, utility service or conduit will result due
to removal.
I.
Furnish alignment and elevation stakes at set intervals for
Architect/Engineer to observe utility installation.
March 17, 2004
02220 - 4
and Backfilling for Utilities
Excavation, Trenching
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
At a minimum, staking interval not to exceed 50 feet and to
include all PI’s, grade breaks, and structures.
3.4 PREPARATION FOR PIPE LAYING:
A.
See drawings for specific pipe material sections for
embedment requirements.
B.
If discrepancy exists between those requirements and these
specifications, provide type of embedment which provides the
greatest load factor.
C.
Form bell or coupling holes in trenches such that only
barrel of pipe is firmly supported by bedding material.
D.
Dig bell or coupling holes after trench bottom has been
graded.
E.
Deflection joints, other than bell and spigot, in accordance
with recommendation of joint manufacturer for particular joint
used.
3.5 BACKFILLING:
A.
Do not backfill trenches until all required utility systems
as installed conform to specified requirements of appropriate
sections.
B.
Backfill as soon as practicable after the completion of the
laying and jointing.
C.
Backfill per typical plan details and per subgrade
requirements for various site improvements.
D.
Reopen trenches improperly backfilled to depth required
for proper compaction. Refill and re-compact as specified, or
otherwise correct the condition in an approved manner.
E.
Exercise care in backfilling operations to avoid displacing
pipe joints either horizontally or vertically and to avoid
breaking pipe.
F.
Hand or pneumatic tamp backfill around and over pipe in lifts
not exceeding 8 inches loose thickness and 6 inches of
compacted thickness.
G.
Compact to density specified in such a manner that the pipe
will not be damaged.
H.
Do not water flush for consolidation under paved sections
March 17, 2004
02220 - 5
and Backfilling for Utilities
Excavation, Trenching
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
or structures. Compact all trench backfill in areas under
paved roads, embankments, concrete slabs, parking areas,
sidewalks, and other structures to at least 95 percent of
maximum dry density.
I.
In locations where trench will not be under paved areas,
compact to a least 92 percent of maximum dry density.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform necessary number of soil tests (ASTM D698
Standard Proctor)
to determine moisture/density
relationship of backfilling materials.
B.
Perform soil tests (Atterberg Limit Series and ASTM D698
Standard Proctor) for each type of fill to be imported to
determine that Atterberg Limits are in accordance with the
specifications for use.
C.
Perform one field density (ASTM D2922) for every 300 linear
feet or fraction thereof for each lift of material placed.
END OF SECTION
March 17, 2004
02220 - 6
and Backfilling for Utilities
Excavation, Trenching
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 02225
TRENCH SAFETY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED:
A.
This specification consists of the basic requirements which
the Contractor must comply with in order to provide for the
safety and health of workers in a trench. This specification
is for the purpose of providing minimum performance
specifications, and the Contractor shall develop, design, and
implement the trench safety system.
The Contractor shall bear the sole responsibility for the
adequacy of the trench safety system and providing "a safe
place to work" for the worker.
B.
Should the trench safety protection system require wider
trenches than specified elsewhere, the Contractor shall be
responsible for the costs associated with determining adequacy
of pipe bedding and class, as well as, purchase and
installation of alternate materials.
1.2 STANDARDS:
A.
The following standard shall be the minimum governing
requirement of the specification and is hereby made a part of
this specification as if written in its entirety. Occupational
Safety and Health Standards - Excavations (29CFR Part 1926),
U.S. Department of Labor, latest edition.
B.
Comply with the applicable Federal, State, and local rules,
regulations, and ordinances.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - Not used
PART 3 - EXECUTION - Not used
END OF SECTION
March 17, 2004
02225 - 1
Trench Safety
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 02230
FLEXIBLE BASE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A.
Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for installing flexible base paving in roadways, alleys,
parking areas, and other areas shown on plans, as indicated, in
accord with provisions of the Contract Documents.
B.
This item includes a foundation course for a final surface
course; shall be composed of either crushed stone, gravel,
or other material approved by the Engineer, and shall be
constructed as herein specified in one or more courses in
conformity with the typical sections shown on plans and to
the lines and grades as established by the Engineer.
C.
Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
D.
Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances or devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A.
Construction standards: TxDOT, "Standard Specifications for
Construction of Highways, Streets, and Bridges", 1993.
B.
Should conflict arise between standard specifications of
government agencies mentioned herein and contract documents,
more stringent shall govern.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A.
Product Data:
1.
Gradation of proposed material
2.
Density of proposed material
3.
Atterberg limits of proposed material
4.
Ball Mill of proposed material
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
March 17, 2004
02230 - 1
Flexible Base
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
2.1 MATERIALS:
A. Materials from the approved source shall meet the requirements
of Item 247 of the State Specifications when tested in accord
with the referenced standards:
1.
State Specifications Item 247, Type A or B.
2.
State Specifications Item 247, Grade 6 as shown below:
a.
Gradation (percent retained):
sieve
percentage
1 3/4"
0
7/8”
10-35
3/8"
30-50
#4
45-65
#40
70-85
b.
Liquid Limit not to exceed 35.
c.
Plasticity Index not to exceed 10.
d.
Ball Mill not to exceed 40.
e.
Maximum Increase in Passing No. 40 not to exceed
20.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONDITION OF SUBGRADE:
A.
The surface of the subgrade shall be finished true to line
and grade in accordance with the specifications (excavation
and rough grading). The subgrade shall be properly maintained
to prevent drying and loosening of the surface. All unstable
or otherwise objectionable material shall be removed from the
subgrade and replaced with approved material.
B.
All holes, ruts and depressions shall be filled with
approved material. All mounds and ridges shall be cut off.
C.
All subgrades shall be brought to specified contours, even
and properly compacted.
D.
The subgrade shall be thoroughly wetted with water and
reshaped and rolled to the extent required to place the
subgrade in an acceptable condition to receive the base
material.
E.
Base material shall not be laid upon frozen subgrade.
F.
Curb and gutter shall be constructed and cured sufficiently
prior to base material placement along toe.
March 17, 2004
02230 - 2
Flexible Base
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
The curb and gutter shall not be damaged during base
material placement.
G.
The condition of the subgrade shall be observed by the
Architect/Engineer prior to placing of base material.
3.2 CONSTRUCTION:
A. Flexible base material shall be laid and compacted in courses
of equal depth of either four (4) inches, five (5) inches,
or six (6) inches as follows:
Thickness of
Number of
Base Material
Courses
4"
one 4" course
6"
one 6" course
8"
two 4" courses
10"
two 5" courses
12"
two 6" courses
For any base thickness of greater than twelve
(12)
inches, the courses shall be of equal thickness with no
single course of a thickness less than four (4) inches nor
greater than six (6) inches.
B.
Base material deposited upon the subgrade shall be spread
and shaped the same day. If inclement weather or other
unforeseen circumstances render impractical the spreading of
the base material during the first twenty-four (24) hour
period, the base material shall be later scarified and spread
as directed by the Engineer.
C.
The base material shall be sprinkled, bladed, processed, and
shaped to conform to typical sections as shown on plans.
D.
All areas and "nests" of segregated coarse or fine material
shall be corrected or removed and replaced with well-graded
base material.
E.
The base material shall be sprinkled as required and
compacted to the extent necessary to provide not less than
98% of the maximum density determined by ASTM D 698.
F.
The moisture content shall not vary more than minus one or
plus two percent from optimum moisture content at the time of
compaction.
G.
In addition to the requirements specified for density, the
full depth of flexible base shown on the plans shall be
compacted to the extent necessary to remain firm and
March 17, 2004
02230 - 3
Flexible Base
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
stable under construction equipment.
H.
After each section of flexible base is completed, tests as
specified herein, will be taken by the Contractor. The
contractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer so that
testing by the Owner can be done. If the material fails to
meet the density requirements, the entire area shall be
reworked as necessary to meet these requirements. In no event
will the density be less than 98% of maximum density
determined by ASTM D 698.
I.
Throughout this entire operation, the shape of the course
shall be maintained by blading, and the surface upon
completion shall be smooth and in conformity with the typical
sections shown on the plans and to the established lines and
grades.
J.
In that area on which pavement is to be placed, any deviation
in excess of .04 feet in cross section, and in a length of
sixteen (16) feet measured longitudinally shall be corrected
by loosening, adding or removing base material, reshaping and
recompacting by sprinkling and rolling.
K.
All irregularities, depressions, or weak spots which develop
shall be corrected immediately by scarifying the areas
affected,
adding
suitable
base
material
as
required,
reshaping and recompacting by sprinkling and rolling.
L.
Should the first course, due to any reason or cause, lose the
required stability, density, or finish before the surfacing
is complete, it shall be recompacted and refinished at the
Contractor's expense.
M.
On projects where eight (8) inches or more base material is
specified, the material shall extend under the curb and
gutter to the back of curb. The amount of base under the curb
and gutter will be the thickness of the total base course,
less six (6) inches, but in no case less than four (4)
inches.
N.
Any required additional base material that is to be added to
an existing flexible base to conform with the typical sections
shown on the plans and to the lines and grades, as established
by the Architect/ Engineer, shall be properly bonded to the
existing base and fine graded to the proper section. This
shall be done by scarifying to a minimum depth of 3 inches
prior to recompaction.
March 17, 2004
02230 - 4
Flexible Base
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A.
A final test report showing all tests shall be submitted to
the Owner. All final tests shall show compliance with the
specifications. Tests that fail shall be shown to have been
retested.
B.
Perform one gradation test on each type of material proposed
for use. Determine compliance with Contract Documents. (ASTM
C136).
C.
Perform one Atterberg Limits on each type of
proposed for use. Determine compliance with
Documents. (ASTM D4318).
D.
Perform Ball Mill test for each type of material proposed for
use. Determine compliance with Contract Documents. (Tex-116E).
E.
Perform one moisture/density relationship of base material
for each type of base material proposed for construction.
(ASTM D698).
F.
Perform two in place density test on base material for each
2,000 square yards or fraction thereof of each lift of
flexible of base placed. Determine compliance with the
Contract Documents. (ASTM D2922).
G.
Measure thickness of flexible base at two locations for each
2,000 square yards or fraction thereof of material installed.
Make depth measurements by test holes, at least 3 inches in
diameter or other approved method through base course.
material
Contract
3.4 WARRANTY:
A. Contractor shall guarantee the materials and workmanship for a
period of one (1) year, beginning on the date of substantial
completion.
END OF SECTION
March 17, 2004
02230 - 5
Flexible Base
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 02270
SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A.
Furnish labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals
necessary to provide erosion and sediment control for the
duration of the construction period including furnishing,
installing and maintaining erosion and sediment control
structures and procedures and the proper removal when no
longer required.
B.
The intent of this specification is to provide guidelines
for the Contractor to adhere to all State, Federal, and
Local environmental regulations. It is also the intent to
provide preventive measures to keep sediment from entering
any storm water system, including open channels. It is the
Contractor's responsibility to adhere to all State, Federal
and
Local
requirements.
While
the
Resident
Project
Representative may require the Contractor to install erosion
control devices during construction, this will in no way
relieve the Contractor of his responsibility.
C.
In the event of conflict between the requirements and
storm water pollution control laws, rules or regulations or
other Federal, State or Local agencies, the more restrictive
laws, rules or regulations shall apply.
D.
Completely coordinate work with other trades.
E.
Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply
with
applicable
requirements
of
all
governing
authorities having jurisdiction. The Specifications and the
Plans are not represented as being comprehensive, but rather
to convey the intent to provide complete slope protection
and erosion control for both the Owner's and adjacent
property. Comply with the local codes and ordinances. If
local codes and ordinances
March 17, 2004
02514 - 1
Concrete Paving
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
require more stringent or additional erosion and sediment
control measures during construction, Contractor shall
provide such measures.
B.
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for meeting all
requirements relative to erosion and pollution control on the
construction site.
C.
Erosion control measures shall be established at the
beginning of construction and maintained during the entire
length of construction. On-site areas which are subject to
severe erosion and off-site areas which are especially
vulnerable to damage from erosion and/or sedimentation are to
be identified and receive additional erosion control measures
as directed by the Owner, the Engineer, or the Resident
Project Representative.
D.
All land-disturbing activities shall be planned and conducted
to minimize the size of the area to be exposed at any one
time and to minimize the time of exposure.
E.
Surface water runoff originating upgrade of exposed area
shall be controlled to reduce erosion and sediment loss during
the period of exposure.
F.
When the increase in the peak rates and velocity of storm
water runoff resulting from a land-disturbing activity is
sufficient to cause accelerated erosion of the receiving
ditch or stream, the Contractor shall install measures to
control both the velocity and rate of release so as to
minimize accelerated erosion and increased sedimentation of
the stream as directed by the Owner, the Engineer, or the
Resident Representative.
G.
All land-disturbing activities shall be planned and conducted
so as to minimize off-site sedimentation damage.
H.
The Contractor shall be responsible for periodically cleaning
out and disposing of all sediment once the storage capacity
of the drainage feature or structure receiving the sediment
is reduced by one-half. The Contractor shall also be
responsible for cleaning out and disposing of all sediment at
the time of completion of the Work.
March 17, 2004
02514 - 2
Concrete Paving
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Grass seed.
B.
Stone
C.
Hay Bales
D.
Silt Fence
PART 2 -
MATERIALS
2.1 MATERIALS
A.
Straw Bales:
1.
Straw bales shall weigh a minimum of fifty (50)
pounds and shall be at least 30" in length.
2.
Bales shall be composed entirely of vegetable
matter and be free of seeds.
3.
Binding shall be either wire or nylon string, jute or
cotton binding is unacceptable.
4.
Bales shall be used for not more than three months
before being replaced. However, if weather conditions
cause biological degradation of the straw bales, they
shall be replaced sooner than the three month time
period to prevent a loss of structural integrity of the
dike.
B.
Stone:
1.
For stone filter: 2 inch graded gravel or crushed
stone.
2.
For stabilized construction entrances: crushed stone 2
to 4 inches in diameter.
C.
Grass Seed:
1.
Temporary seeding
2.
Grass which will not compete with the grasses sown
later for permanent cover shall be a quick-growing
species (such as ryegrass, Italian ryegrass, or cereal
grasses) suitable to the area providing a temporary
cover.
3.
Outside of maintained yards (permanent):
Sideoats Grama 5.6 lbs. pure live seed per acre Blue
Grama
1.6 lbs. pure live seed per acre
Buffalo Grass 16.0 lbs. pure live seed per acre Other
native grasses found in the area may be used as
recommended by the County Agent if approved by the
Owner and/or Engineer.
4.
In maintained yards (permanent):
March 17, 2004
02514 - 3
Concrete Paving
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
Seed or sod to match existing grass or to comply with
other
sections
within
the
specifications
as
applicable.
D. Synthetic Filter Fabric: Synthetic filter fabric should be a
pervious sheet of polypropylene, nylon, polyester, or
polyethylene yarn conforming to the following requirements:
Physical Property
Requirements
Filtering Efficiency 75% to 85% minimum
Tensile strength at standard strength: 20% (max)
elongation
30 lb/linear inch (minimum)
extra strength:
50 lb/linear inch (minimum)
Slurry flow rate
0.3 gal/sf/min. (minimum)
E.
Silt Fence:
1.
Silt fence fabric shall be a nylon reinforced
polypropylene fabric which has a built-in cord running
the entire length of the top edge of the fabric.
2.
The fabric must meet the following minimum criteria:
Tensile Strength, ASTM D4632 90 lbs.
Puncture Rating, ASTM D4833
60 lbs.
Mullen Burst Rating, ASTM D3786
200 psi.
Apparent Opening Size, U.S. Sieve No.
40
F.
Silt Fence Posts:
1.
A minimum 2" x 2" (nominal) x 54" pressure treated wood
posts of Number 2 Grade southern yellow pine or
approved equal.
2.
Metal posts may be used if manufactured for use with
the silt fence.
G.
Sand Bag:
1.
Sand bag material shall be polypropylene, polyethylene,
polyamide or cotton burlap woven fabric, minimum unit
weight four (4) ounces per square yard, mullen burst
strength exceeding 300 psi and ultraviolet stability
exceeding 70%.
2.
Length shall be 24 to 30 inches, width shall be 16 to
18 inches and thickness shall be six (6) to eight (8)
inches and having an approximate weight of 40 pounds.
3.
Sand bags shall be filled with coarse grade sand, free
from deleterious material. All sand shall pass through
a No. 10 sieve.
March 17, 2004
02514 - 4
Concrete Paving
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
H.
PVC Pipe:
1.
Pipe shall be SDR-35 polyvinyl chloride having a
minimum nominal internal diameter of 4".
2.
Pipes shall be sized for anticipated flows.
I.
Soil Retention Blanket:
1.
Soil retention blankets shall consist of a geocomposite
of excelsior or fiber blanket with an extruded plastic
net attached to the top side.
2.
The plastic net shall be photodegradable and the
excelsior or fiber blanket shall be made smolder
resistant without the use of chemicals.
3.
Soil retention blankets shall be high velocity type to
resist severe runoff.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
GENERAL
Items not specifically addressed shall conform to the
applicable referenced erosion control standards specified above.
3.2 AT BEGINNING OF SITE WORK
A.
Prior
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
to general stripping topsoil and excavating:
Install stabilized construction entrances as required.
Install perimeter dikes and swales if required.
Excavate and shape sediment basins and traps as
required.
Machine compact all berms, dikes and embankments for
basins and traps if required.
Install straw bales and silt fence as required.
B.
Construct
sediment
construction.
traps
as
required
C.
Temporarily seed basin slopes if required. 3.3
during
DURING CONSTRUCTION PERIOD
A.
Maintain basins, dikes, traps, stone filters, straw
bales, silt fences, etc. as required.
Inspect
regularly especially after rainstorms.
Repair or
replace damaged or missing items.
B.
After rough grading, sow temporary grass cover over
exposed earth areas as required to control soil erosion.
March 17, 2004
02514 - 5
Concrete Paving
all
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Provide necessary swales and dikes to direct all water
toward and into sediment basins and traps.
Excavate sediment out of basins and traps when capacity has
been reduced by 50 percent. Remove sediment from behind bales
to prevent overtopping.
Remove sediment from stone filters as required.
Topsoil and fine grade slopes and swales, etc. Seed and
mulch as soon as possible in areas as they become ready.
Seeding dates shall be between February 15 and May 15.
Seeding done outside this time period shall be at a rate
triple the amount shown in the table.
3.4 NEAR COMPLETION OF CONSTRUCTION
A.
Eliminate basins, dikes, traps, straw bales, stone filters,
etc.
B.
Grade to finish grades.
C.
Topsoil areas to be seeded with a minimum of 4” of topsoil as
approved by the Engineer.
D.
Fine grade all remaining earth areas, then seed and mulch as
required.
3.5 TEMPORARY STRAW BALE DIKE
A.
Straw bales shall be embedded a minimum of 4" and securely
anchored using 2" x 2" wood stakes driven through the bales
into the ground a minimum of 6". Straw bales are to be placed
directly adj acent to one another leaving no gap between
them.
B.
Bales shall be placed in a single row, lengthwise on proposed
line, with ends of adjacent bales tightly abutting one
another. In swales and ditches, the barrier shall extend to
such a length that the bottoms of the end bales are higher in
elevation than the top of the lowest middle bale. Additional
bales shall be placed behind the first row where the bales
abut each other. The additional bale is used to prevent
unfiltered runoff from escaping between the bales.
C.
The excavated soil shall be backfilled against the barrier.
Backfill shall conform to ground level on the
March 17, 2004
02514 - 6
Concrete Paving
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
downhill side and shall be built up to 4" above ground level
on the uphill side. Loose straw shall be scattered over the
area immediately uphill from a straw barrier.
3.6 STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCES
A.
Prior to the commencement of any construction activity, a
temporary
stabilized
construction
entrances
shall
be
constructed at all entry points to the project site and shall
remain in place for the duration of the construction period
to prevent sediment from leaving the project site and
becoming a nuisance in a public right-of-way. This includes
all labor and materials associated with installation and
maintenance of the entrance and a sediment trap.
B.
A temporary construction entrance shall be installed at any
point where traffic will be entering or leaving a
construction site to or from a public right-of-way, street,
alley, sidewalk or parking area. The purpose of a stabilized
construction entrance is to reduce or eliminate the tracking
or flowing of sediment into graded or incorporate a drainage
swale to prevent runoff from leaving the construction site.
C.
Stabilized construction entrances shall consist of a layer
of synthetic filter fabric covered with a 6" layer of stone
that is between 2 and 4 inches in diameter. The width should
be the entire width of the access and the length should be
between 50 and 75 feet.
D.
The temporary construction entrance shall be maintained in a
condition which will prevent tracking or flowing of sediment
into public right-of-way. This may require periodic top
dressing with additional stone as conditions demand. All
sediment spilled, dropped, washed or tracked into public
rights-of-way must be removed immediately by the contractor.
Dust control should be provided.
E.
When necessary, vehicles must be cleaned to remove sediment
prior to entrance onto public right-of-way. When washing is
required, it shall be done on an area stabilized with
crushed stone which drains into an approved sediment trap or
sediment basin or other sedimentation/filtration device. All
sediment shall be prevented from entering any storm drain,
ditch or watercourse using approved methods.
March 17, 2004
02514 - 7
Concrete Paving
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
3.7 SILT FENCE
A.
Silt fence shall be constructed of the materials specified.
B.
The Contractor shall excavate a 6" by 6" trench for site
fence bedding along the lower perimeters of the site where
necessary to prevent sediment from entering any drainage
system. The Contractor shall install the silt fence in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and
instructions.
C.
Silt fence shall be installed where it is necessary in order
to fulfill the intent of the Erosion Control Standards
listed in the referenced standards.
D.
The purpose of a silt fence is to intercept and detain
water-borne sediment from unprotected areas to a limited
extent.
E.
Silt fence is used during
the perimeter of a disturbed
allowing water to percolate
in place until the disturbed
F.
Silt fence should not be used where there is a concentration
of water in a channel or drainage way or where soil
conditions prevent a minimum toe-in depth of 6"
or
installation of support post to depth of 12".
G.
Fabric shall overlap at abutting ends a minimum of 3' and
shall be jointed such that no leakage or bypass occurs.
H.
If concentrated flow occurs after installation, corrective
action must be taken such as placing rock berm in the areas
of concentrated flow.
the period of construction near
area to intercept sediment while
through. This fence shall remain
area is permanently stabilized.
3.8 SAND BAG BERM OR STONE FILTER
A.
The purpose of a sandbag berm or stone filter is to intercept
sediment-laden
water
from
disturbed
areas
such
as
construction in steam beds, create a retention pond, detain
sediment and release water in sheet flow.
B.
A temporary sand bag bern or stone filter shall be installed
across a channel or right of way in a developing or disturbed
area and should be used when the contributing drainage area
is greater than 5 acres. The berm or filter shall be a
minimum height of 18",
March 17, 2004
02514 - 8
Concrete Paving
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
measured from the top of the existing ground at the upslope
toe to the top of the berm or filter. The berm or filter
shall be sized to have a minimum width of 48" measured at the
bottom of the berm or filter and 18" measured at the top of
the berm or filter.
C. The sand bag berm or filter shall be inspected after each rain.
The sand bags or stone shall be reshaped or replaced as
needed during inspection. Additional inspections shall be
made daily by the responsible party and when the silt
reaches 6", the accumulated silt shall be removed and
disposed of at an approved site in a manner that will not
contribute to additional siltation. The sand bag berm or
filter shall be left in place until all upstream areas are
stabilized and accumulated silt removed; removal must be done
by hand.
3.9 SOIL RETENTION BLANKETS
A.
A soil retention blanket is a geotextile or biodegradable
fabric placed over disturbed areas to limit the effects of
erosion due to rainfall impact and runoff across barren soil.
B.
Soil retention blankets are manufactured by a wide variety
of vendors addressing a wide variety of conditions such as
vegetation establishment and high velocity flow. Blankets
are used in areas which are difficult to stabilize such as
steep slopes, drainage swales or high pedestrian traffic
areas. The blanket types used shall be suitable for the
installation proposed.
C.
The soil retention blanket, whether installed as slope
protection or as flexible channel liner, shall be placed
within 24 hours after seeding or sodding operations have
been completed, or as approved by the Engineer.
D.
Prior to placing the blanket, the area to be covered shall
be relatively free of all rocks or clods over 1-1/2" in
maximum dimension and all sticks or other foreign material
which will prevent the close contact of the blanket with the
soil. The area shall be smooth and free of ruts and other
depressions.
E.
If as a result of rain, the prepared bed becomes crusted or
eroded or if any eroded places, ruts or depressions exist for
any reason, the Contractor shall be required to rework the
soil until it is smooth and to reseed or resod the area at
the Contractor's
March 17, 2004
02514 - 9
Concrete Paving
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
expense. Installation and anchorage of the soil retention
blanket shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
3.10 SEEDING
A.
Grade grass areas to smooth, even surface. Roll, rake and
remove ridges and fill depressions as required to achieve
finish grade. All grades shall comply with plans or shall
meet approval of the Engineer and/or Owner before seeding.
B.
Do not use seed which is wet, moldy or otherwise damaged.
C.
Use approved mechanical power driven drills or seeders,
mechanical hand seeders, hdyromulching equipment, or other
approved equipment.
D.
If mechanically sown, distribute seed evenly over entire area
at rates specified, 50 percent sown in one direction,
remainder at right angels to first sowing.
E.
If hydromulched, apply with a slurry mix of water, seed,
fertilizer and mulch material. On slopes of 3:1 or greater
use a tackifier with the mulch. Mulch to be applied at a
minimum of 1200 pounds dry material per acre.
F.
Stop work when satisfactory results can not be obtained
because of high winds, excessive moisture, or other factors.
Resume work only when favorable conditions develop.
G.
After planting, by mechanical methods, roll planted areas
with corrugated roller of "Cultipacker" type. Rolling of
slope areas to be along contour of slope.
3.11 PROTECTION OF BARE AREAS
A.
Apply temporary or permanent seeding and soil retention
blanket to bare areas including new embankment areas, fills,
stripped areas, graded areas or otherwise disturbed areas,
which have a grade greater than 5% or which will be exposed
for more than 30 days.
B.
Bare working areas on which it is not practical or desirable
to install seeding and soil retention blankets, such as areas
under proposed building slabs, shall be temporarily sloped to
drain at a minimum of 0.2% and a maximum of 5% grade. These
areas shall then
March 17, 2004
02514 - 10
Concrete Paving
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
be "trackwalked" with a crawler dozer traveling up and down
the slope to form the effect of small "terraces" with the
tracks of the dozer. Apply a minimum of three (3) coverages
to each area with the dozer tracks.
C.
Route runoff from the areas through the appropriate silt
fence system.
D.
Protect earth spoil areas by "trackwalking" and silt fences.
3.12 INTERCEPTOR SWALE
A.
Interceptor swales may have a v-shape or be trapezoidal with
a flat bottom and side slopes of 3:1 or flatter. These are
used to shorten the length of exposed slope by intercepting
runoff and can also serve as perimeter swales preventing offsite runoff from entering the disturbed area or prevent
sediment-laden runoff from leaving the construction site or
disturbed area. The outflow from a swale must be directed to
a stabilized outlet or sediment trapping device. The swales
should remain in place until the disturbed area is
permanently stabilized.
B.
Stone stabilization shall be used when grades exceed 2% or
velocities exceed 6 feet per second and shall consist of a
layer of crushed stone 3 inches thick, or flexible channel
liner soil retention blankets. Stabilization shall extend
across the bottom of the swale and up both sides of the
channel to minimum height of 3 inches above the design water
surface elevation based on a two year intensity storm.
C.
Interceptor swale shall be installed across exposed slopes
during construction and should intercept no more than five
acres of runoff. Swales shall have a minimum bottom width of
two feet and a maximum depth of eighteen inches with side
slopes of 3:1 or flatter. Swale must have positive drainage
for its entire length to an outlet. When the slope exceeds
3%, or velocities exceed 4 feet per second (regardless of
slope), stone stabilization is required. Check dams are also
recommended to reduce velocities in the swales possibly
reducing the amount of stabilization necessary. Swales should
be inspected on a weekly basis during wet weather and
repairs should be made promptly to maintain a consistent
cross section.
D.
All trees, brush, stumps, obstructions and other
March 17, 2004
02514 - 11
Concrete Paving
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
material shall be removed and disposed of so as not to
interfere with the proper functioning of the swale.
E.
The swale shall be excavated or shaped to line, grade, and
cross-section as required to meet criteria specified herein
and be free of bank projections or other irregularities
which will impede normal flow.
F.
All earth removed and not needed in construction shall be
disposed of in an approved spoils site so that it will be
conveyed to a sediment trapping device.
G.
Diverted runoff from a disturbed or exposed upland area
shall be conveyed to a sediment trapping device.
H.
The on-site location may need to be adjusted to meet field
conditions in order to utilize the most suitable outlet.
I.
Minimum compaction for the swale shall be 90% standard
proctor.
3.13 DIVERSION DIKE
A.
A diversion dike intercepts runoff from small upland areas
and diverts it away from exposed slopes to a stabilized
outlet, such as a rock berm, sandbag berm, or stone outlet
structure. Dikes are generally used for the duration of
construction to intercept and reroute runoff from disturbed
areas to prevent excessive erosion until permanent drainage
features are installed and/or slopes are stabilized.
B.
Stone stabilization is required for velocities in excess of
6 feet per second and shall consist of stone and shall be
placed in a layer of at least 3 inches thickness and shall
extend a minimum height of 3 inches above the design water
surface up the existing slope and the upstream face of the
dike.
C.
Diversion dikes shall be installed prior to and maintained
for the duration of construction and should intercept no more
than ten acres of runoff. Dikes shall have a minimum top
width of two feet and a minimum height of compacted fill of
18 inches measured from the top of the existing ground at the
upslope toe to top of the dike and having side slopes of 3:1
or flatter. The soil for the dike shall be placed in lifts of
8 inches or less and be compacted to 95% standard proctor
density. The channel which is formed by dike must have
positive drainage for its entire length to an outlet.
March 17, 2004
02514 - 12
Concrete Paving
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
When the slope exceeds 2%, or velocities exceed 6 feet per
second (regardless of slope), stabilization is required.
Situations in which velocities do not exceed 6 feet per
second, vegetation may be used to control erosion.
D.
Diverted runoff from a protected or stabilized area shall
have its outlet flow directed to an undisturbed stabilized
area or into a level spreader or grade stabilization
structure.
E.
Diverted runoff from a disturbed or exposed area shall be
conveyed to a sediment trap such as a rock berm, temporary
sediment trap or sediment basin or to an area protected by
any of these measures.
3.14 LOCATION OF EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL STRUCTURES
A.
Locate erosion and sediment control structures as required
to prevent erosion and removal of sediment from the project
site.
B.
Silt fences shall be required for disturbed areas and
soil stockpiles/spoil areas. Each silt fence installation
shall have a minimum net length of 25 feet. The runoff from
a maximum of one acre of disturbed area or soil stockpile/
spoil area shall be routed through any individual silt fence
installation.
C.
Install diversion dikes to divert runoff to the silt fence
installation.
D.
Install silt traps at the upstream end of the drainage
structures, including open channels, through which runoff
from disturbed areas or soil stockpiles/spoil areas may
drain.
E.
Provide an overall erosion and sediment control system
which protects disturbed areas and soil stockpiles/spoil
areas. The system shall be modified by the Contractor from
time to time to effectively control erosion and sediment
during construction.
END OF SECTION
March 17, 2004
02514 - 13
Concrete Paving
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 02514
CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A.
Furnish all labor, material, tools, equipment, and services
for concrete paving in accordance with provisions of the
Contract Documents.
B.
Completely coordinate work with other trades.
C.
Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and
install
all
supplementary
or
miscellaneous
items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A.
Construction standards: TxDOT, "Standard Specifications for
Construction of Highways, Streets, and Bridges", 1993, as
amended to date.
B.
Should conflicts arise between standard specifications of
government agencies mentioned herein and Contract Documents,
the more stringent shall govern.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A.
Concrete mix design.
B.
Provide, for Architect's/Engineer's approval, one 12" x 12"
sample section for each specified finish. Obtain approval of
each sample prior to construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS:
A. Concrete for vehicular pavement shall be Class S, 4,500 psi at
28 days, as specified in Item 421, TxDot, "Standard
Specifications for Construction of Highways, Streets, and
Bridges", as amended to date.
1.
Slump shall be 2 inches ± 1 inch.
2.
Air shall be 6 percent ± 1percent.
3.
Flyash will be allowed per TxDot requirements.
March 17, 2004
02514 - 1
Concrete Paving
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
B. Concrete for walks shall be Class A, 3,000 psi at 28 days, as
specified in Item 421, TxDot, "Standard Specifications for
Construction of Highways, Streets, and Bridges", as amended to
date.
1.
Slump shall be 2 inches ± 1 inch.
2.
Air shall be 6 percent ± 1percent.
3.
Flyash will be allowed per TxDot requirements.
C.
Reinforcing steel shall be as specified in applicable
specifications.
D. Expansion joint filler shall be flexible foam, W.R. Meadows
"Ceramar" or approved equal. The joint filler shall be
accurately cut to the dimensions and shapes required.
1.
Vehicular paving and curbs: 3/4 inch thick.
2.
Walks: 1/2 inch thick.
E.
Dowels, load transfer devices, tie bars, etc. shall meet the
requirements of ASTM A-615, Grade 60.
F. Sealant shall meet the requirements of F.S. TT-S-00227E, type
II, class A, polyurethane type. Use gun grade nonsag type for
horizontal and vertical joints. Color to match finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SUBGRADE PREPARATION:
A.
The subgrade shall be shaped to line, grade and cross section
and compacted as specified.
B.
If dry, the subgrade or foundation material shall be
sprinkled lightly immediately before concrete is deposited
thereon.
3.2 CONCRETE FOR VEHICULAR TRAFFIC:
A.
Install concrete to dimensions, lines and grades as shown on
the plans and as specified.
B.
On properly installed and compacted subgrade, install 6 inch
layer of concrete with No. 4 bars 12 inches on center each
way, centered in layer unless otherwise shown on the plans.
C.
Finish concrete with screed, followed with bull float and
final finish in accordance with approved samples.
D.
Provide longitudinal and transverse control joints in
March 17, 2004
02514 - 2
Concrete Paving
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
locations indicated on drawings but not to exceed 15 foot
spacing.
1.
1/2 inch wide by 1/4 depth with 1/4 inch radius edges
at top or
2.
Saw cut 1/8 inch wide by 1/4 depth minimum.
3.
Fill with sealant
E.
Provide expansion joints in locations indicated on drawings
and where paving abuts other structures.
1.
3/4 inch wide by full depth of the pavement with
1/4 inch radius edges at top.
2.
Provide 3/4 inch diameter by 18 inch long dowel bars 12
inches on center, centered in pavement perpendicular to
joint.
3.
Provide expansion cap at one end of dowel bar and
lubricate that portion of dowel.
4.
Provide expansion joints without dowels where paving
abuts other structures.
5.
Set joint filler to 1 inch of top.
6.
Seal with sealant.
F.
Provide construction joint at end of days work and whenever
necessary to suspend work for a period of more than 30
minutes.
1.
Key joints with 2 inch by 1 inch key.
2.
Provide 5/8 inch diameter by 30 inch long deformed tie
bars at 30 inches on center, centered in pavement,
perpendicular to joint.
3.
Provide 1/2 inch wide by 1 inch deep joint with 1/4
inch radius edges at top.
4.
Fill with sealant.
G.
Provide thickened edge at drive entrances butting slabs. At
end of concrete, make slab 1.5 times normal thickness and
slope bottom to normal thickness in 3 feet.
3.3 CONCRETE WALK PAVING:
A.
On properly compacted structural fill, install 6 inch layer
of concrete with continuous welded wire fabric (6"X6" W1.4XW1.4) centered in layer; broom finish unless otherwise
shown on the plans.
B.
Provide contraction joints.
1.
Construct joints to 1/4 the total depth of concrete
with a grooving tool or jointer or by sawing with blade.
2.
Keep joints straight and perpendicular to edge of walk
unless otherwise shown.
3.
Spacing of the joints shall be equal to the width of the
sidewalk but not to exceed 10 feet. If sidewalk is to be
constructed abutting curb and gutter, the spacing of the
joints shall be 5 feet
March 17, 2004
02514 - 3
Concrete Paving
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
with every other joint matching the joints in the curb
and gutter.
C.
1.
2.
3.
Provide expansion joints where indicated and where walks meet
other structures.
Expansion joints at 30 feet on center maximum.
Set joint filler to within 1/2 inch of surface.
Seal all joints.
D.
Provide construction joints at end of each day's work and
whenever necessary to suspend work for a period of more than
30 minutes.
1.
Key joints with 2 inch by 1 inch key.
2.
Provide 1/2 inch diameter by 30 inch long deformed tie
bar at 30 inch intervals on center centered in walk
perpendicular to joint.
3.
Provide 1/2 inch wide by 1 inch deep joint with 1/4
inch radius edges at top.
4.
Fill with sealant
E.
Provide thickened edge at abutting concrete pavements and
adjacent to building or wall structures. At end of concrete,
make slab 1.5 times normal thickness and slope bottom to
normal thickness in 1 foot.
3.4 PROTECTION:
A.
The contractor shall protect the concrete against all
damage prior to final acceptance.
B. Remove concrete containing excessive cracking,
fractures, spalling or other defects and reconstruct the entire
section between regularly scheduled joints.
C. Exclude traffic from vehicular pavement until the
concrete is at least seven days old, or for a longer
period if so directed.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A.
Design Mixes:
1.
All concrete mixtures to be prepared by an approved
testing laboratory.
2.
At the beginning of the work, Contractor shall submit
proposed
concrete
mixes
for
review
by
the
Architect/Engineer.
3.
Do not mix concrete for placing in the work until after
submittal is approved.
B.
Test Cylinders: Make at least one (1) test of each day's
pouring or every 50 cubic yards of concrete placed whichever
is the greater number of tests, in each different portion or
section of the work. Make an additional test for each truck
which has water added at
March 17, 2004
02514 - 4
Concrete Paving
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
the site. Mold and cure specimens in accordance with ASTM C31
and test in accordance with ASTM C39. Test cylinders shall be
made and tested by the laboratory in accordance with ASTM
C172. Each test shall consist of four (4) specimens. One (1)
cylinder shall be tested at seven (7) days, two (2) cylinders
shall be tested at twenty eight (28) days and one held in
reserve. Determine temperature and air content for each set
of test cylinders in accordance with ASTM C231.
C.
Field Quality Control:
1.
Determine slump for each strength test and whenever
consistency of concrete appears to vary. Perform tests
in accordance with ASTM C143.
2.
Monitor addition of water to concrete and length of
time concrete is allowed to remain in truck.
3.
Certify delivery tickets indicating class of
concrete, amount of water added during initial
batching, and time initial batching occurred.
4.
Monitor work being performed in accordance with ACI
(American Concrete Institute) recommendations as a
standard of quality.
5.
The elapsed time from the addition of cementitious
material to the mix until the concrete is deposited in
place at the work site shall not exceed 30 minutes when
the concrete is hauled in nonagitating trucks, nor 90
minutes when the concrete is hauled in truck mixers or
truck agitators. Retempering concrete by adding water or
by other means will not be permitted, except when
concrete is delivered in transit mixers. With transit
mixers additional water may be added to the batch
materials and additional mixing performed to increase
the slump to meet the specified requirements provided
the addition of water is performed within 45 minutes
after the initial mixing operations and provided the
water/cementitious ratio specified in the mix design is
not exceeded.
D.
Source Quality Control: Periodically inspect and control
concrete mixing and loading of transit mix trucks at
batch plant
at
intervals
as
agreed to by
Architect/Engineer and laboratory personnel.
3.6 WARRANTY:
A. Contractor shall guarantee in writing, the materials and
workmanship for a period of one (1) year, beginning on the
date of substantial completion.
END OF SECTION
March 17, 2004
02514 - 5
Concrete Paving
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 02525
CONCRETE CURB, GUTTER, AND CURB AND GUTTER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A.
Furnish all labor, material, tools, equipment, and services
for constructing concrete curb, gutter, and curb and gutter in
accordance with provisions of the Contract Documents.
B.
Completely coordinate work with other trades.
C.
Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and
install
all
supplementary
or
miscellaneous
items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A.
Construction standards: TxDOT, "Standard Specifications for
Construction of Highways, Streets, and Bridges", 1993, as
amended to date.
B.
Should conflicts arise between standard specifications of
government agencies mentioned herein and Contract Documents,
the more stringent shall govern.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A.
Concrete mix design.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE:
A. Concrete shall be Class A, 3,000 psi at 28 days, as specified in
Item 421, TxDOT, "Standard Specifications for Construction of
Highways, Streets, and Bridges", as amended to date.
1.
Slump shall be 3 inches ± 1 inch.
2.
Air shall be 6 percent ± 1percent.
3.
Flyash will not be allowed.
B.
Reinforcing steel shall be as specified in applicable
specifications.
March 17, 2004
and Gutter
02525 - 1
Concrete Curb, Gutter and Curb
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
C. Expansion joint filler shall be flexible foam, W.R. Meadows
"Ceramar" or approved equal. The joint filler shall be
accurately cut to the dimensions and shapes required.
1.
Vehicular paving and curbs: 3/4 inch thick.
2.
Walks: 1/2 inch thick.
D.
Dowels, load transfer devices, tie bars, etc. shall meet the
requirements of ASTM A-615, Grade 60.
E.
Sealant shall meet the requirements of F.S. TT-S-00227E,
type II, class A, polyurethane type. Use gun grade nonsag
type for horizontal and vertical joints. Color to match
finish.
F.
Wheel Stops: Precast of 3,500 psi air-entrained concrete,
approximately 6" high 9" wide, and 7'-0" long, with chamfered
corners and drainage slots on underside. To be as manufactured
by Vaughn Concrete Products or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SUBGRADE PREPARATION:
A.
The subgrade, foundation or pavement surface shall be shaped
to line, grade and cross section and compacted as specified.
B.
3.2
3.3
If dry, the subgrade or foundation material shall be
sprinkled lightly immediately before concrete is deposited
thereon.
GUIDELINE:
A.
Set guideline to follow the top line of the curb.
B.
Guideline to be set to indicate both line and grade.
FORMS:
A.
Forms shall be of metal or wood, straight, and suitable for
the work involved in cross section, depth and strength to
resist springing during depositing and consolidating the
concrete.
B.
Wood forms should be at least two inches thick.
C.
Forms should not be used if they vary from a straight line
more than 1/8 inch in any ten foot section in either a
horizontal or vertical direction.
March 17, 2004
and Gutter
02525 - 2
Concrete Curb, Gutter and Curb
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
D.
Wood forms shall also be free from warp, twist, loose knots,
splits or other defects. Approved flexible or curved forms
shall be used for radius forming.
E.
Forms should be cleaned and oiled each time they are used.
3.4 REINFORCING STEEL:
A.
B.
Reinforcing steel, if required, shall be of the size and
dimension and shall be placed in position as shown on the plans.
Reinforcement shall meet the requirements set forth in the
appropriate sections of the specifications.
3.5 PLACING CONCRETE:
A.
Concrete from mixer to final place of deposit shall be
conveyed by method which will prevent segregation or loss of
ingredients, and be deposited in such a manner as to require
as little handling as possible.
B.
Necessary hand spreading shall be done with shovels, not
rakes.
C.
While being placed, the concrete shall be spaded or vibrated
and compacted with suitable tools so that the formation of
voids or honeycomb pockets is prevented. The concrete shall be
especially well spaded or vibrated against the forms and along
all joints. Over vibration or manipulation causing segregation
will not be permitted.
D.
Concrete shall be placed continuous between joints. A
construction joint shall be installed whenever the placing of
concrete is suspended for more than 30 minutes and at the end
of each days work.
3.6 CONVENTIONALLY FORMED CONCRETE:
A.
Forms shall be securely staked to line and grade, and
maintained in a true position during the depositing of
concrete.
B.
Inside forms for curbs shall be of approved material, shall
be of such design as to provide the curb required, and shall
be rigidly attached to the outside form.
C.
After the concrete has been struck off and after it has become
sufficiently set, the exposed surfaces shall be
thoroughly worked with a wooden float.
March 17, 2004
and Gutter
02525 - 3
Concrete Curb, Gutter and Curb
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
D.
The exposed edges shall be rounded by the use of an edging
tool to a radius of 1/4 inch.
E.
Surfaces shall be floated and finished with a smooth wood or
metal float until true to grade and section and uniform in
textures.
3.7 EXTRUDED CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION:
A.
Concrete may be placed by an extrusion machine if approved by
the Architect/Engineer.
B.
The forming tube of the extrusion machine shall be readily
adjustable vertically during the forward motion of the machine
to provide required variable heights necessary to conform to
the grade lines.
C.
A pointer or gauge shall be attached to the machine in such a
manner that a comparison can be made between the extruded work
and the guideline.
D.
The approved mix shall be fed into the machine in such a
manner and at such consistency that the finished work will
present a well compacted mass with a surface free from voids
and honeycomb and true to established shape, line and grade.
E.
Surface finishing specified shall be performed immediately
after extrusion.
3.8 FINISHING:
A.
After the surfaces have been floated with a wooden or metal
float, the final finish shall be accomplished with a bristle
brush moistened with clear water.
B.
Slab edges, including those at formed joints, shall be
finished carefully with an edger having a radius of 1/8 inch.
C.
Transverse joints shall be edged before brooming, and the
brooming shall eliminate the flat surface left by the surface
face of the edger.
D.
Completed surface shall be uniform in color and free of
surface blemishes and tool marks.
3.9 CONTRACTION JOINTS:
A.
Contraction joints shall be cut to 1/4 the total depth of
March 17, 2004
and Gutter
02525 - 4
Concrete Curb, Gutter and Curb
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
the concrete with a grooving tool or jointer or by sawing with a
blade.
B.
Joints in curb and gutter shall be constructed by means of
inserting 1/8 inch steel plates conforming to the cross
section of the curb and gutter. Plates shall remain in place
until concrete has set sufficiently to hold its shape and
shall then be removed.
C.
Finish edges of all joints with an edging tool.
D.
The spacing of the joints shall be 10 feet. 3.10
EXPANSION JOINTS:
A.
Expansion joints shall be spaced at intervals not to exceed 40
feet in curb and gutter.
B.
Expansion joints shall be placed vertically and at right
angles to the longitudinal axis of the curb and gutter.
C.
An expansion j oint shall be placed at the end of each radius
where the radius connects onto concrete curb and gutter.
D.
An expansion joint shall be placed between new and existing
concrete.
E.
Anchor with approved devices to prevent displacing during
placing and finishing operations.
F.
Expansion joint shall be placed in such a manner that it will
be approximately 1/4" below the concrete.
G.
Edge of joints shall be rounded with an edging tool. 3.11
FORM REMOVAL:
A.
Forms shall remain in place at least 12 hours after the
concrete has been placed.
B.
Any concrete found defective after form removal shall be
repaired promptly.
3.12 BACKFILLING:
A.
Backfill shall be of suitable select material and shall be
placed and compacted in accordance with the specifications on
site excavation and rough grading.
B.
In fill sections, backfilling shall be at top of curb or
finish elevation and extending a minimum of 3 feet back
March 17, 2004
and Gutter
02525 - 5
Concrete Curb, Gutter and Curb
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
of curb or on each side of sidewalk or driveway. Greater
distance is required if shown on the grading plan.
3.13 CURING:
A.
Curing to be done in accordance with specifications
controlling concrete work.
3.14 PROTECTION:
A.
The contractor shall protect the concrete against all damage
prior to final acceptance.
B.
Remove concrete containing excessive cracking, fractures,
spalling or other defects and reconstruct the entire section
between regularly scheduled joints.
C.
Exclude traffic from vehicular pavement until the concrete is
at least seven days old, or for a longer period if so
directed.
3.15 WHEEL STOPS:
A.
Provide as detailed on drawings.
B.
Place in accordance with layout and details shown on
drawings.
C.
Install in straight rows or curves and on uniform grade with
slope of parking lot.
D.
Affix to surface as shown on the plans or if not shown as
recommended by manufacturer.
3.16 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A.
Design Mixes:
1.
All concrete mixtures to be prepared by an approved
testing laboratory.
2.
At the beginning of the work, Contractor shall submit
proposed
concrete
mixes
for
review
by
the
Architect/Engineer.
3.
Do not mix concrete for placing in the work until after
submittal is approved.
B. Test Cylinders: Make at least one (1) test of each day's pouring
or every 50 cubic yards of concrete placed whichever is the
greater number of tests, in each different portion or section
of the work. Make an additional test for each truck which has
water added at the site. Mold and cure specimens in
accordance with ASTM C31 and test in accordance with ASTM
C39. Test
March 17, 2004
and Gutter
02525 - 6
Concrete Curb, Gutter and Curb
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
cylinders shall be made and tested by the laboratory in
accordance with ASTM C172. Each test shall consist of four (4)
specimens. One (1) cylinder shall be tested at seven (7) days,
two (2) cylinders shall be tested at twenty eight (28) days and
one held in reserve. Determine temperature and air content for
each set of test cylinders in accordance with ASTM C231.
C.
Field Quality Control:
1.
Determine slump for each strength test and whenever
consistency of concrete appears to vary. Perform tests
in accordance with ASTM C143.
2.
Monitor addition of water to concrete and length of
time concrete is allowed to remain in truck.
3.
Certify delivery tickets indicating class of
concrete, amount of water added during initial
batching, and time initial batching occurred.
4.
Monitor work being performed in accordance with ACI
(American Concrete Institute) recommendations as a
standard of quality.
5.
The elapsed time from the addition of cementitious
material to the mix until the concrete is deposited in
place at the work site shall not exceed 30 minutes when
the concrete is hauled in nonagitating trucks, nor 90
minutes when the concrete is hauled in truck mixers or
truck agitators. Retempering concrete by adding water or
by other means will not be permitted, except when
concrete is delivered in transit mixers. With transit
mixers additional water may be added to the batch
materials and additional mixing performed to increase
the slump to meet the specified requirements provided
the addition of water is performed within 45 minutes
after the initial mixing operations and provided the
water/cementitious ratio specified in the mix design is
not exceeded.
D.
Source Quality Control: Periodically inspect and control
concrete mixing and loading of transit mix trucks at
batch plant
at
intervals
as
agreed to by
Architect/Engineer and laboratory personnel.
3.17 WARRANTY:
A.
Contractor shall guarantee in writing, the materials and
workmanship for a period of one (1) year, beginning on the
date of substantial completion.
END OF SECTION
March 17, 2004
and Gutter
02525 - 7
Concrete Curb, Gutter and Curb
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 02584
PAVEMENT MARKINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY:
A.
Furnish all labor, material, tools, equipment, and services
for placing pavement markings in accordance with provisions of
the Contract Documents.
B.
Completely coordinate work with other trades.
C.
Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and
install
all
supplementary
or
miscellaneous
items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
1.2 SUBMITTALS:
A.
B.
Submit in accordance with Contract Documents.
Product Data
1.
Submit manufacturer's specifications to evidence
compliance with these specifications.
2.
Manufacturer's product data shall be clearly marked to
indicate the specific types intended for submittals and
desired approval.
3.
Product data which is unmarked or unclear as to
intended
submittal
will
returned
unreviewed
to
submitter.
4.
Manufacturer's application instructions
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A.
Special
Requirements
of
Regulatory
Agencies:
Submit
certification that system complies with VOC (Volatile Organic
Components) requirements and regulations of the Environmental
Protection
Agency
(EPA),
Occupational
Safety
Health
Administration (OSHA), State, County, City and Local Air
Control District.
B.
ADA marking shall be in compliance with Texas Department of
Licensing and Regulation Standards.
C.
Fire Lane markings shall be as approved by the local Fire
Marshal.
March 17, 2004
02584 - 1
Pavement Markings
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A.
Deliver, store and handle
manufacturer's
latest
specifications.
products in
published
accordance with
requirements
the
and
1.5 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS:
A.
Do not apply marking paint when weather is foggy, rainy or
when the temperature outside the dew point range as
recommended by the paint manufacturer or when the ambient or
pavement temperatures are below those recommended by the
manufacturer, nor when such conditions are anticipated during
eight hours after application.
B.
Do not apply markings when wind conditions do not allow for
crisp edges.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS:
A. Marking paint shall be FS TT-P-1952D (waterborne), Type II
(adverse conditions) traffic marking paint. Color shall be
highway yellow or as required by local codes. Color for fire
lanes shall be red.
2.2 EQUIPMENT:
A. Pressurized, self-contained paint machine capable of applying a
straight line from 2 in. to 6 in. wide, with consistent
coverage within the specified range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION:
A.
Examine and verify that receiving substrate surfaces of the
structure have no defects or errors which would result in
poor or potentially defective application or cause latent
defects in workmanship.
B.
Conditions of surfaces:
Clean, free of oil, water,
moisture, laitance, or any other deleterious substances.
3.2 PREPARATION:
A. Locate markings as shown on Drawings, in accordance with ADA
standards, or as required by Fire Marshall as applicable.
Provide qualified technician to supervise
March 17, 2004
02584 - 2
Pavement Markings
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
equipment and application of markings. Lay out markings using
guide lines, templates and forms.
B.
Thoroughly clean surfaces free of dirt, sand, gravel, oil
and other foreign materials.
C.
Allow concrete or asphalt to cure before painting as
recommended by manufacturer of marking paint.
3.3 APPLICATION:
A.
Apply in accordance with manufacturer's latest published
requirements, specifications and details.
B.
Install pavement markings with mechanical equipment after
pavement has been properly cured.
C.
Apply markings at a rate of 10.3 mils wet film thickness,
6.0 mils dry film thickness.
D.
Apply marking paint straight and uniform.
E.
Apply traffic markings and symbols as shown on the plans.
F.
Apply ADA parking symbols at stalls.
G.
Apply fire lane markings in accordance with Local Fire
Marshall requirements.
Use approved Stencils for
lettering.
H.
Apply required appropriate designations with approved
stencils at small or compact car stalls.
3.4 CLEANING:
A.
Clean in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and
specifications.
B.
Immediately
remove
spots,
smears,
stains,
residues,
adhesives, etc., from the work of this Section and/or upon
adjacent areas or surfaces which result from the work of
this Section.
C.
Upon the completion of the work of this Section, dispose of,
away from the site, debris, trash, containers, remnants and
scraps which result from the work of this section.
END OF SECTION
March 17, 2004
02584 - 3
Pavement Markings
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 02713
WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A.
Furnish all labor, material, tools, equipment, and services
for underground water distribution system, as indicated, in
accord with provisions of the Contract Documents.
B.
Completely coordinate work with other trades.
C.
Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and
install
all
supplementary
or
miscellaneous
items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
1.2 JOB CONDITIONS:
A.
Verify location and elevations of all structures and proposed
and existing underground utilities prior to trenching
excavation of water line. If pipe or structure adjustment is
necessary due to location of other utilities, assess
alteration impact on other utilities and secure written
approval from Architect/Engineer.
B.
Protect existing utilities and structures and replace if
damaged.
C.
Water distribution system shall interface with building 5
feet from outside face of building.
D.
Contractor to locate and verify connection size, elevation,
type of pipe, and location with existing water system.
E.
The existing water main to which the distribution system are
scheduled to be connected is owned by the City of Canadian.
The tie-in shall be in accordance with all City of Canadian
regulations applying to such work.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS:
A.
Texas Commission on Environmental Quality, 30 TAC, Chapter
290, Water Hygiene.
B.
American Water Works Association Standards and ASTM
standards.
March 17, 2004
02713 - 1
Water Distribution System
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
C.
City of Canadian Plumbing Code.
D.
If there are differences between these specifications and the
Standards, the most stringent shall govern.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A.
Equipment requiring submittals:
1.
Pipe
2.
Valves
3.
Fittings
4.
Adapters
5.
Valve boxes
6.
Metallic marking tape
7.
Joints, couplings, connections
8.
Embedment material
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WATER MAINS:
A.
Provide type of pipe which complies with the applicable codes
for the structure to be serviced.
B.
All pipes and related products must conform to American
National Standards Institute/National Sanitation Foundation
(ANSI/NSF) Standard 61 and must be certified by
an
organization accredited by ANSI.
C.
D.
Ductile Iron Pipe: shall meet requirements of AWWA C150 (ANSI
A21.50), AWWA C151 (ANSI A21.51), AWWA C115 (ANSI
A21.15),
AWWA C111 (ANSI A21.11), AWWA C104 (ANSI
A21.4). Pipe to be listed by Factory Mutual or Underwriters
Laboratories. Pipe joints shall conform to AWWA C111.
1.
Unless otherwise specified, thickness Class 50 for a
minimum of 4 feet of cover under laying Condition 2. If
the cover is greater than 4 feet then a thickness class
as per AWWA C151. Minimum working pressure to be 200
psi.
2.
Lining and Coatings.
a.
Exteriorcoated
with
a
bituminous
coating
approximately 1 mil thick in accordance with AWWA
C151.
b.
Interior- cement mortar lining conforming to AWWA
C104 (ANSI A21.4).
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe:
1. Domestic line 4" through 12": shall meet the requirements
of AWWA C900 for Class 150 (DR18). Pipe to be listed by
Factory Mutual or Underwriters
March 17, 2004
02713 - 2
Water Distribution System
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
Laboratories. Joints shall meet the requirements of
ASTM 3139.
2. Lines less than 4" shall meet requirements of Schedule
40 or 80 PVC pipe. Pipe shall be Type I, Grade 1, glued
joint meeting the requirements of ASTM D 1785 and ASTM
D2672 and must bear the NSF seal of approval.
2.2 FITTINGS:
A.
Fittings for ductile iron pipe or PVC pipe from 4" to 12"
shall meet the requirements of AWWA C153 mechanical joint SSBductile. Fittings shall have a working pressure of not less
than working pressure of the pipe. Fittings shall have same
lining and coating as ductile iron pipe.
B.
Fittings for PVC pipe less than 4" shall be schedule 80 PVC
meeting the same requirements as the pipe.
C.
Tapping sleeves to be of ductile iron or stainless steel
construction.
2.3 JOINTS, COUPLINGS, AND CONNECTIONS:
A.
Screwed. Make screwed joints using machine cut USASI taper
pipe threads. Apply a suitable joint compound to the male
threads only. Ream the pipe to full inside diameter after
cutting.
B.
Flanged. Flanged joints shall be used as indicated on the
plans. Flanged fittings shall comply with AWWA C110. Steel
flanges shall comply with AWWA C207.
1.
Prior to installation of bolts, accurately center and
align flanged joints to prevent mechanical prestressing
of flanges, pipe and equipment. Align bolt holes to
straddle
the
vertical,
horizontal
or
north-south
centerline.
Do
not
exceed
3/64
inch
per
foot
inclination of the flange face from true alignment.
2.
Use flat face companion flanges only with flat face
fittings, valves or equipment.
3.
Install proper gaskets, suitable for intended service
and factory cut to proper dimensions. Secure with a
suitable gasket cement. Gaskets shall be full face
type, natural red rubber, 1/8-inch thick.
4.
Use ANSI nuts and bolts, galvanized or black to
match flange material. Use ANSI 316 stainless steel
nuts and bolts underground. Tighten bolts progressively
to prevent unbalanced stress. Draw bolts tight to
insure proper seating of gaskets.
March 17, 2004
02713 - 3
Water Distribution System
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
C.
Compression Joints.
1.
For ductile iron pipe use Beltite, Tyton, Fastite,
or Grip-Tite compression joints. Install in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations and ASTM C 443.
Use only with pipe designed for compression gaskets.
2.
For pressure rated PVC pipe use compression joints
meeting the requirements of ASTM D3139. Install in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
D.
Mechanical Joints. Provide a stuffing box mechanical joint
adapted to use gasket, cast iron or ductile iron gland and
bolts. Coat bolts with bitumastic enamel. Use joint parts
similar in design to one of the following:
1.
American Mechanical Joint manufactured by the
American Cast Iron Pipe Company.
2.
U.S. Joints manufactured by the United States Pipe and
Foundry Company.
E.
Joints for glued PVC shall be in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
2.4 VALVES:
A.
Gate Valves 2" thru 12": shall meet requirements of AWWA
C509. Valve ends shall be mechanical joint or flanged as shown
on the plans. Valve shall be iron body, fully bronze mounted,
resilient seated, non-rising stem, O-ring stem seals, counterclockwise opening, working pressure of 200 PSI or greater,
and as manufactured by Mueller Company, M&H Valve Company, or
an equal approved by the Engineer. All valves for the proposed
work shall be from a single manufacturer.
B.
Underground Service: furnished with a 2" square operating
nut, and install a valve extension stem on all valves which
have more than 4 feet of cover. The operating nut with the
extension shall have a cover of no more than 30". The extension
shall be a Mueller A-26441 or approved equal. Each buried
valve shall be seated in concrete and furnished with a valve
box assembly.
2.5 VALVE BOXES:
A.
Valve boxes for gate valves shall be Tyler 6860 Series with
#6 round base for valves 8" and smaller and #160 for valves 10"
and larger or an equal approved by the Engineer. Caps for
valve boxes shall have the word "Water" cast in legible
letters on the top.
B.
Cast iron valve boxes shall be furnished and installed
March 17, 2004
02713 - 4
Water Distribution System
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
for all underground valves.
C.
The contractor shall also provide the necessary extension
and be responsible for adjusting the valve boxes to the
proper length to conform to the ground surface.
2.6 TRACE TAPE:
A.
Trace tape shall be at least 3 inches wide, 5.0 mils overall
thickness, plastic film with aluminum core.
B.
Tape shall be resistant to alkalis, acids and other
destructive agents found in the soil.
C.
Tape shall be painted blue on one side for water and shall
have 1 inch high letters painted continuously on one side
which reads, "CAUTION: BURIED WATER LINE BELOW" or other words
to this effect.
D.
Tape
shall
be
"TRACELINE",
as
manufactured
by
THOR
Enterprises, Inc., Sun Prairie, WI, or equal as approved by
the Engineer.
2.7 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT CORROSION PROTECTION:
A.
Wrap shall be of virgin polyethylene not less than 8 mils in
thickness, formed in tubes or sheets as may be required.
Naturally pigmented material may be used where exposure to
ultra violet light will be less than 48 hours. Otherwise the
material shall be pigmented with 2 to 2 1/2 percent of well
dispersed carbon black with stabilizers.
B.
Secure polywrap with 2 inch wide pressure sensitive plastic
tape not less than 10 mils thick.
C.
Polyethylene wrap shall be furnished and installed in
accordance with AWWA C105 (ANSI A21.5).
2.8 THRUST BLOCK:
A.
Portland cement concrete, minimum 4 bag mix.
B.
Compressive strength at 28 days to be 2,000 psi minimum.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CLEANING PIPES:
A.
Thoroughly clean pipes and fittings before they are laid. Pipe
shall be kept clean until the acceptance of the completed work.
Clean each length of pipe or fittings
March 17, 2004
02713 - 5
Water Distribution System
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
inside, just before being lowered into the trench, to remove
all dirt, dust or any other foreign matter. The pipe or
fitting after being thoroughly cleaned shall then be carefully
lowered into the trench so as to exclude dirt and other
foreign matter while jointing it to the other pipe.
B.
At the close of each work day or during any period when the
job is not being actively pursued, the end of the pipe shall
be tightly sealed with an expansion type stopper or other
approved type of watertight seal so that no foreign substance
or water may enter the line. This seal shall be kept in place
until pipe laying is again resumed.
C.
Under no circumstances shall pipe be used that has been
contaminated inside with oil, gasoline, kerosene or any other
similar liquid that will soak into the cement mortar lining
or soften a bituminous coating. In the event that any foreign
matter or water should inadvertently get into the pipe that
has already been laid, work shall immediately cease and no
more pipe be laid until the contamination has been removed to
the satisfaction of the Engineer.
3.2 LAYING PIPE:
A.
Only proper and suitable tools and appliances for the safe
and convenient handling and laying of pipes and fittings
shall be used. Pipe, valves, and fittings shall be carefully
handled and lowered into the trench. Under no circumstances
shall any pipe or fittings be dumped or rolled into the trench
or be allowed to drop against the pipe or fittings already in
the trench. Great care shall be taken to prevent the pipe
lining or coating, if specified, from being damaged, and any
lining or coating damaged in any way shall be repaired by the
Contractor to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer. The
ends of the pipe shall abut against each other in such a
manner that there no shoulder or unevenness on the inside of
the main.
B.
Special care shall be taken to insure that the pipes are well
bedded on a solid foundation, and defects due to settlement
shall be repaired by the Contractor at his own expense. Bell
holes shall be dug sufficiently large to insure the making of
proper joints and to insure that the pipe will rest on the full
length of the barrel. Special precaution shall be exercised
to prevent any pipe from resting on rock.
C.
Whenever a pipe or fitting requires cutting to fit in the
March 17, 2004
02713 - 6
Water Distribution System
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
line or to bring it to the required location, the work shall
be done in a satisfactory manner with an approved cutting
tool or tools which will leave a smooth end at right angles
to the axis of the pipe and not otherwise damage the pipe or
lining.
D.
Pipe shall be laid on a straight and uniform grade, without
dips or humps between the terminal elevations shown on the
plans. The pipe shall not vary more than 1/10 foot from true
line and not more than 2/100 foot from the grade.
E.
No springing of joints will be allowed for changing the
direction of the pipeline except by permission or direction
or as shown on the plans. Pipe, fittings and valves shall be
secured in place by concrete foundation or thrust blocks or
by strapping.
F.
All cast iron pipe or ductile iron pipe, valves and fittings
installed underground shall be polyethylene wrapped. The
polyethylene tubing shall be cut to lengths approximately two
feet longer than the pipe sections. With the pipe suspended
from the center, the tube shall be slipped over the spigot end
and bunched up between the point of support and the spigot
end. After the pipe is installed into the bell of the
adjacent pipe, the pipe shall be lowered to the trench bottom
and the supporting sling removed from the center of the pipe.
The pipe shall then be raised at the bell end enough to allow
the tube to be slipped along the full length of the barrel
with enough left at each end to overlap the adjoining pipe
about one foot. A shallow bell hole must be made at each joint
to facilitate installation of the polyethylene wrap. Pull the
bunched up polyethylene wrap from the preceding length of
pipe, slip it over the end of the new length of pipe, and
secure in place with one circumferential turn of tape plus
enough overlap to assure firm adhesion. Then slip the end of
the polyethylene wrap from the new pipe section over the end
of first wrap until it overlaps the joint at the end of the
preceding length of pipe. Tape it in place. The loose
wrapping on the barrel of the pipe shall be pulled snugly
around the barrel of the pipe, and excess material folded over
the top of the pipe and the folds held in place by means of
short strips of adhesive tape, at about three feet intervals
along the pipe. Repair any rips, punctures or other damage to
the tube with the adhesive tape or pieces of tube material
secured with tape.
G.
Do not lay pipe in water, or when trench or weather are
unsuitable for work, except with permission of the Engineer.
Keep water out of the trench until jointing is
March 17, 2004
02713 - 7
Water Distribution System
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
complete.
H.
No more than 300 linear feet of trench shall be left open
during construction and pipe shall be laid up to the ditching
machine at the end of each day.
I.
Minimum cover on water lines shall be 42 inches from final
grade unless otherwise specified or shown on the plans or
required to clear obstructions. Contractor shall verify final
grades to determine depth of installation. There will be no
additional compensation for laying and backfilling water pipes
at depths greater than shown on the plans.
J.
When non-metallic pipelines are to be laid in this project,
the Contractor shall furnish and lay, above the pipeline, a
continuous strip of metallic identification trace tape. The
Contractor shall backfill over nonmetallic pipelines to a
depth of not more than 24 inches nor less than 12 inches from
the top of the ditch section. The backfilling material shall
be maintained to a generally uniform level. All machine
tamping and other compacting activities shall be completed to
this point in the backfilling before the marking tape is
placed in the trench. The tape shall be laid with the painted
side, which shall also be the side with the identification
lettering on it, in the "up" position. The tape shall be laid
in the flat position and kept there until backfill is
accomplished.
The
Contractor
shall
then
complete
the
backfilling operation in such a manner that the tape is not
cut, crimped, ruptured, or separated by the backfilling work.
K.
Install water line in accordance with AWWA C600 and plumbing
codes unless otherwise noted in the contract documents.
Install PVC pipe in accordance with ASTM D2774 and plumbing
codes unless otherwise noted.
3.3 JOINTS:
A.
Threaded Joints: Cut piping carefully, ream, thread and work
into place without springing. Use a small amount of prepared
pipe thread lubricant on outside threads only.
B.
Flanged Joints:
1.
When bolting flanged joints, take care to insure
that there is no restraint on opposite end of pipe
or fittings which would prevent uniform gasket
compression or cause unnecessary stress in flanges.
2.
Keep one flange free to move in any direction while
flange bolts are being tightened.
3.
Do not pack or assemble bell and spigot joints
March 17, 2004
02713 - 8
Water Distribution System
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
affected by flanged joints until all such flanged
joints have been tightened.
4. Tighten bolts gradually and at a uniform rate, so that
gasket compression is uniform over entire area of
gasket.
C. Mechanical Joints: The mechanical joint shall consist of a
rubber gasket, a cast iron or ductile iron gland ring and Tbolts and hexagonal nuts as specified.
1.
Before any joint is made, the contractor shall exercise
particular care to insure the outside of the spigot and
inside of the bell are entirely free of oil, tar and
greasy substances to insure tight bond.
2.
The joint shall be made according to the manufacturer's
recommendation.
3.
Torque shall be in accordance with AWWA C111.
4.
Deflection from a straight line, either in the
horizontal or vertical plane, shall not exceed the
tolerances established by the manufacturer.
D. Push on Joints: The joint shall consist of a circular rubber
gasket which fits into a specially designed bell or socket end
of the pipe and a specially prepared lubricant.
1.
The gasket seat and the gasket shall be thoroughly
cleaned and should be wiped with a cloth and a thin film
of lubricant applied to the inside surface of the gasket
that will come in contact with the entering pipe. Use
only the lubricant furnished with the pipe. In no case
shall a mineral oil or petroleum base lubricant be
used.
2.
The plain end of the pipe to be j ointed shall be
thoroughly cleaned and started into the socket so that
it is in contact with the gasket. In some cases it may
be desirable to apply a thin film of lubricant to the
outside of the plain end. The joint is then completed
by exerting sufficient force on the entering pipe so
that its plain end is moved past the gasket until it
makes contact with the base of the socket. Any approved
method may be used to home the pipe.
3.
Deflection from a straight line, either in the
horizontal or vertical plane, shall not exceed the
tolerances established by the manufacturer.
E.
Joints
for
glued
PVC
shall
manufacturer's recommendations.
be
in
accordance
with
3.4 FITTINGS AND VALVES:
A.
Fittings, main line valves, and valve boxes shall be
March 17, 2004
02713 - 9
Water Distribution System
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
placed along the water mains where shown on the plans or where
designated by the Engineer in accordance with the requirements
as provided elsewhere in these specifications. Valves and
fittings shall be installed in accordance with AWWA C600
and/or AWWA C500.
B.
Fittings and valves shall be set and joined to pipe in the
manner heretofore specified for cleaning, laying and jointing
pipe.
C.
All fittings shall be installed with 2000 psi concrete thrust
blocking to prevent separation at joints. Blocking shall be
placed so as to rest against firm, undisturbed trench walls.
The supporting area for each block shall be at least as great
as that indicated on the plans or directed by the Engineer and
shall be sufficient to withstand the thrust, including water
hammer, which may develop. Blocking shall not extend beyond
any joints.
D.
All valves shall be carefully handled and lowered into
position by mechanical equipment in such a manner as to
prevent damage to all parts of the valves.
E.
Each valve shall be placed in the proper position with the
operating stem truly vertical and shall be securely held until
all connections have been made.
F.
All valves shall be installed with 2000 psi concrete cushion
to support and anchor valve.
G.
Where valves are placed on the end of a pipe line a cast iron
plug shall be place and secured in the exposed bell before the
trench is refilled.
H.
A valve box shall be provided for every nut operated valve.
The valve box shall be carefully placed and set at a right
angle to the water main.
I.
The valve box shall not transmit shock or stress to the valve
and shall be centered and plumb over the wrench nut of the
valve, with the box cover flush with the surface of the
finished ground or set to the elevation shown on the drawings.
J.
In tamping the backfill around the valve, special care shall
be taken to keep the box in place and to have it firmly
supported so as to avoid settlement. Any box which is found
out of place or which is not firmly supported shall be dug up
and reset in a satisfactory manner.
March 17, 2004
02713 - 10
Water Distribution
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
K.
Valve boxes shall be clean and free of dirt, rocks and
debris, and capped prior to final inspection by the Engineer.
L.
All valves and fittings shall be wrapped in polyethylene in
the same manner as described in these specifications. Wrapping
shall be from flat sheets of polyethylene material. The
sheets shall be passed under valves and fittings. Edges shall
be brought together, folded twice and secured with adhesive
tape. Repair any rips, punctures or other damage to the sheet
with the adhesive tape or pieces of sheets secured with tape.
3.5 HYDROSTATIC TEST:
A.
Test pipe in accordance with all applicable codes. At a
minimum the following tests are required.
B.
The testing shall be performed by raising the pressure in the
various sections of the line. Testing for the water line shall
be in accordance with AWWA standards. The test pressure for
the water domestic lines shall be 150 psi. If a conflict
exists between these specifications and the referenced
standard, the referenced standard shall govern.
C.
Tests to be conducted between Monday and Friday, and all
tests must conclude by 5:00 p.m.
D.
The testing shall be performed after the pipe has been laid
and
backfilled
or
partially
backfilled,
but
prior
to
replacement of pavement. The Engineer has the option to
require each valved section of newly laid pipe to be
subjected to a hydrostatic pressure test. The Contractor has
the option to install plugs and bulkheads at intermediate
locations between main line valves for the purpose of testing
shorter lengths of pipe.
E.
Each valved section of pipe shall be slowly filled with water
to the specified test pressure measured at the point of
lowest point. The water shall be applied by means of a pump
connected to the pipe in a satisfactory manner. The pump,
pipe connections, and all necessary apparatus including
gauges and meters shall be furnished by the Contractor and
make tests at his expense.
F.
The contractor must make arrangements with the City of
Canadian or the Owner for water. The Owner does not provide
water for construction, testing, or flushing.
G.
The duration of each test for the domestic water line shall
be 4 hours unless otherwise approved by the
March 17, 2004
02713 - 11
Water Distribution
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
Engineer. The line shall be re-pressurized at 30 minute
intervals and when the line pressure falls to 130 psi.
H.
Care shall be used to see that all air vents are open during
the filling.
I.
After the line, or section thereof, has been completely
filled, it shall be allowed to stand under a slight pressure
for at least 24 hours to allow the escape of air from air
pockets. During this period, the bulkheads, valves and
connections shall be examined for leaks. If any are found,
these shall be repaired before measuring the leakage during
the test. The water necessary to maintain the test pressure
shall be measured through a meter or by other means
satisfactory to the Architect/Engineer.
J.
Before applying the specified test pressure, all air shall be
expelled from the pipe. In the event it is necessary to expel
air from high points other than where valves are provided, the
Contractor may tap the line for this purpose and afterwards,
tightly plug the tap.
K.
During the last 2 hours of the test, the entire route of the
pipeline shall be inspected to locate any leaks or breaks.
Any defective joints, cracked or defective pipe, fittings, or
valves discovered in consequence of this pressure test shall
be removed and replaced with sound material and the test
shall be repeated until satisfactory results are obtained.
Any and all noticeable leaks shall be repaired, regardless of
whether the actual leakage is within the allowable.
L.
No pipe installation will be acceptable until or unless the
leakage is less than the allowable quantities as outlined
below:
Cast Iron and Ductile Iron Pipe:
The allowable leakage is defined as, L =
SD(P).5
where:
133,200
L = the allowable leakage in gallons per hour S =
the length of pipe tested, in feet
D = the nominal diameter of the pipe in inches P =
the test pressure during the test in psi (gauge)
This formula comes from AWWA Spec C-600-87, pp. 1719.
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe:
The allowable leakage is defined as,
L =
Nx Dx ( P )
.5
7400
1.
2.
March 17, 2004
02713 - 12
Water Distribution
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
Where:
L = the allowable leakage in gallons per hour
N = the number of joints in the length of pipeline
tested
D = the nominal diameter of the pipe in inches P =
the test pressure during the test in psi (gauge)
This formula comes from the Certainteed Vinyl-Iron PVC
Municipal Water Handbook Installation Guide, pp. 9 and
10.
M.
Sections failing to meet this test will be rejected and will
not be accepted until they have met the above requirements.
Upon completion of all sterilization and testing, all valves
are to be opened, and all water from the system will be
flushed until it is clean, and fresh water has replaced the
water used for sterilization.
N.
Leakage is defined as the quantity of water to be injected
into the newly laid pipe, or any valved section of it,
necessary to maintain the specified test pressure after the
pipe has been filled with water and the air expelled.
3.6 STERILIZATION AND FLUSHING:
A.
Flushing and disinfection of water mains shall be in
accordance with Texas Commission on Environmental Quality,
Water Hygiene Division Regulations and in accordance with
AWWA C651. Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment, and
chemicals necessary for the proper sterilization of the
pipelines. The pipes shall be sterilized by using a
chlorinating agent before being placed in service.
B.
After the applicable retention period, heavily chlorinated
water should not remain in prolonged contact with pipe. The
heavily chlorinated water shall be flushed from the main
until chlorine measurements show that the concentration in
the water leaving the main is no higher than that generally
prevailing in the system or is acceptable for domestic use.
C.
The environment to which the chlorinated water is to be
discharged shall be inspected. If there is any question that
the
chlorinated
discharge
will
cause
damage
to
the
environment, then a reducing agent shall be applied to the
water to be wasted to neutralize thoroughly the chlorine
residual remaining in the water.
D.
After final flushing and before placing in service,
bacteriological analysis will be conducted by the
March 17, 2004
02713 - 13
Water Distribution
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
Contractor to determine the efficiency of the disinfection
procedure. Samples shall be delivered to the City of
Amarillo
Environmental
Laboratory
for
testing.
If
contamination is found, the disinfection procedure shall be
repeated. Pipelines will have one test per each 1000 feet at
locations determined by the Engineer. Contractor will be
required to tap and plug line at test locations.
END OF SECTION
March 17, 2004
02713 - 14
Water Distribution
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
SECTION 02730
SANITARY SEWERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A.
Furnish all labor, material, tools, equipment, and services
for all sanitary sewers, in accordance with provisions of the
Contract Documents.
B.
Completely coordinate work with other trades.
C.
Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and
install
all
supplementary
or
miscellaneous
items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A.
Install in accordance with ASTM D2321, ANSI C600, or City of
Canadian Plumbing Code as applicable.
B.
American Water Works Association Standards and ASTM
standards.
C.
Furnish alignment and elevation stakes at an acceptable
interval showing the difference in elevation from top of hub
to flow line of pipe.
D.
Construction standards: Texas Commission on Environmental
Quality 30 TAC Chapter 317, "Design Criteria for Sewerage
Systems",
"City
of
Canadian
Standard
Specifications",
"Uniform Plumbing Code", and City of Canadian plumbing code.
Should conflict arise between standard specifications of
government agencies mentioned herein and Contract Documents,
the more stringent shall govern.
E.
Remove all pipe damaged during shipment or installation from
job site.
1.3 JOB CONDITIONS:
A. Verify locations and elevations of existing and new proposed
underground utilities prior to trenching excavation of sewer
line.
March 17, 2004
02730 - 1
Sanitary Sewers
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
B.
Protect existing structures and utilities from damage.
Repair if damaged by this work.
C.
Lengths indicated on drawings are for information only.
Furnish lengths as required.
D.
Verify accuracy, location, and depth of each existing and
proposed utility prior to trenching or tunneling. If pipe
adjustment is necessary due to location of other utilities,
assess alteration impact on other utilities and secure
approval from Engineer.
E. Perform no pipe work in fill areas until embankment or fill has
been completed to at least 2 feet above top of pipe and has
been properly compacted.
F. Building plumbing contractor and site utility contractor for
the sanitary sewer system shall interface with building
drains 5 feet from outside face of building.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A.
Submittals are required for the following:
1.
Pipe and fittings
2.
Cleanouts
3.
Metallic marking tape
4.
Adapters
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GRAVITY SANITARY SEWER PIPE:
A.
Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe and Fittings. ASTM D 3034 for
diameters greater than 6 inches and less than 15 inches.
Minimum wall dimension ratio shall be SDR 26.
B.
Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe and Fittings. Type 1, Grade 1,
Schedule 40 conforming to ASTM D1785 and bearing the NSF
seal for diameters 6 inches and less.
2.2 JOINTS:
A.
PVC: Gravity ASTM D3212.
B.
PVC: Glue ASTM D2672
2.3 FITTINGS:
March 17, 2004
02730 - 2
Sanitary Sewers
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
A.
Fittings for ductile iron pipe or pressure rated PVC pipe 16"
or smaller shall meet the requirements of AWWA C110 or AWWA
C153 mechanical joint SSB-ductile. Fittings shall have a
working pressure of not less than working pressure of the
pipe. Fittings shall have same lining and coating as ductile
iron pipe.
B.
Fittings for gravity PVC pipe shall meet the same
specifications as the pipe.
2.4 JOINTS, COUPLINGS, AND CONNECTIONS:
A.
PVC pipe with compression joints shall meet the requirements
of ASTM D3139. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
B.
PVC Glue Joints.
Belled ends shall conform to ASTM D2672
and installed in accordance with ASTM D2855.
2.5 SANITARY SEWER CLEANOUTS AND COVERS:
A.
B.
Provide two way cleanout fitting for 4 inch and 6 inch pipe
and combination "Y" and eighth bend for pipe sizes 8 inch and
larger.
Risers to be 4 inch for 4 inch pipe and 6 inch for 6 inch
pipe and larger.
C.
In paved areas use Wade W-6000-Z series or equal.
D.
In unpaved areas Wade W-8550 series or equal. 2.6
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE:
A.
Portland cement with maximum of 9 percent tricalcium
aluminate and sulfate resistant.
B.
Concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3000
psi at 28 days and shall be as specified in concrete
specifications. Flyash will not be permitted.
C.
Reinforcing steel shall be as specified in applicable
specifications.
2.7 TRACE TAPE:
A.
Trace tape shall be at least 3 inches wide, 5.5 mils overall
thickness, plastic film with aluminum core.
B.
Tape shall be resistant to alkalis, acids and other
March 17, 2004
02730 - 3
Sanitary Sewers
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
C.
D.
destructive agents found in the soil.
Tape shall be painted green on one side for sewer and shall
have 1 inch high letters painted continuously on one side
which reads, "CAUTION: BURIED SEWER LINE BELOW" or other
words to this effect.
Tape
shall
be
"TRACELINE",
as
manufactured
by
THOR
Enterprises Inc., Sun Prairie, WI, or equal approved by the
Engineer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPE INSTALLATION:
A.
Install pipe in accordance with ASTM D2321 or ASTM
D2774
as
appropriate and in accordance with
manufactures
installation
procedures
and
recommendations.
3.2 LAYING PIPE:
A.
All pipe shall be kept clean and free from debris while
laying. At the end of each day's operation, or when necessary
to stop work for more than 3 hours, all exposed open ends
shall be securely plugged to prevent the entrance of debris,
rodents, and water.
B.
Sewer pipe shall be laid with bell or coupling ends up grade.
C.
Check alignment and grade of each joint of pipe after setting
by measurement from string line, laser beam target or other
means approved by the Engineer.
D.
The pipe shall be laid to line and grade shown of the plans
or as required by the applicable codes if not shown. Pipe
shall not vary more than 0.1 foot from the true line nor more
than 0.02 foot from the true grade.
E.
All pipe shall be protected during handling against
impact shocks and free falls. Prior to laying, the pipe shall
be carefully inspected for compliance with the specifications
and pipe which does not fully comply with the specifications
shall be rejected and immediately removed from the site of
the work by the contractor.
F.
Do not lay pipe in water or when trench or weather conditions
are unsuitable for work.
March 17, 2004
02730 - 4
Sanitary Sewers
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
G. Bedding shall conform to the specifications in the Section on
Excavation, Trenching and Backfilling for Utilities and as
shown on the plans.
H.
The embedment shall be placed to a grade slightly higher
than required for the grade of the pipe and the pipe shall be
brought to grade by tamping or by the removal of the slight
excess of material under the pipe. Adjustment to grade and
line shall be made by scraping away or filling in with
embedment material. Wedging up or blocking up of pipe will
not be permitted. Each pipe section will have a uniform
bearing on the embedment for the full length of the pipe.
I.
After the pipe has been placed and jointed, the embedment
shall be brought to the full depth required. After embedment
is brought to full depth, the trench shall be backfilled as
necessary to hold the pipe firmly in position, such
backfilling to be done as herein specified.
J.
Concrete embedment, where required, that is placed after the
pipe is laid, shall be tamped to prevent lifting the pipe
out of alignment or grade. Concrete embedment shall have
acquired its initial set before backfilling over the
concrete.
3.3 JOINTING:
A.
Prior to making pipe joints, all surfaces of the portions of
the pipes to be joined shall be cleaned, dried and prepared
in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations.
B.
Joints and jointing shall be such that they will make a
continuous and uniform line of pipe, compatible with the
tolerances allowed under permissible variations of dimensions
for type of pipe furnished.
C.
It is the Contractor's responsibility to prepare best
quality
joints
in
accordance
with
the
manufactures
recommendations.
3.4 SANITARY SEWER SERVICE TAPS:
A.
Construct service tap in accordance with City requirements.
B.
Contractor shall verify location, pipe size and material
with mechanical drawing prior to installing
March 17, 2004
02730 - 5
Sanitary Sewers
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
sewer service.
C.
Sewer cleanouts to be installed at locations shown on plans
and as required by plumbing codes.
3.5 CLEANOUT STRUCTURES:
A.
Install cleanouts at locations shown on plans and where
required by plumbing code.
B.
Tamp backfill around and above pipe in layers not exceeding
4 inches depth so that no settlement occurs.
C.
Construct concrete pad around cleanout at final grade
elevation. Concrete pad to have a minimum strength of 3,000
psi in 28 days.
3.6 TRACE TAPE:
A.
When non-metallic pipelines are to be laid in this project
the Contractor shall furnish and lay, above the pipeline, a
continuous strip of metallic identification tape.
B.
The Contractor shall backfill over non-metallic pipelines to
a depth of not more than 24 inches nor less than 12 inches
from the top of the ditch section. He shall maintain the
backfilling material to a generally uniform level. All
machine tamping, jetting and other compacting activities
shall be completed to this point in the backfilling before
the marking tape is placed in the trench.
C.
The tape is laid in the trench in the general center of the
ditch, over the top of the pipeline. The tape is held in
position by the spot placement of backfill materials over it
to keep it from sliding to the sides and/or from being blown
about in the ditch by the wind.
D.
The tape shall be laid with the painted side, which shall
also be the side with the identification lettering on it, in
the "up" position. The tape shall be laid in the flat
position and kept there until backfill is accomplished.
E.
The Contractor shall then complete the backfilling operation
in manner that the tape is not cut, crimped, ruptured, or
separated by the backfilling work.
March 17, 2004
02730 - 6
Sanitary Sewers
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
3.7 SEPARATION DISTANCES:
A.
Water lines and sewer lines shall be separated.
B.
Separation distance shall be in accordance with all
applicable codes and ordinances
3.8 TESTING PIPE:
A.
Tests will be performed on sections of the gravity flow
sanitary sewer main by the appropriate methods as required
by applicable codes and ordinances.
B.
At a minimum tests shall be as listed below:
1.
Air Test
C.
Test pipe in sections.
Tests may be conducted by Contractor
or an independent testing firm.
D.
Before testing, thoroughly clean pipe. Seal off section of
pipe to be tested at each manhole connection and lateral if
any. Adequately brace all plugs.
E.
Air Test Procedures.
The Contractor shall test the gravity
lines in this project by the air test method.
1.
Test in accordance with ASTM C828, ASTM C924 or
other appropriate procedures. Air, at low pressure,
will be introduced into the plugged line until a
pressure of approximately 4.0 PSI (gauge) is reached.
After this pressure has been reached, the pressure will
be allowed to stabilize and should be reduced to 3.5
PSI before starting the test.
2.
When the pressure is at 3.5 PSI (gauge), disconnect the
air supply and begin timing test. Refer to air test
table to determine length of time section under test
must sustain while not losing in excess of 1 PSI as
monitored by test gage.
3.
For sections of pipe up to 36-inch average inside
diameter, the minimum time allowable for the pressure
to drop from 3.5 pounds per square inch gauge to 2.5
pounds per square inch gauge shall be computed from the
following equation:
T = 0 . 0850 (D) (K) / (Q) ,
where
T = time for pressure to drop 1.0 pound per square inch
gauge in seconds
K = 0.000419(D)(L), but not less than 1.0
D = average inside diameter in inches
L = length of line in feet of same pipe size being
March 17, 2004
02730 - 7
Sanitary Sewers
Canadian, Texas Visitor Center
Canadian, Texas
tested
Q = rate of loss, 0.0015 cubic feet per minute per
square foot internal surface shall be used.
4. Since a K value of less than 1.0 shall not be used, there
are minimum testing times for each pipe diameter as
outlined below:
Pipe
Minimum
Length
Time
Diameter
Time
for Minimum for Longer
Time
Length
(inches)
seconds)
(feet)
(seconds)
4
227
597
0.855(L)
6
340
398
0.855(L)
8
454
298
1.520(L)
10
567
239
2.374(L)
12
680
199
3.419(L)
15
850
159
5.342(L)
18
1020
133
7.693(L)
21
1190
114
10.471(L)
24
1360
100
13.676(L)
27
1530
88
17.309(L)
30
1700
80
21.369(L)
F.
G.
Contractor shall furnish all equipment and materials
necessary to successfully perform tests.
Section of pipe to be tested shall be linear runs between
points of connection.
END OF SECTION
March 17, 2004
02730 - 8
Sanitary Sewers
Canadian Visitors Center
Canadian, Texas
02810-1
DIVISION 2 SITE WORK
02810 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
A.
B.
1.02
A.
1.03
A.
1.04
A.
1.05
A.
1.06
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions,
Supplementary Conditions, Special Conditions, and Division 1 Sections,
if any, apply to the work specified in this section.
SECTION 02930/31 LAWN GRASS SEEDED/SODDED
SECTION 02950 TREES, SHRUBS AND GROUND COVERS
SECTION 02970 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE AND REPLACEMENT
SCOPE OF WORK
The work under this section of the specifications entitled "Irrigation
System" consists of furnishing all materials, supervision, labor,
equipment, appliances and services necessary for and incidental to
completing all operations in connection with these specifications and
the applicable drawings, and subject to the terms of the Contract. In
general the work shall include, but not be limited to, the following
within the Contract limit line.
DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
The drawings and specifications are intended to describe a complete
work and are essential parts of the contract. A requirement occurring
in any of them is binding. In case of discrepancies, plans shall govern
over specifications. The contractor shall not take advantage of any
apparent omission in the plans and specifications and the Landscape
Architect shall be permitted to make such corrections or interpretations
as may be deemed necessary for the fulfillment of the intent of the
plans and specifications. In the event the contractor discovers an
apparent error or discrepancy, he shall immediately call this to the
attention of the Landscape Architect. Manufacturer's specifications
and installation instructions of all equipment supplied shall become
part of these specifications. If additional sprinkler heads are necessary
to provide full and complete coverage, they will be provided and
installed by the contractor with no additional cost to the owner.
SITE INSPECTION
Before submitting his bid, the Irrigation Contractor shall visit the site and
examine all existing conditions on which his work might depend. He
shall report to the Landscape Architect any condition, which might
prevent him from installing his equipment in the manner intended.
SUBSTITUTIONS
Substitutions of materials will not be permitted.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
Prior to final acceptance, the contractor shall supply to the owner an
operations manual complete with manufacturer's catalog sheets fully
describing the performance of the installed equipment.
Canadian Visitors Center
Canadian, Texas
1.07
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
02810-2
WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE
Materials and workmanship shall be fully guaranteed for one(1) year after
final acceptance. Replacement of defective materials or repairs of work
shall be done at no expense to the owner during this first year after
installation, except repairs or replacements necessitated by damage
beyond the contractor's control.
Maintenance of the system, i.e. raising and lowering heads to compensate
for lawn and shrub growth, cleaning and adjustment of heads, shall be
given to the owner for one year after completion of the installation as a
part of this contract.
Backfilling of all excavations shall be guaranteed. If at any time during the
one year period of warranty, trenches should settle, the contractor shall
return and repair any settling where excavation was made by him at no
expense to the owner and as part of this contract. However, the
responsibility of the contractor shall not include washing due to rain.
Maintenance and guarantee as stated above do not include alterations
necessitated by re-landscaping, addition of trees, or the like. Further
maintenance does not include trimming grass around heads or any service
required due to lack of owner's maintenance of the lawn and plants. It is
also expressly understood that the guarantee and maintenance do not
cover mechanical damage (breakage) or any repairs needed for causes
beyond the control of the contractor.
Water will be available for all necessary testing, flushing and jetting at no
expense to the contractor.
Electrical supply of 115 volt AC will be the responsibility of the contractor.
This shall be coordinated with owner's staff and/or the General Contractor.
The Electrical Engineering drawings indicate primary power for the
controller will be provided at the power panel.
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.02
A.
B.
PIPE
Polyvinyl chloride pipe (PVC) shall conform to ASTMD2240.
1. Marking and identification of all PVC pipe shall be continuously and
permanently marked with the following information: Manufacturer's
name, pipe size, type of pipe and material, SDT number, product
standard number and the National Sanitation Foundation seal.
2. All fittings shall be Schedule 40 and of the same material as the PVC
pipe specified.
Sprinkler mains are considered that portion of pipe from water source to
operating valves. This portion of the piping is subject to surges, being a
closed portion of the irrigation system. Pipe to be Class 200PVC and
Schedule 40 PVC solvent welded.
Lateral piping is that portion of the piping from operating valves to the
irrigation heads. This portion of the piping is not subject to surges, being an
"open end" portion of the irrigation system. Pipe to Class 200PVC or
PR315PVC.
Flexible polyvinyl chloride hose (PVC) shall conform to ASTMD2287.
1. All flexible polyvinyl chloride hose is to be “Excalibur” brand, or
approved equal.
COPPER TUBING AND FITTINGS
If required, copper tubing shall be hard, straight lengths of domestic
manufacture only, no copper tube of foreign extrusion. Copper is to be
Type "M".
Fittings shall be cast brass or wrought copper.
Canadian Visitors Center
Canadian, Texas
02810-3
2.03 WIRE
A.
B.
2.04
A.
B.
C.
2.05
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Wire shall be single strand copper wire, Type U.F. with 4/64" vinyl insulation,
14 gauge for 24 VAC circuit wires and 12 gauge for common wires,
minimum which is Underwriters Laboratory approved for direct
underground burial when used in a National Electrical Code Class II Circuit.
All irrigation wiring shall be direct burial with coiled loops at 50’ intervals
minimum.
AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER CONTROLLER
Controller shall be a Rainbird LX Plus Series 12 Station. The controller shall be
contained in an industrial grade, rainproof, plastic, high-impact, NEMA 4,
wall mount case suitable for outdoor use with a lockable cover. Operations
of the control shall be fully automatic, incorporating 24-hour clock and 7day calendar to start the sprinkling cycle. The control shall be capable of
repeating the watering cycles as required with a maximum delay between
the ending of one cycle and the beginning of the next not to exceed 2
hours. Control shall be semi-automatic operation whereby the automatic
cycle may be started independent of the clock (optional) and manual
operation whereby any station may be operating by hand independent of
all timing mechanism. The choice of automatic day or hour programming
shall be available to the operator on the face of the control panel without
the use of tools. Controller shall have built-in electrical surge protection and
a power failure backup system that will maintain the irrigation program for
up to 7 days by means of a rechargeable 9-volt nickel cadmium battery
and in the event of backup battery failure, a default program that will
initiate watering after power is restored. Controller is to have lighting and
surge protection installed by the contractor as recommended by the
manufacturer.
Wall mount controller as detailed and in location as shown on the
drawings.
Electrical service to the Controller shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor. An electrical supply is shown on the Electrical Engineering
drawings and will be available for use. All hardwiring to the controller shall
be encased in rigid conduit and attached to the adjacent structure/panel
with appropriate anchors.
ELECTRIC VALVES
Automatic control valves shall be of the diaphragm type using normally
closed principle. A normally closed solenoid valve operator using 24 volts
AC shall actuate the valve. The valve operator is to be mounted directly on
the control valve bonnet with all ports and bypass channels completely
internal.
Control valve diaphragms are to be of one-piece molded construction.
The control valve shall be manufactured incorporating an adjustable
pressure regulator device, which can be easily removed for cleaning and
service.
Control valves shall function manually (on and off) by means of a bleeder
valve on the bonnet assembly, without electrical connection to the
controller.
Control valve to be constructed with a built-in regulator to automatically
control the closing time of the valve and stainless steel pin to clean the
diaphragm orifice each time the valve operates.
The control valves shall be constructed so that the bonnet assembly and
the solenoid valve operator shall be finished with an epoxy coating for
waterproofing.
Canadian Visitors Center
Canadian, Texas
G.
2.06
A.
2.07
B.
2.08
A.
B.
2.09
A.
2.10
A.
B.
2.1 1
A.
02810-4
Automatic valves shall be Rainbird PEB Series, contamination Resistant, 24
VAC valves with a bronze body and cover attached with stainless steel
bolts. All valves will be size as noted on drawings in zone identification tag
and have pressure regulator unless otherwise noted on drawings.
SPRINKLER HEADS
Spray Heads: Rainbird 1804 PRS series 4” pop up spray heads with plastic
nozzles. Nozzles are to be 6’/8’/10’/12’/15’ and variable arc radii as
required to provide the necessary overlap to provide full and complete
coverage. Nozzles are to be Top Color-coded with quickly identify radius
and arc.
VALVE BOXES
A. Valve boxes are to be 10”diameter with high density plastic covers.
SLEEVES UNDER PAVEMENT
Provided and installed by Irrigation Contractor unless otherwise noted.
Sleeves are to be placed under all pavements greater than 6 feet in width
and are to extend a minimum of 12" beyond paved surfaced and are to
be PVC Schedule 40.
Coordinate the location and placement of all sleeves with the work of the
Concrete/Paving Contractor. Failure of Irrigation Contractor to locate and
use sleeves provided by the Concrete/Paving Contractor does not relieve
him of the responsibility for gaining passage under all pavements at his own
expense.
BACKFLOW PREVENTION DEVICE
Double Check Assembly Series 850, 2.0" size as manufactured by FEBCO
Industries or approved equal. It shall include 2 gate valves for isolating the
unit and a minimum of 2 test cocks for insuring proper operation. It shall be
designed for inline servicing and shall be installed below grade in the
supply manifold vault with a gravel sump and supports as detailed on
drawings.
FREEZE STAT DEVICE
Freeze-Clik Freeze Sensor: Hunter Model Number 401 or approved equal. It
shall be made of heavy-duty aluminum and a double epoxy sealed
element. It shall run off of 24 VAC, 6 amps, and have and UL Listing of Class
II Low Voltage (24 volt use only). The temperature set point will be 37
degrees F.
Coordinate a mounting location with Landscape Architect.
BLOCK VALVES
None required for this project.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
HEAD LAYOUT
A.
Lay out work as accurately as possible to the drawings. The drawings,
though carefully drawn, are generally diagrammatic to the extent that
joints, offsets and all fittings are not shown. The contractor shall be
responsible for full and complete coverage of all irrigated areas and shall
make any necessary minor adjustments at no additional cost to the owner.
Any major revisions to the irrigation system must be submitted in written,
Change Order form, along with any change in contract price.
Canadian Visitors Center
Canadian, Texas
02810-5
3.02 EXCAVATING AND TRENCHING
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.03
A.
B.
3.04
A.
3.05
A.
B.
C.
D.
Perform all excavations as required for the installation of the work included
under this section, including shoring of earth banks to prevent cave-ins.
Restore all surfaces, existing underground installation, etc., damaged or cut
as a result of the excavations to their original condition and in a manner
approved by the Owner.
Contractor shall be responsible for contacting all appropriate utility
companies, agencies, or authorities and for locating and protecting all
existing underground utilities and is solely responsible for any damage or
interruption to service caused by his excavations.
Coordinate any and all work under this section with Landscape Planting
Contractor to avoid conflicts with tree planting.
Trenches shall be wide enough to allow a minimum of 4 inches between
parallel pipe lines. Trenches for pipe lines shall be made of sufficient depths
to provide the minimum cover from finish grade as follows:
1.
24" minimum cover over main lines and control wires.
2.
18" minimum cover over lateral lines to heads.
Maintain all warning signs, shoring, barricades, flares and lanterns as
required by any local ordinances.
All piping is to be inspected by the project Landscape Architect, the
Landscape Irrigator or designated inspector prior to any backfilling.
Failure to obtain inspection prior to backfilling will be grounds for
uncovering any non-inspected, installed piping. There are no
exceptions.
BACKFILL
Backfilling shall be flooded and hand-tamped in order to prevent future
settling. This will be strictly enforced. All trenches and adjoining areas shall
be hand raked to leave grade in as good or better condition than before
installation. Irrigation contractor shall be responsible for any damage due
to settling of ditches.
Backfill material in all trenches to be under vehicular or pedestrian paved
areas, shall be cementuous flowable fill.
PIPING LAYOUT
The piping layout is understood to be diagrammatic and piping shall be
routed around existing and proposed trees and shrubs in such a manner as
to avoid damage to planting. No digging shall be done within the root ball
area of newly planted trees.
PIPE LINE ASSEMBLY
Install remote control valves where shown and group together where
practical; place no closer than 12 inches to walk edges, buildings, and
walls.
Plastic pipe and fittings shall be solvent welded using solvents and
methods as recommended by manufacturer of the pipe, except where
screwed or gasketed connections are required. Pipe and fittings shall be
thoroughly cleaned of dirt, dust and moisture before applying solvent with
a nonsynthetic bristle brush.
Pipe may be assembled and welded on the surface. Snake pipe from side
to side of trench bottom to allow for expansion and contraction.
Make all connections between plastic pipe and metal with threaded
fittings using plastic male adapters and Teflon tape or joint compound.
Canadian Visitors Center
Canadian, Texas
02810-6
3.06 SPRINKLER HEAD ASSEMBLY
A.
B.
3.07
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.08
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.09
A.
B.
C.
3.10
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.1 1
A.
Install all sprinkler heads as shown on drawings.
Install any additional heads as required to provide full and complete
coverage of all irrigated areas.
CLOSING OF PIPE AND FLUSHING OF LINES
Cap or plug all openings as soon as lines have been installed to prevent
the entrance of materials that would obstruct the pipe. Leave in place
until removal is necessary for completion of installation.
Thoroughly flush out all water lines before installing head nozzles and
valves.
Test in accordance with city plumbing codes and regulations as required.
Upon completion of the testing, the Contractor shall complete the
assembly and adjust sprinkler heads for proper distribution.
AUTOMATIC CONTROL WIRING
Install control wires, sprinkler mains and laterals in common trenches
wherever possible.
Install control wires at least 24" below finish grade. Provide looped slack at
valves to allow for contraction of wires.
Control wire splices will be allowed only on runs of 500 feet or more.
Connections shall be weatherproof and encased in a watertight splicing
system such as Spears DS-400, three-part or approved equal.
All wire passing under existing or future paving, construction, etc., shall be
encased in plastic conduit sleeving extending at least 12" beyond the
edges of paving or construction.
AUTOMATIC CONTROLLERS
Connect remote control valves to controller in a clockwise sequence to
correspond with station setting beginning with Stations 1,2,3,etc.
Irrigation Contractor shall be responsible for demonstrating and
familiarizing Owner or Owner's representative with the proper operation
and maintenance of controller and of the complete irrigation system.
Provide the Owner with three (3) keys to controller lock and two copies of
the manufacturer's owners/operators handbook.
BACKFILL AND COMPACTING
After system is operating and all required tests have been made, backfill
excavations and trenches with clean soil, free of rubbish.
Backfill for all trenches, regardless of the type of pipe covered, shall be
compacted to minimum 90% density.
Compact all trenches by thoroughly flooding the backfill. Water jetting
process may be used in those areas.
Dress off all areas to finish grades.
CLEAN UP
Remove from site, daily, all debris resulting from work of this section.
END OF SECTION 02810
Canadian Visitors Center
Canadian, Texas
02920-1
DIVISION 2 SITE WORK
02920 LANDSCAPE GRADING AND FILL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
B.
1.02
A.
B.
Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Special Conditions, and Division 1
Sections, if any, apply to the work specified in this section.
SECTION 02810 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM
SECTION 02930/02931 LAWN GRASSES
SUBMITTALS
Test Reports: The Contractor shall have a representative sample of the
proposed topsoil tested for its horticultural suitability for landscape use by
the Agricultural Extension Service (Texas A&M University System) Soil Testing
Laboratory or by an approved private laboratory. The soil test results shall
accurately
indicate
existing
nutrient
and
pH
content
and
recommendations for amendments required for optimum horticultural use.
The Contractor shall pay for this test.
Provide a representative sample of the proposed topsoil mix prior to
placement for approval by the Landscape Architect
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
TOPSOIL FOR TURF AREAS
A. Topsoil shall be a natural, fertile soil, possessing characteristics of representative
productive soils in the vicinity. It shall be obtained from naturally well
drained areas and shall not be excessively acid or alkaline or contain toxic
substances which may be harmful to plant growth. Topsoil shall be without
admixture of subsoil and shall contain a minimum of lumps, stones, stumps,
roots, or similar substances one inch or more in diameter. It shall be
collected from sites that are not infected with a growth of, or the
reproductive parts of noxious weeds. It shall not be stripped, collected or
deposited when wet. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish the
location where the topsoil is to be obtained to the Landscape Architect in
writing as well as a one-gallon sample of such soil. The Landscape Architect
shall determine quality topsoil.
2.02
QUANTITY
A.
The General Contractor shall be responsible for moving, placing, and finish
grading the additional soil depth required for the construction of the
elevations as shown on the plans within +/- 0.10ft.
B.
All topsoil and final grading necessary for completing the finish grade in
preparation for a planting bed is to be provided by the landscape
contractor.
Canadian Visitors Center
Canadian, Texas
02920-2
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
3.02
A.
3.03
A.
B.
3.04
A.
SITE PREPARATION
Remove all existing weeds, grass and debris by mechanically stripping
them from the site project limits. Minimize disturbing the current grade
around existing trees on site. Scrape only enough surface material to
remove turf grass and no deeper around existing trees. Protect the existing
trees from any and all mechanical damage during the grading process.
Grade site to within 0.10 feet of proposed contours prior to placing finish
grade topsoil.
PLACEMENT
Place approved, finished topsoil in lifts with sufficient compaction (80-90%
maximum) to prevent settlement, but loose enough to encourage plant
growth.
FINISH GRADING
Grade planting areas to a smooth, even surface. Roll, rake to remove
ridges and fill depressions as required to achieve finish grade.
All grades shall meet the approval of the Landscape Architect and/or Civil
Engineer prior to planting operations.
CLEANUP
Remove from the site, daily, all debris resulting from work under this Section.
END OF SECTION 02920
Canadian Visitors Center
Canadian, Texas
02931-1
DIVISION 2 SITE
WORK 02931
LAWNS SODDED
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
B.
The general provisions of the Contract including General Conditions,
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Sections, if any, apply to the work
specified in this Section.
SECTION 02920 LANDSCAPE GRADING AND FILL
SECTION 02810 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.01
A.
SOD
Frontier Turf type Tall Fescue, insect and disease free and having a
minimum of 1" topsoil attached to the roots and cut no more than 3
days prior to installation. Sod is to be locally grown by H Bar H Turf Farm,
6270 South Osage, Amarillo, Texas – 1-(806)-622-0861.
2.02
COMMERCIAL FERTILIZER
A.
B.
Clean, free flowing, organic based 25-3-9 element slow release nitrogen
timed release 22.5% 1 BDU Turf Grass Food.
Approved Manufacturers:
1. Warren's Turf Professionals
2. Nor-Am Chemical Company
3. or Approved Equal
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
C.
3.02
A.
B.
C.
SURFACE PREPARATION
Spray all weeds and existing grasses with "Roundup" herbicide (3% solution)
according to manufacturer's recommendations. Verify death of sprayed
plants before beginning earthwork. Repeat as necessary to obtain a 100%
weed/grass free planting bed.
Remove unnecessary grasses, weeds and hard fragments, stone and debris
larger than 3/8" diameter.
Grade grass areas to smooth, even surface. Roll, rake and remove ridges
and fill depressions as required to achieve finish grade. Final grade is to be 1
1/2" below adjacent paving and edgings. All grades shall meet approval of
the Landscape Architect before sodding.
SODDING
Lightly water the prepared grade, lay sod so edges are butted together
and all edges rolled down to produce an even and smooth consistent
cover, free of excessive bumps or undulations. Lay sod rolls in a “running
bond” or “split joint” pattern. Topdress seams with topsoil as necessary.
Broadcast fertilizer according to rates recommended by manufacturer.
Water within two (2) hours of installation and roll grass in two directions with
7 days of installation.
Canadian Visitors Center
Canadian, Texas
3.03
02931-2
WATERING
A. Apply water immediately following sodding operations with a fine mist to settle
sod and organic material. Landscape Contractor will be responsible for
keeping areas moist until and final acceptance.
3.04
A.
3.05
A.
FINAL ACCEPTANCE
Sod areas are to have a minimum of 100% coverage with no bare spots or
exposed seams and a smooth playing surface at the time of final
acceptance.
CLEANUP
Remove from site, daily, all debris resulting from work under this section.
END OF SECTION 02931
Canadian Visitors Center
Canadian, Texas
02950-1
DIVISION 2 SITE WORK
02950
TREES, SHRUBS AND GROUND COVERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
A.
B.
1.02
A.
1.03
A.
1.04
A.
1.05
A.
1.06
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
The general provisions of the Contract including General Conditions,
Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 Sections, if any, apply to the work
specified in this section.
SECTION 02810 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM
SECTION 02930/02931 LAWN GRASSES
SECTION 02970 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE & REPLACEMENT
SCOPE OF WORK
The work covered by this part of the specifications consists of furnishing all plants
and other materials, labor, equipment and appliances, and performing all
operations in connection with the planting of trees, shrubs, ground covers and
other such materials in strict accordance with these specifications and the
applicable drawings, and subject to the terms and conditions of the contract.
STANDARDS
The following documents, used as standards, are to be considered a part of these
specifications:
1.
American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature, "Standardized
Plant Names", Second Edition, 1942.
2.
American Association of Nurserymen, Inc., "American Standard for Nursery
Stock", Revised February 1973 or later.
SUBSTITUTIONS
Substitution of materials will not be permitted without the Landscape Architect's
prior written approval.
MAINTENANCE
Maintain all plantings after installation until final acceptance of each phase of
planting. Maintenance consists of mowing, watering, cultivation, weeding,
mulching, restaking, resetting of plants to proper grades and upright position,
retaining of water saucers, control of erosion and furnishing and applying the
necessary ingredients to keep plants free from insects, diseases and in optimum
condition.
GUARANTEE
Guarantee all plant material to be true in name and to be in a healthy, vigorous
condition at the end of the guarantee period.
Canadian Visitors Center
Canadian, Texas
B.
C.
1.07
A.
1.08
A.
1.09
A.
1.10
A.
02950-2
Guarantee period for plants after final acceptance is as follows:
1.
Trees .................................................................................................................... 1 year
2.
Shrubs, vines & ground covers ........................................................................ 1 year
3.
Perennials .........................................................................................................90 days
4.
Annuals .............................................................................................................30 days
Make all replacements within 30 days of notification when weather conditions
permit. Replace plants that are dead, not in a healthy, vigorous condition and
plants which have incurred loss of design value as determined by the Landscape
Architect. Replacements are at no expense to the Owner.
MATERIAL STORAGE
Package plants to provide adequate protection against climatic and breakage
injuries during transit. Do not drop plant material from trucks or any other plant
handling equipment. Handle plant material carefully to insure against frozen,
cracked, broken, loose or "mushroomed" root balls. Damaged balls, root bound
plants, plants infested with insects or having other deficiencies will constitute
grounds for rejection. Remove rejected materials from the work site immediately.
Protect roots and foliage from sun and drying before planting.
PLANT LIST
A plant list is shown on the Planting Plan or included at the end of this section.
NOMENCLATURE
The scientific and/or common names of plants herein specified conform to the
approved names given in "Standardized Plant Names". Names of varieties not
included therein conform generally with names accepted in the nursery trade.
QUANTITIES
The quantities necessary to complete the planting as shown and located on the
drawings are furnished as a convenience to the contractor. The contractor shall
be responsible for providing the quantities necessary to complete the planting
plan. Dimensions for plant beds have, in many instances, been established from
scaled drawings. It is the Contractor's responsibility to check these dimensions on
the site and allow for the quantity of plants accordingly.
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.01
A.
2.02
A.
B.
PLANT INSPECTION
Plants are subject to approval and inspection for name, variety, quality and size at
place of growth, at the nursery and upon delivery to the work site. Inspection for
latent defects or injuries will be made during work progress.
PLANT QUALITY AND SIZE
Plants shall have a habit of growth that is normal for the species and shall be
sound, healthy, vigorous and free from insect pests, plant diseases, injuries, and
after effects thereof.
All plants shall meet or exceed the measurements specified in the Plant List, which
are minimum acceptable sizes. They shall be measured before pruning, with the
branches in the normal position. Any necessary pruning shall be done at the time
of planting. Contractor may use larger sizes of plant material at his
discretion, but with no increase in the contract price to the owner.
Canadian Visitors Center
Canadian, Texas
C.
02950-3
Requirements for the measurement, branching, grading, quality, balling and
burlapping of plants generally follow the code of standards currently
recommended by the "American Standard for Nursery Stock".
1. Minimum Root Ball Sizes for Trees:
Tree Size Ball Depth
Minimum
Ball Diameter
Minimum
1.5"-2.0"
20"
24"
2.0"-2.5"
22"
28"
2.5"-3.0"
24"
30"
4.0"
30"
40"
+4.0"
1.5 x Ball Diameter 10"per 1"caliper
5'-6'ht.
18"
24"
6'-8'ht.
24"
30"
2. Tree ball shapes shall be truncated cones.
D.
2.03
Caliper for single trunk trees is the diameter of the stem measured 6" above the
ground level for trees 4”caliper or less and 12” above grade for sizes over 4”.
Caliper for multi-trunk trees is measured as the diameter of the largest stem plus
one half the diameter of all remaining stems at a point 6" above ground level.
BALLED AND BURLAPPED PLANTS (B&B)
A. Use plants having natural balled and burlapped rootballs that are not cracked,
broken, loose or mushroomed before or during installation. "Prefabricated" rootballs
are considered as bare root and are not acceptable as balled and burlapped.
2.04
A.
2.05
A.
2.06
A.
BARE ROOT PLANTS (BR)
When bare root plants are specified, use plants with sufficient root spread and
depth to assure full recovery and development of the plants.
CONTAINER GROWN PLANTS
Use plants grown in containers having sufficient roots to hold planting mix intact,
but not root bound, after removal from the container.
TOPSOIL
Topsoil shall be a natural, fertile soil, possessing characteristics of representative
productive soils in the vicinity. It shall be obtained from naturally well drained areas
and shall not be excessively acid or alkaline or contain toxic substances which
may be harmful to plant growth. Topsoil shall be without admixture of subsoil and
shall contain a minimum of lumps, stones, stumps, roots, or similar
substances one inch or more in diameter. It shall not be collected from sites that
are infected with a growth of, or the reproductive parts of noxious weeds. It shall
Canadian Visitors Center
Canadian, Texas
02950-4
not be stripped, collected or deposited when wet. It is the responsibility of the
Landscape Contractor to furnish the location where the topsoil is to be obtained to
the Landscape Architect in writing as well as a one-gallon sample of such soil. The
Landscape Architect shall determine the quality of topsoil.
B.
2.07
A.
2.08
A.
2.09
A.
B.
C.
2.10
A.
2.11
A.
If required by Landscape Architect, the Contractor shall have a sample of the
proposed topsoil tested for horticultural suitability by the Agricultural Extension
Service (Texas A&M University System) Soil Testing Laboratory or by an approved
private soil testing laboratory. The soil test shall accurately indicate existing nutrient
content and recommendations for amendments required for optimum horticultural
use. The Landscape Contractor shall pay for soil test.
WATER
Water will be furnished by the Owner and will be suitable for irrigation purposes
and free of ingredients harmful to plant life. The Contractor shall furnish any hose
and/or other equipment required for the placement of water.
COMMERCIAL FERTILIZERS
Fertilizers shall conform to all applicable state laws, shall be delivered in original,
unopened containers, each bearing the manufacturer's guaranteed analysis, and
shall be uniform in composition, dry and free flowing. Any fertilizer that becomes
caked or otherwise damaged, making it unsuitable for use, will not be accepted.
ORGANIC MATTER AND MULCH
Organic matter shall be composted manure + alfalfa soil conditioner as
manufactured by Humalfa Incorporated, Box 878, Shattuck, OK (405)938-2514 or
approved equal and shall be of such character as not to be displaced by the
wind.
Alternate organic matter may be peat moss of German, Canadian or Michigan
origin and is to be low in content of woody parts and free of minerals harmful to
plant life. It shall have a pH of from 4 to 6, a moisture content of not more than
30%, and a water absorbing capacity from 1100 to 2000%. Peat moss may be
natural, shredded or granulated.
Mulch for topdressing of planted areas is to be shredded cypress bark mulch or
approved equal.
WRAPPING
Tree wrapping for trunks or parts of other plants specified to be wrapped shall be
double thickness, heavy kraft crepe paper, specially designed for this purpose,
and supplied in rolls of appropriate widths. Twine for tying shall be lightly tarred
medium or coarse sisal (lath) yarn.
PLANTING BED HERBICIDE
Herbicide for all ground cover and shrub beds shall be “Pendulum” as
manufactured by the American Cyanamid Corporation or an approved equal
that will provide for a weed free planting bed.
Canadian Visitors Center
Canadian, Texas
02950-5
2.12 MATERIALS FOR STAKING TREES
A.
B.
C.
Stakes for supporting trees shall be "T-Post" steel posts or 2" diameter treated,
lodgepole pine posts. Posts shall be 6'-0" in length, minimum.
Wire for fastening trees to stakes shall be No. 14 galvanized iron.
Hose to encase wires shall be new or used 2-ply reinforced rubber garden, plastic
garden, or flexible PVC hose.
2.13
A.
B.
MATERIALS FOR GUYING TREES
Notched stakes for anchoring guy wires shall be 2"x2"x24" creosoted wood.
Guy wires shall be No. 14 pliable, galvanized iron. Encased in rubber or flexible
PVC hose.
2.14
SAND
A.
2.15
A.
B.
Sharp sand graded clean of clay, rock, sticks, etc. and normally used as mason's
sand for mortar mix or concrete.
WEED BARRIER
Weed barrier for tree well shall be DeWitt Company Pro 5 synthetic fabric or
approved equal.
Install the weed barrier according to the manufacturer’s recommendations.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
A.
PLANTING TIME
Plant only under favorable conditions during seasons that are normal for planting
each type of plant.
3.02
LAYOUT
A.
B.
Stake or mark planting locations, locate underground and overhead obstructions
and make necessary location adjustments subject to the Landscape Architect's
approval prior to any digging.
Contractor shall be responsible for contacting all appropriate utility companies,
agencies, or authorities and for locating and protecting all existing underground
utilities and is solely responsible for any damage or interruption to service caused
by his excavations.
3.03
PLANT PIT SIZES
A.
3.04
A.
Excavate plant pits for all plants:
1.
Container grown plants at twice the container diameter in width and equal
to the container depth for pit depth.
2.
Balled and Burlapped plants at 2 times the ball diameter in width and the ball
depth -2" for pit depth.
3.
Bare root plants at 1-1 /2 times the root spread in width and depth.
PLANT HANDLING
Handle all plants by their containers or by the rootball. DO NOT STRAP AND LIFT
TREES BY THEIR TRUNKS. Do not cut or remove containers until time of installation.
Remove boxes only after setting plant in pit. Move balled and burlapped plants by
lifting or carrying (do not roll or drag).
Canadian Visitors Center
Canadian, Texas
3.05
A.
3.06
A.
3.07
A.
B.
C.
3.08
A.
3.09
A.
02950-6
BACKFILL FOR TREES
Thoroughly mix 1/3 part sharp sand + 1/3 part organic matter + 1/3 topsoil or
approved existing soil.
SOIL PREPARATION FOR SHRUB AND GROUND COVER BEDS
Add 2" sharp sand, 3" of the specified organic material in section 2.09 and till to a
depth of 8" to 10". Install plants and fertilizer, excavating as necessary to provide a
finish grade after planting at 1" below walks, curbs and mow strips.
PLANT INSTALLATION
Set plants plumb and straight in pits; allow for settlement. Carefully place backfill
around the base and sides of rootball to 1/2 the depth. Thoroughly water the
backfill to eliminate all voids. Remove all polyrope, wire, burlap fasteners, and
burlap from the top one third of the rootball. Water completely and add
additional backfill as required for adjustments due to plant settling. Build watering
saucers above finish grade for ground level trees as required to hold a sufficient
amount of water in relation to plant size.
Plants in beds shall be carefully inserted into prepared soil at slightly above finished
grade. When all plants are in place, rake the entire bed area smooth, water and
allow to soak away. After settlement add soil as necessary to finished grade and
water.
Plant all trees so that the top of the root ball is approximately 2”above finished
grade. Remove all basket wiring, burlap, and roping from the top of each tree ball
after planting and leave exposed until inspected by the landscape architect prior
to installing the required 36”diameter 3”deep mulch ring.
PRUNING
Prune all plants as directed by the Landscape Architect. Do not destroy the natural
form of the plant. Remove all broken, weak and unnecessary plant growth by
cutting flush with the trunk or stem. Leave a clean cut and paint all cuts and
damaged areas greater than 3/4" in diameter with asphaltic tree paint.
STAKING, GUYING AND WRAPPING OF TREES
Trees shall be set plumb and rigidly braced in position until the soil has been
tamped solidly around the ball and roots. Trees of two inch and one half inches
(2.5") caliper or greater shall be guyed; trees of less than 2.5" caliper shall be
staked if required.
1.
Guying, if required by the Landscape Architect, shall be with three guys,
equally spaced around the tree. Each guy shall consist of two strands of No. 14
galvanized wire attached to the tree trunk at an angle of about 45o at
approximately 2/5 of the tree height and anchored to the ground stakes
which have been driven into the ground at an angle away from the tree and
notched to accommodate the guy wires. Guys shall be slightly tightened by
twisting the strands together. Under no circumstances shall a tree be plumbed
with extreme tautness of guy wires. Plumbing shall be accomplished by
adjusting the ball.
2.
Staking, if required, shall be accomplished with two stakes that shall be driven
one foot below the bottom of the plant ball and to extend 3/5 of the height,
or long enough to properly support the tree. Trees shall be secured
to the stakes with two strands of No. 14 galvanized wire encased in two-ply,
reinforced garden hose.
Canadian Visitors Center
Canadian, Texas
3.
3.10
A.
B.
3.11
A.
3.12
A.
02950-7
Wrapping, if required, shall be done promptly after planting. The trunks of all
trees shall be spirally wrapped with 2 layers of crepe paper material, as
hereinbefore specified, to the height of the second branches. Wrapping shall
be stapled or tied with sisal securely in place.
MULCHING
Plants shall be mulched within two days after planting with a two-inch layer of
mulch material, entirely covering the area around each plant. In case of ground
cover areas, the entire area between the plants is to be so treated, regardless of
plant spacing. Add herbicide, as specified, before mulching according to the
manufacturer's recommendations.
Around each tree there shall be a tree well clear area approximately 36" in
diameter, where there is no sod or seeded lawn. This area shall be mulched to a
depth of 3".
SOAKING
All plants are to be soaked with "Green Light" Root Stimulator or "Carl Pool's Root
Activator", as suggested by manufacturer, during the planting procedure.
CLEAN UP
As planting operations proceed, all rope, wire, burlap empty containers, rocks,
clods and all other debris shall not be allowed to accumulate but shall be
removed daily and the site kept as clean and tidy as possible at all times.
END OF SECTION 02950
Canadian Visitors Center
Canadian, Texas
02950-8
DIVISION 2 SITE WORK
02970 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE AND REPLACEMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
A.
B.
1.02
RELATED DOCUMENTS
The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions,
Supplementary Conditions, Special Conditions, and Division 1 Sections, if any,
apply to the work specified in this section.
SECTION 02810 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM
SECTION 02920 LANDSCAPE GRADING
SECTION 02930/02931 LAWN GRASSES
MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance of installed landscape is to be included by Landscape Contractor as
part of this contract and shall begin immediately after each portion of lawn and
each plant is planted and shall continue in accordance with the following
requirements:
1. All new plants and lawn areas shall be regularly maintained for a period of at
least forty five(45) days from Substantial Completion or until it is clearly evident
that all plants are sufficiently recovered from transplanting and in a healthy,
growing condition.
2. Maintenance shall include, but not be limited to:
a. All regular mowing, edging, weeding, pruning and removal of dead
materials
b. Adjustments to the Irrigation System as required
c. Pest, weed and disease control
d. Fertilization
e. Erosion control and repair of related damage
f.
Protection of work
g. Removal of trash and debris from planted areas
The landscape contractor shall notify owner two weeks in advance prior to the
completion of their maintenance period. At such time an on-site review of all materials
and workmanship shall be performed. Any defects shall be either corrected or replaced
as necessary and maintenance of said items may be extended for a period equal to the
original maintenance period at the owner’s discretion.
1.03
A.
INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE
Inspection of the work to determine completion of Contract, exclusive of the
possible replacement of plants, will be made by the Landscape Architect and
Owner at the conclusion of the Maintenance Period upon written notice
requesting such inspection submitted by the Contractor at least two weeks prior
to the anticipated date. The condition of all planting will be noted and
determination made by the Owner whether maintenance shall continue in any
part.
8-498
5104
Draft 4/8/2005 8:47 AM
Canadian Visitors Center
Canadian, Texas
B.
1.04
02950-9
Final Acceptance: After inspection, the Contractor will be notified, in writing, by
the Owner of acceptance of all work exclusive of the possible replacement of
plants subject to guaranty, or, if there are any deficiencies of the requirements
for completion of the work. Maintenance or other work remaining to be done
shall be subject to reinspection before Final Acceptance.
LANDSCAPE GUARANTEE
Provide guarantee in the following form, retyped onto the landscape
contractor’s letterhead:
GUARANTEE FOR LANDSCAPE PLANTING AND RELATED WORK
We hereby guarantee that the Landscape Planting and Related Work that we
have provided at the First American Bank/Gem Lake Road, Amarillo, Texas has
been completed in accordance with the requirements of the Specifications and
Contract Documents.
We agree to repair or replace our Work, together with adjacent Work that may
be displaced by so doing that may prove to be defective in its workmanship or
material with in a period of twelve (12) months from the date of Project
Substantial Completion. We also agree to repair damages resulting from such
defects, without expense to the Owner, with the exception of ordinary wear and
tear, abuse or neglect.
We agree to replace plants that are identified, within three (3) years, as not being
true to name specified. Replacement plants shall be of a size equal to the
current size of like species originally planted at the project.
In the event of our failure to comply with these conditions within thirty (30) days
after written notification, we collectively or separately do hereby authorize the
Owner to proceed in having such defective Work repaired or replaced and
made good at our expense; we will honor and pay the costs and charge
therefore upon demand.
Signed :……………………………………………Date: _________________
Landscape Contractor’s Name
Address
City, State, Zip
END OF SECTION 02970
9-498
5132
06-05